Subaru 2019 Crosstrek Hybrid User Manual

(1,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 24

Foreword

SFWAA

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in

excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control

system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this

manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its

operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such

as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the

SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the

nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this

manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU

CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and

designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any

obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles

previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and

covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some

explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your

vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next

owner will need the information found herein.

SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN

“SUBARU” and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.

(2,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 24

(3,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 24

Vehicle types

SFWAB

This manual describes the following vehicle type.

(2,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

(3,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

S00

Warranties

S00AA

& Warranties for U.S.A.

S00AA01

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of

America, Inc. and sold at retail by an

authorized SUBARU dealer in the United

States come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranties

. Federal Emission Control Systems

Warranties

. California Emissions Control Sys-

tems Warranties

All warranty information, including applic-

ability, details of coverage and exclusions,

is in the “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully.

How to use this Owner’s

Manual

S00AB

& Using your Owner’s Manual

S00AB01

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully

read this manual. To protect yourself and

extend the service life of your vehicle,

follow the instructions in this manual.

Failure to observe these instructions may

result in serious injury and damage to your

vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen

chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief

table of contents, so you can usually tell at

a glance if that chapter contains the

information you want.

Chapter HS: Hybrid system

This chapter explains the characteristics of

the hybrid system.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air-

bags

This chapter informs you how to use the

seat and seatbelt and contains precau-

tions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and doors

This chapter informs you how to operate

the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and controls

This chapter informs you about the opera-

tion of instrument panel indicators and how

to use the instruments and other switches.

Chapter 4: Climate control

This chapter informs you how to operate

the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you about your audio

system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate

interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start and

operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your

SUBARU in various conditions and ex-

plains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you

have a problem, such as a flat tire or

engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep your

SUBARU looking good.

– CONTINUED –

(4,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service

This chapter informs you when you need to

take your SUBARU to the dealer for

scheduled maintenance and informs you

how to keep your SUBARU running

properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about dimen-

sions and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer information and

Reporting safety defects

This chapter informs you about Uniform

tire quality grading standards and Report-

ing safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in

this manual. You can use it to quickly find

something you want to read.

For details about the EyeSight system,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for the EyeSight system.

& Safety warnings

S00AB02

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to poten-

tial hazards that could result in injury to you

or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well

as all other portions of this manual care-

fully in order to gain a better understanding

of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which serious injury or death could

result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which injury or damage to your

vehicle, or both, could result if the

caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or sugges-

tions how to make better use of your

vehicle.

& Safety symbol

S00AB03

You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means “Do

not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this

happen”, depending upon the context.

(5,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Abbreviation list

S00AB04

You may find several abbreviations in this

manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-

tions are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation Meaning

ABS Anti-lock brake system

A/C Air conditioner

AKI Anti knock index

ALR Automatic locking retractor

ALR/ELR

Automatic locking retractor/

Emergency locking retractor

AWD All-wheel drive

BSD/RCTA

Blind Spot Detection/Rear

Cross Traffic Alert

CVT

Continuously variable trans-

mission

DRL Daytime running light

EBD

Electronic brake force distri-

bution

ELR Emergency locking retractor

EV Electric Vehicle

GAW Gross axle weight

GAWR Gross axle weight rating

GPS Global positioning system

GVW Gross vehicle weight

GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating

INT Intermittent

Abbreviation Meaning

LATCH

Lower anchors and tethers for

children

LED Light emitting diode

MIL Malfunction indicator light

MMT

Methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl

OBD On-board diagnostics

RAB Reverse Automatic Braking

RON Research octane number

SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive

SRH

Steering Responsive Head-

light

SRS

Supplemental restraint sys-

tem

TIN Tire identification number

TPMS

Tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem

Vehicle symbols

S00AC

These are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to

“Warning and indicator lights” FP18.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Read these instructions care-

fully

Wear eye protection

Battery fluid contains sulfuric

acid

Keep children away

Keep flames away

Prevent explosions

(6,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Safety precautions when

driving

S00AD

& Seatbelt and SRS airbag

S00AD01

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle must

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers must

always wear seatbelts when in

the vehicle. The SRS (Supple-

mental Restraint System) airbag

does not do away with the need to

fasten seatbelts. In combination

with the seatbelts, it offers the

best combined protection in case

of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always sit

upright and well back in the seat

as far from the steering wheel as

practical while still maintaining

full vehicle control and the front

passenger should move the seat

as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts” FP79.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem airbag)” FP106.

& Child safety

S00AD02

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap or

in your arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a

collision, because the child will

be caught between the passen-

ger and objects inside the vehi-

cle.

. While riding in the vehicle, infants

and small children should always

be seated in the REAR seat in an

infant or child restraint system

which is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. If

a child is too big for a child

restraint system, the child should

sit in the REAR seat and be

restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seating

positions. Never allow a child to

stand up or kneel on the seat.

. Place children in the REAR seat

properly restrained at all times in

a child restraint device or in a

seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill

children, especially if they are not

restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT

IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO

(7,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Always turn the child safety locks

to the “LOCK” position when

children sit in the rear seat.

Serious injury could result if a

child accidentally opens the door

and falls out. Refer to “Child

safety locks” FP166.

. Always lock the passenger’s win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child

operating the power window. Re-

fer to “Windows” FP166.

. Never leave unattended children,

adults or animals in the vehicle.

They could accidentally injure

themselves or others through

inadvertent operation of the ve-

hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,

temperature in a closed vehicle

could quickly become high en-

ough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to them.

. When leaving the vehicle, close

all windows and lock all doors.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts” FP79.

. For the child restraint system, refer to

“Child restraint systems” FP92.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem airbag)” FP106.

& Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

S00AD03

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-

hicle for a lengthy time while the

engine is running. If that is un-

avoidable, then use the ventila-

tion fan to force fresh air into the

vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

& Drinking and driving

S00AD04

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very

dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-

stream delays your reaction time

and impairs your perception, judg-

ment and attentiveness. If you drive

after drinking – even if you drink just

a little – it will increase the risk of

being involved in a serious or fatal

– CONTINUED –

(8,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

accident, injuring or killing yourself,

your passengers and others. In

addition, if you are injured in the

accident, alcohol may increase the

severity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent

causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects

all people differently, you may have con-

sumed too much alcohol to drive safely

even if the level of alcohol in your blood is

below the legal limit. The safest thing you

can do is never drink and drive. However if

you have no choice but to drive, stop

drinking and sober up completely before

getting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and driving

S00AD05

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the

counter and prescription) that can

delay your reaction time and impair

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness. If you drive after taking

them, it may increase your, your

passengers’ and other persons’ risk

of being involved in a serious or fatal

accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with

your doctor or pharmacist or read the

literature that accompanies the medication

to determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive

after taking any medications that can make

you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability

to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you

have a medical condition that requires you

to take drugs, please consult with your

doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence

of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your

own health and well-being, we urge you

not to take illegal drugs in the first place

and to seek treatment if you are addicted

to those drugs.

& Driving when tired or sleepy

S00AD06

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your

reaction time will be delayed and

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness will be impaired. If you

drive when tired or sleepy, your,

your passengers’ and other per-

sons’ chances of being involved in

a serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but instead

find a safe place to rest if you are tired or

sleepy. On long trips, you should make

periodic rest stops to refresh yourself

before continuing on your journey. When

possible, you should share the driving with

others.

& Modification of your vehicle

S00AD07

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified

other than with genuine SUBARU

parts and accessories. Other types

of modifications could affect its

performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or

performance problems resulting

from modification may not be cov-

ered under warranties.

& Use of cell phones/texting

and driving

S00AD16

CAUTION

Do not talk on a cell phone or text

while driving; it may distract your

attention from driving and lead to an

(9,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

accident. If you use a cell phone to

talk or text, first pull off the road and

park in a safe place. In some States/

Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on

a phone while driving, but only if the

phone is hands-free.

& Driving vehicles equipped

with navigation system

S00AD09

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distract

your attention from driving. Also, do

not operate the controls of the

navigation system while driving.

The loss of attention to driving could

lead to an accident. If you wish to

operate the controls of the naviga-

tion system, first take the vehicle off

the road and stop it in a safe

location.

& Driving with pets

S00AD10

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your

driving and distract your attention from

driving. In a collision or sudden stop,

unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and hurt you or

your passengers. Besides, the pets can be

hurt under these situations. It is also for

their own safety that pets should be

properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-

strain a pet with a special traveling harness

which can be secured to the rear seat with

a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be

secured to the rear seat by routing a

seatbelt through the carrier’s handle.

Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the

front passenger’s seat. For further infor-

mation, consult your veterinarian, local

animal protection society or pet shop.

& Tire pressures

S00AD11

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-

sure of each tire at least once a month and

before any long journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the

tire pressures to the values shown on the

tire placard. For detailed information, refer

to “Tires and wheels” FP416.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with

excessively low tire pressures

can cause the tires to deform

severely and to rapidly be-

come hot. A sharp increase in

temperature could cause tread

separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to

an accident.

& Attaching accessories

S00AD15

WARNING

. Do not attach any accessories,

labels or stickers (other than

properly placed inspection stick-

ers) to the windshield. Such

items may obstruct your view.

. If it is necessary to attach an

accessory (such as an electronic

toll collection (ETC) device or

security pass) to the windshield,

consult your SUBARU dealer for

details on the proper location.

(10,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

General information

S00AK

& California Perchlorate Advi-

sory

S00AK03

Certain vehicle components such as air-

bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and

keyless entry transmitter batteries may

contain perchlorate material. Special

handling may apply for service or vehicle

end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

& Noise from under the vehicle

S00AK01

NOTE

You may hear a noise from under the

vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours

after the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position. However, this does not

indicate a malfunction. This noise is

caused by the operation of the fuel

evaporation leakage checking system

and the operation is normal. The noise

will stop after approximately 15 min-

utes.

& Event data recorder

S00AK04

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an

EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data

that will assist in understanding how a

vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is

designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

. How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

. Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or brake

pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash

location) are recorded. However, other

parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely ac-

quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition

to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the

special equipment, can read the informa-

tion if they have access to the vehicle or

the EDR.

(1,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Keys and doors

Instruments and controls

Climate control

Audio

Interior equipment

Starting and operating

Driving tips

In case of emergency

Appearance care

Maintenance and service

Specifications

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

Hybrid system

(12,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Illustrated index

S00AE

& Exterior

S00AE01

1) Engine hood (page 403)

2) Windshield wipers (page 241)

3) Headlights (page 231)

4) Replacing bulbs (page 432)

5) Moonroof (page 170)

6) Roof rails (page 348)

7) Outside mirrors (page 243)

8) Door locks (page 160)

9) Tire pressure (page 418)

10) Flat tires (page 366)

11) Snow tires (page 344)

12) Fog lights (page 238)

13) Tie-down hooks (page 380)

14) Towing hook (page 380)

(13,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1) Rear window defogger (page 244)

2) Fuel filler door and cap (page 282)

3) Child safety locks (page 166)

4) Tie-down hole (page 380)

5) Replacing bulbs (page 432)

6) Rear gate (page 169)

7) Towing hook (page 380)

8) Rear window wiper (page 242)

9) Charge port door (page 43)

– CONTINUED –

(14,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Interior

S00AE02

! Passenger compartment area

S00AE0201

1) Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 101)

2) Seatbelts (page 79)

3) Front seats (page 70)

4) Rear seats (page 70)

5) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK

NOTE

For U.S.-spec. models with SUBARU

STARLINK: Refer to the Owner’s Man-

ual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK

Safety and Security.

(15,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1) Power windows (page 166)

2) Door locks (page 160)

3) Remote control mirror switch (page 243)

4) Power door locking switch (page 161)

5) Glove box (page 267)

6) Front power supply socket (page 269)

7) Select lever (page 292)

8) Electronic parking brake switch (page

310)

9) Seat heater switches (page 78)

10) Cup holder (page 267)

11) Center console (page 267)

12) X-MODE switch (page 306)

13) Hybrid Mode switch (page 29)

– CONTINUED –

(16,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Instrument panel

S00AE03

1) Steering Responsive Headlight off switch

(page 237)

2) Timer charging setting switch (page 58)

3) Fuel door release switch (page 282)

4) Illumination brightness control (page

180)

5) Combination meter (page 177)

6) Multi-function display (color LCD) (page

209)

7) Audio*

8) Hazard warning flasher switch (page

177)

9) Climate control (page 250)

10) Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 245)

11) Hill holder switch (page 313)

12) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 321)

13) Fuse box (page 430)

14) Hood release knob (page 403)

15) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(page 304)

*: For details about how to use the audio

and navigation system (if equipped),

refer to the separate navigation/audio

Owner’s Manual.

NOTE

For models with the EyeSight system:

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

(17,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1) Audio control switches*

2) INFO button (page 211)

3) Cruise control*

4) SI-DRIVE switches (page 296)

5) Heated steering wheel switch (page 246)

6) SRS airbag (page 106)

7) Horn (page 247)

8) Control switches for combination meter

display (color LCD) (page 202)

9) Hands-free phone switches*

10) Tilt/telescopic lock lever (page 245)

*1: For details about how to use the

switches, refer to the separate navi-

gation/audio Owner’s Manual.

*2: For details about how to use the cruise

control, refer to the Owner’s Manual

supplement for the EyeSight system.

– CONTINUED –

(18,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches

S00AE04

1) Windshield wiper (page 239)

2) Mist (page 241)

3) Windshield washer (page 241)

4) Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 242)

5) Wiper control lever (page 239)

6) Windshield wiper and washer switches

(page 241)

7) Light control switch (page 231)

8) Fog light switch (page 238)

9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 231)

10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change

(page 233)

11) Turn signal lever (page 239)

(19,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Combination meter

S00AE05

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be

slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Power meter (page 177)

2) Select lever/position indicator (page 200)

3) Combination meter display (color LCD)

(page 202)

4) Trip meter and odometer (page 178)

5) Driver Assist indicator (page 180)

6) Speedometer (page 177)

7) Fuel gauge (page 179)

– CONTINUED –

(20,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Warning and indicator lights

S00AE06

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 182

Front passenger’s

seatbelt warning light

182

SRS airbag system

warning light

183

Front passenger’s

frontal airbag ON in-

dicator

183

Front passenger’s

frontal airbag OFF in-

dicator

183

CHECK ENGINE

warning light/Mal-

function indicator light

184

Coolant temperature

high warning light

185

Charge warning light 186

Oil pressure warning

light

186

Engine low oil level

warning light

187

Mark Name Page

ABS warning light 188

Brake system warn-

ing light

189

Electronic parking

brake indicator light

190

Door open warning

light

192

AWD warning light 192

Power steering warn-

ing light

192

Hill Holder indicator

light

192

Vehicle Dynamics

Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics

Control operation in-

dicator light

193

Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF indicator

light

194

Turn signal indicator

lights

200

Mark Name Page

High beam indicator

light

200

High beam assist in-

dicator light

200

Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light

200

LED headlight warn-

ing light

200

Steering Responsive

Headlight warning

light/Steering Re-

sponsive Headlight

OFF indicator light

200

Front fog light indica-

tor light

200

Access key warning

indicator

194

Security indicator

light

199

Headlight indicator

light

200

X-MODE indicator 201

(21,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Mark Name Page

Hill descent control

indicator

201

Low fuel warning light 191

Low tire pressure

warning light

187

Windshield washer

fluid warning light

187

Sport (S) mode indi-

cator

199

Intelligent (I) mode

indicator

199

BSD/RCTA warning

indicator

201

BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

cator

201

RAB warning indica-

tor

201

RAB OFF indicator 201

Icy road surface

warning indicator

201

Mark Name Page

Hybrid READY indi-

cator light

185

Hybrid Fail Lamp 185

EV (Electric Vehicle)

mode lamp

185

Hybrid Battery

Charge Mode indica-

tor

185

Hybrid Battery Save

Mode indicator

185

Timer charging

setting indicator

185

Charge cable con-

nection indicator

185

Hybrid system over-

heat warning light

185

Engine hood open

warning light

185

(22,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Function settings

S00AF

& Function settings and adjustments on the combination meter display (color LCD)

S00AF01

Setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed within the display to meet your personal requirements.

Item

Available settings Factory default setting

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

1st menu/vehicle system

2nd menu/adjustable

vehicle system setting

3rd menu/selectable ve-

hicle system setting

Screen Settings

Welcome Screen — On/Off On 203

Good-bye Screen — On/Off On 203

Gauge Initial Movement — On/Off On 207

Driver Assist Indicator — On/Off On 207

Units —

km, km/h, Liter/mile,

MPH, Gallon

mile, MPH, Gallon 207

Tire Pressure Units — kPa/PSi PSi 207

Languages —

English/Español/Fran-

çais

English 208

Warning Volume* — — Max/Mid/Min Mid

319 and 330

For details about

EyeSight sys-

tem, refer to the

Owner’s Manual

supplement for

the EyeSight

system.

(23,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Item

Available settings Factory default setting

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

1st menu/vehicle system

2nd menu/adjustable

vehicle system setting

3rd menu/selectable ve-

hicle system setting

EyeSight

Lead Vehicle Acquisition

Sound

— On/Off On

Refer to the

Owner’s Manual

supplement for

the EyeSight

system.

Lead Vehicle Moving

Monitor Function

— On/Off On

Cruise Control Accel-

eration Characteristics*

—

Lv.4 (Dynamic)/Lv.3

(Standard)/Lv.2 (Com-

fort)/Lv.1 (ECO)

Lv.3 (Standard)

RAB Sonar Audible Alarm — On/Off On 330

Vehicle Setting

Keyless Entry System

Audible Signal On/Off On 154

Hazard Warning Flasher On/Off On 208

Driver Door Unlock Driver’s Door Only/All Driver’s Door Only 149

Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock

Rear Gate/Trunk Only/

All

Rear Gate/Trunk Only 208

Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 15 minutes 244

Interior Light —

10 seconds/20 seconds/

30 seconds/Off

30 seconds 265

Auto Light Sensor — Min/Low/Mid/Max Mid 231

Welcome Lighting

Approaching Time Set

30 seconds/60 seconds/

90 seconds/Off

30 seconds 232

Leaving Time Set

30 seconds/60 seconds/

90 seconds/Off

30 seconds 232

One-touch lane changer — On/Off On 239

Default Settings — — No/Yes —

208

*: You can also set this while driving.

– CONTINUED –

(24,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Individual settings and adjustments

S00AF02

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page

Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation

165

& Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer

S00AF03

A SUBARU dealer can change the setting adjustments of the following items to meet your personal requirements. Contact the nearest

SUBARU dealer for details.

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting

Keyless Access Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Remote keyless entry system

Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation

Battery drainage prevention func-

tion

Battery drainage prevention func-

tion

Operation/Non-operation Operation

Alarm system

Dome light/Cargo area light/Map

light illumination

ON/OFF OFF

Monitoring start delay time (after

closure of doors)

0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds

Auto dimmer cancel

Sensitivity of the operation of the

auto dimmer cancel

OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid

Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation

Auto on/off wiper-linked headlights Auto-on/off wiper-linked Operation/Non-operation Operation

High beam assist function High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Operation/Non-operation Non-operation

Auto on/off headlights

Sensitivity of the operation of the

auto on/off headlights

Low/Normal/High/Very high

High

(25,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

SHS

HS-1. Hybrid system features ................................. 24

Hybrid system operation mode .............................26

Control when driving in each mode.......................27

Hybrid system operation mode selection switch....29

Charging ..............................................................30

Pedestrian alert system ........................................30

HS-2. Hybrid system precautions........................... 31

High voltage battery and battery charger air

vents ..................................................................34

Emergency shut off system ..................................34

Hybrid warning message ......................................35

HS-3. Hybrid vehicle driving tips............................ 35

HS-4. EV driving range ............................................ 36

Displayed value ....................................................36

Tips for extending the EV driving range ................36

HS-5. Charging ......................................................... 37

General information ..............................................37

Charging methods ................................................39

Confirm the items before charging .......................39

Power sources that can be used ..........................39

Charging equipment.............................................42

Charge port door .................................................43

Keyless access function and charge cable

connector locking system ..................................43

Charging indicator ...............................................45

Charge cable........................................................46

Charging tips for high voltage battery ..................50

Charging from an external power source ..............52

Using the Remote Battery Charging Timer ............57

Display when charging is completed ....................61

HS-6. Troubleshooting ............................................ 62

When normal charging cannot be carried out .......62

When the Remote Battery Charging Timer

does not operate normally..................................63

When charging-related message is displayed .......65

When other message is displayed ........................68

Hybrid system

(26,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

HS-1. Hybrid system features

SHSAA

The hybrid system is a system excellent in

both economical efficiency of electric

vehicles and practicality of hybrid vehicles.

1) Gasoline engine

2) Electric motor (traction motor)

EV driving can be performed using elec-

tricity charged from an external power

source. The EV driving range will vary in

accordance with conditions such as vehi-

cle speed, the amount of charge remaining

in the high voltage battery and the usage of

the climate control system. The gasoline

engine may also be used simultaneously

in accordance with driving conditions.

If the amount of electricity remaining in the

high voltage battery becomes low, the

vehicle is automatically controlled in such

a way that it can be driven as a hybrid

vehicle through the joint use of the gaso-

line engine.

NOTE

. Plug-in hybrid vehicles can be dri-

ven using electricity charged from an

external power source. However, as the

gasoline engine is used depending on

the situation even in driving using only

the electric motor, and the gasoline

engine is provided on board as a power

source in driving using both the electric

motor and engine. For that reason it is

necessary to refuel the vehicle. Check

the fuel amount and refill immediately

when the fuel level becomes low. Refer

to “Fuel” FP281.

. If the vehicle is not used for a long

time, the 12 V battery may discharge. In

this event, charge the 12 V battery. In

order to prevent the high voltage bat-

tery from becoming extremely low in

charge, charge the high voltage battery

from an external power source or start

the hybrid system at least once every 2

or 3 months, and turn the ignition

switch off after the gasoline engine

has stopped automatically. (If the gaso-

line engine does not start up even after

approximately 10 seconds have passed

since the Hybrid READY indicator light

came on, the ignition switch can be

turned off without any further action.)

. When the vehicle is left with the

charge cable connected, the electricity

consumption amount of the 12 V bat-

tery increases due to controls, such as

the system checking and operating.

When the charge cable is not needed,

immediately disconnect it from the

vehicle.

. There may be no engine sound or

vibration even though the vehicle is

able to move with the Hybrid READY

indicator light is illuminated. For safety,

apply the parking brake and make sure

to shift the select lever position to “P”

when parked.

. The following sounds or vibrations

may occur when the hybrid system is

operating and are not malfunctions.

– Electric motor sounds may be

made by the vehicle.

– Sounds may be heard from the

high voltage battery when the hy-

brid system starts or stops.

– Relay operating sounds such as

a snap or soft clank will be emitted

from the high voltage battery, the

cargo area, when the hybrid system

is started or stopped.

– Sounds from the hybrid system

may be heard when the back door is

Hybrid system features

(27,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

open.

– Sounds may be heard from the

transmission when the gasoline en-

gine starts or stops, when driving at

low speeds, or during idling.

– Engine sounds may be heard

when accelerating sharply.

– Sounds may be heard due to

regenerative braking when the

brake pedal is depressed or as the

accelerator pedal is released.

– Vibration may be felt when the

gasoline engine starts or stops.

– Cooling fan sounds may be heard

from the air intake vent.

. For details about maintenance, re-

pair, recycling, and disposal, contact

your SUBARU dealer regarding main-

tenance, repair, recycling and disposal.

Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.

– CONTINUED –

Hybrid system features

Hybrid system

(28,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Hybrid system operation mode

SHSAA01

The hybrid system operates in the 3 modes illustrated above.

The combination meter (color LCD) can be used to check which mode the hybrid system is

currently being driven in. Refer to “Telltale screen” FP204.

A) Normal Mode

B) Hybrid Battery Charge Mode

C) Hybrid Battery Save Mode

1) Hybrid Mode switch

: Switching automatically

: Press the Hybrid Mode switch

: Press and hold the Hybrid Mode switch

Hybrid system features

(29,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Normal Mode

SHSAA0101

The system switches automatically be-

tween being powered by only the electric

motor and powered by both the electric

motor and engine according to the driving

conditions and changes in the charge level

of the high voltage battery.

When in EV driving, the EV (Electric

Vehicle) mode lamp illuminates on the

combination meter (color LCD). Refer to

“EV (Electric Vehicle) mode lamp” FP185.

NOTE

. When the charge level of the high

voltage battery is high, EV driving is

used. However the engine may start

automatically at times of high load or

when driving at high speed.

. When the charge level of the high

voltage battery is low, both the engine

and electric motor are used for driving.

However if the charge level recovers as

a result of regenerative braking or other

charging, EV driving can be used again.

! Hybrid Battery Save Mode

SHSAA0102

When in Hybrid Battery Save Mode, the

vehicle drives in a way that maintains the

charge level of the high voltage battery.

When in the mode, the Hybrid Battery

Save Mode indicator illuminates on the

combination meter (color LCD).

For information about how to change to

Hybrid Battery Charge Mode, refer to

“Hybrid system operation mode selection

switch” FP29.

! Hybrid Battery Charge Mode

SHSAA0103

WARNING

Observe the following precautions

when using the Hybrid Battery

Charge Mode while parking.

Failure to do so may lead to death or

serious health hazard, as the gaso-

line engine operates when in the

Hybrid Battery Charge Mode.

. Do not stop the vehicle near

flammable materials.

. Do not use the Hybrid Battery

Charge Mode in a closed area

where ventilation is insufficient,

such as in a garage or an area

with snow buildup.

Electricity generated in the gasoline en-

gine can be charged in the high voltage

battery by switching to the Hybrid Battery

Charge Mode.

When in the mode, the Hybrid Battery

Charge Mode indicator illuminates.

For information about how to change to

Hybrid Battery Charge Mode, refer to

“Hybrid system operation mode selection

switch” FP29.

NOTE

. The system may not be able to

switch to the Hybrid Battery Charge

Mode due to the state of the hybrid

system. Refer to “Switching to the

Hybrid Battery Charge Mode” FP29.

. Charging time differs depending on

the driving state of the vehicle when

driving in Hybrid Battery Charge Mode.

. When in the Hybrid Battery Charge

Mode, the gasoline engine runs to

charge the battery and fuel consump-

tion becomes higher compared with

driving in Normal Mode.

& Control when driving in each

mode

SHSAA03

! Driving using only the electric motor

SHSAA0301

In Normal Mode, EV driving is possible.

However, depending on the situation, EV

driving may be canceled and both the

gasoline engine and the electric motor

may be used. Also, if a little electricity is

remaining in the high voltage battery,

Driving using both the electric motor and

engine is automatically selected. In order

to drive only on the electric motor power for

a long time, observe the followings.

– CONTINUED –

Hybrid system features

Hybrid system

(30,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. Avoid sudden acceleration, sudden

deceleration and be sure to drive

smoothly.

If you repeatedly accelerate, the high

voltage battery charge will deplete quickly.

Also, EV driving may be canceled by rapid

acceleration or high vehicle speed.

. Restrain your speed as much as

possible. The distance that can be driven

in driving using only the electric motor will

reduce considerably at high speeds.

NOTE

. EV driving range

– The EV driving range is displayed

on the combination meter display

(color LCD).

– The EV driving range changes in

accordance with the charge status

of the high voltage battery and the

speed of the vehicle.

– Even if there is enough charge

remaining in the high voltage bat-

tery, EV driving may be canceled

and both the gasoline engine and

the electric motor are used depend-

ing on the situation.

. Even if there is a sufficient amount of

electricity remaining in the high voltage

battery and EV driving range is being

displayed on the combination meter

display (color LCD), EV driving may be

canceled and both the gasoline engine

and the electric motor are used depend-

ing on the situation. EV driving will be

returned automatically after EV driving

becomes possible again.

EV driving may be canceled automati-

cally in the following circumstances:

– The vehicle speed is more than

65 mph (105 km/h).

– Power is needed temporarily, for

example when the accelerator pedal

is depressed firmly or when accel-

erating suddenly.

– The temperature of the hybrid

system is high because the vehicle

has been left in the sun, driven on a

hill, driven at high speeds, etc.

– The temperature of the hybrid

system is low.

– The heater is switched on when

the outside temperature is below

about 148F (−108C).

– The windshield defogger switch

is pressed.

– The system determines that the

gasoline engine needs to be started.

The gasoline engine may also oper-

ate in circumstances other than

those listed above, depending on

conditions.

! Driving using both the electric mo-

tor and engine

SHSAA0302

In driving using both the electric motor and

engine, controls are primarily carried out

as follows in accordance with the driving

conditions.

– The gasoline engine stops when the

vehicle is stopped.*

– During start off, the electric motor

(traction motor) drives the vehicle.

– During normal driving, the gasoline

engine and electric motor (traction motor)

are controlled effectively, and the vehicle is

driven with optimum fuel efficiency. Also,

when necessary, the electric motor (trac-

tion motor) operates as an electrical

generator to charge the high voltage

battery.

– When the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed heavily, the drive force from both

the gasoline engine and the electric motor

(traction motor) is used to accelerate.

*: When the high voltage battery requires

charging or the engine is warming up,

the gasoline engine will not automati-

cally stop.

NOTE

The gasoline engine starts and stops

automatically. However, it may not stop

automatically in the following condi-

Hybrid system features

(31,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

tions:

– During gasoline engine warm-up

– During high voltage battery char-

ging

– When the temperature of the high

voltage battery is high or low.

– When the windshield defogger

switch is pressed.

Depending on the circumstances, the

gasoline engine may also not stop

automatically in situations other than

those above.

! When braking (regenerative brak-

ing)

SHSAA0303

The electric motor (traction motor) charges

the high voltage battery.

The EV driving range can be extended by

actively using this regenerative braking to

store electricity in the high voltage battery.

Moreover, as fuel consumption is also

reduced when driving using both the

electric motor and engine, the regenera-

tive braking system can be used effec-

tively.

NOTE

. In the following situations, kinetic

energy is converted to electric energy

and deceleration force can be obtained

in conjunction with the recharging of

the high voltage battery.

– The accelerator pedal is released

while driving with the select lever

position in “D” or “B”.

– The brake pedal is depressed

while driving with the select lever

position in “D” or “B”.

. When the high voltage battery is

fully charged, it is not recharged by

regenerative braking.

& Hybrid system operation

mode selection switch

SHSAA02

Hybrid Mode switch

The hybrid system operation modes can

be selected using the switch.

NOTE

. If there is not enough electrical

power in the high voltage battery, it is

not possible to select the Hybrid Bat-

tery Save Mode.

. The Hybrid Battery Charge Mode

cannot be selected if the high voltage

battery is almost completely charged.

! Switching to the Hybrid Battery

Save Mode

SHSAA0201

Pressing the Hybrid Mode switch while it is

in the Normal Mode or Hybrid Battery

Charge Mode can be selected to the

Hybrid Battery Save Mode.

The Hybrid Battery Save Mode indicator

illuminates when the mode is switched to

Hybrid Battery Save Mode. The Driver

Assist indicator at the top of the combina-

tion meter also illuminates in yellow-green

for approximately 5 seconds.

Hybrid Battery Save Mode will be canceled

by pressing the Hybrid Mode switch.

! Switching to the Hybrid Battery

Charge Mode

SHSAA0202

1. Press and hold the Hybrid Mode

switch.

2. Release the switch once the Hybrid

Battery Charge Mode indicator starts to

blink.

The indicator illuminates when the switch

to Hybrid Battery Charge Mode is com-

plete. The Driver Assist indicator at the top

– CONTINUED –

Hybrid system features

Hybrid system

(32,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

of the combination meter illuminates in

light blue for approximately 5 seconds.

When the high voltage battery is almost

fully charged, the Hybrid Battery Charge

Mode is automatically canceled and the

operation mode will be switched to Hybrid

Battery Save Mode.

The Hybrid Battery Charge Mode can be

canceled by pressing the Hybrid Mode

switch.

NOTE

. The maximum charge amount in the

Hybrid Battery Charge Mode is approxi-

mately 80% of the fully charged capa-

city for the charging from an external

power source.

. When the high voltage battery is

close to fully charged, it is not possible

to change to Hybrid Battery Charge

Mode even when the Hybrid Mode

switch is pressed.

. When the ignition switch is turned

off, operation mode switching is can-

celed and the system returns to Normal

Mode the next time the vehicle is

started.

. The following may occur to protect

the system.

– Hybrid Battery Charge Mode can-

not be selected or canceled.

– The gasoline engine will not start

or stop even after switching to

hybrid battery charge mode.

. If a load to the system is large, such

as when the power consumption of the

climate control system is large or when

the temperature of the engine coolant is

high, it may take longer than usual to

charge using the Hybrid Battery Charge

Mode, or charging to the high voltage

battery may not be performed.

& Charging

SHSAA04

In order to make EV driving available,

charge the high voltage battery from an

external power source before using the

vehicle. Refer to “Charging” FP37.

NOTE

Even if charging of the high voltage

battery has not been completed, the

vehicle can be driven. However, if there

is not enough charge remaining, it is

possible that the vehicle cannot be

driven using only the electric motor or

the EV driving range will become short-

er.

& Pedestrian alert system

SHSAA06

When driving with the gasoline engine

stopped, a sound which changes in ac-

cordance with the driving speed will be

played in order to warn people nearby of

the vehicle’s approach. The sound will

stop when the vehicle speed exceeds

approximately 22 mph (36 km/h).

The sound is produced continuously by the

system while the vehicle is reversing.

NOTE

In the following cases, the pedestrian

alert system may be difficult for sur-

rounding people to hear.

– In very noisy areas

– In the wind or the rain

Also, as the pedestrian alert system is

installed on the front of the vehicle, it

may be more difficult to hear from the

rear of the vehicle.

Hybrid system features

(33,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

HS-2. Hybrid system precau-

tions

SHSAB

WARNING

Take care when handling the hybrid

system, as it contains a high voltage

system (about 650 V at maximum) as

well as parts that become extremely

hot when the hybrid system is

operating. Obey the caution labels

attached to the vehicle. The high

voltage system is very dangerous

and improper operation can cause

severe burns and electric shock that

may result in death or serious injury.

1) Engine

2) Electric motor (traction motor)

3) Service plug cover and warning label

4) High voltage battery

5) Charge port door caution label

6) Warning label for high voltage battery

7) Inverter with converter assembly

– CONTINUED –

Hybrid system precautions

Hybrid system

(34,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

WARNING

. The vehicle has high voltage DC

and AC systems as well as a 12-

volt system. DC and AC high

voltage is very dangerous and

can cause severe burns and

electric shock that may result in

death or serious injury.

– Never touch, disassemble, re-

move or replace the high vol-

tage parts, cables or their

connectors.

– The hybrid system will be-

come hot after starting as the

system uses high voltage. Be

careful of both the high vol-

tage and the high tempera-

ture, and always obey the

caution labels attached to the

vehicle.

– Never try to open the service

plug cover under the cargo

area. The service plug is used

only when the vehicle is ser-

viced and is subject to high

voltage.

. Observe the following precau-

tions to reduce the risk of death

or serious injury when an acci-

dent occurs:

– Pull your vehicle off the road,

apply the parking brake, shift

the select lever position to

“P”, and turn the hybrid sys-

tem off.

– Do not touch the high voltage

parts, cables or connectors.

– If electric wires are exposed

inside or outside your vehicle,

an electric shock may occur.

Never touch exposed electric

wires.

– Do not touch the battery if

liquid is leaking from or ad-

hering to it.

If electrolyte (carbonic-based

organic electrolyte) from the

high voltage battery comes

into contact with eyes or skin,

it could cause blindness or

skin wounds. In the event that

it comes into contact with

eyes or skin, wash it off im-

mediately with a large amount

of water, and seek immediate

medical attention.

– If electrolyte is leaking from

the high voltage battery, do

not approach the vehicle.

In the event that the high

voltage battery is damaged,

the internal construction of

the battery will prevent a large

amount of electrolyte from

leaking out. However, any

electrolyte that does leak out

will give off a vapor. This

vapor is an irritant to skin

and eyes and could cause

acute poisoning if inhaled.

– Do not bring burning or high-

temperature items close to the

electrolyte. The electrolyte

may ignite and cause a fire.

– If a fire occurs in the hybrid

vehicle, leave the vehicle as

soon as possible. Never use a

fire extinguisher that is not

meant for electric fires. Using

even a small amount of water

may be dangerous.

– Carefully inspect the ground

under the vehicle. If you find

that liquid has leaked onto the

ground, the fuel system may

have been damaged. Leave

the vehicle as soon as possi-

ble.

. Never resell, hand over or modify

the high voltage battery. To pre-

vent accidents, hybrid batteries

that have been removed from a

Hybrid system precautions

(35,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

disposed vehicle are collected

through a SUBARU dealer. Do

not dispose of the battery your-

self. Unless the battery is prop-

erly collected, the following may

occur, resulting in death or ser-

ious injury:

– The high voltage battery may

be illegally disposed of or

dumped, and it is hazardous

to the environment or some-

one may touch a high voltage

part, resulting in an electric

shock.

– The high voltage battery is

intended to be used exclu-

sively with your hybrid vehi-

cle. If the high voltage battery

is used outside of your vehicle

or modified in any way, acci-

dents such as electric shock,

heat generation, smoke gen-

eration, explosion and elec-

trolyte leakage may occur.

When reselling or handing

over your vehicle, the possibi-

lity of an accident is extremely

high because the person re-

ceiving the vehicle may not be

aware of these dangers.

. If your vehicle is disposed of

without the high voltage battery

having been removed, there is a

danger of serious electric shock

if high voltage parts, cables and

their connectors are touched. In

the event that your vehicle must

be disposed of, the high voltage

battery must be disposed of by

your SUBARU dealer. If the high

voltage battery is not disposed of

properly, it may cause electric

shock that can result in death or

serious injury.

CAUTION

. The fuel may remain in the tank

for a long time and undergo

changes in quality depending on

the how the vehicle is used.

Refuel at least 9.3 gal. (35 L, 7.7

Imp.gal.) of fuel every 6 months

(refuel a total of at least 9.3 gal.

[35 L, 7.7 Imp.gal.] over a 6-month

period), as this may affect com-

ponents of the fuel system or the

gasoline engine.

NOTE

. High voltage parts and cables on the

hybrid vehicles incorporate electro-

magnetic shielding. Therefore they

emit approximately the same amount

of electromagnetic waves as conven-

tional gasoline powered vehicles or

home electronic appliances.

. Your vehicle may cause sound inter-

ference in some third party-produced

radio parts.

. The high voltage battery has a

limited service life.

The high voltage battery capacity (the

ability to hold a charge) reduces with

time and use in the same way as other

rechargeable batteries. The extent at

which capacity reduces changes dras-

tically depending on the environment

(ambient temperature, etc.) and usage

conditions, such as how the vehicle is

driven and how the high voltage battery

is charged. This is a natural character-

istic of lithium-ion batteries, and is not

a malfunction.

Also, even though the distance that can

be driven using only the electric motor

decreases when the high voltage bat-

tery capacity reduces, driveability does

not significantly become worse.

In order to reduce the possibility of the

capacity reducing, refer to “General

information” FP37.

. When the high voltage battery is

extremely cold (below −228F (−308C))

under the influence of the outside

– CONTINUED –

Hybrid system precautions

Hybrid system

(36,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

temperature, it may not be possible to

start the hybrid system. In this case, try

to start the hybrid system again after

the temperature of the high voltage

battery increases due to the outside

temperature increase.

. Do not place a ferromagnetic sub-

stance in the cargo area. It could have a

negative impact on electric devices.

& High voltage battery and bat-

tery charger air vents

SHSAB01

1) High voltage battery air vents

2) Battery charger air vent

There are air vents on the cargo area for

the purpose of cooling the high voltage

battery and battery charger. If the vents

become blocked, the high voltage battery

or battery charger may overheat, which will

lead to a reduction in high voltage battery

output.

The vehicle is equipped which a function

that cools the high voltage battery when it

is being charged from an external power

source. This function uses the climate

control system to collect cool air from the

intake port and use it to cool the high

voltage battery. For the detailed settings,

refer to “High voltage battery cooling

screen setting” FP221.

CAUTION

. Make sure not to block the air

vent with anything, such as a

plastic cover, or luggage. The

high voltage battery and battery

charger may overheat and be

damaged.

. Do not wet or allow foreign sub-

stances to enter the air vents as

this may cause a short circuit and

damage to the high voltage bat-

tery and battery charger.

. Do not carry large amounts of

water, such as water cooler bot-

tles, in the vehicle. If water spills

onto the high voltage battery, the

battery may be damaged. Have

the vehicle inspected by your

SUBARU dealer.

. If “Reduced High voltage battery

cooling Have vehicle inspected at

retailer” is displayed on the com-

bination meter display (color

LCD), check that nothing is

blocking the air vent. If the mes-

sage continues to be displayed

when the air vent is not blocked,

have the vehicle inspected by

your SUBARU dealer.

& Emergency shut off system

SHSAB02

When a certain level of impact is detected

by the impact sensor, the emergency shut

off system blocks off the high voltage

current and stops the fuel pump to mini-

mize the risk of electrocution and fuel

leakage. If the emergency shut off system

activates, your vehicle will not restart. To

restart the hybrid system, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

Hybrid system precautions

(37,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Hybrid warning message

SHSAB03

A message is automatically displayed

when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid

system or an improper operation is at-

tempted.

If a warning message is shown on the

combination meter display (color LCD),

read the message and follow the instruc-

tions.

NOTE

If a warning light comes on, a warning

message is displayed or the 12 V

battery is disconnected, the hybrid

system may not start. In that case, try

to start the system again. If the Hybrid

READY indicator light does not come

on, contact your SUBARU dealer.

HS-3. Hybrid vehicle driving

tips

SHSAC

WARNING

. Always start the hybrid system

while sitting in the driver’s seat.

Do not depress the accelerator

pedal while starting the hybrid

system under any circum-

stances. Doing so may cause an

accident resulting in death or

serious injury.

. When restarting the hybrid sys-

tem after an emergency shut-

down while driving, press the

ignition switch. When restarting

the hybrid system after stopping

the vehicle, change the select

lever position to “P” and then

press the ignition switch.

For economical and ecological driving, pay

attention to the following points.

. Use of power meter

Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping

the power meter within the Eco area. Refer

to “Power meter” FP177.

. Select lever position operation

Shift the select lever position to the “D”

position when stopped at a traffic light, or

when driving in heavy traffic.

Shift the select lever position to the “P”

position when parking.

Selecting the “N” position has no positive

effect on fuel consumption. In the “N”

position, the gasoline engine operates

but electricity cannot be generated. Also,

when using the climate control system,

etc., the high voltage battery power is

consumed.

. Accelerator pedal/brake pedal op-

eration

– Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid

abrupt acceleration and deceleration.

Gradual acceleration and deceleration

will make more effective use of the

electric motor (traction motor) without

having to use gasoline engine power.

– Avoid repeated acceleration. Re-

peated acceleration consumes high

voltage battery power, resulting in poor

fuel consumption. Battery power can

be restored by driving with the accel-

erator pedal slightly released.

– Make sure to operate the brakes

gently and in a timely manner when

braking. A greater amount of electrical

energy can be regenerated when

slowing down.

. Delays

Repeated acceleration and deceleration,

as well as long waits at traffic lights, will

– CONTINUED –

Hybrid vehicle driving tips

Hybrid system

(38,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

lead to high fuel and electricity consump-

tion. Check traffic reports before leaving

and avoid delays as much as possible.

When driving in a traffic jam, gently release

the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to

move forward slightly while avoiding over-

use of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can

help control excessive electricity and fuel

consumption.

. Highway driving

Control and maintain the vehicle at a

constant speed. Before stopping at a toll

booth or similar, allow plenty of time to

release the accelerator and gently apply

the brakes. A greater amount of electrical

energy can be regenerated when slowing

down.

. Air conditioning

– Using the remote climate control

system while the charge cable is

connected to the vehicle can reduce

electricity consumption immediately

after starting off by operating the

climate control mainly using electricity

from an external power source. Refer

to “Remote climate control system”

FP158.

– Set the air conditioning-linked

setting to ON to lower the electricity

consumption just after starting to drive.

Refer to “Setting the Remote Battery

Charging Timer” FP58.

HS-4. EV driving range

SHSAD

The EV driving range displayed on the

combination meter (color LCD) shows an

estimate of the distance that is possible in

EV driving (driving using only the electric

motor), and the actual distance that can be

driven may differ from that displayed.

Refer to “Basic screens” FP205.

& Displayed value

SHSAD01

The value displayed on the combination

meter display (color LCD) is estimated

from the following information.

. The amount of high voltage battery

charge currently remaining

. The electricity consumption (the esti-

mated distance that can be driven in EV

driving per unit of electrical energy) based

on the recorded value.

. The past climate control system elec-

tricity consumption amount

The electricity consumption varies de-

pending on how the vehicle is driven. The

vehicle automatically records the electri-

city consumption when being charged and

uses the electricity consumption for esti-

mating the EV driving range. Therefore,

the EV driving range displayed when the

high voltage battery is fully charged may

differ from the previous EV driving range

depending on how the vehicle was driven.

& Tips for extending the EV

driving range

SHSAD02

The distance that can be driven in EV

driving varies significantly depending on

how the vehicle is driven, road conditions,

the weather, the outside temperature,

usage conditions of electrical components

and the number of occupants.

The distance that can be driven in EV

driving can be extended if the following is

performed:

. Maintain a safe distance from the

vehicle in front and avoid unnecessary

acceleration and deceleration.

. Accelerate and decelerate as smoothly

as possible.

. Drive at moderate speeds as much as

possible and maintain a constant speed.

. Set the climate control to a moderate

temperature and turn off the climate

control when it is not needed.

. Use tires of the specified size and

maintain the specified tire pressure.

. Do not add unnecessary weight to the

vehicle.

EV driving range

(39,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

HS-5. Charging

SHSAE

& General information

SHSAE07

Make sure to read the following precau-

tions before connecting the charge cable

to the vehicle and charging the high

voltage battery.

WARNING

. People with implantable cardiac

pacemakers or cardiac resyn-

chronization therapy-pace-

makers should not carry out the

charging procedure. Ask some-

one else to do it.

– Do not approach the charging

equipment and charge cable

while charging. The charging

procedure may affect the op-

eration of such devices.

– Do not remain in the vehicle

during charging. The charging

procedure may affect the op-

eration of such devices.

– Do not enter the vehicle even

to take something out of the

cargo area. The charging pro-

cedure may affect the opera-

tion of such devices.

. This vehicle has been designed

to allow charging from an exter-

nal power source using a

SUBARU genuine charge cable

for exclusive use with standard

household AC outlets.

However, the vehicle differs

greatly from standard household

electrical goods in the following

ways, and incorrect usage could

cause fire or electric shock, pos-

sibly leading to death or serious

injury.

– For information about battery

charging time, refer to “Esti-

mated charging time” FP51.

– Charging can be conducted

outdoors.

. Do not operate the select lever

when the charge cable is con-

nected to the vehicle. In the event

that the charge cable has been

damaged, the select lever posi-

tion may change from “P” to

another position and the vehicle

could move, possibly leading to

an accident.

. Do not refill the gasoline tank

while the battery is charging.

. Do not disassemble or modify the

charger. There is the risk of

accident or injury. Doing so could

increase the risk of accident or

injury, and it could also have a

negative impact on other de-

vices.

. Do not fuel the vehicle or wash

the vehicle when the charge port

door is open. There is the risk of

malfunction or injury.

CAUTION

. Make sure to observe the follow-

ing precautions when handling

the charge cable. Failure to ob-

serve these precautions may re-

sult in damage to the charge

cable and charge port.

– Insert the charging connector

straight into the charge port.

– After inserting the charging

connector, do not apply ex-

cessive force to or twist the

connector. Also, do not lean

on the connector or hang any

objects from it.

– CONTINUED –

Charging

Hybrid system

(40,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

– Do not step on or trip over the

charge cable.

– Before removing the charging

connector, make sure that it is

unlocked. Refer to “After char-

ging” FP56.

– After removing the charge

cable, promptly return it to its

proper location.

To charge properly, follow the procedure

after reading the explanation below. Char-

ging is intended to be carried out only by

licensed drivers who properly understand

the charging procedure.

. Charging should not be carried out by

children.

. When charging with charging equip-

ment, follow the procedures for using all

equipment.

. When charging using a public charging

facility, check the setting of the Remote

Battery Charging Timer.

NOTE

. Do not operate any unnecessary

electrical components while charging

is in progress. Doing so may increase

the time required for charging. It could

also have a negative impact on other

devices.

. The vehicle has the following safety

functions.

– The hybrid system will not start

while the charge cable is attached to

the vehicle, even if the ignition

switch is operated.

– If the charge cable is connected

while the Hybrid READY indicator

light is illuminated, the hybrid sys-

tem will stop automatically and

driving will not be possible.

– When the charge cable is con-

nected to the vehicle, the select

lever position cannot be changed

from “P” to another position. How-

ever it can be changed to a position

other than “P” if the shift lock is

disengaged.

. The following occur during char-

ging, however, they do not indicate a

malfunction.

– The charging starting time may

differ depending on the state of the

vehicle.

– During charging, the sound of the

fan may be heard from the charging

equipment cooling air vents.

– During and after charging, the

cargo area in which the charging

equipment is installed may get

warm.

. The capacity of the high voltage

battery will decline gradually when the

high voltage battery is in use. The rate

at which it declines will differ in accor-

dance with environmental conditions

and the way in which the vehicle is

used. Observing the following can help

suppress battery capacity decline.

– Avoid parking the vehicle in high

temperature areas when the high

voltage battery is fully charged.

– Avoid accelerating and deceler-

ating frequently and suddenly when

EV driving.

– Avoid frequent driving near the

top speed for EV driving.

– Leave a low level of charge in the

high voltage battery when leaving

the vehicle undriven for a long

period of time.

After confirming that EV driving has

switched to driving using both the

electric motor and engine, turn the

ignition switch off.

– Use the Remote Battery Charging

Timer as much as possible in order

to fully charge the high voltage

battery immediately before starting

off.

Also, if the high voltage battery capa-

city reduces, the distance that can be

Charging

(41,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

driven in EV driving decreases. How-

ever, the driveability does not signifi-

cantly become worse.

. In the following situations, the re-

maining charge of the high voltage

battery after charging completes may

be less than normal in order to protect

the system. When this occurs, even if

the remaining charge display of the

high voltage battery shows that it is

fully charged, the remaining charge

rapidly decreases faster than normal.

– Charging is carried out when the

outside temperature is low or high

– Charging is carried out immedi-

ately after high-load driving or in

extreme heat

If none of the above situations apply

and there is a drastic drop in the

remaining charge of the high voltage

battery after charging completes, have

the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU

dealer.

. Certification

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including in-

terference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

& Charging methods

SHSAE06

The following methods can be used to

charge the high voltage battery.

. Charging from an external power

source

This is a charging method used when

charging from an AC outlet (120 V) with the

charge cable equipped to the vehicle or

charging at a public charging station. Refer

to “Charging from an external power

source” FP52.

The charging start time (or departure time)

and day can be set to carry out charging

using the timer at the desired date and

time. Refer to “Using the Remote Battery

Charging Timer” FP57.

. Using the Hybrid Battery Charge

Mode

The hybrid system can be switched to

Hybrid Battery Charge Mode to charge the

high voltage battery using electricity gen-

erated by gasoline engine operation. Refer

to “Switching to the Hybrid Battery Charge

Mode” FP29.

& Confirm the items before

charging

SHSAE12

Before charging, always check the follow-

ing items.

. The parking brake is applied.

. The headlights are switched off or set to

AUTO, and lights, such as the hazard

warning flashers and interior lights, are

switched off. If electric components are

activated, they will use electric power. This

will cause a longer battery charging time.

. The ignition switch is off.

. Make sure that each part of the charge

cable is in good condition. Refer to

“Inspecting and maintaining the charge

cable” FP49.

& Power sources that can be

used

SHSAE05

WARNING

Make sure to observe the precau-

tions for electrical faults when char-

ging the vehicle.

Failure to use a power source that

fulfills the requirements, or failure to

observe regulations while charging

could lead to an accident, possibly

resulting in death or serious injury.

– CONTINUED –

Charging

Hybrid system

(42,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

An external power source that fulfills the

following criteria is necessary for charging

this vehicle. Confirm this before charging.

! Power sources

SHSAE0501

. Connect to an AC 120 V outlet (NEMA

5-15R) with a Ground-Fault Circuit-Inter-

rupter (GFCI) and a circuit breaker. Use of

a 15 A individual circuit is strongly recom-

mended to ensure the charge cable will

operate properly.

. When charging outdoors, make sure to

connect to a weatherproof outlet that is

certified for outdoor use.

Checking Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter

(GFCI) operation before its use is recom-

mended.

NOTE

. When your circuit breaker trips dur-

ing charging, the upper limit of the

charging current can be changed in the

settings on the multi-function display.

Refer to “Maximum charge current

setting” FP223.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

If you do not follow them, fire,

electrical shock or damage may

occur, possibly resulting in death

Charging

(43,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

or serious injury.

– Connect to an AC 120 V outlet

(NEMA 5-15R) with a Ground-

Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI)

supplied by a circuit breaker per

your local code. Use of a 15 A

individual circuit is strongly re-

commended.

– Do not connect the charge cable

to a multi-outlet adapter, multi-

plugs, or conversion plug.

– Connecting the charge cable to

an extension cord is strictly pro-

hibited. The extension cord may

overheat and does not contain a

Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter

(GFCI).

– Do not connect to a power strip.

– Use of a block heater for charging

is prohibited.

– Make sure to connect the char-

ging connector and charge port

directly. Do not connect a con-

verting adaptor or extension cord

between the charging connector

and charge port.

. For safe charging, the following

charging equipment and settings

are recommended.

– When charging outdoors, con-

nect the plug to a weather-

proof outlet, and ensure that

the plug remains waterproof

while the plug is connected.

– To reduce the risk of fire,

connect only to an at least 15

A branch circuit with an over-

current protection in accor-

dance with the National Elec-

tric Code, ANSI/NFPA 70.

– To reduce the risk of electric

shock when working with the

plug, connect to an outlet with

a Ground-Fault Circuit-Inter-

rupter (GFCI) or one that has

a Ground Leakage Circuit

Breaker installed.

CAUTION

Do not use private power generators

as a power source for charging.

Doing so may make charging un-

stable, the voltage may be insuffi-

cient, and the error warning indica-

tor on Charging Circuit Interrupting

Device of the charge cable may

flash.

– CONTINUED –

Charging

Hybrid system

(44,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Charging equipment

SHSAE01

This vehicle features equipment for connecting to an external power source.

1) Charge port door (page 43)

2) Charge port

3) Charge port light

4) Charge cable connector lock switch

(page 43)

5) Charging indicator (page 45)

6) Charge cable (page 46)

7) Charging Circuit Interrupting Device

(page 48)

8) Charging connector cap

Charging

(45,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Charge port door

SHSAE13

If one of the following conditions is met, the

charge port door can be opened by

pushing.

. The door is unlocked.

. The access key fob is being held. Refer

to “Keyless access function and charge

cable connector locking system” FP43.

& Keyless access function and

charge cable connector lock-

ing system

SHSAE04

When carrying the access key fob on your

person, only the charge port door can be

unlocked, and the charging connector can

be locked or unlocked with the doors of the

vehicle locked.

! Opening the charge port door and

locking the charging connector by

using keyless access function

SHSAE0401

Opening the charge port door

Pressing the charge port door carrying the

access key fob on your person can open

only the charge port door with the doors of

the vehicle locked.

Charge cable connector locking system

Pressing the charge cable connector lock

switch carrying the access key fob on your

person can lock and unlock the charging

connector.

It can be used to prevent the charge cable

from being removed or stolen while char-

ging.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions

when locking the charging connec-

tor. Failure to do so may cause a

malfunction in the charge cable

connector locking system.

– CONTINUED –

Charging

Hybrid system

(46,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. Check that the charging connec-

tor is compatible with this vehi-

cle. A charging connector of a

different type or a charging con-

nector with a damaged or de-

formed insertion part may not be

locked.

. Do not operate the charge cable

connector lock switch before the

charging connector is con-

nected.

. Operate the charge cable con-

nector lock switch after firmly

inserting the charging connector

into the charge port.

. Do not apply excessive force to

the charging connector when the

charging connector is locked.

When removing the charging

connector, make sure to unlock

the charging connector.

NOTE

. For details about the antenna loca-

tion and operating range, refer to

“Operating ranges” FP146.

. When the doors are locked with the

keyless access function, wireless re-

mote control or door lock switch, the

charge port door is also locked.

. If the charge port door is closed with

the doors locked, the charge port door

locks.

. After using the emergency key to

unlock the doors, the charge port door

can be opened. When the doors are

locked using the emergency key, the

charge port door also locks.

. After using the emergency key to

unlock the doors, the charge port door

can be opened. Refer to “How to lock

and unlock the vehicle by using the

key” FP160. The charge cable connec-

tor locking system can also be oper-

ated.

. If the charge port door is pressed

when the doors are locked and you are

not carrying the access key fob, the

charge port door opens slightly, but

remains locked. Carry an access key

fob or unlock the doors, and then press

the charge port door twice to open it.

. When the charge port door is open,

make sure not to touch the push lifter. If

it is pushed accidentally, the charge

port door or connector lock may be

unlocked.

If they are accidentally operated, carry

an access key fob or unlock the doors,

and then press the charge cable con-

nector lock switch to unlock.

. If the charge port door does not open

when using the normal procedure, it

can be opened, refer to “Charge port

door – if the charge port door cannot be

opened” FP387.

. If only the rear seat door is unlocked,

the charge port door or charge cable

may be locked/unlocked.

. The charge cable connector locking

system operates even when the key-

Charging

(47,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

less access function is not activated.

! Changing the charging connector

lock settings

SHSAE040101

The method for locking and unlocking the

charging connector can be changed as

follows in the “Charge cable connector

lock mode” settings on the multi-function

display.

Setting Operation description

“Manual

lock (De-

fault

setting)”

The charging connector is locked

and unlocked by pressing the

charge cable connector lock

switch when carrying the access

key fob or after unlocking the

doors.

“Auto

lock”

The charging connector is auto-

matically locked when the char-

ging connector is connected.*

“Auto lock

& Auto

unlock”

The charging connector is auto-

matically locked when the char-

ging connector is connected and

automatically unlocked when

charging is completed.*

*1: Carrying the access key fob and unlocking

the doors is not necessary.

*2: The charging connector can be locked and

unlocked by similar operations to that of

“Manual Lock”.

*3: The charging connector will be unlocked if

the power supply is interrupted after the

charging connector is automatically locked.

For details on how to change the settings,

refer to “Charge cable connector lock

mode setting” FP224.

NOTE

. If the charge cable connector lock

switch is operated repeatedly, the

charge cable connector locking system

may not work to protect the system. In

this case, wait for a while before

operating the switch again.

. The charge cable connector locking

system does not guarantee to prevent

theft of the charge cable, and is not

necessarily effective for all the situa-

tions.

1) Connector lock pin

. When the charging connector can-

not be inserted into the charge port,

check that the connector lock pin is not

lowered.

If the connector lock pin is lowered, the

connector lock is operating. Carry an

access key fob or unlock the doors, and

then press the charge cable connector

lock switch to unlock the connector

lock and check that the connector lock

pin is not lowered.

. If the charging connector cannot be

unlocked by pressing the charge cable

connector lock switch even after carry-

ing an access key fob or unlocking the

doors, refer to “Charge port door – if the

charge port door cannot be opened”

FP387.

& Charging indicator

SHSAE02

Charging indicator

The illumination/flashing pattern changes

to inform the user of the charging status in

the following ways.

– CONTINUED –

Charging

Hybrid system

(48,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Illumination/

flashing pat-

tern

Vehicle condition

Illuminated

. Charging is in progress

. Charging is possible

. Hybrid battery heating

function is operating (Re-

fer to “

High voltage battery

heating setting” FP223.)

. The hybrid battery cooling

function is operating (Re-

fer to “

High voltage battery

cooling screen setting”

FP221.)

Flashes for

approximate-

ly 15 seconds

When charge schedule is re-

gistered and charge cable is

connected to vehicle (Refer to

“

Using the Remote Battery

Charging Timer” FP57.)

Rapidly

flashes for

approximate-

ly 10 seconds

When charging cannot be

carried out due to malfunction

in a power source or the

vehicle etc. (Refer to “

When

normal charging cannot be car-

ried out” FP62.)

Not illumi-

nated

. Charging connector is not

inserted into charge port

. When Remote Battery

Charging Timer is on

standby

. When charging is com-

pleted

NOTE

When a system malfunction occurs

while charging or using the remote

climate control system, the charging

indicator rapidly flashes for approxi-

mately 10 seconds and then turns off.

If this occurs, the next time the hybrid

system is started, a message will be

displayed on the combination meter.

When a message is displayed, follow

the instructions displayed on the

screen.

& Charge cable

SHSAE03

WARNING

Observe the following precautions

when using the charge cable and

Charging Circuit Interrupting De-

vice. Failure to do so may cause an

accident, resulting in death or ser-

ious injury.

– Do not attempt to disassemble or

repair the charge cable, charging

connector, plug or Charging Cir-

cuit Interrupting Device.

If a problem arises with the

charge cable or the Charging

Circuit Interrupting Device, stop

charging immediately and con-

tact your SUBARU dealer.

– Do not subject the charge cable,

charging connector, plug or

Charging Circuit Interrupting De-

vice to strong force or impact.

– Do not apply excessive force to

the charge cable by forcefully

folding, twisting, pulling or drag-

ging the charge cable.

– Do not damage the charge cable

with sharp objects.

– Do not fold the charging connec-

tor or the plug or insert foreign

objects into them.

– Do not put the charging connec-

tor or the plug into water.

If they are dropped into water,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

– Do not bring the charge cable to a

high-temperature item such as a

heating device.

– Do not wrap the charge cable

around the Charging Circuit In-

terrupting Device.

CAUTION

. To prevent damage to the charge

cable and related parts, observe

the following precautions.

– When interrupting or cancel-

ing charging, remove the

charging connector before re-

moving the plug.

– When removing the charge

Charging

(49,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

cable, check that the charging

connector is unlocked.

– Do not forcefully pull the char-

ging connector cap.

– Do not apply a vibration to the

charging connector while

charging.

Charging may be stopped.

– Do not insert anything but the

charging connector into the

charging port.

– When inserting the plug into

or removing the plug from the

outlet, make sure to hold the

body of the plug.

– Do not forcefully pull the

charge cable if it is caught or

entangled.

If the cable is entangled, dis-

entangle it before using it.

– When charging from the ex-

ternal device, use the charge

cable equipped with the vehi-

cle.

. Precautions for low temperatures

In low temperatures, the charge

cable and plug-cord may become

hard. Therefore, make sure to not

apply excessive force when they

are hard. If excessive force is

applied to the hardened charge

cable or the plug-cord, they may

be damaged.

1) Charging connector

2) Latch release button

3) Charging connector cap

4) Plug

5) Plug-cord

6) Charging Circuit Interrupting Device

7) Power indicator (Refer to “Charging

Circuit Interrupting Device indicator”

FP48.)

8) Charging indicator (Refer to “Charging

Circuit Interrupting Device indicator”

FP48.)

9) Error warning indicator (Refer to “Char-

ging Circuit Interrupting Device indicator”

FP48.)

! Safety functions

SHSAE0301

The Charging Circuit Interrupting Device

has the following safety features.

. Electrical leakage detection function

If an electrical leakage is detected during

charging, the power source will be auto-

matically interrupted, thus preventing fires

or electrical shocks caused by electrical

leakage.

If the power source is interrupted, the error

indicator flashes.

Refer to “When a malfunction occurs

during charging” FP48.

. Automatic check function

This is an automatic system check that is

run before charging begins to check for

problems in the operation of the electrical

leakage detection function.

If a malfunction is found in the electrical

leakage detection function as a result of

– CONTINUED –

Charging

Hybrid system

(50,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

the check, the error warning indicator will

flash to inform the user. Refer to “When a

malfunction occurs during charging”

FP48.

. Temperature detection function

A temperature detection function is

equipped to the plug. While charging, if

heat is generated due to looseness on the

outlet side, this function suppresses heat

by controlling the charging current.

. Conditions for supplying current to

the vehicle

The Charging Circuit Interrupting Device is

designed to prevent electrical current from

being supplied to the charging connector

when it is not connected to the vehicle,

even if the plug is inserted into the outlet.

! Charging Circuit Interrupting De-

vice indicator

SHSAE0302

Three indicators are used to indicate the

following conditions.

1) Power indicator (amber)

2) Charging indicator (green)

3) Error warning indicator (red)

. Power indicator

Illuminates when electricity is flowing to

the Charging Circuit Interrupting Device.

. Charging indicator

Illuminates when charging is in progress.

. Error warning indicator

Flashes when there is electrical leakage or

when a malfunction occurs in the Charging

Circuit Interrupting Device.

! When a malfunction occurs dur-

ing charging

SHSAE030201

The indicators on the Charging Circuit

Interrupting Device use a combination of

different statuses (not illuminated, illumi-

nated or flashing) to inform the user of

internal malfunctions.

When the error warning indicator is illumi-

nated or flashing, temporarily remove the

plug from the outlet and then reconnect it

to check if the error indicator turns off.

If the error warning indicator turns off,

charging is now possible.

If it does not turn off, perform the correction

procedure in the following chart.

Charging

(51,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Status Power indicator

Error warning

indicator

Cause/Correction procedure

Normal Illuminated Not illuminated —

Charging sys-

tem error

Not illuminated

or illuminated

An electrical leakage is detected and char-

ging is canceled, or there is a malfunction in

the charge cable.

Contact your SUBARU dealer.

Illuminated Flashes

Plug tempera-

ture detection

malfunction

Flashes Flashes

There is a malfunction in the plug tem-

perature detection part.*

Contact your SUBARU dealer.

Plug tempera-

ture increase

detection

Flashes Not illuminated

An increase in the temperature of the plug is

detected due to an improper connection

between the outlet and plug.*

Contact your SUBARU dealer.

Charge cable

life span notice

Illuminated Flashes

The number of charges using the charge

cable is nearing the end of its usable life

span.

Contact your SUBARU dealer.

Charge cable

life span

Illuminated Illuminated

The number of charges using the charge

cable has exceeded its usable number of

charges.

Contact your SUBARU dealer.

*1: When this occurs, charging is carried out without a limited charging current.

*2: When this occurs, charging is carried out with a limited charging current.

! Inspecting and maintaining the

charge cable

SHSAE0303

For safety, inspect the charge cable on a

routine basis.

WARNING

. Check the following points regu-

larly. Failure to do so may cause

an unexpected accident, result-

ing in death or serious injury.

– The charge cable, plug, char-

ging connector, Charging Cir-

cuit Interrupting Device etc.

have not been damaged

– The outlet has not been da-

maged

– The plug can be securely in-

serted into the outlet

– The plug does not get extre-

mely hot during use

– The tip of the plug has not

been deformed

– The plug is not dirtied by dust

etc.

Remove the plug from the outlet

before inspecting it. If any ab-

normalities are found in the

charge cable as a result of the

inspection, immediately stop use

– CONTINUED –

Charging

Hybrid system

(52,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

and consult your SUBARU deal-

er.

. Never wash the charge cable with

water. Fire or electric shock may

occur during charging, possibly

resulting in death or serious

injury.

When the charge cable is dirty,

first remove the dirt with a hand,

wrung cloth, and then wipe the

cable with a dry cloth.

. Remove the plug from the outlet

when not using the charge cable

for a long time. Dust could accu-

mulate on the plug or in the

outlet, possibly causing over-

heating which could lead to a fire.

Also, keep the cable in a place

free from moisture.

& Charging tips for high voltage

battery

SHSAE08

! Tips for more effective charging

SHSAE0801

To enable EV driving, we recommend

efficiently charging the vehicle as follows.

1. Before departure

In order to use EV driving, charge the high

voltage battery before leaving. For details

about how to charge, refer to “Charging

from an external power source” FP52. For

details about how to set the Remote

Battery Charging Timer, refer to “Using

the Remote Battery Charging Timer”

FP57.

2. At the destination

Use a public charging station to charge the

high voltage battery.

If there are no charging facilities, the high

voltage battery can be charged using the

Hybrid Battery Charge Mode.

3. After returning

In order to drive the next time, charge the

high voltage battery.

! Checking information related to

charging

SHSAE0802

Information related to charging can be

displayed and checked on the multi-func-

tion display. It is also possible for SUBARU

STARLINK subscribers to check the in-

formation using a smartphone.

Charging

(53,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Charging screen

1. Remaining charging time

2. Hybrid Battery Charge Status

When the ignition switch is turned to ON

during charging, the charging screen will

display. The remaining charging time and

current charging condition are displayed.

NOTE

If approximately 100 seconds elapse

after the ignition switch is turned to ON

during charging, the ignition will auto-

matically turn off and the display will

also turn off.

! Estimated charging time

SHSAE0601

The time required to charge the high

voltage battery differs according to the

charging voltage and charging current.

Connected

power source

Home power

source

Public char-

ging station

Charging

voltage

AC 120 V AC 240 V

Maximum

charging

current

12 A 16 A

Estimated

charging

time*

Approximate-

ly 5 hours

Approximate-

ly 2 hours

*: The time required for charging to complete

depends on conditions such as the remaining

charge of the high voltage battery and the

outside temperature.

NOTE

. In the following situations, charging

time may become longer than normal.

– In very hot or very cold tempera-

tures.

– The vehicle is consuming a lot of

electricity, for example, when the

head lights and other features are

on.

– There is a power outage during

charging.

– There is an interruption in the

electrical supply.

– There is a drop in the voltage of

the external power source.

– The charge in the 12 V battery is

low, for example due to the vehicle

being left unused for a long period

of time.

– The maximum charging current

is set to 8 A on the multi-function

display. Refer to “Maximum charge

current setting” FP223.

– When the hybrid battery heating

function operates. Refer to “High

voltage battery heating setting”

FP223.

– When the hybrid battery cooling

function operates before charging.

Refer to “High voltage battery cool-

ing screen setting” FP221.

– The air conditioning-linked

setting or remote climate control

was used.

. DC Chargers cannot be used with

this vehicle.

! Charging-linked functions

SHSAE0602

This vehicle is equipped with several

functions that are linked with charging.

Refer to “High voltage battery settings”

FP221.

– CONTINUED –

Charging

Hybrid system

(54,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Charging from an external

power source

SHSAE09

WARNING

. Observe the following precau-

tions for charging. Failure to do

so may cause an accident, result-

ing in death or serious injury.

– Connect to a power source

suitable for charging. Refer

to “Power sources that can

be used” FP39.

– Check that the charge port,

charge cable, plug and outlet

are free of foreign matter.

– Only use outlets where the

plug can be securely inserted.

– Do not charge with the charge

cable coiled or bundled.

– Do not coil the 120 V charge

cable while in-use because

the cable may overheat.

– Failure to re-coil the charge

cable when not in-use could

result in strangulation or a

tripping hazard.

– Do not wash the vehicle while

the charge cable is connected

to the vehicle or the charge

port door is open.

– Do not touch the terminals of

the charging connector and

charge port with sharp metal

objects (needles etc.) or by

hand, or short them with for-

eign objects.

– When charging outdoors,

make sure to connect to a

weatherproof outlet for out-

door use.

– Do not insert the plug if the

outlet is submerged in water

or snow.

– Check that no snow, water or

ice has accumulated around

the charging connector term-

inals or the vehicle charge

port while it is raining or

snowing. Tap snow, water or

ice gently from the connector

prior to inserting the charging

connector into the vehicle’s

charge port.

– Do not connect the plug if your

hands are wet. Also, do not get

the plug or outlet wet.

– Do not charge the vehicle

during a lightning storm.

– Do not park with the wheels on

the charge cable, plug, char-

ging connector or Charging

Circuit Interrupting Device.

– Firmly insert the plug into the

outlet.

– Do not use an extension cord

or converting adaptor.

. If the error warning indicator on

the Charging Circuit Interrupting

Device illuminates or flashes dur-

ing charging, there may be an

electrical leak in the power

source path, or there may be a

malfunction in the charge cable

or Charging Circuit Interrupting

Device. Refer to “When a mal-

function occurs during charging”

FP48. If the error warning indi-

cator does not turn off even after

performing the correction proce-

dure, immediately stop charging,

remove the charge cable and

contact your SUBARU dealer.

Continuing to charge the vehicle

in that condition may lead to

accidents or serious injury.

. Remove the plug if it will not be

used for a long time. Dirt and dust

may accumulate in the plug or

outlet, which could cause a mal-

function or fire, possibly leading

Charging

(55,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

to death or serious injury.

. Make sure to observe the follow-

ing precautions regarding the

charging equipment. Failure to

observe these precautions may

result in death or serious injury,

such as burns or electric shocks.

– The charging equipment is hot

during charging. Do not touch

the charging equipment, as

doing so may result in burns.

– Do not disassemble, repair or

modify the charging equip-

ment. When the charging

equipment needs to be re-

paired, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

CAUTION

. Do not insert the plug into the

charge port. The charge port may

be damaged.

. After disconnecting the charging

connector from the charge port,

make sure to close the charge

port door. Water or foreign ob-

jects may enter the charge port,

which could lead to vehicle da-

mage.

. If the charge port door is not

locked, it may open if pushed.

. After removing the plug from the

outlet, keep it in a safe place free

from moisture and dust. The

charge cable or plug may be

damaged if the cable is stepped

on or ridden over by the vehicle.

. Do not charge if the outside

temperature is −228F (−308C) or

below, as it is likely that charging

will take longer and equipment

related to charging will be da-

maged.

. Do not leave the vehicle or the

charge cable in areas where the

outside temperature is lower than

−408F (−408C). The vehicle or

charge cable will probably be

damaged.

. Due to the environment in which

the power equipment is located,

charging may be unstable due to

noise, the voltage may be insuffi-

cient, and the error warning in-

dicator on Charging Circuit Inter-

rupting Device of the charge

cable may flash.

When using a public charging station,

make sure to check the operation instruc-

tions on the charging station.

When the charge schedule is registered,

make sure “Charge Now” is on the screen

before charging. Refer to “Using the

Remote Battery Charging Timer” FP57.

! When charging

SHSAE0901

1. Prepare the charge cable.

2. Insert the charge cable into the outlet

of the external power source.

Check that the power indicator on the

Charging Circuit Interrupting Device is

illuminated.

– CONTINUED –

Charging

Hybrid system

(56,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

NOTE

In order to reduce the load on the outlet

and plug, when inserting the plug, use a

string to hang Charging Circuit Inter-

rupting Device on a hook or an equiva-

lent.

3. Open the charge port door. Refer to

“Charge port door” FP43.

4. Remove the charging connector cap of

the charging connector and secure it to the

cable.

5. Insert the charging connector into the

charge port.

Align the guide position on the bottom of

the charging connector, and push the

charging connector straight into the

charge port as far as possible.

Once a click is heard, check that the

charging connector is securely locked.

1) Connector lock pin

2) Charge port door lock pin

WARNING

Do not insert a hand into the con-

nector lock portion and charge port

door lock portion when connecting

the charging connector to the

charge port. When pushing the

charge cable connector lock switch,

a finger may be caught in the con-

nector lock pin or the charge port

door lock pin, resulting in an injury.

Also pay attention that clothes do

not become pinched or caught by

the pin. If clothes are pinched or

caught, push the charge cable con-

nector lock switch to release the pin.

Charging

(57,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

6. Confirm that the charging indicator

illuminates.

NOTE

. During charging, the Driver Assist

indicator at the top of the combination

meter also blinks. This lighting can be

turned off. Refer to “Driver Assist

Indicator” FP207.

. If the charging indicator does not

illuminate when the charging connec-

tor is inserted, refer to “When normal

charging cannot be carried out” FP62.

. If the charging indicator blinks after

connecting the charge cable, the

charge schedule is registered and

charging cannot be performed immedi-

ately. To cancel the timer and start

charging immediately, perform any of

the following procedures.

– Turn “Charge Now” on. Refer to

“Setting the Remote Battery Char-

ging Timer” FP58.

– While the charging indicator is

blinking, remove and reconnect the

charging connector within 5 sec-

onds.

. If the error warning indicator on

Charging Circuit Interrupting Device

flashes during charging, refer to “When

a malfunction occurs during charging”

FP48.

The charging indicator will turn off when

charging is completed.

7. To lock the charging connector, carry

an access key fob and press the charge

cable connector lock switch.

NOTE

. After the charging connector is

locked, the charging connector cannot

be unlocked by pressing the charge

cable connector lock switch.

. When the charge cable is connected

to the charge port, the driver assist

indicator will indicate the charging

status by illuminating and blinking.

. If the latch release button is pressed,

charging will not begin even if the

charge cable is connected.

Also, charging will be stopped when

the latch release button is pressed and

held for several seconds during char-

ging. To restart charging, reinsert the

charging connector after pulling it out

and check that the charging indicator

illuminates.

. The surface of Charging Circuit

Interrupting Device may become hot

during charging, but this does not

indicate a malfunction.

. Depending on radio wave condi-

tions, interference may be heard on

the radio during charging.

. When the charging connector can-

not be inserted into the charge port,

refer to “Changing the charging con-

nector lock settings” FP45.

– CONTINUED –

Charging

Hybrid system

(58,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! After charging

SHSAE0902

1. If the charging connector is locked,

carry an access key fob and press the

charge cable connector lock switch to

unlock it.

2. Pull the charging connector towards

you while pressing the latch release

button.

NOTE

. If the charging connector is discon-

nected during charging, charging will

be interrupted.

. If the cable cannot be pulled out,

refer to “Charge cable – if the charge

cable cannot be removed” FP388.

3. Attach the charging connector cap.

4. Close the charge port door.

5. Remove the plug from the outlet when

the charging device is not being used.

NOTE

. Hold the body of the plug when

removing.

. When leaving the plug inserted,

inspect the plug and connector once a

month to check if dirt or dust has

accumulated.

. The remaining charge level shown

on the Hybrid Battery Charge Status

may drop slightly when the ignition

switch is turned to ON depending on

the outside temperatures, even if char-

ging has been completed. However,

this does not indicate a malfunction.

Charging

(59,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Using the Remote Battery

Charging Timer

SHSAE10

Charging can be carried out at the desired

time by registering the charge schedule.

Also, it is possible to set the timer to one’s

preferences, such as having charging

complete by a certain departure time or

be carried out at the same time on certain

days.

NOTE

. Check the following items to make

sure that the Remote Battery Charging

Timer operates correctly.

– Adjust the clock to the correct

time. Refer to “Clock” FP228.

– Check that the ignition switch is

turned off

– After registering the charge sche-

dule, connect the charge cable. The

charging start time is determined

based on the charge schedule at the

time that the charge cable was

connected.

– After connecting the charge

cable, check that the charging in-

dicator blinks. Refer to “Charging

indicator” FP45.

– Do not use an outlet that has a

power cut off function. Use an outlet

that constantly supplies electricity.

For outlets where the power is cut

off due to a timer function, charging

may not be carried out according to

plan if the power is cut off during the

set time.

. Even if multiple consecutive charge

schedules are registered when the

charge cable remains connected to

the vehicle, the next charge will not be

carried out according to the timer until

the charge cable is removed and re-

connected after charging completes.

Also, when the high voltage battery is

fully charged, charging according to

the timer will not be carried out.

. When the following operations are

performed while Remote Battery Char-

ging Timer is on standby, the timer is

temporarily canceled and charging is

started immediately.

– The remote climate control sys-

tem is operated. Refer to “Remote

climate control system” FP158.

– “Charge Now” is turned on. Refer

to “Setting the Remote Battery

Charging Timer” FP58.

– An operation temporarily cancels

charging using the timer. Refer to

“When charging” FP53.

. When the charging mode is set to

“Departure time”, timer settings may be

ignored due to the outside temperature,

and charging may start immediately.

. When charging is carried out using

the timer, the hybrid battery cooling

function may operate according to the

temperature of the high voltage battery.

For details about “High voltage battery

cooling screen” setting, refer to “High

voltage battery cooling screen setting”

FP221.

– The charging mode is set to

“Start time”, cooling starts at the

set charging start time.

– The charging mode is set to

“Departure time”, cooling starts

approximately 30 minutes before

the charging starts. However, if

there is no time to finish charging

by the set time, the high voltage

battery cooling time may be shor-

tened and the hybrid battery cooling

function may not operate.

– CONTINUED –

Charging

Hybrid system

(60,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Settings of the Remote Battery

Charging Timer

SHSAE1001

Setting screen

When registering the charge schedule, the

following settings can be changed on the

multi-function display.

! Charging mode setting

SHSAE100101

One of the two following charging modes

can be selected.

Charging

mode

Description

“Start time”

Starts charging at the set time

and finishes charging when

fully charged.*

“Departure

time”

Starts charging to finish at the

set time.*

*1: There might be a slight variation in the timing

when charging starts due to the state of the

high voltage battery.

*2: When this setting is selected, the air

conditioning-linked setting can be used.

! Repeated setting

SHSAE100102

The periodic timer charging can be set by

selecting the day of the week.

! Air conditioning-linked setting

SHSAE100103

When the charging mode is set to “Depar-

ture time”, the climate control system can

be set to automatically operate according

to the set time. Operation starts approxi-

mately 10 minutes before the set depar-

ture time.

By adjusting the cabin temperature in

advance, passengers can enjoy a plea-

sant interior immediately after entering the

vehicle.

NOTE

. When the air conditioning-linked

setting is turned on, the climate control

operates until the set departure time.

Therefore, the climate control will con-

sume electricity and charging may not

complete by the set departure time.

. If the high voltage battery is fully

charged, charging will not be carried

out even if the charge schedule is set.

However, if air conditioning-linked

setting is turned on, the air condition-

ing will operate only once when it nears

the time set in “Departure time”. If this

occurs, the air conditioning will con-

sume electricity and the remaining

charge of the high voltage battery when

departing may be decreased.

. The air conditioning-linked setting

will not operate when the doors are not

locked.

! Remote Battery Charging Timer

on/off setting

SHSAE100104

The Remote Battery Charging Timer can

be turned on or off.

! “Charge Now” on/off setting

SHSAE100105

If even one charge schedule is registered,

charging does not start until the set time,

even if the charge cable is connected to

the vehicle. To start charging immediately

without changing the charge schedule

setting, turn on to temporarily cancel the

charge schedule and enable charging

immediate after connecting the charge

cable.

! Setting the Remote Battery Char-

ging Timer

SHSAE1002

WARNING

When setting the Remote Battery

Charging Timer with the hybrid

system on, ensure that the vehicle

is parked in a place with adequate

Charging

(61,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

ventilation. In a closed area such as

a garage, exhaust gases including

harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may

collect and enter the vehicle. This

may lead to death or a serious health

hazard.

CAUTION

When setting the Remote Battery

Charging Timer with the hybrid

system off, the 12 V battery will be

discharged.

1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” or

“ACC”.

2. Press the timer charging setting switch

in the instrument panel.

NOTE

When the combination meter display

(color LCD) is displaying the menu

screen entering screen, the system will

not move to the charge timer settings

screen even if the timer charging

setting switch is pressed.

Charge timer settings

3. Set “Charge Now” to “Off” for timer

charging.

NOTE

. If no timer charging setting is regis-

tered, “Charge Now” cannot be se-

lected.

. When timer charging is scheduled,

then “Next scheduled charge time” is

displayed when “Charge Now” is

turned off.

. As long as the charge cable is not

unplugged, the “Next scheduled

charge time” display is not updated

even when charging is completed.

4. Select “Charging schedule”.

– CONTINUED –

Charging

Hybrid system

(62,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Charging schedule screen

5. Select “Add” to add a new timer

charging setting.

To change an existing setting, select the

setting to change.

NOTE

. The registered charging schedules

can be checked on this screen.

. A maximum of 3 charge schedules

can be registered.

1) Charging mode setting

2) Air conditioning-linked setting

3) Time setting

4) Remote Battery Charging Timer on/off

setting

5) Desired day setting

6. Set each item.

Setting

items

Description

Charging

mode

setting

Start time:

Starts charging at the set time and

finishes charging when fully

charged.

Departure time:

Starts charging to finish at the set

time.

Air condi-

tioning-

linked

setting

Set the air conditioning-linked

setting to on or off. For details,

refer to “

Settings of the Remote

Battery Charging Timer” FP58.

Setting

items

Description

Time

setting

Set the charging start time or

departure time.

Remote

Battery

Charging

Timer on/

off setting

Set the charging timer to on or off.

Desired

day

setting

Set the day of the week when the

charging timer starts.

7. When “Set” is selected, the schedule

will be set. If the schedule is already set,

select “Change” to set the changed sche-

dule. To delete the setting of the schedule,

select “Delete”. Select “Go Back” to return

to the previous screen.

Charging

(63,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

NOTE

. It is possible to check the next

charge schedule when the ignition

switch is turned to the “OFF” position.

. The Remote Battery Charging Timer

setting can also be registered from

“Charge timer settings” on the multi-

function display. Refer to “Charge timer

settings” FP223.

. The timer charging setting switch

cannot be used while driving.

. When the vehicle is in the following

conditions, the Remote Battery Char-

ging Timer setting operations are can-

celed.

– A message is displayed while

performing a setting operation

– The ignition switch is operated

before the settings are confirmed

– The vehicle starts off

. SUBARU STARLINK subscribers

can also set the Remote Battery Char-

ging Timer from a smartphone. Refer to

the Owner’s Manual supplement for

SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Secur-

ity.

& Display when charging is

completed

SHSAD03

Regardless of the type of power source or

whether the Remote Battery Charging

Timer is used, if the charging indicator

has turned off, then charging was com-

pleted correctly.

NOTE

A message is not displayed on the

combination meter when charging is

completed normally.

Charging

Hybrid system

(64,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

HS-6. Troubleshooting

SHSAF

& When normal charging cannot be carried out

SHSAF01

Symptom Likely cause Correction procedure

The power source indicator

on Charging Circuit Inter-

rupting Device does not illu-

minate, even though the

plug is connected to an

external power source.

The plug is not properly connected to the outlet. Check that the plug is properly connected to the outlet.

Power is out.

After power is restored, carry out the charging procedure

again.

The building breaker is tripped and power is cut off.

Check that the breaker is connected and if there is no

malfunction, check if the vehicle can be charged through

another outlet.

If charging is possible, the first outlet may have a

malfunction. Contact the building or facility manager, or an

electrician.

There is a short circuit or open circuit between the Charging

Circuit Interrupting Device and the plug.

Immediately stop charging and contact your SUBARU

dealer.

The error warning indicator

on Charging Circuit Inter-

rupting Device flashes.

The electrical leakage detection function or self-diagnostic

function operates and power is cut off.

When the voltage is insufficient, the error warning indicator

may flash when there is noise interference. Perform a reset

and connect to a proper power source. Refer to “

When a

malfunction occurs during charging” FP48.

If charging does not start, immediately stop charging and

contact your SUBARU dealer.

The charging indicator does

not illuminate, even though

the charging connector is

connected.

The plug is not properly connected to the outlet. Check whether the plug is properly connected to the outlet.

The charging connector is not securely connected to the

charge port.

Check the connection status of the charging connector.

If the charging indicator does not illuminate, even though

the charging connector is securely connected, there may be

a malfunction in the system. Immediately stop charging and

contact your SUBARU dealer.

The high voltage battery is already fully charged.

When the high voltage battery is fully charged, charging is

not performed.

The charging equipment does not operate.

Please contact the facility manager when there is a problem

with charging equipment.

Troubleshooting

(65,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Symptom Likely cause Correction procedure

The charging indicator

flashes and charging cannot

be carried out.

When charging indicator slowly flashes*:

Charge schedule is registered.

When you wish to charge according to the timer, wait until

the set time.

To immediately start charging, set “Charge Now” to “On”.

Refer to “

Setting the Remote Battery Charging Timer” FP58.

Or, while the charging indicator is flashing, remove and

reconnect the charging connector within 5 seconds.

When charging indicator rapidly flashes*:

Malfunction occurred in an external power source or the

vehicle.

Start the hybrid system and follow the instructions

displayed by the message on the combination meter

display (color LCD).

*: For details regarding charging indicator illumination and flashing, refer to “

Charging indicator” FP45.

& When the Remote Battery Charging Timer does not operate normally

SHSAF02

Symptom Likely cause Correction procedure

Cannot charge at desired

time.

The vehicle clock is not properly adjusted.

Check the clock settings and adjust it to the proper time.

Refer to “

Clock” FP228.

The charge cable is not connected to vehicle. Before using the charging timer, connect the charge cable.

An incorrect charging mode was selected.

Check the charging mode setting. Refer to “

Using the

Remote Battery Charging Timer” FP57.

When the charging mode is “Start time”, charging starts at

the set time, but when it is “Departure time”, charging is

completed by the set time. (The charging start time is

automatically controlled by the system.)

Cannot change timer setting

from smartphone applica-

tion*.

The smartphone is outside its coverage area.

Check the signal strength. If the smartphone is outside its

coverage area, move to a place with a better signal.

– CONTINUED –

Troubleshooting

Hybrid system

(66,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Symptom Likely cause Correction procedure

Charging starts immediately,

even though charge sche-

dule is registered.

“Charge Now” is set to “On”.

When charging according to the timer, set “Charge Now” to

“Off”. Refer to “

Setting the Remote Battery Charging Timer”

FP58.

The charge schedule is set to “Off”.

Check that charge schedule is not set to “Off”. Refer to

“

Setting the Remote Battery Charging Timer” FP58.

The charging mode is set to “Departure time” and the

schedule departure time is close to current time.

When the system determines that there is no time to finish

charging by the set scheduled departure time, it starts

charging immediately. Check the charge schedules.

The charge cable was removed and reinserted while the

charging indicator was flashing.

If the charge cable is removed and reinserted while the

charging indicator is flashing, the charging timer is

canceled. Temporarily remove the charge cable, and then

reconnect it.

The remote climate control system was operated.

When the remote climate control system is operated, the

system will start charging immediately, even if the charge

schedule is registered. To carry out charging using the

timer, stop the remote climate control system, and then

reconnect the charge cable.

“Hybrid system battery heating setting” operated.

When the charging mode is set to “Departure time”, “hybrid

battery heating function” may operate before charging

starts. Check the status of the charging indicator. Refer to

“

Charging indicator” FP45.

Charging ends earlier than

time set in “Departure time”.

The charging end time does not match the estimated end

time due to the condition of the power source or the outside

temperature.

If sudden changes in temperature or changes in the

condition of the power source occur while charging,

charging may end earlier than the time estimated by the

system.

Charging is not complete,

even though it is time set in

“Departure time”.

The air conditioning-linked setting is set to on.

When air conditioning-linked setting is set to on, the air

conditioning operates until the set departure time. There-

fore, charging may not complete by the set time due to

charging conditions. To have the high voltage battery fully

charged, allow charging to continue.

The charging end time does not match the estimated end

time due to the condition of the power source or the outside

temperature.

If sudden changes in temperature or changes in the

condition of the power source occur while charging,

charging may not end exactly at the time estimated by the

system.

Troubleshooting

(67,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Symptom Likely cause Correction procedure

Charging does not start,

even though it is time set in

“Start time”.

The charge cable was connected after the set time.

Connect the charge cable before the time set in “Start time”.

*: To access remote charging functionality, a MySubaru account is required. To create a MySubaru account, visit www.mysubaru.com and select “Create

an Account”. The MySubaru Mobile Application can be downloaded through the applicable device App Store. For more information, visit https://www.

subaru.com/vehicles/crosstrek/hybrid.html.

& When charging-related message is displayed

SHSAF03

When the hybrid system is started after charging, a message is displayed in the combination meter display (color LCD).

When this occurs, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

Symptom Likely cause Correction procedure

If “Charging stopped: Check

cable Check owners man-

ual” is shown.

The charging connector is not securely connected.

Check the connection status of the charging connector.

If charging cannot be carried out, even though the proper

procedures were followed, have the vehicle inspected by

your SUBARU dealer.

The latch release button of the charging connector was

pressed while charging.

When the latch release button is pressed while charging,

charging stops. To continue charging, reconnect the

charging connector.

If “Charging stopped: Bat-

tery temp Check owners

manual” is shown.

Charging was stopped to protect the high voltage battery as

it continued to remain hot for a certain period of time.

Allow the high voltage battery to cool down and perform

charging again if the charging amount has not reached the

desired amount.

– CONTINUED –

Troubleshooting

Hybrid system

(68,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Symptom Likely cause Correction procedure

If “Charging stopped: Un-

plugged/power failure” is

shown.

There is a problem in the power supply from the external

power source.

Check the following items.

. The plug is not disconnected.

. The power source indicator on Charging Circuit

Interrupting Device is illuminated.

. The circuit breaker has tripped or not.

If there is no problem with any of the above items, there may

be a problem with the outlet. Contact an electrician and

request an inspection.

Furthermore, if the error warning indicator on Charging

Circuit Interrupting Device is flashing, there may be an

electrical leakage. Consult your SUBARU dealer.

The charging equipment has stopped charging.

. Charging may be canceled by an interruption of power

supply depending on specifications of a charging

equipment. Refer to the instructions provided with the

charging equipment.

– When charging is stopped using the charging

equipment

– Equipment with timer charging function

– Equipment that is not compatible with the timer

charging function of the vehicle

. Check if it is possible to charge with the charge cable

equipped to the vehicle.

If charging cannot be carried out, even when using the

genuine charge cable, consult your SUBARU dealer.

If “Charging stopped: Low

voltage” is shown.

The charging equipment is not compatible with the vehicle. Check if it is possible to charge with the charge cable

equipped to the vehicle.

If charging cannot be carried out, even when using the

genuine charge cable, consult your SUBARU dealer.

The charging equipment has stopped charging.

Troubleshooting

(69,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Symptom Likely cause Correction procedure

If “Charging stopped: Check

cable” is shown.

There is a problem in the power supply from the external

power source.

Check the following items.

. The plug is securely inserted.

. The extension cord is not used and outlet is not

overloaded.

. Connected to a dedicated power line

. Electrical leakage has occurred or not.

There may be a problem with the outlet of the building.

Contact an electrician to request an inspection. If charging

cannot be carried out, even though there is no problem with

the power source path, there may be a malfunction in the

system. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU

dealer.

The charging equipment has stopped charging.

Check if it is possible to charge with the charge cable

equipped to the vehicle.

If charging cannot be carried out, even when using the

genuine charge cable, consult your SUBARU dealer.

If “Charging stopped: Ex-

cessive power usage Check

owners manual” is shown.

The power is being consumed by the electrical components

of vehicle.

Check the following items, and then carry out charging

again.

. If the headlights and audio are turned on, turn them off.

. Turn the ignition switch off.

If charging cannot be carried out, even after performing the

above, the 12 V battery may not be sufficiently charged.

Operate the hybrid system for approximately 15 minutes or

more to charge the 12 V battery.

If “Charging stopped: sys-

tem Check owners manual”

is shown.

A malfunction occurred in charging system.

Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED –

Troubleshooting

Hybrid system

(70,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& When other message is displayed

SHSAF04

Messages related to the high voltage battery are displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD). When this occurs, follow the

instructions displayed on the screen.

Symptom Likely cause Correction procedure

If “Hybrid System Over-

heated. Reduced Output

Power.” is shown.

The message may be shown when driving under severe

operating conditions. For example, when driving up a long

steep hill or driving up a steep hill in reverse.

The hybrid system may be overheated. Refer to “

Engine and

hybrid system overheating” FP378.

If “Shift out of N to recharge”

is shown.

The message is displayed when the remaining charge for

the high voltage battery is low.

As the high voltage battery cannot be charged when the

select lever position is in “N”, when stopped for long periods

of time shift the select lever position to “P”.

If “Press brake Shift to P

Restart engine” is shown.

Message is displayed when the remaining charge for the

high voltage battery is low, because the vehicle has been

shifted to “N” for a long period of time.

When operating the vehicle, shift to “P” and restart the

hybrid system.

If “Hybrid system may over-

heat” is shown.

The message may be shown when the accelerator pedal is

depressed to hold the vehicle while the vehicle is stopped

on an uphill, etc.

Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake

pedal.

If “Have high voltage battery

inspected at retailer” is

shown.

The high voltage battery is scheduled to be inspected or

replaced.

If you continue to drive the vehicle without having the

battery inspected, the hybrid system will eventually no

longer start.

Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer.

Troubleshooting

(71,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

S01

1-1. Seats .................................................................. 70

Safety tips ............................................................70

Front seats ...........................................................73

Rear seats ............................................................74

Head restraints .....................................................75

1-2. Seat heater ........................................................ 78

Safety precautions................................................78

Operation .............................................................78

1-3. Seatbelts............................................................ 79

Seatbelt safety tips ...............................................79

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .....................81

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency

Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) ..............................81

Seatbelt warning light and chime ..........................81

Fastening the seatbelt ..........................................81

Seatbelt maintenance............................................87

1-4. Seatbelt pretensioners ..................................... 87

Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner ...............88

Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt

pretensioners .....................................................89

System monitors ..................................................91

System servicing ..................................................91

Precautions against vehicle modification ..............91

1-5. Child restraint systems .................................... 92

Safety tips for installing child restraint systems ....93

Where to place a child restraint system ................94

Choosing a child restraint system ........................96

Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR

seatbelt..............................................................96

Installing a booster seat ..................................... 100

Installation of child restraint systems by

use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .... 101

Top tether anchorages ....................................... 104

1-6. SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag) ..............................................106

General precautions regarding SRS airbag

system............................................................. 106

General precautions regarding SRS airbag

system for accessories and any objects ........... 108

General precautions regarding SRS airbag

system and children......................................... 110

Components ...................................................... 113

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 115

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag ............. 127

SRS airbag system monitors .............................. 135

SRS airbag system servicing.............................. 136

Precautions against vehicle modification............ 137

How to contact the vehicle manufacturer

concerning modifications for persons with

disabilities that may affect the advanced

airbag system .................................................. 138

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(72,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1-1. Seats

S01AQ

& Safety tips

S01AQ01

! Safety tips for seat

S01AQ0101

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-

trol and personal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands and feet of rear

seat passengers and cargo are

clear of the adjusting mechan-

ism.

. After adjusting the seat, move it

back and forth to make sure it is

securely locked. If the seat is not

securely locked, it may move or

the seatbelt may not operate

properly.

. Do not put objects under the front

seats. They may interfere with

front seat locking and cause an

accident.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the front seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always sit

upright and well back in the seat

as far from the steering wheel as

practical while still maintaining

full vehicle control and the front

passenger should move the seat

as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

WARNING

Place children in the rear seat prop-

erly restrained at all times. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if they

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults, their

risk of being injured from deploy-

ment is greater. For that reason, we

strongly recommend that ALL chil-

dren (including those in child seats

and those that have outgrown child

restraint devices) sit in the REAR

seat properly restrained at all times

in a child restraint device or in a

seatbelt, whichever is appropriate

Seats

(73,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

for the child’s age, height and

weight. Secure ALL types of child

restraint devices (including forward

facing child seat) in the REAR seats

at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN

THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning child restraint sys-

tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-

tems” FP92.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do not

place objects such as cushions

between the passenger and the seat-

back. If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

Do not let rear passengers rest their

feet between the front seatback and

seat cushion. Doing so may lead to

defective operation of the following

systems and could result in serious

injury.

. Occupant detection system

. SRS side airbag

. Seat heater

. Power seat (driver’s seat)

– CONTINUED –

Seats

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(74,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits well

back and upright in the seat. Do not

put cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks

or seat cushions. If you do so, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both can

result in serious internal injury or

death.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

because it could tumble forward and

injure passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

! Safety tips for head restraint

S01AQ0102

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the

risk of serious neck injury in the

event that the vehicle is struck

from the rear. Also, never install

the head restraints the opposite

way round. Doing so will prevent

the head restraints from function-

ing as intended. Therefore, when

you remove the head restraints,

you must reinstall all head re-

straints correctly to protect vehi-

cle occupants.

. All occupants, including the dri-

ver, should not operate a vehicle

or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the

head restraints are placed in their

proper positions in order to mini-

mize the risk of neck injury in the

event of a crash.

Seats

(75,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Front seats

S01AQ02

! Power seat (driver’s seat)

S01AQ0202

1) Seat position forward/backward con-

trol switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or

backward. During forward/backward ad-

justment of the seat, you cannot adjust

the seat cushion height.

2) Seat height control switch

To adjust the seat height, pull up or push

down the rear end of the control switch.

3) Seatback angle (reclining) control

switch

To adjust the angle of the seatback, move

the control switch.

! Manual seat (passenger’s seat)

S01AQ0201

! Forward and backward adjust-

ment

S01AQ020101

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to

the desired position. Then release the

lever and try to move the seat back and

forth to make sure that it is securely locked

into place.

! Reclining the seatback

S01AQ020102

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then

release the lever and make sure the

seatback is securely locked into place.

The seatback placed in a reclined position

can spring back upward with force when

the lever is pulled. While operating the

lever to return the seatback, hold the

seatback lightly so that it may be raised

back gradually.

– CONTINUED –

Seats

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(76,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Rear seats

S01AQ03

! Armrest

S01AQ0301

To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge

of the armrest.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury, passengers

must never be allowed to sit on the

center armrest.

! Folding down the rear seatback

S01AQ0302

WARNING

. When you fold down the seat-

back, check that there are no

passengers or objects on the rear

seat. Not doing so creates a risk

of injury or property damage if

the seatback suddenly folds

down.

. Never allow passengers to ride

on the folded rear seatback or in

the cargo area. Doing so may

result in serious injury or death.

. Secure all objects and especially

long items properly to prevent

them from being thrown around

inside the vehicle and causing

serious injury during a sudden

stop, a sudden steering maneu-

ver or a rapid acceleration.

Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock

release knob and then fold the seatback

down.

! Return the rear seatback

S01AQ0303

WARNING

When returning the seatback to its

original position, observe the fol-

lowing precaution.

Failure to observe the precaution

may damage the seatbelt, impairing

its effectiveness, and possibly re-

sult in a serious injury.

. When returning the seatback to

its original position, pull the

seatbelt out towards the vehicle

exterior so that it will not be

caught between the seatback

and the trim.

Seats

(77,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Lock release knob

1) Unlocked

2) Locked

A) Unlocking marker in red

To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it locks

into place and make sure that the unlock-

ing marker on the lock release knob is no

longer visible.

WARNING

When you return the seatback to its

original position, check that the

unlocking marker on the lock re-

lease knob is not visible. Also, move

the seatback back and forth to

confirm that it is securely fixed in

place. If the seatback is not securely

fixed in place, the seatback may

suddenly fold down in the event of

sudden braking, or objects may

move out from the cargo area, which

could cause serious injury or death.

& Head restraints

S01AQ04

WARNING

The front seat head restraints are

designed to be installed into the

front seats only. The rear seat head

restraints are designed to be in-

stalled into the rear seats only. Do

not attempt to install the front seat

head restraints into the rear seats, or

the rear seat head restraints into the

front seats.

NOTE

It is possible to adjust the angle of the

front seat head restraints only. When

installing the front seat head restraints,

make sure that the angle of the head

restraints can be adjusted.

! Front seats

S01AQ0401

Both the driver’s seat and the front

passenger’s seat are equipped with head

restraints. Both head restraints are adjus-

table in the following ways.

! Height adjustment

S01AQ040101

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the release button on the top of the

seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

– CONTINUED –

Seats

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(78,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

Each head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

NOTE

When the head restraint cannot be

pulled out or installed due to insuffi-

cient clearance between the head re-

straint and the roof, tilt the seat and

then perform the installation and re-

moval tasks.

! Angle adjustment

S01AQ040102

The angle of the head restraint can be

adjusted in several steps. While maintain-

ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the

head restraint to a position where the back

of your head is as close to the head

restraint as possible.

To tilt:

Tilt the head restraint by hand to the

preferred position. A click will be audible

when the head restraint is locked.

To return:

Tilt the head restraint once as far forward

as it can go. The head restraint will

automatically return to the fully upright

position. Then, adjust the head restraint

again to the preferred angle.

! Rear seats

S01AQ0402

Both the rear window side seats and the

rear center seat are equipped with head

restraints.

! Rear windows side seating posi-

tion

S01AQ040201

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

Seats

(79,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

After installing the head restraint, make

sure it is securely locked.

! Rear center seating position

S01AQ040202

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to

be used at the retracted position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to the extended posi-

tion.

1) Incorrect (retracted position)

2) Correct (extended position)

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the release button on the top of the

seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

When the rear-center seating position is

occupied, raise the head restraint to the

extended position. When the rear center

seating position is not occupied, lower the

head restraint to improve rearward visibi-

lity.

Seats

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(80,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1-2. Seat heater

S01AB

The seat heater is equipped in the front

seats.

The seat heater operates when the ignition

switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

& Safety precautions

S01AB03

CAUTION

. People with delicate skin may

suffer slight burns even at low

temperatures if they use the seat

heater for a long period of time.

When using the heater, always be

sure to warn the persons con-

cerned.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates against heat,

such as a blanket, cushion, or

similar items. This may cause the

seat heater to overheat.

. When the seat is warmed enough

or before you leave the vehicle,

be sure to turn off the seat heater.

NOTE

Use of the seat heater for a long period

of time while the hybrid system is not

running can cause 12 V battery dis-

charge.

& Operation

S01AB04

1) HI – Rapid heating

2) LO – Normal heating

3) Off

A) Left-hand side

B) Right-hand side

Seat heater

(81,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” or

“HI” position on the switch, as desired,

depending on the temperature.

Selecting the “HI” position will cause the

seat to heat up quicker.

To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the

opposite side of the current position.

The indicator located on the switch illumi-

nates when the seat heater is in operation.

1-3. Seatbelts

S01AE

& Seatbelt safety tips

S01AE01

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. All belts should fit snugly in order

to provide full restraint. Loose

fitting belts are not as effective in

preventing or reducing injury.

. Each seatbelt is designed to sup-

port only one person. Never use a

single belt for two or more per-

sons – even children. Otherwise,

in an accident, serious injury or

death could result.

. Replace all seatbelt assemblies

including retractors and attach-

ing hardware worn by occupants

of a vehicle that has been in a

serious accident. The entire as-

sembly should be replaced even

if damage is not obvious.

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury.

. Keep the lap belt as low as

possible on your hips. In a colli-

sion, this spreads the force of the

lap belt over stronger hip bones

instead of across the weaker

abdomen.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the front seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

. Do not put cushions or any other

materials between occupants

and seatbacks or seat cushions.

If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap

belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result

in serious internal injury or death.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(82,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt under

the arm or behind the back. If an

accident occurs, this can increase

the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can

become very hot in a vehicle that has

been closed up in sunny weather;

they could burn an occupant. Do not

touch such hot parts until they cool.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seatbelt by the front

passenger when any of the SRS frontal,

side and curtain airbags deploy.

! Infants or small children

S01AE0101

Use a child restraint system that is suitable

for your vehicle. Refer to “Child restraint

systems” FP92.

! Children

S01AE0102

WARNING

Place children in the rear seat prop-

erly restrained at all times. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if they

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults, their

risk of being injured from deploy-

ment is greater. For that reason, we

strongly recommend that ALL chil-

dren (including those in child seats

and those that have outgrown child

restraint devices) sit in the REAR

seat properly restrained at all times

in a child restraint device or in a

seatbelt, whichever is appropriate

for the child’s height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint

devices (including forward facing

child seats) in the REAR seats at all

times.

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN

THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning the child restraint

system, refer to “Child restraint

systems” FP92.

If a child is too big for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear seat

and be restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions. Never allow a child to

stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses

the face or neck, move the child closer to

the belt buckle to help provide a good

shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to

securely place the lap belt as low as

possible on the hips and not on the child’s

waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt

Seatbelts

(83,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

cannot be properly positioned, a child

restraint system should be used. Never

place the shoulder belt under the child’s

arm or behind the child’s back.

! Expectant mothers

S01AE0103

Expectant mothers also need to use the

seatbelts. They should consult their doctor

for specific recommendations. The lap belt

should be worn securely and as low as

possible over the hips, not over the waist.

& Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ELR)

S01AE02

The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows

normal body movement but the retractor

locks automatically during a sudden stop,

impact or if you pull the belt very quickly

out of the retractor.

& Automatic Locking Retractor/

Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR/ELR)

S01AE03

Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-

matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic

Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor normally functions as an Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/

ELR has an additional locking mode

“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode” intended to secure a child restraint

system. When the seatbelt is once drawn

out completely and is then retracted even

slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in

that position and the seatbelt cannot be

extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks

will be heard which indicate the retractor

functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is

retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system on

the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,

the seatbelt must be changed over to the

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

When the child restraint system is re-

moved, make sure that the seatbelt re-

tracts fully and the retractor returned to the

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

mode.

For instructions on how to convert the

retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to

the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child

restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt”

FP96.

& Seatbelt warning light

and chime

S01AE04

Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and chime”

FP182.

& Fastening the seatbelt

S01AE06

! Front seatbelts

S01AE0601

1. Adjust the seat position according to

the following procedure.

Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the

upright position. Move the seat as far from

the steering wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-

back to the upright position. Move the seat

as far back as possible.

2. Sit well back in the seat.

3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it

out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(84,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.

! Adjusting the front seat shoulder

belt anchor height

S01AE060101

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for the

driver/front passenger. Always adjust the

anchor height so that the shoulder belt

passes over the middle of the shoulder

without touching the neck.

To raise:

Pull the release knob and slide the anchor

up.

To lower:

Pull the release knob and slide the anchor

down.

Pull down on the anchor to make sure that

it is locked in place.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoulder portion of the

webbing does not pass over your

neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt

anchor to a lower position. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

S01AE060102

1. Push the button on the buckle.

2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to

avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.

Seatbelts

(85,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Before closing the door, make sure that the

belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear seatbelts (except rear center

seatbelt)

S01AE0602

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it

out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let

the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

S01AE060201

1. Push the button on the buckle.

2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to

avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that the

belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear center seatbelt

S01AE0603

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate

2) Connector (tongue)

3) Connector (buckle)

4) Center seatbelt buckle

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(86,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

WARNING

Fastening the seatbelt with the web-

bing twisted can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

When fastening the belt after it is

pulled out from the retractor, espe-

cially when inserting the connec-

tor’s tongue plate into the mating

buckle (on right-hand side), always

check that the webbing is not

twisted.

WARNING

. Be sure to fasten both tongue

plates to the respective buckles.

If the seatbelt is used only as a

shoulder belt (with the connec-

tor’s tongue plate not fastened to

the connector’s buckle on the

right-hand side), it cannot prop-

erly restrain the wearer in posi-

tion in an accident, possibly

resulting in serious injury or

death.

. The head restraint is not intended

to be used at the lowest position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise

the head restraint to the extended

position. Otherwise, in an acci-

dent, serious injury or death

could result.

1. Raise the head restraint to the ex-

tended position. Do not remove the head

restraint.

Seatbelts

(87,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

2. Remove the plates from the belt holder

on the right side of the cargo area and pull

out the seatbelt slowly.

3. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it

through the belt guide as follows: First

insert one edge of the belt into the open

gap in the belt guide; then slide the rest of

the belt in, so that the whole belt fits inside.

4. After confirming that the webbing is not

twisted, insert the connector (tongue)

attached at the webbing end into the

buckle on the right-hand side until a click

is heard.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it

out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let

the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

into the center seatbelt buckle marked

“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it

clicks.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(88,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

7. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

S01AE060301

1. Push the release button of the center

seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to

unfasten the seatbelt.

NOTE

When the seatback is folded down for

greater cargo area, it is necessary to

disconnect the connector.

2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard

pointed object into the slot in the connector

(buckle) on the right-hand side and push it

in. The connector (tongue) plate will then

disconnect from the buckle.

3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.

You should hold the webbing end and

guide it back into the retractor while it is

rolling up. Neatly store the connector

(tongue) plate in the recess and then insert

the tongue plate into the slot.

Seatbelts

(89,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

CAUTION

. Do not allow the retractor to roll

up the seatbelt too quickly. Other-

wise, the metal tongue plates

may hit against the trim, resulting

in damaged trim.

. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up

so that the tongue plates are

neatly stored. A hanging tongue

plate can swing and hit against

the trim during driving, causing

damage to the trim.

& Seatbelt maintenance

S01AE07

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and

lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the

belts because this could seriously affect

their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments

including the webbing and all hardware

periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears,

damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-

place the seatbelts even if only minor

damage is found.

CAUTION

. Keep the belts free of polishes,

oils, chemicals and particularly

battery acid.

. Never attempt to make modifica-

tions or changes that will prevent

the seatbelt from operating prop-

erly.

1-4. Seatbelt pretensioners

S01AF

The following seatbelts have a seatbelt

pretensioner.

. Driver’s seatbelt

. Front passenger’s seatbelt

The seatbelt pretensioners are designed

to be activated in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe frontal and

side collision and rollover accident.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection,

the occupants should sit in an

upright position with their seat-

belts properly fastened. Refer to

“Seatbelts” FP79.

. Do not modify, remove or strike

the seatbelt retractor assemblies

equipped with seatbelt preten-

sioners or surrounding area. This

could result in accidental activa-

tion of the seatbelt pretensioners

or could make the system inop-

erative, possibly resulting in ser-

ious injury. Seatbelt preten-

sioners have no user-serviceable

parts. For required servicing of

seatbelt retractors equipped with

seatbelt pretensioners, consult

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelt pretensioners

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(90,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

your SUBARU dealer.

. When discarding seatbelt retrac-

tor assemblies equipped with

seatbelt pretensioners or scrap-

ping the entire vehicle due to

collision damage or for other

reasons, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

NOTE

. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-

signed to activate in minor impacts or

in rear impacts.

. Pretensioners are designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis. In the

event that a pretensioner is activated,

both the driver’s and front passenger’s

seatbelt retractor assemblies should

be replaced only by an authorized

SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-

belt retractor assemblies, use only

genuine SUBARU parts.

. If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt

pretensioner does not retract or cannot

be pulled out due to a malfunction or

activation of the pretensioner, contact

your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

. If the seatbelt retractor assembly or

surrounding area has been damaged,

contact your SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible.

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to inform the buyer that the vehicle

is equipped with seatbelt preten-

sioners. Also, notify the buyer of the

contents in this section.

& Seatbelt with shoulder belt

pretensioner

S01AF01

NOTE

This section is applicable to the follow-

ing components.

. Driver’s seatbelt

Front seatbelt pretensioner

The pretensioner sensor also serves as

follows.

. SRS frontal airbag sensor

. Side impact sensor

. Front door impact sensor

. Rollover sensor

If the sensor detects a certain predeter-

mined amount of force during frontal or

side collisions or rollover accidents, any

seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is

quickly drawn back in by the retractor to

take up the slack so that the belt more

effectively restrains the seat occupant.

The driver’s seatbelt pretensioner includes

a tension reducing device which limits the

peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the

occupant in the event of a collision.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt retractor remains

locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not

be pulled out and retracted and therefore

must be replaced.

Seatbelt pretensioners

(91,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! In cases of rollover accident, frontal

collisions or side collisions, the

following components will operate

simultaneously

S01AF0101

For details, refer to “In cases of rollover

accident, frontal collisions or side colli-

sions, the following components will oper-

ate simultaneously” FP90.

& Seatbelt with shoulder belt

and lap belt pretensioners

S01AF02

NOTE

This section is applicable to the front

passenger’s side seatbelt.

1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder

belt pretensioner and adaptive force

limiter)

2) Lap belt pretensioner

On the front passenger’s side, the

shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemen-

ted by a lap belt pretensioner, which is

located at the base of the center pillar. Like

the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap belt

pretensioner instantaneously pulls in the

belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of

frontal collision force is detected. As a

result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat

occupant more effectively.

The front passenger’s seatbelt preten-

sioner includes a tension reducing device

which limits the peak forces exerted by the

seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a

collision.

The adaptive force limiter will select a

reducing load to suit the body size of

occupant as detected by the occupant

detection sensor.

When the seatbelt pretensioners are acti-

vated, an operating noise will be heard and

a small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-

mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt

cannot be pulled out and retracted and

therefore must be replaced.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelt pretensioners

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(92,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! In cases of rollover accident, frontal collisions or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously

S01AF0201

Driver’s side

seatbelt pre-

tensioner

Front passen-

ger’s side

shoulder belt

pretensioner

Front passen-

ger’s side lap

belt preten-

sioner

SRS frontal

airbag for dri-

ver

SRS frontal

airbag for front

passenger

SRS curtain

airbags

SRS side air-

bags

Rollover accidents * * – – –

both sides

–

Frontal collisions

* * * * **

– –

Offset frontal

collisions

* * * * **

both sides

–

Side collisions **

– – –

impacted side

Rear impact – – – – – – –

Minor impact – – – – – –

–

*: Activated

–: Not activated

*1: This does not operate if the occupant detection system deactivates airbag operation.

*2: When both the satellite safing sensor and any of the center pillar impact sensors/front door impact sensors sense an impact force.

*3: When both the satellite safing sensor and the driver’s side front door impact sensor sense an impact force.

However, when a center pillar impact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously,

the seatbelt pretensioner does not activate.

*4: When both the satellite safing sensor and the front passenger’s side front door impact sensor sense an impact force.

However, when a center pillar impact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously,

the seatbelt pretensioner does not activate.

Seatbelt pretensioners

(93,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& System monitors

S01AF03

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner

with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.

The seatbelt pretensioners share the

control module with the SRS airbag

system. Therefore, if any malfunction

occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the

SRS airbag system warning light will

illuminate. For details, refer to “SRS airbag

system monitors” FP135.

& System servicing

S01AF04

WARNING

. When discarding a seatbelt re-

tractor assembly or scrapping

the entire vehicle damaged by a

collision, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

. Tampering with or disconnecting

the system’s wiring could result

in accidental activation of the

seatbelt pretensioner and/or

SRS airbag or could make the

system inoperative, which may

result in serious injury. Do not

use electrical test equipment on

any circuit related to the seatbelt

pretensioner and SRS airbag sys-

tems. For required servicing of

the seatbelt pretensioner, con-

sult your nearest SUBARU deal-

er.

CAUTION

The sensors and SRS airbag control

modules are located in the following

locations.

. Front sub sensors: on both the

right and left side at the front of

the vehicle

. Front door impact sensors: on

both front doors

. Satellite safing sensor: under the

rear center seat

. SRS airbag control module (in-

cluding the impact sensors): un-

der the center of the instrument

panel

If you need service or repair in those

areas or near the front seatbelt

retractors, have the work performed

by your authorized SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

If the front or side part of the vehicle is

damaged in an accident to the extent

that the seatbelt pretensioner does not

operate, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

& Precautions against vehicle

modification

S01AF05

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you

want to install any accessory parts to your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the seatbelt pretensioners.

. Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s

door pillar or specified for indivi-

dual vehicle models in this Own-

er’s Manual.

Seatbelt pretensioners

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(94,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1-5. Child restraint systems

S01AG

Infants and small children should always

be placed in an infant or child restraint

system in the rear seat while riding in the

vehicle.

You should use an infant or child restraint

system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-

cle Safety Standards, is compatible with

your vehicle and is appropriate for the

child’s age and size.

All child restraint systems are designed to

be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or

the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt

(except those described in “Installation of

child restraint systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)” FP101).

Children could be endangered in an

accident if their child restraints are not

properly secured in the vehicle. When

installing the child restraint system, care-

fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint

system at all times while the vehicle is

moving.

Lock release knob

1) Unlocked

2) Locked

A) Unlocking marker in red

WARNING

. Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that

the seatback is securely locked

into place. Otherwise, in an acci-

dent, serious injury or death

could result.

. Do not leave children in the car

unattended. High interior tem-

peratures may cause heat stroke

and dehydration that result in

serious injury or death.

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child on

his or her lap or in his or her arms

Child restraint systems

(95,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

while the vehicle is moving. The

passenger cannot protect the child

from injury in a collision, because

the child will be caught between the

passenger and objects inside the

vehicle.

Additionally, holding a child in your

lap or arms in the front seat exposes

that child to another serious danger.

Since the SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force, the

child could be injured or even killed.

WARNING

Children should be properly re-

strained at all times. Never allow a

child to stand up, or to kneel on any

seat. Unrestrained children will be

thrown forward during sudden stop

or in an accident and can be injured

seriously.

Additionally, children standing up or

kneeling on or in front of the front

seat are exposed another serious

danger. Since the SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed and

force, the child could be injured or

even killed.

& Safety tips for installing child

restraint systems

S01AG16

WARNING

. Do not use a seat belt extender. If

a seat belt extender is used when

installing a child restraint sys-

tem, the seat belt will not se-

curely hold the child restraint

system. Use of a seat belt exten-

der could cause death or serious

injury to children or other pas-

sengers in sudden braking, swer-

ving, or accidents.

. Attach the child restraint system

to the anchors properly. When

using the LATCH anchors, be

sure that there are no foreign

objects around the anchors.

Also, the seat belts should not

be caught behind the child re-

straint system. Make sure the

child restraint system is securely

attached. Otherwise it may cause

death or serious injury to chil-

dren or other passengers in sud-

den braking, swerving, or acci-

dents.

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

– CONTINUED –

Child restraint systems

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(96,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

& Where to place a child re-

straint system

S01AG01

The following are SUBARU’s recommen-

dations on where to place a child restraint

system in your vehicle.

WARNING

. Several types of child restraint

systems may conceal the buckle

of the neighboring seat. If the

occupant of the neighboring seat

cannot correctly fasten the seat-

belt, that person must move to a

different seat. If the seatbelt can-

not be correctly fastened, there is

the risk of serious injury or death

in the event of sudden braking or

a collision.

. If the child restraint system can-

not be correctly installed be-

cause it contacts the driver’s

seat, move the child restraint

system to a different seat. If it

cannot be installed in a different

seat, adjust the front seat so that

contact does not occur.

A: Front passenger’s seat

You should not install a child restraint

system (including a booster seat) due to

the hazard to children posed by the

passenger’s airbag.

B: Rear seat, window-side seating

positions

Recommended positions for all types of

child restraint systems.

In these positions, the following equipment

is provided for installing a child restraint

system.

. Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat-

belts

. Lower anchorages (bars)

. Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)

Some types of child restraints might not be

able to be secured firmly due to projection

of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Rear seat, center seating position

The ALR/ELR seatbelt and an upper

anchorage (tether anchorage) are pro-

vided in this position.

Some types of child restraints might not be

able to be secured firmly due to projection

of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

When you install a child restraint system in

the rear seat’s center seating position,

raise the center head restraint.

Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side

seating positions may be used for a seat in

Child restraint systems

(97,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

the center seating position if a child

restraint system manufacturer’s instruc-

tions permit and specify using anchors as

far apart as those in this vehicle.

If a child restraint system is not correctly

fixed in place (for example, if a child

restraint system can be moved more than

1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you

should install the child restraint system in a

rear seat, window-side seating position.

WARNING

. Even with advanced airbags, chil-

dren can be seriously injured by

the airbag. Place children in the

rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill

children, especially if they are not

restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

For that reason, be sure to secure

ALL types of child restraint de-

vices (including forward facing

child seats) in the REAR seats at

all times. You should choose a

restraint device which is appro-

priate for the child’s age, height

and weight. According to acci-

dent statistics, children are safer

when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the

front seating positions.

. Do not use lower anchorages

(bars) for a seat in the center

seating position unless a child

restraint system manufacturer’s

instructions permit and specify

using anchors spaced as far

apart as those in this vehicle.

. Do not connect two or more lower

hooks onto the same anchorage

(bar).

WARNING

. SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS

EQUIPPED WITH A PASSEN-

GER’S SRS AIRBAG, NEVER IN-

STALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE

FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Do not allow children to lean their

heads or other body parts against

the door of the vehicle, or the

areas around the door. Deploy-

ment of the SRS side and curtain

airbags could impact the child

resulting in death or serious

injury.

. To secure the child restraint sys-

tem, be sure to comply with all

installation instructions provided

by the child restraint manufac-

turer. Not doing so could result in

death or serious injury to chil-

dren in a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

– CONTINUED –

Child restraint systems

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(98,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Choosing a child restraint

system

S01AG02

Choose a child restraint system that is

appropriate for the child’s age and size

(weight and height) in order to provide the

child with proper protection. The child

restraint system should meet all applicable

requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards for the United States or

of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

for Canada. It can be identified by looking

for the label on the child restraint system or

the manufacturer’s statement of compli-

ance in the document attached to the

system.

Also it is important for you to make sure

that the child restraint system is compa-

tible with the vehicle in which it will be

used.

& Installing child restraint sys-

tems with ALR/ELR seatbelt

S01AG04

CAUTION

When installing a child restraint

system in the rear center seating

position, set both seatbacks to the

original position. Otherwise, the

child restraint system cannot be

securely restrained, which may re-

sult in death or serious injuries in

the event of sudden stop, sudden

steering maneuver or an accident.

! Installing a rearward facing child

restraint

S01AG0401

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT

IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that

the seatback is securely locked

into place. Otherwise, in an acci-

dent, serious injury or death

could result.

1. Move the seatback back and forth to

confirm that it is securely locked into place.

– Check that the red colored unlock-

ing marker which is attached to the

bottom of the lock release knob is

invisible. For details, refer to “Folding

down the rear seatback” FP74.

2. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child

restraint system in the rear center

seating position, if the child restraint

system does not fit snugly against

the contours of the rear center seat

cushion, install the child restraint

system in the window-side seating

Child restraint systems

(99,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

position to be safe. For details, refer

to “Where to place a child restraint

system” FP94.

3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system follow-

ing the instructions provided by its manu-

facturer.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

6. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode is

recommended by the manufacturer’s in-

structions supplied with the child restraint

system, perform the following procedure.

(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to

the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode.

(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the

retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks

will be heard which indicate the retractor

functions as ALR.

7. Push and pull the child restraint system

forward and from side to side to check if it

is firmly secured. Sometimes a child

restraint can be more firmly secured by

pushing it down into the seat cushion and

then tightening the seatbelt.

8. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR

mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portion

of the belt to confirm that it cannot be

pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

9. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

– CONTINUED –

Child restraint systems

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(100,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Installing forward facing child re-

straint

S01AG0402

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT

IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that

the seatback is securely locked

into place. Otherwise, in an acci-

dent, serious injury or death

could result.

1. Move the seatback back and forth to

confirm that it is securely locked into place.

– Check that the red colored unlock-

ing marker which is attached to the

bottom of the lock release knob is

invisible. For details, refer to “Folding

down the rear seatback” FP74.

2. Prepare the rear seat head restraint

where a child restraint system is intended

to be installed in the following way.

– When a child restraint system is

installed on the window-side seating

position, remove the rear seat head

restraint. For details, refer to “Rear

seats” FP76.

Store the head restraint in the cargo

area. Avoid placing the head restraint

in the passenger compartment to pre-

vent it from being thrown around in the

passenger compartment in a sudden

stop or a sharp turn.

– When a child restraint system is

installed on the rear center seating

position, raise the rear seat head

restraint to the extended position. Do

not remove the head restraint. For

details, refer to “Rear seats” FP76.

3. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child

restraint system on the rear center

seating position, if the child restraint

system does not fit snugly against

the contours of the rear center seat

cushion, install the child restraint

system on the window-side seating

position to be safe. For details, refer

to “Where to place a child restraint

system” FP94.

4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system follow-

ing the instructions provided by its manu-

facturer.

– When a child restraint system is

installed on the rear center seating

position, pass the rear center seatbelt

through the belt guide properly. For

details, refer to “Rear center seatbelt”

FP83.

5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

Child restraint systems

(101,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to

the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into

the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the

retractor functions as ALR.

8. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, try to move it back and

forth and right and left to check if it is firmly

secured. Sometimes a child restraint

system can be more firmly secured by

pushing it down into the seat cushion and

then tightening the seatbelt.

9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

10. Latch the top tether hook onto the

tether anchorage that is located behind the

rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.

For additional instructions, refer to “Top

tether anchorages” FP104.

11. To remove the child restraint system,

– CONTINUED –

Child restraint systems

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(102,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

If you have installed a child restraint

system for the rear center seating posi-

tion, when you remove the child restraint

system, the seatbelt may not be restored

to the ELR mode even if the seatbelt is

retracted. In this case, lower the head

restraint to the retracted position to allow

the seatbelt to retract moreover. The

seatbelt will return to the ELR mode.

Remember that the head restraint is not

intended to be used at the lowest position

(retracted position). Therefore, when the

rear center seat is occupied (including

when a child restraint system is installed)

next time, be sure to raise the head

restraint to the extended position.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

& Installing a booster seat

S01AG05

1. Place the booster seat in the rear

seating position and sit the child on it.

The child should sit well back on the

booster seat.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the booster seat and the child

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click. Take care not to twist

the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the center of child’s shoulder and

that the lap belt is positioned as low as

possible on the child’s hips.

4. To remove the booster seat, press the

release button on the seatbelt buckle and

allow the belt to retract.

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury to the child.

. Never place the shoulder belt

under the child’s arm or behind

the child’s back. If an accident

occurs, this can increase the risk

or severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly in

order to provide full restraint.

Loose fitting belts are not as

Child restraint systems

100

(103,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

effective in preventing or redu-

cing injury.

. Place the lap belt as low as

possible on the child’s hips. A

high-positioned lap belt will in-

crease the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen, and

both can result in serious internal

injury or death.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. Placing the

shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sud-

den braking or in a collision.

& Installation of child restraint

systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)

S01AG07

! Lower and tether anchorages

S01AG0701

WARNING

Attach the child restraint system to

the anchors properly. When using

the LATCH anchors, be sure that

there are no foreign objects around

the anchors. Also, the seat belts

should not be caught behind the

child restraint system. Make sure

the child restraint system is se-

curely attached. Otherwise it may

cause death or serious injury to

children or other passengers in

sudden braking, swerving, or acci-

dents.

Some types of child restraint systems can

be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle

without use of the seatbelts. Such child

restraint systems are secured to the

designated anchorages provided on the

vehicle body. The lower and tether an-

chorages are sometimes referred to as the

LATCH system (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren).

Your vehicle is equipped with four lower

anchorages (bars) and three upper an-

chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-

modating such child restraint systems.

– CONTINUED –

Child restraint systems

101

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(104,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Lower anchorages

S01AG070101

The lower anchorages (bars) are used for

installing a child restraint system only on

the rear seat window-side seating posi-

tions. For each window-side seating posi-

tion, two lower anchorages are provided.

Each lower anchorage is located where

the seat cushion meets the seatback.

! Tether anchorages

S01AG070102

The tether anchorages (upper an-

chorages) are provided at the locations

shown in the above illustration. For details,

refer to “Top tether anchorages” FP104.

! To install a child restraint system

using lower and tether an-

chorages

S01AG070103

To install a child restraint system using

lower and tether anchorages, perform the

following procedure.

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that the

seatback is securely locked into

place. Otherwise, in an accident,

serious injury or death could result.

1. Move the seatback back and forth to

confirm that it is securely locked into place.

– Check that the red colored unlock-

ing marker which is attached to the

bottom of the lock release knob is

invisible. For details, refer to “Folding

down the rear seatback” FP74.

2. You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of

the rear seat seatbacks. These marks

indicate the positions of the lower an-

chorages (bars).

Child restraint systems

102

(105,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Remove the covers and locate the lower

anchorages (bars).

If it is hard to install the child restraint

system because the anchorage cover

returns to the original position, press the

anchorage cover to the seat cushion until it

is flat.

3. Remove the rear seat head restraint.

For details, refer to “Rear seats” FP76.

CAUTION

Store the head restraint that has

been removed in the cargo area.

Avoid placing the head restraint in

the passenger compartment, as it

could be thrown around in the

passenger compartment in a sud-

den stop or a sharp turn.

4. While following the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint system manu-

facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the

lower anchorages located at “

” marks on

the bottom of the rear seatback. When the

hooks are connected, make sure the

adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

5. [If your child restraint system is of a

flexible attachment type (which uses tether

belts to connect the child restraint system

properly to the lower anchorages)]

While pushing the child restraint into the

seat cushion, pull both left and right lower

tether belts up to secure the child restraint

system firmly by taking up the slack in the

belt.

6. Latch the top tether hook onto the

tether anchorage that is located behind the

rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.

For additional instructions, refer to “Top

tether anchorages” FP104.

– CONTINUED –

Child restraint systems

103

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(106,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

7. Before seating a child in the child

restraint system, try to move it back and

forth and right and left to verify that it is held

securely in position.

8. To remove the child restraint system,

follow the reverse procedures of installa-

tion.

If you have any question concerning this

type of child restraint system, ask your

SUBARU dealer.

& Top tether anchorages

S01AG09

Your vehicle is equipped with three top

tether anchorages so that a child restraint

system having a top tether can be installed

in the rear seat. When installing a child

restraint system using top tether, proceed

as follows, while observing the instructions

by the child restraint system manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional

stability by offering another connection

between a child restraint system and the

vehicle, we recommend that you use a top

tether whenever one is required or avail-

able.

! Anchorage location

S01AG0901

1) For left seat

2) For center seat

3) For right seat

Three upper anchorages are installed on

the back side of the rear seatback.

Child restraint systems

104

(107,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! To hook the top tether

S01AG0902

CAUTION

. Except for the center seating

position, remove the head re-

straint when mounting a child

restraint system. Otherwise, it

might be possible that the top

tether cannot be fastened tightly.

. For the center seating position,

raise the center head restraint to

the extended position when

mounting a child restraint sys-

tem. Otherwise, it will be impos-

sible to use the seatbelt guide

that is attached to the head

restraint correctly.

The seatbelt guide is essential for

routing the belt webbing at the

center seating position. For in-

formation about using the seat-

belt guide, refer to “Rear center

seatbelt” FP83.

1. Attach the top tether hook to the

appropriate upper anchorage.

For the center seating position, route

the top tether under the head restraint as

illustrated below.

1) Seatbelt guide

2) Seatbelt of the center seating position

3) Top tether

2. Tighten the top tether securely.

Please contact your SUBARU dealer if you

have any question regarding the installa-

tion of a child restraint system.

Child restraint systems

105

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(108,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1-6. *SRS airbag (Supple-

mental Restraint System air-

bag)

S01AH

*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-

straint system. This name is used because

the airbag system supplements the vehi-

cle’s seatbelts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-

mental restraint system in addition to a lap/

shoulder belt at each front seating position

and each rear window-side seating posi-

tions. The supplemental restraint system

(SRS) consists of seven airbags.

The configurations are as follows.

. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal

airbags

. Driver’s and front passenger’s side

airbags

. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-

senger, and window-side rear passen-

gers)

. Knee airbag for driver

These SRS airbags are designed only

as a supplement to the primary protec-

tion provided by the seatbelt.

The system also controls front seatbelt

pretensioners. For operation instructions

and precautions concerning the seatbelt

pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt preten-

sioners” FP87.

& General precautions regard-

ing SRS airbag system

S01AH10

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers must

always wear seatbelts when in

the vehicle. The SRS airbag is

designed only to be a supplement

to the primary protection pro-

vided by the seatbelt. It does not

eliminate the need to fasten seat-

belts. In combination with the

seatbelts, it offers the best com-

bined protection in case of a

serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the seatbelt system,

refer to “Seatbelts” FP79.

. The SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are designed only

to be a supplement to the primary

protection provided by the seat-

belt. They do not eliminate the

need to fasten seatbelts. It is also

important to wear your seatbelt to

help avoid injuries that can result

when an occupant is not seated

in a proper upright position.

WARNING

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always sit

upright and well back in the seat

as far from the steering wheel as

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

106

(109,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

practical while still maintaining

full vehicle control and the front

passenger should move the seat

as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

WARNING

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to either front door. The

SRS side airbags are stored in

both front seat seatbacks next to

the door, and they provide pro-

tection by deploying rapidly (fas-

ter than the blink of an eye) in the

event of a side impact. However,

the force of SRS side airbag

deployment may cause injuries

if your head or other parts of the

body are too close to the SRS

side airbag.

. Since your vehicle is equipped

with SRS curtain airbags, do not

sit or lean unnecessarily close to

the front or rear door on either

side. Also, do not put your head,

arms or hands out of the window.

The SRS curtain airbags on both

sides of the cabin are stored in

the roof side (between the front

pillar and a point behind the rear

quarter glass), and they provide

protection by deploying rapidly

(faster than the blink of an eye) in

the event of a side impact, roll-

over or an offset frontal collision.

However, the force of its deploy-

ment may cause injuries if your

head is too close to it.

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the SRS airbag. Because

the SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed – faster than

the blink of an eye – and force to

protect in high speed collisions,

the force of an airbag can injure

an occupant whose body is too

close to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries

that can result when the SRS

airbag contacts an occupant not

in proper position such as one

thrown forward during pre-acci-

dent braking.

Even when properly positioned,

there remains a possibility that

an occupant may suffer minor

injury such as abrasions and

bruises to the face or arms be-

cause of the SRS airbag deploy-

ment force.

WARNING

. Do not rest your arm on either

front door or its internal trim. You

could be injured in the event of

SRS side airbag deployment.

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

107

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(110,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. Do not place any objects over or

near the SRS airbag cover or

between you and the SRS airbag.

If the SRS airbag deploys, these

objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle,

causing injury.

CAUTION

. When the SRS airbag deploys,

some smoke will be released.

This smoke could cause breath-

ing problems for people with a

history of asthma or other breath-

ing trouble. If you or your pas-

sengers have breathing pro-

blems after SRS airbag deploys,

get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releases

hot gas. Occupants could get

burned if they come into direct

contact with the hot gas.

NOTE

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to inform the buyer that the vehicle

is equipped with SRS airbags. Also,

notify the buyer of the applicable sec-

tion in this Owner’s Manual.

. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel

supply will be cut off to reduce the risk

of fire caused by leaking fuel. For

details about restarting of the hybrid

system, refer to “If your vehicle is

involved in an accident” FP389.

& General precautions regard-

ing SRS airbag system for

accessories and any objects

S01AH13

WARNING

. Do not put any objects (including

straps or cords) over the steering

wheel pad, column cover, or

dashboard.

– These objects could be en-

tangled with the steering

wheel, preventing the SRS

frontal airbag, etc. from oper-

ating properly.

– If the SRS frontal airbag de-

ploys, these objects could be

propelled inside the vehicle,

causing injury.

. Do not put any objects under the

driver’s side of the instrument

panel. If the SRS knee airbag

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

108

(111,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

deploys, those objects could in-

terfere with its proper operation

and could be propelled inside the

vehicle, causing injury.

. The key must not be attached to

heavy, sharp or hard acces-

sories, or another key. If the SRS

knee airbag deploys, those ob-

jects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle and

cause injury.

WARNING

Do not attach accessories to the

windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-

ror over the inside rear view mirror. If

the SRS airbag deploys, those ob-

jects could become projectiles that

could seriously injure vehicle occu-

pants.

WARNING

. Do not attach accessories to the

door trim or near either SRS side

airbags and do not place objects

near the SRS side airbags. In the

event of SRS side airbag deploy-

ment, they could be propelled

dangerously toward the vehicle’s

occupants and cause injuries.

. Do not attach a hands-free micro-

phone or any other accessory to

a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear

pillar, the windshield, a side win-

dow, an assist grip, or any other

cabin surface that would be near

a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A

hands-free microphone or other

accessory in such a location

could be propelled through the

cabin with great force by the

curtain airbag, or it could prevent

correct deployment of the curtain

airbag. In either case, the result

could be serious injuries.

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other

hard or pointed objects on the coat

hooks. If such items were hanging

on the coat hooks during deploy-

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

109

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(112,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

ment of the SRS curtain airbags,

they could cause serious injuries by

coming off the coat hooks and being

thrown through the cabin or by

preventing deployment of the cur-

tain airbags.

Before hanging clothing on the coat

hooks, make sure there are no sharp

objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-

ing directly on the coat hooks with-

out using hangers.

WARNING

. Do not put any kind of clothes or

other objects over either front

seatback and do not attach labels

or stickers to the front seat sur-

face on or near the SRS side

airbag. They could prevent prop-

er deployment of the SRS side

airbag, reducing protection avail-

able to the front seat’s occupant.

. Do not install a seat cover unless

it is a genuine SUBARU seat

cover exclusively designed for

use with the SRS airbag. Even

when using a genuine SUBARU

seat cover, the SRS side airbag

system may not function nor-

mally if the seat cover is not

installed correctly.

& General precautions regard-

ing SRS airbag system and

children

S01AH14

WARNING

Seat children in the rear seat prop-

erly restrained at all times. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if they

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults, their

risk of being injured from deploy-

ment is greater.

For that reason, we strongly recom-

mend that ALL children (including

those in child seats and those that

have outgrown child restraint de-

vices) sit in the REAR seat properly

restrained at all times in a child

restraint device or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint

devices (including forward facing

child seats) in the REAR seats at all

times.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions.

For instructions and precautions

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

110

(113,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

concerning the child restraint sys-

tem, refer to “Child restraint sys-

tems” FP92.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN

THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up or

kneel on the front passenger’s seat.

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or in

your arms. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable force and can

injure or even kill the child.

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

111

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(114,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

WARNING

. Never allow a child to do the

following.

– Kneel on any passenger’s seat

facing the side window

– Wrap his/her arms around the

front seat seatback

– Put his/her head, arms or

other parts of the body out of

the window

In the event of an accident, the

force of SRS side airbag and/or

SRS curtain airbag deployment

could injure the child seriously

because his/her head, arms or

other parts of the body are too

close to the SRS side airbag and/

or SRS curtain airbag.

. Since your vehicle is also

equipped with a front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children

should be placed in the rear seat

anyway and should be properly

restrained at all times.

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

112

(115,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Components

S01AH11

1) Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

2) Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

3) SRS side airbag

4) SRS curtain airbag

5) SRS knee airbag

The SRS airbags are stowed in the

following locations.

Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the center

portion of the steering wheel

A “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the

pad of the airbag.

Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:

near the top of the dashboard the “SRS

AIRBAG” mark above the grove box.

SRS side airbag: in the door side of each

front seat seatback which bears an “SRS

AIRBAG” label

SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side

(between the front pillar and a point behind

the rear quarter glass)

“SRS AIRBAG” marks are located at the

top of each center pillar.

SRS knee airbag: under the steering

column

A “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the

door of the airbag.

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

113

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(116,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1) Airbag control module (including impact

sensor and rollover sensor)

2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)

7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand

side)

9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

10) Airbag wiring

11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

12) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force

limiter (front passenger’s side)

13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side)

14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)

15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)

16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)

17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s

side)

18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)

19) Front passenger’s occupant detection

system sensor

20) Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module

21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator

22) SRS airbag system warning light

23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear

center seat)

24) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

114

(117,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

25) Front door impact sensor (right-hand

side)

26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s

side)

& SUBARU advanced frontal

airbag system

S01AH02

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system that com-

plies with the new advanced frontal airbag

requirements in the amended Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)

No. 208.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system automatically determines the de-

ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag at the time of deployment as well as

whether or not to activate the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if

activated, the deployment force of the SRS

frontal airbag at the time of deployment.

Your vehicle has warning labels on the

driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors

beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH

ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at-

tached to the glove box lid beginning with

the phrase “Even with Advanced Air

Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read

the instructions on the warning labels and

tag.

Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system is a

supplemental restraint system and must

be used in combination with a seatbelt. All

occupants should wear a seatbelt or be

seated in an appropriate child restraint

system.

For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer

to “Components” FP113.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,

the following components deploy.

. SRS frontal airbag for driver

. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger

. SRS knee airbag for driver

. SRS curtain airbag*

*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.

These components supplement the seat-

belts by reducing the impact to the

occupant’s head, chest and knees.

! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

S01AH0201

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual

stage inflator. The inflator operates in

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

115

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(118,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

different ways depending on the severity of

impact.

SRS airbag system warning light

Have the system inspected by your

SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS

airbag system warning light illuminates.

NOTE

The driver’s SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are not controlled by the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-

tem.

! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag

S01AH0202

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator

operates in different ways depending on

the severity of impact.

1) Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection system sensors

are installed between the seat and seat

rails, and monitor the physique and pos-

ture of the front passenger. Using this

information, the occupant detection sys-

tem determines whether the front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de-

ployed or not.

The occupant detection system may not

inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys. This is normal. In this

case, although the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag does not operate, the front

passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-

ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-

sioner. For details about the seatbelt

pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt preten-

sioners” FP87.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system from functioning correctly

or cause the system to fail.

. Do not apply any strong impact to

the front passenger’s seat such

as by kicking.

. Do not let rear passengers rest

their feet between the front seat-

back and seat cushion.

. Do not spill liquid on the front

passenger’s seat. If liquid is

spilled, wipe it off immediately.

. Do not remove or disassemble

the front passenger’s seat.

. Do not install any accessory

(such as an audio amplifier) other

than a genuine SUBARU acces-

sory under the front passenger’s

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

116

(119,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

seat.

. Do not place anything (shoes,

umbrella, etc.) under the front

passenger’s seat.

. Do not place any objects (books,

etc.) around the front passen-

ger’s seat.

. Do not use the front passenger’s

seat with the head restraint re-

moved.

. Do not leave any articles on the

front passenger’s seat or the

seatbelt tongue and buckle en-

gaged when you leave your vehi-

cle.

. Do not put sharp object(s) on the

seat or pierce the seat uphols-

tery.

. Do not place a magnet near the

seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt

retractor.

. Do not use front seats with their

forward-backward position and

seatback not being locked into

place securely. If any of them are

not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure,

refer to “Forward and backward

adjustment” FP73 and “Reclin-

ing the seatback” FP73.

SRS airbag system warning light

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front

passenger’s occupant detection system

have failed, the SRS airbag system warn-

ing light will illuminate. Have the system

inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme-

diately if the SRS airbag system warning

light illuminates.

If your vehicle has sustained impact, this

may affect the proper function of the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.

Have your vehicle inspected at your

SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front

passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle

to your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

The front passenger’s SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag are not con-

trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron-

tal airbag system.

! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicators

S01AH0203

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON and OFF indicators” FP183.

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

117

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(120,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Occupant detection system

S01AH0209

1) Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection system sensors

are installed between the seat and seat

rails, and monitor the physique and pos-

ture of the front passenger. Using this

information, the occupant detection sys-

tem determines whether the front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de-

ployed or not.

WARNING

Do not kick the front passenger seat

or subject it to severe impact. Other-

wise, the SRS airbag system warn-

ing light may illuminate to indicate a

malfunction of the front passenger

occupant detection system. In this

case, contact your SUBARU dealer

immediately.

CAUTION

Electrical devices, such as cell

phones, laptops, portable music

players, or electronic games, espe-

cially when connected to the acces-

sory power outlet and placed on the

front passenger’s seat or used by

the person sitting in the front pas-

senger’s seat, may affect the opera-

tion of the occupant detection sys-

tem. If either of the following situa-

tions occurs when using an electro-

nic device in the vehicle, at first try

to relocate that device to avoid it

creating any interference.

. The SRS airbag system warning

light illuminates.

. The front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON and OFF indicators oper-

ate erratically.

If the device continues to cause

interference, the use of that device

in the vehicle should be discontin-

ued.

SRS airbag system warning light

If the front passenger’s seat cushion is

wet, this may adversely affect the ability of

the system to determine deployment.

Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seat

dry naturally and then check the SRS

airbag system warning light.

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

118

(121,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators do not work properly

even when the front passenger’s seat is

dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front

passenger’s seat and have the occupant

detection system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

Also, if luggage or electronic devices are

placed on the front passenger’s seat, this

may adversely affect the ability of the

system to determine deployment. This

may prevent the front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON and OFF indicators from work-

ing properly. Check that the indicators

work properly.

When the OFF indicator turns off and the

ON indicator illuminates, the front passen-

ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a

collision. Remove luggage and electronic

devices from the front passenger’s seat.

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not

activated

S01AH0204

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will not be activated when any of the

following conditions are met regarding

the front passenger’s seat:

. The seat is empty.

. The seat is equipped with an appro-

priate child restraint system and an infant

or a child is restrained in it. (See WARN-

ING that follows.)

. The front passenger’s occupant detec-

tion system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN

THE FRONT SEAT EVEN IF THE

FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-

TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be

sure to install it in the REAR seat in a

correct manner. Also, it is strongly

recommended that any forward fa-

cing child seat or booster seat be

installed in the REAR seat, and that

even children who have outgrown a

child restraint system be also seated

in the REAR seat. This is because

children sitting in the front passen-

ger’s seat may be killed or severely

injured should the front passenger’s

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

119

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(122,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR

seats are the safest place for chil-

dren.

CAUTION

When the front passenger’s seat is

occupied by an infant in an appro-

priate child restraint system, ob-

serve the following precautions.

Failure to do so may interfere with

the proper operation of the occupant

detection system, activating the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

even though that seat is occupied by

the infant in the child restraint

system.

. Do not place any article (includ-

ing electronic devices) on the

seat other than the infant in the

child restraint system.

. Do not place more than one infant

in the child restraint system.

! If the front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator illuminates

and the OFF indicator turns off

even when an infant or a small

child is in a child restraint sys-

tem (including booster seat)

S01AH020401

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position.

2. Remove the child restraint system from

the seat.

3. By referring to the child restraint

manufacturer’s recommendations as well

as the child restraint system installation

procedures in “Child restraint systems”

FP92, correctly install the child restraint

system.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and make sure that the front

passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator

turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.

If still the ON indicator remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off, take the

following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than the child restraint system

and the child occupant.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off after

taking relevant corrective actions de-

scribed above, relocate the child restraint

system to the rear seat and immediately

contact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection.

NOTE

When a child who has outgrown a child

restraint system or a small adult is

seated in the front passenger’s seat,

the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system may or may not activate the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

120

(123,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

depending on the occupant’s seating

posture. Children should always wear a

seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-

spective of whether the airbag is deac-

tivated or activated. If the front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

(the ON indicator remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off), take

the following action.

. Ensure that no article is placed on

the seat other than the occupant.

If the ON indicator still remains illumi-

nated while the OFF indicator turns off

despite the fact that the actions noted

above have been taken, seat the child/

small adult in the rear seat and imme-

diately contact your SUBARU dealer for

an inspection. Even if the system has

passed the dealer inspection, it is

recommended that on subsequent trips

the child/small adult always take the

rear seat.

Children who have outgrown a child

restraint system should always wear the

seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag

is deactivated or activated.

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

S01AH0205

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will be activated for deployment upon

impact when any of the following condi-

tions are met regarding the front passen-

ger’s seat.

. When the seat is occupied by an adult.

. When certain items (e.g. jug of water)

are placed on the seat.

! If the passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator illuminates and the

ON indicator turns off even when

the front passenger’s seat is

occupied by an adult

S01AH020501

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

This can be caused by the adult incorrectly

sitting in the front passenger’s seat.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position.

2. Ask the front passenger to set the

seatback to the upright position, sit up

straight in the center of the seat cushion,

correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/

her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to

the rearmost position.

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

121

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(124,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

If the OFF indicator remains illuminated

while the ON indicator remains off, take the

following actions.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position.

2. Make sure that the front passenger

does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat

cover, seat heater or massager, etc.

3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,

the front passenger should remove any

unnecessary items before sitting in the

front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a

rear seat.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and wait 6 seconds to allow the

system to complete self-checking. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators turn

off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator

should illuminate while the OFF indicator

remains off.

If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-

nated while the ON indicator remains off,

ask the occupant to move to the rear seat

and immediately contact your SUBARU

dealer for an inspection.

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

122

(125,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Operation

S01AH0207

A) Driver’s side

B) Passenger’s side

1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.

2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not

obstructed.

The SRS airbags can function only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system is designed to determine the

activation or deactivation condition of the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-

pending on the characteristic of item(s) or

person on the front passenger’s seat

monitored by the front passenger’s occu-

pant detection system sensor. For this

reason, only the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag may deploy in the event of a

collision, but this does not mean failure of

the system.

If the following sensors detect a predeter-

mined amount of force during a frontal

collision, the control module sends signals

to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s

module or both driver’s and front passen-

ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) to

inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).

. The front sub sensors

. The impact sensors in the airbag

control module

On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbag

also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

123

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(126,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags use dual stage inflators.

The two inflators of each airbag are

triggered either sequentially or simulta-

neously, depending on the severity of

impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS

frontal airbag and depending on the

severity of impact and the characteristic

of item(s) or person on the seat in the case

of the front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag.

! After deployment

S01AH0210

After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-

diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s

vision is not obstructed and the driver’s

ability to maintain control of the vehicle is

not impaired. The time required from

detecting impact to the deflation of the

SRS airbag after deployment is shorter

than the blink of an eye.

Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys and the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,

the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt

pretensioners operate at the same time.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,

fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and

some smoke will be released. These

occurrences are a normal result of the

deployment. This smoke does not indicate

a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag system

components around the steering

wheel and dashboard with bare

hands right after deployment. Doing

so can cause burns because the

components can be very hot as a

result of deployment.

! Example of the type of accident

S01AH0211

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-

signed as follows.

. To deploy in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe frontal

collision

. To function on a one-time-only basis

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not

designed as follows.

. To deploy in most lesser frontal im-

pacts*

. To deploy in most side or rear impacts

or in most rollover accidents*

*1: Because the necessary protection can be

achieved by the seatbelt alone.

*2: Because deployment of only the driver’s

SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags

would not protect the occupant in those

situations.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the

level of force experienced in the passen-

ger compartment during a collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on the

visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

! Example of accident in which the

driver’s/driver’s and front pas-

senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)

will most likely deploy

S01AH021101

A head-on collision against a thick con-

crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19

mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

124

(127,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-

vated when the vehicle is exposed to a

frontal impact similar in fashion and

magnitude to the collision described

above.

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which it is possible that

the driver’s/driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy

S01AH021102

Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags may be activated when the vehicle

sustains a hard impact in the undercar-

riage area from the road surface (such as

when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch,

is severely impacted or knocked hard

against an obstacle on the road such as

a curb).

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

125

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(128,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) is unlikely to occur

S01AH021103

1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a

telephone pole or sign pole.

2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a

truck.

3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset

frontal impact.

4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal

collision.

5) The vehicle strikes an object that can

move or deform, such as a parked

vehicle.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require deployment

of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of

accidents like those illustrated, the dri-

ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-

ing on the level of accident forces involved.

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

126

(129,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which the driver’s/dri-

ver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) are not de-

signed to deploy in most cases

S01AH021104

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags are not designed to deploy

in most of the following cases.

. If the vehicle is struck from the side or

from behind.

. If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.

. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed

frontal collision.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is

impacted more than once, the driver’s

and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first

impact.

Example: In the case of a double collision,

first with another vehicle, then against a

concrete wall in immediate succession,

once either or both of the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are

activated on the first impact, it/they will

not be activated on the second impact.

& SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag

S01AH03

! SRS side airbag

S01AH0302

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door

side of each front seat seatback, which

bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.

In a moderate to severe side impact

collision, the SRS side airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the door panel

and supplements the seatbelt by reducing

the impact on the occupant’s chest and

waist. The SRS side airbag operates only

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

127

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(130,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

for front seat occupants.

! SRS curtain airbag

S01AH0303

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU

SRS curtain airbag system that complies

with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.

The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the

cabin is stored in the roof side (between

the front pillar and a point over the rear

seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located

at the top of each center pillar.

In a moderate to severe side impact

collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the side win-

dow and supplements the seatbelt by

reducing the impact on the occupant’s

head.

In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both

sides of the vehicle deploy between the

occupant and the side window and supple-

ment the seatbelt by reducing the impact to

the occupant’s head.

In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain

airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy

between the occupant and the side win-

dow and supplement the seatbelt by

reducing the impact to the occupant’s

head and chest.

! Operation

S01AH0301

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag can function only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The following airbags deploy indepen-

dently of each other since each has its

own impact sensor.

. Driver’s SRS side airbag

. Front passenger’s SRS side airbag

. SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)

. SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)

Therefore, they may not both deploy in the

same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag deploys indepen-

dently of the driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel

and instrument panel.

An impact sensor, which senses impact

force, is located in each of the following

locations.

. In the left and right front doors

. In the left and right center pillars

. In the left and right rear wheel houses

. Under the rear center seat

A rollover sensor is also located inside the

airbag control module.

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

128

(131,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! In cases of rollover accident or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously

S01AH0306

Impact sensors affected

SRS side airbags SRS curtain airbags

Seatbelt pretensioner

(shoulder belt pretensioner only)

Impacted side

Non-impacted

side

Impacted side

Non-impacted

side

Impacted side

Non-impacted

side

Both of the sen-

sors together

sense an impact

force

Impact sensor in

front doors

* – * – * –

Impact sensor

under rear cen-

ter seat

Both of the sen-

sors together

sense an impact

force

Impact sensor in

center pillars

* – * – – –

Impact sensor

under rear cen-

ter seat

Both of the sen-

sors together

sense an impact

force

Impact sensor in

rear wheel

houses

– – * – – –

Impact sensor

under rear cen-

ter seat

Rollover sensor in airbag control

module

– * * *

*: Activated

–: Not activated

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

129

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(132,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! After deployment

S01AH0304

After the deployment, the SRS side airbag

immediately starts to deflate. The time

required from detection of an impact to

deflation of an SRS side airbag after

deployment is shorter than the blink of an

eye.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated

for a while following deployment then

slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag deploy even when no one occupies

the seat on the side on which an impact is

applied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud

inflation noise will be heard and some

smoke will be released. These occur-

rences are a normal result of the deploy-

ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire

in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbag

system components around the

front seat seatback with bare hands

right after deployment. Doing so can

cause burns because the compo-

nents can be very hot as a result of

deployment.

After deployment, do not touch any

part of the SRS curtain airbag sys-

tem (from the front pillar to the part

of the roof side over the rear seat).

Doing so can cause burns because

the components can be very hot as a

result of deployment.

! Example of the type of accident

S01AH0305

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are designed as follows:

. To deploy in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe side impact

collision

. To function on a one-time-only basis

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are not designed to deploy in the

following cases:

. In most lesser side impact

. In most frontal or most rear impacts

(because the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag deployment would not pro-

tect the occupant in those situations)

The SRS curtain airbags are also de-

signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an

extremely inclined state such as during a

rollover. They are not designed to deploy in

most lesser inclined state.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

deployment depend on the level of force

experienced in the passenger compart-

ment during a side impact collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on the

visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

! Example of the type of accident in

which the SRS side airbag will

most likely deploy.

S01AH030501

1) A severe side impact near the front seat.

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

130

(133,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy.

S01AH030502

1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side

impact near the front seat or the rear seat.

2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or

the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curbstone

laterally.

4) An offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag.

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

131

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(134,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy.

S01AH030503

1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard

surface

2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

3) Landing hard or vehicle falling

It is possible that the SRS side and curtain

airbags will deploy if a serious impact

occurs to the underside of your vehicle.

Some examples are shown in the illustra-

tion.

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

132

(135,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy.

S01AH030504

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-

on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS side

airbag deployment. In the event of acci-

dents like those illustrated, the SRS side

airbag may not deploy depending on the

level of accident forces involved.

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

133

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(136,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely to deploy.

S01AH030505

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-

on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS curtain

airbag deployment. In the event of acci-

dents like those illustrated, the SRS

curtain airbag may not deploy depending

on the level of accident forces involved.

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

134

(137,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which the SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag

are not designed to deploy in

most cases

S01AH030506

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision

with another vehicle (moving or station-

ary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind.

3) The vehicle pitches end over end.

In the event of accidents like those

illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are not designed to deploy

in most cases.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

A) SRS curtain airbag

B) SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struck

from the side more than once, the SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy

only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double side

impact collision, first with one vehicle and

immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag are activated on

the first impact, they will not be activated

on the second.

& SRS airbag system monitors

S01AH04

SRS airbag system warning light

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the SRS airbag system

(including front seatbelt pretensioners)

with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.

The SRS airbag system warning light will

show normal system operation by illumi-

nating for approximately 6 seconds when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

135

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(138,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

The following components are monitored

by the indicator:

. Front sub sensor

. Airbag control module (including im-

pact sensor and rollover sensor)

. Frontal airbag module

– Driver’s side

– Front passenger’s side

. Knee airbag module (driver’s side)

. Side airbag sensor

. Front door impact sensor

. Side airbag module

. Curtain airbag sensor

. Curtain airbag module

. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear

center seat)

. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

. Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive

force limiter (front passenger’s side)

. Lap belt pretensioner (front passen-

ger’s side)

. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-

ger’s side)

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

system sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module

. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator

. All related wiring

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

Immediately take your vehicle to

your nearest SUBARU dealer to

have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbag will not operate properly in

the event of a collision, which may

increase the risk of injury.

& SRS airbag system servicing

S01AH05

WARNING

. When discarding an airbag mod-

ule or scrapping the entire vehi-

cle damaged by a collision, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer.

. The SRS airbag has no user-

serviceable parts. Do not use

electrical test equipment on any

circuit related to the SRS airbag

system. For required servicing of

the SRS airbag, consult your

nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-

ing with or disconnecting the

system’s wiring could result in

accidental inflation of the SRS

airbag or could make the system

inoperative, which may result in

serious injury.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in areas

indicated in the following list, have

the work performed by an author-

ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-

bag control module, impact sensors

and airbag modules are stored in

these areas.

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

136

(139,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. Under the center of the instru-

ment panel

. On both the right and left sides at

the front of the vehicle

. Steering wheel and column and

nearby areas

. Bottom of the steering column

and nearby areas

. Top of the dashboard on front

passenger’s side and nearby

areas

. Each front seat and nearby area

. Inside each center pillar

. Inside each front door

. In each roof side (from the front

pillar to a point over the rear seat)

. Between the rear seat cushion

and rear wheel house on each

side

. Under the rear center seat

In the event that the SRS airbag is

deployed, replacement of the system

should be performed only by an author-

ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-

nents of the SRS airbag system are

replaced, use only genuine SUBARU

parts.

NOTE

In the following cases, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The front part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which only

the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags did not deploy.

. The pad of the steering wheel, the

cover over the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag, or either roof side (from

the front pillar to a point over the rear

seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

. The center pillar, front door, rear

wheel house or rear sub frame, or an

area near these parts, was involved in

an accident in which the SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not

deploy.

. The fabric or leather of either front

seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise

damaged.

. The rear part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which no

SRS airbag was deployed.

& Precautions against vehicle

modification

S01AH06

WARNING

To avoid accidental activation of the

system or rendering the system

inoperative, which may result in

serious injury, no modifications

should be made to any components

or wiring of the SRS airbag system.

This includes following modifica-

tions.

. Installation of custom steering

wheels

. Attachment of additional trim ma-

terials to the dashboard

. Installation of custom seats

. Replacement of seat fabric or

leather

. Installation of additional fabric or

leather on the front seat

. Attachment of a hands-free mi-

crophone or any other accessory

to a front pillar, a center pillar, a

rear pillar, the windshield, a side

window, an assist grip, or any

other cabin surface that would be

near a deploying SRS curtain

airbag.

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

137

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(140,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. Installation of additional electri-

cal/electronic equipment such as

a mobile two-way radio on or near

the SRS airbag system compo-

nents and/or wiring is not advi-

sable. This could interfere with

proper operation of the SRS air-

bag system.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the SRS airbag system.

. Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s

door pillar or specified for indivi-

dual vehicle models in this Own-

er’s Manual.

. Attachment of any equipment

(side steps or side sill protectors,

etc.) other than genuine SUBARU

accessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you

want to install any accessory parts on your

vehicle.

& How to contact the vehicle

manufacturer concerning

modifications for persons

with disabilities that may af-

fect the advanced airbag

system

S01AH15

Changing or moving any parts of the front

seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,

front side frame, radiator panel, instrument

panel, combination meter, steering wheel,

steering column, tire, suspension or floor

panel can affect the operation of the

SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you

have any questions, you may contact the

following SUBARU distributors.

<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District

of Columbia>

Subaru of America, Inc.

Customer Retailer Services Department

One Subaru Drive

Camden, NJ 08103-8500

1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Subaru Hawaii

2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202,

Honolulu, HI 96819-4467

808-839-2273

<Guam>

Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-

bile

491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1

Dededo, Guam 96921-6225

671-633-2698

Trebol Motors

P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico

00910

787-793-2828

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

138

(141,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(142,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(143,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

S02

2-1. Keyless access with push-button start

system ........................................................... 142

Key number plate ............................................... 143

Safety precautions.............................................. 143

Locking and unlocking by holding the access

key fob .............................................................145

Unlock using PIN Code Access...........................149

Power saving function ........................................ 151

Power saving function of access key fob ............ 152

Disabling keyless access function ......................152

Selecting audible signal operation ......................154

Warning chimes and warning indicator ...............154

When access key fob does not operate

properly............................................................154

Replacing battery of access key fob....................154

Replacing access key fob ...................................154

Certification for keyless access with push-

button start system .......................................... 154

2-2. Immobilizer...................................................... 155

Security indicator light........................................155

Key replacement................................................. 155

Certification for immobilizer system .................... 156

2-3. Remote keyless entry system ....................... 156

Locking the doors ..............................................157

Unlocking the doors ........................................... 157

Vehicle finder function ........................................ 157

Sounding a panic alarm ...................................... 157

Remote climate control system .......................... 158

Replacing the battery ......................................... 159

2-4. Door locks........................................................160

Locking and unlocking from the outside............. 160

Locking and unlocking from the inside............... 161

Key lock-in prevention function .......................... 162

12 V battery drainage prevention function .......... 162

2-5. Alarm system...................................................163

Alarm system operation ..................................... 163

Arming the system ............................................. 164

Disarming the system ........................................ 164

Alarm system setting ......................................... 165

If you have accidentally triggered the alarm

system............................................................. 165

Valet mode......................................................... 165

2-6. Child safety locks............................................166

2-7. Windows...........................................................166

Power window operation .................................... 167

Initialization of power window with one-touch

auto up/down function ..................................... 169

2-8. Rear gate..........................................................169

Lock/unlock ....................................................... 169

Open/close......................................................... 169

2-9. Moonroof (if equipped) ...................................170

Moonroof switches............................................. 171

Sunshade........................................................... 172

Keys and doors

(144,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

2-1. Keyless access with

push-button start system

S02AP

The following access key fobs are pro-

vided with the vehicle.

1) Access key fob (main)

2) Access key fob (sub)

3) Key number plate

The keyless access with push-button start

system allows you to perform the following

functions when you are carrying the

access key fob.

. Locking and unlocking of the doors and

rear gate. Refer to “Locking and unlocking

by holding the access key fob” FP145.

. Starting and stopping the hybrid sys-

tem. For details, refer to “Starting and

stopping the hybrid system” FP287.

. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-

tem. For details, refer to “Alarm system”

FP163.

NOTE

. Locking/unlocking using the remote

keyless entry system can also be con-

trolled with the buttons on the access

key fob. For details, refer to “Remote

keyless entry system” FP156.

. Carefully store the key number plate

supplied with the access key fob. It is

necessary for vehicle repair and addi-

tional registration of access key fobs.

For details, refer to “Key replacement”

FP155.

An emergency key is attached to each

access key fob.

1) Release button

2) Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the

access key fob, take out the emergency

key.

The emergency key is used for the follow-

ing operations.

. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door

. Locking and unlocking the glove box

NOTE

The glove box can be kept locked when

you leave your vehicle and the access

key fob (with the emergency key re-

moved) at a parking facility.

Keyless access with push-button start system

142

(145,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Key number plate

S02AA01

The key number is stamped on the key

number plate attached to the key set. Write

down the key number and keep it in

another safe place, not in the vehicle. This

number is needed to make a replacement

key if you lose your key or lock it inside the

vehicle. Refer to “Key replacement”

FP155.

& Safety precautions

S02AP11

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker

or an implanted defibrillator, stay at

least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the

transmitting antennas installed on

the vehicle.

The radio waves from the transmit-

ting antennas on the vehicle could

adversely affect the operation of

implanted pacemakers and im-

planted defibrillators.

If you wear electronic medical equip-

ment other than an implanted pace-

maker or an implanted defibrillator,

before using the keyless access

with push-button start system, refer

to “Radio waves used for the key-

less access with push-button start

system” mentioned later, and con-

tact the electronic medical equip-

ment manufacturer for more infor-

mation. The radio waves from the

transmitting antennas on the vehicle

could adversely affect the operation

of the electronic medical equipment.

“Radio waves used for the keyless

access with push-button start sys-

tem”

. The keyless access with push-

button start system uses radio

waves of the following fre-

quency* in addition to the radio

waves used for the remote key-

less entry system. The radio

waves are periodically output

from the antennas installed on

the vehicle as shown in the

following illustrations.

*: Radio frequency: 134 kHz

1) Antenna

– CONTINUED –

Keyless access with push-button start system

143

Keys and doors

(146,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

CAUTION

. Never leave or store the access

key fob inside the vehicle or

within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the

vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The

access key fob may be locked

inside the vehicle, or the battery

may discharge rapidly. Note that

the push-button ignition switch

may not turn on in some cases

depending on the location of the

access key fob.

. The access key fob contains

electronic components. Observe

the following precautions to pre-

vent malfunctions.

– It is recommended to have the

access key battery replaced at

an authorized SUBARU dealer

to avoid the risk of damage.

– Do not get the access key fob

wet. If the access key fob gets

wet, wipe it off immediately

and let it dry completely.

– Do not apply strong impacts to

the access key fob.

– Never leave the access key

fob in direct sunlight or any-

where that may become hot,

such as on the dashboard. It

may damage the battery or

cause circuit malfunctions.

– Do not wash the access key

fob in an ultrasonic washer.

– Do not leave the access key

fob in humid or dusty loca-

tions. Doing so may cause

malfunctions.

– Keep the access key fob away

from magnetic sources.

– Do not leave the access key

fob near a personal computer

or home electrical appliance.

– Do not leave the access key

fob near a battery charger or

any electrical accessories.

– Do not apply metallic window

tint or attach metallic objects

to the windows.

– Do not fit non genuine acces-

sories or parts.

. If the access key fob is dropped,

the integrated emergency key in-

side may become loose. Be care-

ful not to lose the emergency key.

. When traveling in an airplane, do

not press the button of the ac-

cess key fob. If any button of the

access key fob is pressed, radio

waves are emitted and may affect

the operation of the airplane.

When carrying the access key

fob in a bag, take measures to

prevent the buttons from being

pressed accidentally.

NOTE

. The operational/non-operational

setting for the keyless access function

can be changed. For the setting proce-

dure, refer to “Disabling keyless ac-

cess function” FP152.

. For detailed information about the

operation method for the push-button

ignition switch while the keyless ac-

cess function is switched to the non-

operational mode, refer to “Access key

fob – if access key fob does not operate

properly” FP384.

. The keyless access with push-but-

ton start system uses weak radio

waves. The status of the access key

fob and environmental conditions may

interfere with the communication be-

tween the access key fob and the

vehicle under the following conditions,

and it may not be possible to lock or

unlock the doors or start the hybrid

system.

– When operating near a facility

where strong radio waves are trans-

Keyless access with push-button start system

144

(147,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

mitted, such as a broadcast station

and power transmission lines.

– When products that transmit

radio waves are used, such as an

access key fob or a remote trans-

mitter key of another vehicle.

– When carrying the access key fob

of your vehicle together with the

access key fob or the remote trans-

mitter of another vehicle.

– When the access key fob is

placed near wireless communica-

tion equipment such as a cell

phone.

– When the access key fob is

placed near a metallic object.

– When metallic accessories are

attached to the access key fob.

– When carrying the access key fob

with electronic appliances such as a

laptop computer.

– When the battery of the access

key fob is discharged.

. The access key fob is always com-

municating with the vehicle and is

continuously using the battery.

Although the life of the battery varies

depending on the operating conditions,

it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the

battery becomes fully discharged, re-

place it with a new one.

. If an access key fob is lost, it is

recommended that all of the remaining

access key fobs be reregistered. For

reregistration of an access key fob,

contact a SUBARU dealer.

. For a spare access key fob, contact a

SUBARU dealer.

. Up to 7 access key fobs can be

registered for one vehicle.

. Do not leave the access key fob in

the storage spaces inside the vehicle,

such as the door pocket, dashboard,

inside the corner of the cargo area.

Vibrations may damage the key fob or

turn on the switch, possibly resulting in

a lockout.

. After the 12 V battery is discharged

or replaced, initialization of the steering

lock system may be required to start

the hybrid system. In this case, perform

the following procedure to initialize the

steering lock.

(1) Turn the push-button ignition

switch to the “OFF” position. For

details, refer to “Switching power

status” FP175.

(2) Open and close the driver’s

door.

(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec-

onds.

When the steering is locked, the initi-

alization is completed.

. Do not leave the access key fob in

the following places.

– On the instrument panel

– On the floor

– Inside the glove box

– Inside the door trim pocket

– On the rear seat

– In the cargo area

If you do, the following situations

may occur.

– The access key fob is mistakenly

locked inside the vehicle.

– A false warning issues although

no malfunction actually occurs.

– No warning issues even when

any malfunction occurs.

& Locking and unlocking by

holding the access key fob

S02AP20

When the access key fob is carried within

the operating range, the doors and the rear

gate can be locked/unlocked just by

touching the door handle.

NOTE

The vehicle can also be locked/un-

locked with the remote keyless entry

system. For details, refer to “Remote

keyless entry system” FP156.

– CONTINUED –

Keyless access with push-button start system

145

Keys and doors

(148,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Operating ranges

S02AP2001

1) Antenna

2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32

in (40 to 80 cm))

3) Operating range for charge port door (for

details about charge port door, refer to

“Keyless access function and charge

cable connector locking system” FP43.)

1) LED indicator

When the access key fob is within either of

the operating ranges of the front doors, the

LED indicator on the access key fob

flashes. When the keyless access func-

tions are disabled, the LED indicator does

not flash unless a button on the access key

fob is pressed.

NOTE

. If the access key fob is placed too

close to the vehicle body, the keyless

access functions may not operate

properly. If they do not operate prop-

erly, repeat the operation from farther

away.

. If the access key fob is placed near

the ground or in an elevated location

from the ground, even if it is in the

indicated operating range, the keyless

access function may not operate prop-

erly.

. When the access key fob is within

the operating range, it is possible for

anyone, even someone who is not

carrying the access key fob, to operate

the keyless access function. Note that

the keyless access function can be

operated only by the door handle, door

lock sensor, rear gate opener button or

rear lock button in the operating range

in which the access key fob is detected.

. It is not possible to lock the doors

and rear gate using the keyless access

function when the access key fob is

inside the vehicle. However, depending

on the status of the access key fob and

the environmental conditions, the ac-

cess key fob may be locked inside the

vehicle. Before locking the vehicle,

make sure that you have the access

key fob.

. When the battery of the access key

fob is discharged, or when operating it

in a location with strong radio waves or

noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power

plant, broadcast station or an area

where wireless equipment is used), or

while talking on a cell phone, the

operating ranges may be reduced, or

the keyless access function may not

operate.

Keyless access with push-button start system

146

(149,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

In such a case, perform the procedure

described in “Locking and unlocking”

FP384.

. The doors may lock or unlock when

the car is being washed or exposed to a

significant amount of water that con-

tacts the door handle while the key fob

is still in the operating range.

! How to lock and unlock

S02AP2002

It is possible to perform the following

operations when you are carrying the

access key fob.

. Lock and unlock the doors (including

charge port door)

. Unlock and lock rear gate

NOTE

. It is not possible to lock the doors

and rear gate using the keyless access

function when the push-button ignition

switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Refer to “Switching power status”

FP175.

. If the door handle is gripped with a

gloved hand, the door lock may not be

released.

. If the door lock sensor is touched

three times or more repeatedly, the

system will ignore the sensor opera-

tion.

. When performing the locking proce-

dure too quickly, locking may not have

been completed. After performing the

locking procedure, it is recommended

to pull the REAR door handle to confirm

that the doors have been locked.

. If any of the doors (or the rear gate)

are not fully closed, the following will

occur to alert you that the doors (or the

rear gate) are not properly closed.

– An electronic chirp sounds five

times.

– The hazard warning flashers

flash five times.

. It is possible to lock the doors even

when one of the doors is open. After

performing the locking procedure,

close the opened door or rear gate to

lock it.

. Within 3 seconds after locking the

doors and the rear gate by using the

keyless access function, it is not pos-

sible to unlock doors and/or the rear

gate by using the keyless access func-

tion.

. When locking, be sure to carry the

access key fob to prevent locking the

access key fob in the vehicle.

. The setting of the hazard warning

flasher operation and the volume of the

audible signal can be changed by your

SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU

dealer for details. Also, the setting of

the hazard warning flasher operation

can be changed by operating the com-

bination meter display (color LCD). For

details, refer to “Keyless Entry System”

FP208.

! Locking with the door lock sensor

S02AP200201

1) Door lock sensor

Carry the access key fob, close all doors

including the rear gate, and touch the door

lock sensor on the door handle. All doors

including the rear gate will be locked. Also,

an electronic chirp will sound once and the

hazard warning flashers will flash once.

– CONTINUED –

Keyless access with push-button start system

147

Keys and doors

(150,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Locking with the rear lock button

S02AP200202

1) Rear lock button

Carry the access key fob, close all doors

including the rear gate and press the rear

lock button. The rear gate and all doors will

be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will

sound once and the hazard warning

flashers will flash once.

! Unlocking

S02AP200203

Carry the access key fob, and grip the

following door handle.

. The driver’s door handle:

Either only the driver’s door will unlock, or

all doors will unlock.

. The front passenger’s door handle:

All doors and rear gate will be unlocked.

Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice

and the hazard warning flashers will flash

twice.

! Unlocking rear gate

S02AP200204

1) Rear gate opener button

Carry the access key fob, and press the

rear gate opener button. Either only the

rear gate will unlock, or all doors will

unlock. Also, an electronic chirp will sound

twice and the hazard warning flashers will

flash twice.

Keyless access with push-button start system

148

(151,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Door unlock selection function

S02AP2003

When the door is unlocked using the

keyless access function, only the doors

that were set can be unlocked.

The settings can be changed with the

following methods.

. The setting can be changed by operat-

ing the combination meter display (color

LCD). Refer to “Keyless Entry System”

FP208.

. The setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer.

& Unlock using PIN Code Ac-

cess

S02AP21

When all doors including the rear gate are

locked, you can unlock the doors (includ-

ing rear gate) without a key by pressing the

rear lock button.

1) Rear lock button

NOTE

PIN Code Access will be helpful if the

key fob is accidentally left in the

vehicle. It is recommended that a 5-

digit security code (PIN code) be regis-

tered.

– CONTINUED –

Keyless access with push-button start system

149

Keys and doors

(152,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Registration for a PIN code

S02AP2102

Steps Operation Time from the previous step

1 Turn off the ignition switch. -

2 Close all doors (including rear gate). -

Press and hold the “

” button on the access key fob, and press and hold the

rear lock button until a chirp sounds intermittently.

4 Press the “

” button on the access key fob. Within 30 seconds

The PIN code is inputted by using the rear lock button within 30 seconds after

the chirp sound of step 4.

For example, to register “32468” as the PIN code, perform the following

procedure.

Within 30 seconds

(1) Press the button three times.

(2) After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.

(3) After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.

(4) After a chirp sounds once, press the button six times.

(5) After a chirp sounds once, press the button eight times.

6 Perform step 5 again after the chirp starts sounding intermittently. Within 30 seconds

7 All doors will be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code will be registered.

NOTE

Press the “ ” button within 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparation mode and move on to the registration stage. Unless the

“

” button is pressed within 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.

Keyless access with push-button start system

150

(153,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

NOTE

. Press the rear lock button ten times

to enter “0”.

. Change the PIN code frequently to

protect your vehicle from theft.

. If you have lent your vehicle to

another person, confirm that the PIN

code has not been changed or deleted.

If the PIN code has been changed or

deleted, reregister a new PIN code.

. If you make an error during the

registration procedure, press the “

”

or “

” button on the access key fob.

Then, start over from the procedure

described in “Preparation for register-

ing a PIN code”.

. To protect your vehicle from theft,

you cannot register a string of the same

five numbers together, such as

“00000”, nor “12345” as a PIN code.

. Do not register your vehicle license

plate number or simple numbers such

as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code.

Doing so will increase the risk of

vehicle theft.

. When you try to register “22222”, the

registered PIN code will be deleted. You

cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code

Access until a new code is registered.

. After registering a new PIN code,

make sure that you can unlock the

doors using the PIN code.

. The PIN code cannot be deleted

while the keyless access function is

disabled by operating the access key

fob.

. Reregister the PIN code in the fol-

lowing cases.

– When you forget the PIN code.

– When you want to change the PIN

code.

! Unlocking

S02AP2103

Input the registered PIN code by using the

rear lock button.

NOTE

. You cannot unlock by PIN Code

Access in the following cases.

– When the access key fob is within

the operating ranges.

– When the ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position.

. If you make an operation error dur-

ing the unlocking procedure, start over

with the unlocking procedure after

waiting for 5 seconds or longer.

. To protect your vehicle from theft, a

buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes

are entered five times continuously. If

this occurs, you cannot unlock the

doors by PIN Code Access for 5

minutes.

& Power saving function

S02AP23

The keyless access function will be dis-

abled in the following cases to protect the

access key fob battery and the vehicle

battery.

. Case 1: When the keyless access

function and the remote keyless entry

system have not been used for 2 weeks

or longer while all doors are locked.

Operate one of the following items to

recover the keyless access function:

– Unlock the doors by operating any

procedure other than gripping the front

passenger’s door handle.

– Lock the doors.

– Open a door and then close it.

. Case 2: When the access key fob has

been left in the operating range for 10

minutes or longer while all doors are

locked

Operate one of the following items to

recover the keyless access function:

– Unlock the doors by gripping the

door handle.

– Unlock the doors by pressing the

rear gate opener button.

– Lock the doors by touching the door

lock sensor.

– Lock or unlock the doors by using

– CONTINUED –

Keyless access with push-button start system

151

Keys and doors

(154,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

the remote keyless entry system.

– Lock or unlock the doors by using

the power door locking switch.

– Open either of the front doors.

& Power saving function of ac-

cess key fob

S02AP22

This function stops the access key fob

from receiving signals and helps minimize

the battery consumption of the access key

fob.

1. Press the “

” button twice while hold-

ing the “

” button.

1) LED indicator

2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4

times to notify that the setting is complete.

When the access key fob is in the power

save mode, the keyless access function

and push-button start system will not be

available.

To cancel the power save mode, press one

of the buttons on the access key fob.

& Disabling keyless access

function

S02AP07

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker

or an implanted defibrillator, per-

form the procedure described in

“By operating the driver’s door”

FP153 to disable the keyless access

function. If you perform the proce-

dure described in “By operating the

access key fob” FP152, the opera-

tion of an implanted pacemaker or

implanted defibrillator may be af-

fected by the radio waves from the

transmitter antenna.

When the vehicle is not going to be used

for a long time, or when you choose not to

use the keyless access function, the key-

less access function can be disabled.

NOTE

. The locking and unlocking function

by the remote keyless entry system is

not disabled.

. To start the hybrid system while the

functions are disabled, perform the

procedure described in “Starting the

hybrid system” FP385.

! Disabling functions

S02AP0701

! By operating the access key fob

S02AP070102

If you have registered a PIN code for PIN

Code Access, you can disable the keyless

access function by operating the access

key fob. For details about registering a PIN

code, refer to “Unlock using PIN Code

Access” FP149.

1. Open the driver’s door.

2. Rotate the lock lever toward the lock

position.

3. Press and hold the “ ” button and A/C

button on the access key fob simulta-

Keyless access with push-button start system

152

(155,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

neously for more than 5 seconds.

A chirp sound will be heard, and the

function will be disabled.

! By operating the driver’s door

S02AP070101

Steps Operation Time Status

1 Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the door. - Close

2 Push “

” on the power door locking switch. - Close

3 Open the driver’s door. Within 5 sec. Close?Open

Push “

” on the power door locking switch

twice.

Within 5 sec. Open

5 Close and open the driver’s door. Within 10 sec.

Open?Close?

Open?Close?Open

Push “

” on the power door locking switch

twice while the door is open.

Within 10 sec. Open

7 Close and open the driver’s door once. Within 10 sec. Open?Close?Open

8 Close the door. Within 5 sec.

Open?Close

A chirp will sound and the functions will be disabled.

– CONTINUED –

Keyless access with push-button start system

153

Keys and doors

(156,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

NOTE

In steps 4 and 6, press the power door

locking switch slowly. If the switch is

pressed quickly, the functions may not

be disabled.

! Enabling functions

S02AP0702

When the procedure to disable the func-

tions is performed again, a chirp sound will

be heard, and the functions are enabled.

NOTE

. The keyless access function will be

enabled only if you perform the proce-

dure in the same manner you disabled

the function (for example, when dis-

abling by operating the driver’s door,

the function will not be enabled even if

you operate the access key fob).

. Press the push-button ignition

switch if you do not know the proce-

dure in which the keyless access func-

tion was disabled.

– When disabling by operating the

driver’s door: a chirp will not be

heard.

– When disabling by operating the

access key fob: a chirp will be

heard.

& Selecting audible signal op-

eration

S02AP12

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn

the audible signal off. For more details,

contact a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

The setting can be changed by operat-

ing the combination meter display

(color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi-

cle Setting” FP208.

& Warning chimes and warning

indicator

S02AP06

The keyless access with push-button start

system sounds a warning chime and

flashes the access key warning indicator

on the combination meter in order to

minimize improper operations and help

protect your vehicle from theft.

For details, refer to “Warning chimes and

warning indicator of the keyless access

with push-button start system” FP194.

& When access key fob does

not operate properly

S02AP08

Refer to “Access key fob – if access key

fob does not operate properly” FP384.

& Replacing battery of access

key fob

S02AP09

Refer to “Replacing battery of access key

fob” FP437.

& Replacing access key fob

S02AP13

Access key fobs can be replaced at

SUBARU dealers. For more details, con-

tact a SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for keyless ac-

cess with push-button start

system

S02AP14

FCC ID: HYQ14AHK

FCC ID: Y8PFJ18-1

FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

Keyless access with push-button start system

154

(157,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

2-2. Immobilizer

S02AB

The immobilizer system is designed to

prevent an unauthorized person from

starting the hybrid system. Only keys

registered with your vehicle’s immobilizer

system can be used to operate your

vehicle. If the hybrid system start is

attempted with an unregistered access

key fob, the hybrid system will not start.

Even if the hybrid system does start, it will

stop after a few seconds. This system,

however, is not a 100% anti-theft guaran-

tee.

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under direct

sunlight or anywhere it may be-

come hot.

. Do not get the key wet. If the key

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

. Do not modify or remove the

system. If modified or removed,

the proper operation of the sys-

tem cannot be guaranteed.

NOTE

. To protect your vehicle from theft,

please pay close attention to the follow-

ing security precautions:

– Never leave your vehicle unat-

tended with its keys inside.

– Before leaving your vehicle,

close all windows and the moon-

roof, and lock the doors and rear

gate.

– Do not leave spare keys or any

record of your key number in the

vehicle.

. The vehicle has a maintenance-free

type immobilizer system.

& Security indicator light

S02AB02

Refer to “Security indicator light” FP199.

& Key replacement

S02AB03

Your key number plate will be required if

you ever need a replacement key made.

Any new key must be registered for use

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system

before it can be used. You can register a

maximum of seven access key fobs.

One key that has already been registered

is required in order to register a new key.

NOTE

If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code

still remains in the memory of the

vehicle’s immobilizer system. For se-

curity reasons, the lost key’s ID code

– CONTINUED –

Immobilizer

155

Keys and doors

(158,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

should be erased from the memory. To

erase the lost key’s ID code, all keys

that will be used are required.

For details about new key registration

and erasing the lost key’s ID code,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for immobilizer

system

S02AB05

Refer to “Certification for keyless access

with push-button start system” FP154.

2-3. Remote keyless entry

system

S02AQ

CAUTION

. Do not expose the remote trans-

mitter to severe shocks, such as

those experienced as a result of

dropping or throwing.

. Do not take the remote transmit-

ter apart except when replacing

the battery.

. Do not get the remote transmitter

wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with

a cloth immediately.

. When you carry the remote trans-

mitter on an airplane, do not

press the button of the remote

transmitter while in the airplane.

When any button of the remote

transmitter is pressed, radio

waves are sent and may affect

the operation of the airplane.

When you carry the remote trans-

mitter in a bag on an airplane,

take measures to prevent the

buttons of the remote transmitter

from being pressed.

Access key fob

1) Lock/arm button

2) Unlock/disarm button

3) A/C button

4) PANIC button

The remote keyless entry system has the

following functions.

. Locking and unlocking the doors (and

rear gate)

. Sounding a panic alarm

. Operating the remote climate control

system. For details, refer to “Remote

climate control system” FP158.

. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-

tem. For details, refer to “Alarm system”

FP163.

Remote keyless entry system

156

(159,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

The operable distance of the remote key-

less entry system is approximately 30 feet

(10 meters). However, this distance will

vary depending on environmental condi-

tions. The system’s operable distance will

be shorter in areas near a facility or

electronic equipment emitting strong radio

waves such as a power plant, broadcast

station, TV tower, or remote controller of

home electronic appliances.

NOTE

. The remote keyless entry system

will not be activated when the push-

button ignition switch is in any position

other than the “OFF” position.

. The hazard warning flashers will

flash once or twice when the access

key fob button is pressed in the follow-

ing cases.

– When locking the doors

– When unlocking the doors

Operation of the hazard warning

flashers in the above cases can be set

to “On” or “Off” by a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-

tails.

& Locking the doors

S02AQ01

Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors

and rear gate. An electronic chirp will

sound once and the hazard warning

flashers will flash once.

If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are not

fully closed, the following will occur to alert

you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not

properly closed.

. An electronic chirp sounds five times.

. The hazard warning flashers flash five

times.

When you close the door, it will automati-

cally lock and then the following will occur.

. An electronic chirp sounds once.

. The hazard warning flashers flash

once.

& Unlocking the doors

S02AQ02

Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock

the driver’s door. An electronic chirp will

sound twice and the hazard warning

flashers will flash twice. To unlock all doors

and the rear gate, briefly press the unlock/

disarm button a second time within 5

seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and

second presses of the unlock/disarm

button (for unlocking of all of the doors

and the rear gate) is extremely short,

the system may not respond.

& Vehicle finder function

S02AQ07

Use this function to find your vehicle

parked among many vehicles in a large

parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet

(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the

lock/arm button three times in a 5-second

period will cause your vehicle’s horn to

sound once and its hazard warning

flashers to flash three times.

NOTE

If the interval between presses is too

short when you press the lock/arm

button three times, the system may

not respond to the signals from the

remote transmitter.

& Sounding a panic alarm

S02AQ08

To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”

button once.

The horn will sound and the hazard

warning flashers will flash.

To deactivate the panic alarm, press any

button on the remote transmitter. Unless a

button on the remote transmitter is

pressed, the alarm will be deactivated

after approximately 30 seconds.

– CONTINUED –

Remote keyless entry system

157

Keys and doors

(160,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Remote climate control sys-

tem

S02AQ21

WARNING

. Precautions for the remote cli-

mate control system;

– Do not use the system if

people are in the vehicle. Even

when the system is in use, the

internal temperature may still

reach a high or low level due

to features such as the auto-

matic shut-off. Children and

pets left inside the vehicle

may suffer heatstroke dehy-

dration or hypothermia, which

could result in death or ser-

ious injury.

– Depending on the surround-

ing environment, signals from

the A/C button on the access

key fob may transmit further

than expected. Pay appropri-

ate attention to the vehicle’s

surroundings and use the but-

ton only when necessary.

– Do not operate the A/C button

on the access key fob if the

engine hood is open. The

remote climate control system

may operate unintentionally

and objects may be drawn into

the electrical cooling fan.

CAUTION

To prevent the high voltage battery

from being discharged through in-

correct operation. Use the A/C but-

ton on the access key fob only when

necessary.

The remote climate control system uses

electrical energy stored in the high voltage

battery and allows the climate control

system to be operated by remote control.

If the remote climate control system is

used while the charge cable is connected

to the vehicle, the reduction of charge in

the high voltage battery will be suppressed

to allow you to use electricity from an

external power source.

Charging will be conducted automatically

after the remote climate control system is

stopped.

! Before leaving the vehicle

S02AQ2101

The remote climate control system is set to

a predetermined temperature. The remote

climate control system operates at that set

temperature.

SUBARU STARLINK subscribers can

check the temperature setting from a

smartphone. For details, refer to Owner’s

manual supplement for SUBARU

STARLINK Safety and Security.

! How to use the remote climate

control system

S02AQ2102

1) A/C button

To operate the remote climate control

system, press and hold the A/C button on

the access key fob.

To cancel the system, press the A/C button

twice.

NOTE

When the remote climate control sys-

tem operates, all doors will be locked.

Remote keyless entry system

158

(161,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Operating conditions

S02AQ210201

The system will only operate if all of the

following conditions are met.

. The shift position is in the “P” position.

. The ignition switch is off.

. All doors are closed.

. The engine hood is closed.

NOTE

. The system may not start in the

following situations.

– The charge level of the high

voltage battery is low.

– The outside temperature is extre-

mely low.

– When the hybrid system is cool

(for example, after being left for a

long time in low temperatures).

! Remote climate control system

automatic shut-off

S02AQ210202

The system will automatically shut off

under the following conditions.

. About 10 minutes have passed since

operation began.

. Any one of the operating conditions is

not met.

The system may also shut off if the charge

level of the high voltage battery drops to

low.

NOTE

. When defogging the windshield

using the remote climate control sys-

tem, defogging may be insufficient due

to the power being restricted more than

during normal climate control opera-

tion. Also, the outside of the windshield

may fog up due to the outside tempera-

ture, humidity or climate control set

temperature.

. When the outside heat exchanger

becomes frosted over, heating perfor-

mance may decline due to automati-

cally switching to the frost removal

operation.

. Any unlocked doors will be automa-

tically locked when the system is

operating. The buzzer sounds and the

hazard warning flashers flash to indi-

cate that the doors have been locked or

the system has been turned off.

(The doors locked: Once; The system

turned off: Three times)

. While the remote climate control

system is operating

– Depending on the operating con-

dition of the remote climate control

system, the electric fan and electric

compressor may spin and an oper-

ating noise may be heard. However,

this does not indicate a malfunction.

– Depending on the operating con-

ditions, the electric fan and electric

compressor may operate intermit-

tently. However, this does not in-

dicate a malfunction.

– The remote climate control sys-

tem may stop operating temporarily

if other features that use electronic

equipments are in operation or if the

charge level of the 12 V battery

becomes low.

– The headlights, windshield wiper,

combination meter, etc. will not

operate while the remote climate

control system is operating.

. It is possible to use the smartphone

application to operate the remote cli-

mate control system. For details, refer

to Owner’s Manual supplement for

SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Secur-

ity.

& Replacing the battery

S02AQ12

Refer to “Replacing key battery” FP436.

Remote keyless entry system

159

Keys and doors

(162,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

2-4. Door locks

S02AC

& Locking and unlocking from

the outside

S02AC01

NOTE

If you unlock the driver’s door with a

key (including an emergency key) and

open the door while the alarm system is

armed, the alarm system is triggered

and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this

case, perform any of the following

operations:

. Press any button on the access key

fob (except when the access key fob

battery is discharged).

. Press the push-button ignition

switch to “ACC”.

. Carry the access key fob and per-

form either of the following procedures.

– Grip the front door handle

– Press the rear gate opener button

For details about the alarm system,

refer to “Alarm system” FP163.

! How to lock and unlock the vehicle

by using the key

S02AC0101

1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock.

2) Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.

In this case, only the driver’s side door is

locked.

NOTE

. The emergency key is directional. If

the key cannot be inserted, change the

direction in which the key is inserted.

. When the driver’s door is locked/

unlocked using the emergency key, the

charge port door is also locked/un-

locked.

! How to lock the vehicle without

using the key

S02AC0102

To lock the door from outside without the

key, the following methods are available.

! Locking using lock lever

S02AC010201

1) Rotate the lock lever forward.

2) Close the door.

In this way, only the door that was operated

will be locked.

Door locks

160

(163,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Locking using power door lock-

ing switch

S02AC010202

1) Press the lock side of the power door

locking switch.*

2) Close the door.

*: For details about the power door locking

switch, refer to “How to operate the power

door locking switches” FP161.

In this case, all closed doors and the rear

gate are locked at the same time.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle when locking the

doors from the outside without the key.

& Locking and unlocking from

the inside

S02AC02

! How to use the lock lever

S02AC0202

1) Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock.

2) Rotate the lock lever forward to lock.

Always make sure that all doors and the

rear gate are closed before starting to

drive.

The red mark on the lock lever appears

when the door is unlocked.

WARNING

Keep all doors locked when you

drive, especially when small chil-

dren are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of seat-

belts and child restraints, locking

the doors reduces the chance of

being thrown out of the vehicle in an

accident.

It also helps prevent passengers

from falling out if a door is acciden-

tally opened, and intruders from

unexpectedly opening doors and

entering your vehicle.

! How to operate the power door

locking switches

S02AC0203

All doors and the rear gate can be locked

and unlocked using the power door locking

switches located at the driver’s side and

the front passenger’s side doors.

– CONTINUED –

Door locks

161

Keys and doors

(164,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Example

1) Press to lock

2) Press to unlock

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside using the power

door locking switches.

& Key lock-in prevention func-

tion

S02AC06

Under the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, all the doors will not lock

when the door lock switch is pushed with

the driver door open.

NOTE

. When leaving the vehicle, make sure

you are holding the key before locking

the doors.

. The factory setting (default setting)

for this function is set as “operational”.

This function’s operational/non-opera-

tional setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU

dealer for details.

. When getting out of the vehicle from

a rear door, make sure to unlock all the

doors by pushing the unlock side of the

power door locking switch.

If a rear door is unlocked from the

inside door lever then the door is

opened and closed, the Key lock-in

prevention function will be triggered.

All doors will be unlocked, the Key lock-

in prevention warning indicator “

”

will appear and the warning chime will

also sound.

! Non-operation of key lock-in pre-

vention function

S02AC0602

When the system is set so that it does not

operate, the doors are locked by the

following operation.

. If the lock lever is turned to the front

(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door

open and the driver’s door is then closed

with the lock lever in that position, the

driver’s door is locked.

. If the spare key is used to lock the

driver’s door from the outside of the

vehicle, the door is locked.

& 12 V battery drainage pre-

vention function

S02AC03

If a door or the rear gate is not completely

closed, the interior lights will remain

illuminated as a result. However, several

lights are automatically turned off by the

battery drainage prevention function to

prevent the battery from discharging. The

following interior lights are affected by this

function.

Item

Switch

position

Automatically turning

off

Map lights DOOR

Approximately 20

minutes later

Dome light DOOR

Approximately 20

minutes later

Door locks

162

(165,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Item

Switch

position

Automatically turning

off

Ignition

switch light

—

Approximately 20

minutes later

Cargo area

light

DOOR

Approximately 20

minutes later

NOTE

. The default setting for this function

is set as “operational”. The operational/

non-operational setting of this function

can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Contact your SUBARU dealer to

change the setting.

. When leaving the vehicle, please

make sure that all doors and the rear

gate are completely closed.

2-5. Alarm system

S02AF

The alarm system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn

sounds and the hazard warning flashers

flash if someone attempts to break into

your vehicle.

The system can be armed or disarmed

with the keyless access function or access

key fob.

The system will not be activated when the

push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set

for activation at the time of shipment from

the factory. You can set the system for

deactivation yourself or have it done by

your SUBARU dealer.

& Alarm system operation

S02AF01

When the alarm system is armed, it is

triggered by opening any of the doors, the

rear gate or engine hood.

The alarm system will activate the follow-

ing alarms when triggered.

. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30

seconds.

. The hazard warning flashers will flash

for 30 seconds.

If any of the doors, the rear gate or engine

hood remains open after the 30-second

period, the horn will continue to sound for a

maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, the rear

gate or engine hood is closed while the

horn is sounding, the horn will stop

sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.

NOTE

The alarm system can be set to illumi-

nate the following interior lights.

. Map lights (illuminates only when

the door interlock switch is in the

“DOOR” position)

. Dome light (illuminates only when

the dome light switch is in the “DOOR”

position)

. Cargo area light (illuminates only

when the cargo area light switch is in

the “DOOR” position)

The notifications regarding the map

lights, dome light and cargo area light

are deactivated as the factory setting. A

SUBARU dealer can activate the sys-

tem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

– CONTINUED –

Alarm system

163

Keys and doors

(166,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Arming the system

S02AF04

The alarm system becomes armed when

the following operation is performed.

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if

equipped) and turn the ignition switch to

the “OFF” position.

2. Carry the access key fob and get out of

the vehicle.

3. Make sure that the engine hood is

closed.

4. Lock the doors using any of the

following methods.

. Locking using the remote keyless

entry system. For details, refer to

“Remote keyless entry system”

FP156.

. Locking using the keyless access

function. For details, refer to “Locking

with the door lock sensor” FP147.

. Locking using the power door lock-

ing switch. For details, refer to “Locking

using power door locking switch”

FP161.

Security indicator light

NOTE

. All doors and the rear gate will lock,

an electronic chirp will sound once, the

hazard warning flashers will flash once,

and the security indicator light will start

flashing rapidly.

. If any of the doors or the rear gate is

not fully closed, an electronic chirp

sounds five times and the hazard

warning flashers flash five times to

indicate that the doors (or the rear gate)

are not properly closed. When the

doors are closed, doors will automati-

cally lock.

5. Approximately 30 seconds later, the

system will enter surveillance state.

When the system is in surveillance state,

the security indicator light will then flash

slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-

onds), indicating that the system has been

armed for surveillance.

NOTE

. The system can be armed even if the

windows and/or moonroof are open.

Always make sure that they are fully

closed before arming the system.

. The 30-second standby time can be

eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-

formed by your SUBARU dealer.

. If any of the following actions is

done during the standby period, the

system will not switch to the surveil-

lance state.

– Doors (including the rear gate)

are unlocked using the access key

fob.

– Doors (including the rear gate)

are unlocked using the keyless

access function.

– Any door (including the rear gate)

is opened.

– Push-button ignition switch is

turned to the “ACC” position.

& Disarming the system

S02AF05

Perform either of the following procedures.

. Briefly press a button (for less than 2

seconds) on the access key fob.

Alarm system

164

(167,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. Carry the access key fob and perform

either of the following procedures.

– Grip the front door handle.

– Press the rear gate opener button.

– Unlock using the PIN code access.

The flashing of the security indicator light

will then change slowly (once approxi-

mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-

proximately every 2 seconds), indicating

that the alarm system has been disarmed.

! Emergency disarming

S02AF0501

If you cannot disarm the system using the

access key fob (i.e. the transmitter battery

is too weak), you can disarm the system.

The system can be disarmed if you turn the

ignition switch from the “OFF” to the “ACC”

or “ON” position with an access key fob.

NOTE

If the access key fob battery is dis-

charged, perform the procedure de-

scribed in “Switching power status”

FP385. In such a case, replace the

battery immediately. Refer to “Repla-

cing battery of access key fob” FP437.

& Alarm system setting

S02AF11

To change the setting of your vehicle’s

alarm system for activation or deactiva-

tion, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to

“Disarming the system” FP164.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors, rear gate and engine hood.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

4. Hold down “

” of the driver’s power

door locking switch, open the driver’s door

within the following 1 second, and wait 10

seconds without releasing the switch. The

setting will then be changed as follows.

Setting

status

Combination

meter display

Horn

Activate AL ON Once

Deactivate AL OFF

Twice

NOTE

You may have the above setting change

done by your SUBARU dealer.

& If you have accidentally trig-

gered the alarm system

S02AF03

! To stop the alarm

S02AF0301

Do any of the following operations:

. Press any button on the access key fob.

. Turn the push-button ignition to the

“ACC” position.

NOTE

Only registered access key fobs will

stop the alarm. If the access key fob is

not registered, the alarm will not stop.

& Valet mode

S02AF06

When you choose the valet mode, the

alarm system does not operate. In valet

mode, the remote transmitter is used only

for locking and unlocking the doors and

rear gate and panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change the

setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for

deactivation mode. Refer to “Alarm system

setting” FP165. The security indicator

light will continue to flash once every 3

seconds indicating that the system is in the

valet mode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting of

your vehicle’s alarm system for activation

mode. Refer to “Alarm system setting”

FP165.

Alarm system

165

Keys and doors

(168,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

2-6. Child safety locks

S02AG

Each rear door has a child safety lock.

When the child safety lock lever is in the

lock position, the door cannot be opened

from inside. The door can only be opened

from the outside.

WARNING

Always turn the child safety locks to

the “LOCK” position when children

sit in the rear seat. Serious injury

could result if a child accidentally

opens the door and falls out.

2-7. Windows

S02AH

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, always con-

form to the following instructions

without exception.

. When operating the power win-

dows, be extremely careful to

prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,

neck, head or other objects from

being caught in the window.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

. Always carry the key when you

leave the vehicle for safety rea-

sons and never allow an unat-

tended child to remain in the

vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury

to a child operating the power

window.

The power windows operate when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

NOTE

. If the power window system detects

resistance, an impact or an abnormal-

ity, the window operation may be auto-

matically stopped to prevent further

jamming, entrapment or malfunction.

– The closing window slides down

slightly and stops.

– The opening window stops slid-

ing down.

. The power window system may

detect resistance, an impact or an

abnormality in the following cases.

– A substantial sized object is

caught between the window and

the window frame.

– A foreign object is caught be-

tween the window and the window

frame.

– The vehicle drives over a deep

pothole.

. The window cannot be closed for a

few seconds after the window is auto-

matically stopped by the system.

Child safety locks

166

(169,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Power window operation

S02AH07

! Power window switches

S02AH0701

Driver’s side power window switches

1) For front left window (with one-touch auto

up and down feature)

2) For front right window (with one-touch

auto up and down feature)

3) For rear left window

4) For rear right window

5) Lock switch

All door windows can be controlled by the

power window switch cluster at the driver

side door.

These switches illuminate when activated.

Passenger’s side power window switches

Each passenger’s window can be con-

trolled by the power window switch located

on the door.

These switches illuminate when activated.

! Operating the window

S02AH0702

With one-touch auto up and down feature

1) Automatically close*

2) Close

3) Open

4) Automatically open*

*: To stop the window halfway, operate the

switch to opposite side.

– CONTINUED –

Windows

167

Keys and doors

(170,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Without one-touch auto up and down

feature

1) Close

2) Open

NOTE

Avoid the following.

. Continuously operating a switch in

the same direction after the window is

fully closed or fully opened.

. Continuously operating three or

more switches all at once in the same

direction after the windows are fully

closed or fully opened.

Either of the operations described

above may cause the power window

breaker to operate making it impossible

to open or close the window. Be sure to

initialize the power windows. If they are

not initialized, the one-touch auto up/

down function will not operate. Refer to

“Initialization of power window with

one-touch auto up/down function”

FP169.

! Anti-entrapment function (windows

with one-touch auto up/down func-

tion)

S02AH0703

While closing the window automatically, if

the window senses a substantial enough

object trapped between the window and

the window frame, it automatically moves

down slightly and stops.

If a foreign object is caught while window is

opening automatically, the window will

stop.

CAUTION

. Never attempt to test this func-

tion using fingers, hands or other

parts of your body.

. The anti-entrapment function

may not operate properly if some

object gets trapped just before

the window fully closes.

NOTE

. If a window detects an impact similar

to that caused by trapping an object (for

example, when the vehicle encounters

a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment

function may operate.

. The window cannot be operated for a

few seconds after the anti-entrapment

function operates.

! Off delay function (windows with

one-touch auto up/down function)

S02AH0705

The windows can be operated for approxi-

mately 40 seconds even after the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF”

position. If a front door is opened within 40

seconds, the off delay function is can-

celed.

! Locking the passenger’s windows

S02AH0704

1) Lock

2) Unlock

When the lock switch is in the lock position,

the rear passenger’s window switches on

Windows

168

(171,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

the driver side door and the passenger’s

window switches cannot be operated.

When the indicator on the window

switches does not illuminate, the window

switch cannot be operated.

& Initialization of power window

with one-touch auto up/down

function

S02AH06

If the power window automatic function

(one-touch auto up and down function)

does not operate properly, operate each

window according to the following proce-

dure in order to initialize the power window

system.

1. Close the door.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

3. Open the window completely and then

press and hold down the power window

switch for approximately 1 second.

4. Close the window completely and then

pull and hold the power window switch for

approximately 1 second.

2-8. Rear gate

S02AJ

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaust

gas from entering the vehicle,

always keep the rear gate closed

while the hybrid system is run-

ning.

. Do not attempt to shut the rear

gate while holding the recessed

grip. Also avoid closing the rear

gate by pulling on the recessed

grip from inside the cargo space.

There is a danger of your hand

being caught and injured.

NOTE

If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due

to a discharged 12 V battery, a malfunc-

tion in the door locking/unlocking sys-

tem or other causes, you can unlock it

by manually operating the rear gate

lock release lever.

For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate –

if the rear gate cannot be opened”

FP388.

& Lock/unlock

S02AJ02

The rear gate can be locked and unlocked

using any of the following systems.

. Power door locking switch: Refer to

“How to operate the power door locking

switches” FP161.

. Keyless access with the push-button

start system: Refer to “Keyless access

with push-button start system” FP142.

. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to

“Remote keyless entry system” FP156.

& Open/close

S02AJ03

1) The rear gate opener button

To open:

First unlock the rear gate lock then push

the rear gate opener button.

– CONTINUED –

Rear gate

169

Keys and doors

(172,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

To close:

Lower the rear gate slowly and push down

firmly until the latch engages.

The rear gate can be lowered easily if you

pull it down holding the recessed grip.

CAUTION

. Do not jam a plastic bag in or

place cellophane tape on the rear

gate stays or scratch the stays

while loading or unloading cargo.

That could cause leakage of gas

from the stays, which may result

in their inability to hold the rear

gate open.

. Be careful not to hit your head or

face on the rear gate when open-

ing or closing the rear gate and

when loading or unloading cargo.

2-9. Moonroof (if equipped)

S02AK

WARNING

Never let anyone’s hands, arms,

head or any objects protrude from

the moonroof. A person could be

seriously injured if any of the follow-

ing conditions occur.

. The vehicle stops suddenly.

. The vehicle turns sharply.

. The vehicle is involved in an

accident.

. Body parts protruding from the

vehicle are struck by outside

objects.

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, always con-

form to the following instructions

without exception.

. Before closing the moonroof,

make sure that no one’s hands,

arms, head or other objects will

be accidentally caught in the

moonroof.

. Always carry the key when you

leave the vehicle for safety rea-

sons and never allow an unat-

tended child to remain in the

Moonroof

170

(173,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury

to a child operating the moon-

roof.

. Never try to check the anti-en-

trapment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the

moonroof.

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the open

moonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof if

falling snow or extremely cold

conditions have caused it to

freeze shut.

. The anti-entrapment function

does not operate when the moon-

roof is being tilted down. Be sure

to confirm that it is safe to do so

before tilting the moonroof down.

. If the moonroof does not close,

have the system checked by a

SUBARU dealer.

The moonroof has both tilting and sliding

functions.

The moonroof operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

& Moonroof switches

S02AK02

! Tilting moonroof

S02AK0201

1) Up

2) Down

To raise the moonroof, press and hold the

switch in the up side and release. To lower

the moonroof, press and hold the switch in

the down side.

NOTE

Release the switch after the moonroof

has been raised or has been lowered

completely. Pressing the switch con-

tinuously may cause damage to the

moonroof.

! Sliding moonroof

S02AK0202

1) Open

2) Close

To open or close the moonroof using the

automatic function, press and hold the

switch toward the open/close side and

release.

To stop the moonroof halfway, press a

switch on the moonroof switch.

NOTE

. After washing the vehicle or after it

rains, wipe away water on the roof prior

to opening the moonroof to prevent

drops of water from falling into the

passenger compartment.

– CONTINUED –

Moonroof

171

Keys and doors

(174,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. For the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with the

moonroof fully opened.

! Anti-entrapment function

S02AK0203

When the moonroof senses a substantial

enough object trapped between its glass

and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it

automatically moves back to the fully open

position and stops there. The anti-entrap-

ment function may also be activated by a

strong shock on the moonroof even when

there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this function

using fingers, hands or other parts

of your body.

& Sunshade

S02AK05

The sunshade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is

closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sunshade

also moves back.

Moonroof

172

(175,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

S03

3-1. Push-button ignition switch........................... 175

Safety precautions.............................................. 175

Operating range for push-button start system ..... 175

Switching power status.......................................175

When access key fob does not operate

properly............................................................176

3-2. Hazard warning flasher .................................. 177

3-3. Meters and gauges ......................................... 177

Speedometer ...................................................... 177

Power meter .......................................................177

Odometer ........................................................... 178

Double trip meter................................................ 178

Fuel gauge .........................................................179

Hybrid Battery Charge Status.............................. 179

Driver Assist indicator ........................................ 180

Combination meter settings ................................ 180

3-4. Illumination brightness control ..................... 180

Auto dimmer cancel function .............................. 181

3-5. Warning and indicator.................................... 181

Initial illumination for system check.................... 181

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 182

SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 183

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicators .........................................................183

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator light ................................................... 184

Hybrid READY indicator light .............................. 185

Hybrid Fail Lamp ................................................ 185

Hybrid Battery Charge Mode indicator................. 185

Hybrid Battery Save Mode indicator ................... 185

EV (Electric Vehicle) mode lamp ......................... 185

Hybrid system overheat warning light................. 185

Timer charging setting indicator......................... 185

Charge cable connection indicator ..................... 185

Engine hood open warning light......................... 185

Coolant temperature high warning light .............. 185

Charge warning light .......................................... 186

Oil pressure warning light .................................. 186

Engine low oil level warning light ....................... 187

Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 187

Low tire pressure warning light .......................... 187

ABS warning light .............................................. 188

Brake system warning light ................................ 189

Electronic parking brake indicator light .............. 190

Low fuel warning light........................................ 191

Hill Holder indicator light.................................... 192

Door open warning light..................................... 192

AWD warning light ............................................. 192

Power steering warning light .............................. 192

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light................................................... 193

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 194

Warning chimes and warning indicator of

the keyless access with push-button start

system............................................................. 194

Security indicator light ....................................... 199

SI-DRIVE indicator light ...................................... 199

Select lever position indicator ............................ 200

Turn signal indicator lights................................. 200

High beam indicator light ................................... 200

High beam assist indicator light ......................... 200

Instruments and controls

(176,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Automatic headlight beam leveler warning

light.................................................................. 200

LED headlight warning light ................................ 200

Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator

light.................................................................. 200

Front fog light indicator light ..............................200

Headlight indicator light......................................200

X-MODE indicator ............................................... 201

Hill descent control indicator .............................. 201

BSD/RCTA warning indicator...............................201

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator .................................... 201

RAB warning indicator........................................ 201

RAB OFF indicator.............................................. 201

Icy road surface warning indicator ...................... 201

3-6. Combination meter display (color LCD) ....... 202

Basic operation .................................................. 202

Welcome screen (opening animation) and

Good-bye screen (ending animation)................. 203

Warning screen .................................................. 203

Telltale screen ....................................................204

Basic screens.....................................................205

Menu screens .....................................................207

3-7. Multi-function display (color LCD) ................ 209

Features ............................................................. 209

Welcome screen .................................................209

Self-check screen ............................................... 209

Interruption screen .............................................210

Basic operation .................................................. 211

Basic screens..................................................... 211

Setting screen.................................................... 218

How to get the source code using the open

source ............................................................. 227

3-8. Clock ................................................................228

Setting the clock manually ................................. 228

Setting the clock automatically........................... 230

Regulatory information....................................... 230

3-9. Light control switch ........................................231

Precautions and tips .......................................... 231

Headlights ......................................................... 231

High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 233

Headlight flasher................................................ 233

High beam assist function.................................. 233

Daytime running light system ............................. 236

3-10. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH).........237

3-11. Headlight beam leveler .................................238

3-12. Fog light switch.............................................238

3-13. Turn signal lever............................................239

One-touch lane changer ..................................... 239

3-14. Wiper and washer..........................................239

Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 241

Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 242

3-15. Mirrors ............................................................243

Inside mirror ...................................................... 243

Outside mirrors.................................................. 243

3-16. Defogger and deicer......................................244

3-17. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel.......................245

Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped)....... 246

3-18. Horn................................................................247

Instruments and controls

(177,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3-1. Push-button ignition

switch

S03BG

& Safety precautions

S03BG04

Refer to “Safety precautions” FP143.

& Operating range for push-

button start system

S03BG01

1) Antenna

2) Operating range

NOTE

. If the access key fob is not detected

within the operating range of the anten-

nas inside the vehicle, the push-button

ignition switch and the hybrid system

start cannot be operated.

. Even when the access key fob is

outside the vehicle, if it is placed too

close to the glass, it may be possible to

switch the power or to start the hybrid

system.

. Do not leave the access key fob in

the following places. It may become

impossible to operate the push-button

ignition switch and the hybrid system

start. It may also cause a false warning

to issue although no malfunction actu-

ally occurs, or not to issue a warning

when any malfunction occurs.

– On the instrument panel

– On the floor

– Inside the glove box

– Inside the door trim pocket

– On the rear seat

– In the cargo area

. When operating the push-button

ignition switch or starting the hybrid

system, if the access key fob battery is

discharged, perform the procedure de-

scribed in “Access key fob – if access

key fob does not operate properly”

FP384. In such a case, replace the

battery immediately. Refer to “Repla-

cing battery of access key fob” FP437.

& Switching power status

S03BG02

1) Operation indicator

2) Push-button ignition switch

The power is switched every time the

push-button ignition switch is pressed.

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Shift the select lever into the “P”

position.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

without depressing the brake pedal. Every

time the button is pressed, the power is

switched in the sequence of “OFF”, “ACC”,

“ON” and “OFF”. When the hybrid system

is stopped and the push-button ignition

switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the operation

indicator on the push-button ignition switch

illuminates in orange.

– CONTINUED –

Push-button ignition switch

175

Instruments and controls

(178,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Power

status

Indicator color Operation

OFF Turned off

Power is turned

off.

ACC Orange

The following

systems can be

used:

audio and ac-

cessory power

outlet.

Orange

(while hybrid

system is

stopped)

All electrical

systems can be

used.

Turned off

(while hybrid

system is run-

ning)

CAUTION

. When the push-button ignition

switch is left in “ON” (while the

hybrid system is not running) or

“ACC” for a long time, it may

result in 12 V battery discharge.

. Do not spill drinks or other liquids

on the push-button ignition

switch. It may cause a malfunc-

tion.

. Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch with a hand soiled

with oil or other contaminants. It

may cause a malfunction.

. If the push-button ignition switch

does not operate smoothly, stop

the operation. Contact a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

. If the push-button ignition switch

does not illuminate even when

the instrument panel illumination

is turned on, have the vehicle

inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

. If the vehicle was left in the hot

sun for a long time, the surface of

the push-button ignition switch

may get hot. Be careful not to

burn yourself.

NOTE

. When operating the push-button

ignition switch, firmly press it all the

way.

. If the push-button ignition switch is

pressed quickly, the power may not

turn on or off.

. If the indicator light on the push-

button ignition switch flashes in green

when the push-button ignition switch is

pressed, steering is locked. When this

occurs, press the push-button ignition

switch while turning the steering wheel

left and right.

! 12 V battery drainage prevention

function

S03BG0201

To prevent the 12 V battery from running

out, the power status switches to the “OFF”

position automatically when the power

status of the ignition switch is in the

following position.

. The power status is in the “ACC”

position and the vehicle has 20 minutes

left.

. The power status is in the “ON” position

and the vehicle has 1 hour left.

& When access key fob does

not operate properly

S03BG03

Refer to “Access key fob – if access key

fob does not operate properly” FP384.

Push-button ignition switch

176

(179,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3-2. Hazard warning flasher

S03AB

The hazard warning flasher is used to warn

other drivers when you have to park your

vehicle under emergency conditions. The

hazard warning flasher works regardless

of the position of the ignition switch.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

push the hazard warning button on the

instrument panel. All the turn signal lights

and the turn signal indicator lights will

flash. To turn off the flasher, push the

button again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

3-3. Meters and gauges

S03AD

NOTE

Some of the meters and gauges on the

combination meter use liquid-crystal

displays. You will find their indications

hard to see if you wear polarized

glasses.

& Speedometer

S03AD03

The speedometer shows the vehicle

speed.

& Power meter

S03AD17

The indication of the power meter will

change depending on the operation of the

accelerator pedal. It shows the energy

output conditions during driving and the

regeneration energy status.

1) Charging area

2) Eco area

3) Power area

Charging area: It shows the energy re-

covery status by regenerating the energy

system.

Eco area: It shows the eco driving status.

Power area: It shows the exceeding status

of eco driving.

– CONTINUED –

Hazard warning flasher

177

Instruments and controls

(180,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Odometer

S03AD04

1) TRIP RESET switch

2) Odometer

This meter displays the odometer when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

NOTE

If you press the TRIP RESET switch

when the ignition switch is in the “OFF”

or “ACC” position, the odometer/trip

meter will light up.

The indicators will turn off when:

. The TRIP RESET switch is not oper-

ated for approximately 10 seconds.

. The driver’s door is opened and then

closed.

& Double trip meter

S03AD05

1) TRIP RESET switch

2) Trip meter

This meter displays the two trip meters

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

The display can be switched as shown in

the following sequence by pressing the

TRIP RESET switch.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

trip or B trip meter by pressing the TRIP

RESET switch and keep the knob pressed

for more than 2 seconds.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

NOTE

. If the connection between the com-

bination meter and 12 V battery is

broken for any reason such as vehicle

maintenance or fuse replacement, the

data recorded on the trip meter will be

lost.

. If you press the TRIP RESET switch

when the ignition switch is in the “OFF”

or “ACC” position, the odometer/trip

meter will light up. It is possible to

switch between the A trip meter and B

Meters and gauges

178

(181,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

trip meter indications while the od-

ometer/trip meter is lit up.

In addition, it is possible to reset the trip

meter by pressing and holding the TRIP

RESET switch.

The indicators will turn off when:

– The TRIP RESET switch is not

operated for approximately 10 sec-

onds.

– The driver’s door is opened and

then closed.

& Fuel gauge

S03AD07

1) TRIP RESET switch

2) Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge is displayed when the

ignition is in the “ON” position, and it shows

the approximate amount of fuel remaining

in the tank.

The gauge indication may change slightly

during braking, turning or acceleration due

to fuel level movement in the tank.

NOTE

. The “ ” sign will be shown in the

fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel

filler door is located on the right side of

the vehicle.

. If you press the TRIP RESET switch

while the ignition switch is in the “OFF”

or “ACC” position, the fuel gauge will

light up and indicate the amount of fuel

remaining in the tank.

The indicators will turn off when:

– The TRIP RESET switch is not

operated for approximately 10 sec-

onds.

– The driver’s door is opened and

then closed.

& Hybrid Battery Charge Status

S03AD18

It shows the remaining power in the high

voltage battery.

NOTE

. The remaining power in the high

voltage battery decreases depends on

the driving conditions of the vehicle.

Also, the remaining amount may de-

crease due to system power consump-

tion even though the vehicle is not

being driven.

. The “

” sign will be shown in the

Hybrid Battery Charge Status. This

indicates that the charge port door is

located on the left side of the vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Meters and gauges

179

Instruments and controls

(182,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Driver Assist indicator

S03AD19

1) Driver Assist indicator

The Driver Assist indicator illuminates for

approximately 5 seconds after switching to

Hybrid Battery Save Mode or Hybrid

Battery Charge Mode.

It also blinks slowly when charging from an

external power supply is in progress.

The Driver Assist indicator setting can be

set on the combination meter. Refer to

“Driver Assist Indicator” FP207.

NOTE

The Driver Assist indicator also blinks

and illuminates when the EyeSight

system is operating. For details, refer

to the Owner’s Manual supplement for

the EyeSight system.

& Combination meter settings

S03AD16

Meter and vehicle settings can be set on

the combination meter display (color

LCD). Refer to “Menu screens” FP207.

3-4. Illumination brightness

control

S03AJ

The illumination brightness of the instru-

ment panel illuminates under the following

conditions.

. When the light switch is in the “

” or

“

” position.

. When the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-

nate automatically.

You can adjust the illumination brightness

for better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

Illumination brightness control

180

(183,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

NOTE

. When the control dial is turned fully

upward, the illumination brightness

becomes the maximum and the auto-

matic dimming function does not work

at all.

. The brightness setting is not can-

celed even when the ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” position.

& Auto dimmer cancel function

S03AJ01

When the ambient light is bright, the

illumination brightness is set to the max-

imum regardless of the position of the

control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust

the illumination brightness by using the

control dial. When the ambient light is dark,

you can dim the illumination brightness as

described above.

The operational/non-operational setting

and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel

function can be changed by your SUBARU

dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

3-5. Warning and indicator

S03AE

& Initial illumination for system

check

S03AE29

Several of the warning and indicator lights

illuminate when the ignition switch is

initially turned to the “ON” position. This

permits checking the operation of the

bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position. For

the system check, several of the following

lights illuminate and then turn off after

several seconds or after the hybrid system

has started.

: Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt

warning light turns off only when the

driver fastens the seatbelt.)

: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning

light (The seatbelt warning light turns

off only when the front seat passen-

ger fastens the seatbelt.)

: SRS airbag system warning light

ON /

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator light

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator light

: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator light

: Coolant temperature high warning light

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: Low tire pressure warning light

: ABS warning light

: Brake system warning light

: Electronic parking brake indicator

light

: Low fuel warning light

: Hill holder indicator light

: AWD warning light

: Power steering warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator

light

: Automatic headlight beam leveler

warning light

: Hill descent control indicator

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator

181

Instruments and controls

(184,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the

corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer

for repair.

& Seatbelt warning light

and chime

S03AE01

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat, as required by current

safety standards.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver and

front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by

illuminating the warning lights in the loca-

tions indicated in the following illustration

and sounding a chime.

Driver’s warning light

Front passenger’s warning light

! Operation

S03AE0101

If the driver and/or front passenger have/

has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will

flash for several seconds, to warn that the

seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the driver’s

seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also

sound simultaneously.

NOTE

. If the driver’s and/or front passen-

ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened

6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning

device operates as follows according

to the vehicle speed.

– At speeds lower than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

steady illumination and flashing at

15-second intervals. The chime will

not sound.

– At speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

flashing and steady illumination at

15-second intervals and the chime

will sound while the warning light(s)

is/are flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warning

operation that follows the 6-second

warning after turning ON the ignition

switch. When the ignition switch is

turned ON next time, however, the

complete sequence of the warning

operation resumes. For further details

about canceling the warning operation,

please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If there is no passenger on the front

passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning

device for the front passenger’s seat will

be deactivated. The front passenger’s

occupant detection system monitors

whether or not there is a passenger on

the front passenger’s seat.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may prevent the device from

functioning correctly or cause the device to

Warning and indicator

182

(185,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

fail.

. Do not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

place his/her hands or legs on the front

passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to

pull the seatback.

. Do not use front seats with their back-

ward-forward position and seatback not

being locked into place securely. If any of

them are not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure, refer to

“Manual seat (passenger’s seat)” FP73.

If the seatbelt warning device for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is

deactivated even when the front passen-

ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take

the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system and

its child occupant, although we strongly

recommend that all children sit in the rear

seat properly restrained.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth.

If still the seatbelt warning device for front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-

tions described above, immediately con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

& SRS airbag system

warning light

S03AE02

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system. Immediately take your vehi-

cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer

to have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbag will not operate properly in

the event of a collision, which may

increase the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position.

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

For details about the components mon-

itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS

airbag system monitors” FP135.

& Front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON and OFF indicators

S03AE03

ON : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator

183

Instruments and controls

(186,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

The indicator is displayed near the map

lights.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF

indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators turn

off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the

indicators illuminates depending on the

status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-

vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain off.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator will remain off while

the OFF indicator will illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indicators

remain illuminated or off simultaneously

even after the system check period, the

system is malfunctioning. Contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-

spection.

& CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction

indicator light

S03AE04

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-

nates while you are driving, have

your vehicle checked/repaired by

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible. Continued vehicle opera-

tion without having the emission

control system checked and re-

paired as necessary could cause

serious damage, which may not be

covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks

while the hybrid system is running, it may

indicate that there is at least one problem

or potential problem somewhere in the

emission control system.

! If the light illuminates steadily

S03AE0401

If the light illuminates steadily while driving

or does not turn off after the hybrid system

starts, an emission control system mal-

function has been detected.

You should have your vehicle checked by

an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

NOTE

This light also illuminates when the fuel

filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,

the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light illuminating

could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.

Remove the cap and retighten it until it

clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with

the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap

will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light turn off immediately. It may take

several driving trips. If the light does not

turn off, take your vehicle to your author-

ized SUBARU dealer immediately.

! If the light is blinking

S03AE0402

If the light is blinking while driving, an

engine misfire condition has been de-

tected which may damage the emission

control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emis-

sion control system, you should do the

following.

. Reduce vehicle speed.

. Avoid hard acceleration.

. Avoid steep uphill grades.

. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-

ble.

. Stop towing a trailer as soon as

possible.

Warning and indicator

184

(187,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may

stop blinking and illuminate steadily after

several driving trips. You should have your

vehicle checked by an authorized

SUBARU dealer immediately.

& Hybrid READY

indicator light

S03AE99

This light illuminates when the hybrid

system has started. It turns off when the

hybrid system has been turned off.

CAUTION

If the Hybrid READY Indicator Light

does not illuminate when the engine

has been started, have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer.

& Hybrid Fail Lamp

S03AE71

The indicator illuminates when a malfunc-

tion occurs in the hybrid system. Contact

your SUBARU dealer immediately for an

inspection.

& Hybrid Battery Charge

Mode indicator

S03AEA0

When in the Hybrid Battery Charge Mode,

this indicator illuminates. For details about

the Hybrid Battery Charge Mode, refer to

“Hybrid system operation mode” FP26.

& Hybrid Battery Save

Mode indicator

S03AEA7

When in the Hybrid Battery Save Mode,

this indicator illuminates. For details about

the Hybrid Battery Save Mode, refer to

“Hybrid system operation mode” FP26.

& EV (Electric Vehicle)

mode lamp

S03AEA1

This lamp illuminates in the following

cases.

. When driving only using the electric

motor power

. When the engine is automatically

stopped by the hybrid system

& Hybrid system overheat

warning light

S03AEA2

This warning light illuminates when the

temperature of the inverter with converter

assembly is high. Contact your SUBARU

dealer immediately for an inspection.

& Timer charging setting

indicator

S03AEA8

This indicator illuminates when Remote

Battery Charging Timer has been sched-

uled. For details how to set the charging

timer, refer to “Setting the Remote Battery

Charging Timer” FP58.

& Charge cable connec-

tion indicator

S03AEA9

This indicator illuminates when the charge

cable is connected to the vehicle.

& Engine hood open

warning light

S03AE98

The warning light illuminates if the engine

hood is not fully closed. This function is

effective even if the ignition switch is in the

“OFF” or “ACC” position, or the key is

removed from the ignition switch.

Always make sure this light is not illumi-

nated before you start to drive.

& Coolant temperature

high warning light

S03AE48

CAUTION

. After turning the ignition switch

to the “ON” position, if this warn-

ing light behaves in any of the

following ways, the electrical

system may be malfunctioning.

Contact your SUBARU dealer

immediately for an inspection.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator

185

Instruments and controls

(188,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

– It remains blinking in RED.

– It remains illuminated in RED

for more than 2 seconds.

. While driving, if this warning light

behaves in any of the following

ways, take the specified appro-

priate measure listed below.

– Blinking or illuminated in

RED:

Safely stop the vehicle as

soon as possible, and refer to

the emergency steps to take in

the case of engine overheat-

ing. After that, have the sys-

tem checked by your nearest

SUBARU dealer. Refer to “En-

gine and hybrid system over-

heating” FP378.

This coolant temperature high warning

light has the following two functions.

. Blinking in RED indicates that the

engine is close to overheating.

. Illumination in RED indicates overheat-

ing condition of the engine.

For a system check, this warning light

illuminates in RED for approximately 2

seconds when the ignition switch is turned

to the “ON” position.

If the engine coolant temperature in-

creases over the specified range, the

warning light blinks in RED. At this time,

the engine is close to overheating.

If the engine coolant temperature in-

creases further, the warning light illumi-

nates in RED continuously. At this time, the

engine may be overheating.

When the warning light blinks in RED or

illuminates in RED, safely stop the vehicle

as soon as possible, and refer to the

emergency steps to take in the case of

engine overheating. Refer to “Engine and

hybrid system overheating” FP378. After

that, have the system checked by your

nearest SUBARU dealer.

Also, if the warning light often blinks in

RED, the electrical system may be mal-

functioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for an inspection.

NOTE

If the engine is restarted after a certain

driving condition, this warning light

may illuminate in RED. However, this

is not a malfunction if the warning light

turns off after a short time.

& Charge warning light

S03AE05

If this light illuminates when the hybrid

system is running, it may indicate that the

charging system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the hybrid system starts,

stop the hybrid system at the first safe

opportunity. If the light remains illumi-

nated, contact your nearest SUBARU

dealer immediately.

& Oil pressure warning

light

S03AE06

If this light illuminates when the hybrid

system is running, it may indicate that the

engine oil pressure is low and the lubricat-

ing system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the hybrid system starts,

stop the hybrid system at the first safe

opportunity. Contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not operate the hybrid system

with the oil pressure warning light

illuminated. This may cause serious

engine damage.

Warning and indicator

186

(189,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Engine low oil level

warning light

S03AE58

This light illuminates when the engine oil

level decreases to the lower limit.

If the engine low oil level warning light

illuminates while driving, park the vehicle

in a safe and level location, and then check

the engine oil level. When the engine oil

level is not within the normal range, refill

with engine oil. Refer to “Engine oil”

FP406.

If the warning light does not turn off after

refilling the engine oil, or the warning light

illuminates even though the engine oil

level is within the normal range, have the

vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

. The oil level will be detected by the

system just after turning the ignition

switch to the ON position, and the low

oil level warning light will turn on when

the oil level is below the lower limit. The

warning light will turn off when the

ignition switch is turned to the OFF

position.

. In the following cases, the low oil

level warning light may not illuminates

even if the oil level is below the lower

limit for avoiding the erroneous light-

ing.

– The car is parked on a steep

slope.

– Rapid acceleration, hard braking

or rapid steering occurred during

EV driving.

– The engine was restarted within a

few hours.

& Windshield washer

fluid warning light

S03AE42

This light illuminates when the fluid level in

the windshield washer fluid tank de-

creases to the lower limit approximately

0.6 US qt (0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).

& Low tire pressure

warning light

S03AE08

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will illuminate for approximately 2

seconds to check that the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning

properly. If there is no problem and all tires

are properly inflated, the light will turn off.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a

different size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label, you should determine the proper tire

inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator

187

Instruments and controls

(190,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfunction exists. When the mal-

function indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low

tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-

tions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Should the warning light illuminate steadily

after blinking for approximately one min-

ute, have the system inspected by your

nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate

briefly after the ignition switch is

turned ON or the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute, you should have

your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly.

When a wheel rim is replaced with-

out the original pressure sensor/

transmitter being transferred, the

Low tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking for

approximately one minute. This in-

dicates the TPMS is unable to moni-

tor all four road wheels. Contact

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible for tire and sensor replace-

ment and/or system resetting.

If the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one min-

ute, promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system

is NOT a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked peri-

odically (at least monthly) using a

tire gauge. After any change to tire

pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-

itoring system will not re-check tire

inflation pressures until the vehicle

is first driven more than 20 mph (32

km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-

sures, increase the vehicle speed to

at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the

TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-

tion pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low pres-

sure threshold, the low tire pressure

warning light should turn off a few

minutes later. Therefore, be sure to

install the specified size for the front

and rear tires.

& ABS warning light

S03AE09

CAUTION

. If any of the following conditions

occur, we recommend that you

have the ABS repaired at the first

available opportunity by your

Warning and indicator

188

(191,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

SUBARU dealer.

– The warning light does not

illuminate when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

– The warning light illuminates

when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position,

but it does not turn off even

after the vehicle is started.

– The warning light illuminates

during driving.

. When the warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is

off), the ABS function shuts

down. However, the conventional

brake system continues to oper-

ate normally.

The ABS warning light, Vehicle Dynamics

Control warning light, and brake system

warning light illuminate simultaneously if

the EBD system malfunctions. For further

details of the EBD system malfunction

warning, refer to “Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD) system warning”

FP190.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following conditions,

the ABS may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and turns off approximately 2

seconds after the hybrid system has

started.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the hybrid system is started but

turns off immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light remains illumi-

nated after the hybrid system has been

started, but it turns off while driving.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the hybrid system is

jump started, the ABS warning light may

illuminate. This is due to the low battery

voltage and does not indicate a malfunc-

tion. When the battery becomes fully

charged, the light will turn off.

& Brake system warning

light

S03AE10

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains illuminated,

have the brakes inspected by a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

The brake system warning light has the

following functions.

! Brake fluid level warning

S03AE1002

This light illuminates when the brake fluid

level has dropped to near the “MIN” level of

the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position. At this time the

buzzer will also sound.

If the brake system warning light should

illuminate while driving, it could be an

indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn

brake pads. If this occurs, immediately

stop the vehicle at the nearest safe

location and check the brake fluid level. If

the fluid level is below the “MIN” mark in

the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle.

Have the vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator

189

Instruments and controls

(192,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning

S03AE1003

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

the brake system warning light

, Ve-

hicle Dynamics Control warning light

and ABS warning light illuminate

simultaneously during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are

applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s

motion may therefore become somewhat

harder to control.

If the brake system warning light

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

and ABS warning light illuminate

simultaneously, take the following steps.

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat

location.

2. Shut down the hybrid system, apply

the parking brake and then restart it.

3. Fully release the parking brake.

4. Even if all the warning lights do not

come back on, the EBD system may have

a possible malfunction. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected.

5. If all the warning lights stay illuminated

or come back on after approximately 2

seconds, shut down the hybrid system,

apply the parking brake and check the

brake fluid level.

. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system or the

electronic brake boost control module

may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected.

. If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN”

mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead,

have the vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

! Electronic brake boost control

module warning

S03AE1007

When a malfunction of the electronic brake

boost control module or leakage from the

brake circuit is detected, the brake system

warning light

illuminates and the

buzzer sounds.

At this time, the brake pedal may feel

heavy.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

location and request instructions from a

SUBARU dealer. Continuing to drive the

vehicle may be dangerous.

! Regenerative braking system warn-

ing

S03AE1008

The brake system warning light

illuminates when regenerative braking

cannot be activated. If this occurs, drive

cautiously and have the vehicle inspected

by a SUBARU dealer.

& Electronic parking

brake indicator light

S03AE85

! Parking brake indicator

S03AE8501

The light illuminates with the parking brake

applied while the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position. It turns off when the parking

brake is fully released.

! Electronic parking brake system

warning

S03AE8502

WARNING

. When you release the electronic

parking brake while the hybrid

system is running, the electronic

parking brake indicator light will

turn off. However, if the light still

illuminates, stop the vehicle in a

safe place immediately and have

the system inspected by a

SUBARU dealer.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

. If the electronic parking brake

Warning and indicator

190

(193,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

indicator light flashes, the elec-

tronic parking brake system may

be malfunctioning. Immediately

stop your vehicle in a safe loca-

tion, use tire stops under the tires

to prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing and contact your SUBARU

dealer. For details, refer to “Elec-

tronic parking brake” FP310.

NOTE

. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “OFF” position with the electronic

parking brake applied, the electronic

parking brake indicator light remains

illuminated for approximately 30 sec-

onds and then turns off.

. Even if the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes, if the warning

light behavior is as described in the

following examples, the electronic

parking brake system is not malfunc-

tioning.

– The indicator light turns off when

the electronic parking brake is re-

leased.

. The electronic parking brake indica-

tor light may flash immediately after the

hybrid system is started. However, it is

not malfunctioning if the indicator light

turns off after the electronic parking

brake is released.

. The electronic parking brake indica-

tor light may flash after the electronic

parking brake is frequently applied and

released. However, the electronic park-

ing brake system is not malfunctioning

if the light turns off for a short period of

time.

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes when the electronic parking brake

system is malfunctioning. If the indicator

light flashes, promptly park in a safe

location as soon as possible and contact

your SUBARU dealer.

The electronic parking brake indicator light

remains illuminated when the parking

brake cannot be released even if the

parking brake switch is pushed. For de-

tails, refer to “Electronic parking brake”

FP310.

! Parking brake apply inhibit warn-

ing

S03AE850201

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound

will be heard if the parking brake switch is

operated when the parking brake cannot

be applied.

! Frequent operation warning

S03AE850202

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound

will be heard if the parking brake switch is

operated too frequently. In this case, the

operation of the parking brake switch is

restricted to protect the electronic parking

brake system.

NOTE

Wait until the indicator light turns off.

& Low fuel warning light

S03AE11

The low fuel warning light illuminates when

the tank is nearly empty, at approximately

2.0 US gal (7.5 liters, 1.65 Imp gal). It only

operates when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light

illuminates. When the level of fuel

in the tank is low, engine misfire may

occur and may result in the follow-

ing problems.

. The engine may be damaged.

. The AWD system may not operate

normally.

. EyeSight may not operate nor-

mally.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator

191

Instruments and controls

(194,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Hill Holder indicator

light

S03AE60

WARNING

If the Hill Holder indicator light does

not illuminate even when the Hill

Holder switch is pressed to activate

the Hill Holder function, the electro-

nic parking brake system may be

malfunctioning. Immediately stop

the vehicle in a safe location. We

recommend that you contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately.

The light illuminates when the Hill Holder

switch is pressed to activate the Hill Holder

function. For details about the Hill Holder

function, refer to “Hill Holder function”

FP312.

& Door open warning light

S03AE12

The warning light illuminates if any door or

the rear gate is not fully closed. This

function is effective even if the ignition

switch is in the “OFF” or “ACC” position, or

the key is removed from the ignition switch.

For some models, only the open doors are

indicated by the warning lights.

Always make sure this light is not illumi-

nated before you start to drive.

& AWD warning light

S03AE13

This light blinks in the following circum-

stances.

. When driving with tires of different sizes

installed

. When the air pressure in any tire is

extremely low.

. When the level of fuel in the tank is low.

. When there is a problem with the AWD

system.

WARNING

If the AWD warning light flashes,

promptly park in a safe location then

check whether all four tires are the

same diameter and whether any of

the tires has a puncture or has lost

air pressure for some other reason.

Continuing to drive with the AWD

warning light flashing can lead to

powertrain damage.

& Power steering warning

light

S03AE53

While the hybrid system is running, this

warning light illuminates when a malfunc-

tion has been detected in the electric

power steering system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low

speeds, such as while frequently turn-

ing the steering wheel during parallel

parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long period of

time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

Warning and indicator

192

(195,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur too frequently,

that may result in a malfunction of the

power steering control system.

& Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol warning light/Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control

operation indicator

light

S03AE14

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light

S03AE1401

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem provides its ABS control

through the electrical circuit of the

ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is

inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system becomes unable to

provide ABS control. As a result, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

also becomes inoperative, causing

the warning light to illuminate.

Although both the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and ABS are inop-

erative in this case, the ordinary

functions of the brake system are

still available. You will be safe while

driving with this condition, but drive

carefully and have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

NOTE

. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system itself mal-

functions, the warning light only illumi-

nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock

Brake System) remains fully opera-

tional.

. The warning light illuminates when

the electronic control system of the

ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

malfunctions.

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-

ing light, ABS warning light, and brake

system warning light illuminate simul-

taneously if the EBD system malfunc-

tions. For further details of the EBD

system malfunction warning, refer to

“Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning” FP190.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably inoperative under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The warning light illuminates while the

vehicle is running.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following examples,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and turns off approximately 2

seconds after the hybrid system has

started.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the hybrid system is started but

turns off immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light illuminates after

the hybrid system has started and turns

off while the vehicle is subsequently

being driven.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.

. The warning light illuminates when

the hybrid system has stalled and

continues to illuminate after the hybrid

system has been restarted. However, it

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator

193

Instruments and controls

(196,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

will turn off once the vehicle starts

moving.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light

S03AE1402

The indicator light flashes during activation

of the skid suppression function and during

activation of the traction control function.

NOTE

. The light may remain illuminated for

a short period of time after the hybrid

system has been started, especially in

cold weather. This does not indicate the

existence of a problem. The light

should turn off as soon as the engine

has warmed up.

. The indicator light illuminates when

the engine has developed a problem

and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under the follow-

ing condition. Have your vehicle checked

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The light does not turn off even after the

lapse of several minutes (the hybrid

system has warmed up) after the hybrid

system has started.

& Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol OFF indicator light

S03AE15

The light illuminates when the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed

to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The light does not illuminate when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. The light does not turn off even once

several seconds have elapsed after the

ignition switch has been turned to the “ON”

position.

& Warning chimes and

warning indicator of the

keyless access with

push-button start sys-

tem

S03AE55

Access key warning indicator

The keyless access with push-button start

system sounds a warning chime and

flashes the access key warning indicator

on the combination meter in order to

minimize improper operations and help

protect your vehicle from theft.

When the warning chime sounds and/or

the warning indicator flashes, take the

appropriate action.

Warning and indicator

194

(197,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the indica-

tor on the push-button ignition

switch is flashing in green when

starting the hybrid system. This

indicates the status that the steering

wheel is not released and could

result in an accident involving ser-

ious injury or death.

CAUTION

. When starting the hybrid system

again after the operation indica-

tor on the push-button ignition

switch flashes in green, if the

operation indicator is still flash-

ing in green, there could be a

steering lock malfunction. Con-

tact your SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible.

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in orange, contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE

. Even when the access key fob is

within the operating ranges inside the

vehicle, the access key warning for

hybrid system start may be provided

depending on the status of the access

key fob and the environmental condi-

tions.

. When the access key fob is taken out

of the vehicle through an open window,

the access key fob takeout warning or

passenger access key fob takeout

warning will not be provided.

! List of warnings

S03AE5504

CAUTION

When any of the following warnings

occurs even if the access key warn-

ing indicator does not appear, take

the appropriate action.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator

195

Instruments and controls

(198,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button igni-

tion switch

Status Action

Ding, ding ...

(intermittent)

— —

The driver’s door was opened while the

push-button ignition switch is “ACC” when

the select lever is in the “P” position).

Switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”, or close the driver’s door.

*When exiting the vehicle, be sure to

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”.

The push-button ignition switch was

switched to “OFF” while the driver’s door

is open.

Close the driver’s door.

Ding

Short beep

(2 seconds)

—

Lockout warning:

An attempt was made to lock all doors

while the access key fob is left inside the

vehicle.

Take out the access key fob from the

vehicle, and lock the doors.

*The doors cannot be locked while the

access key fob is inside the vehicle.

*A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors

will be unlocked.

—

Short beep

(2 seconds)

—

Access key fob lock-in warning:

The door lock sensor was touched while

the push-button ignition switch is “OFF”

and the access key fob is inside the

vehicle.

Take out the access key fob from the

vehicle, and lock the doors.

*If the access key fob is inside the vehicle,

the doors cannot be locked.

—

Beep, beep, beep,

beep, beep

(5 times)

—

Door ajar warning:

The door lock sensor is touched while the

ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and

one of the doors including the rear gate is

opened.

Close the doors securely and lock them.

*If one of the doors including the rear gate

is opened, the doors cannot be locked.

Ding

Long beep (60

seconds max.)

—

Power warning:

The door lock sensor was touched while

carrying the access key fob, the push-

button ignition switch is in a position other

than “OFF” (when the select lever is in the

“P” position).

Return the access key fob inside the

vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF”.

*If the push-button ignition switch is not

switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be

locked.

Ding, ding ...

(7 seconds)

— —

Access key warning:

The vehicle was driven while the access

key fob is not inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and drive the

vehicle.

Warning and indicator

196

(199,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button igni-

tion switch

Status Action

Ding — —

Access key warning for hybrid system

start:

The push-button ignition switch was

pressed while the access key fob is not

inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and press the

push-button ignition switch.

Ding

Beep, beep, beep

(3 times)

—

Access key takeout warning:

The driver exited the vehicle with the

access key fob and closed the driver’s

door while the push-button ignition switch

is in a position other than “OFF” (when the

select lever is in the “P” position).

Switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.

Ding

Beep, beep, beep

(3 times)

—

Passenger access key takeout warn-

ing:

A fellow passenger exited the vehicle with

the access key fob and closed a door

other than the driver’s door while the

push-button ignition switch is in a position

other than “OFF”.

Return the access key fob to inside the

vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF”.

Long beep

(continuous)

Long beep

(continuous)

—

Access key takeout without P position

warning:

The driver exited the vehicle with the

access key fob and closed the driver’s

door while the push-button ignition switch

is in a position other than “OFF” and the

select lever is in a position other than the

“P” position.

Shift the select lever to the “P” position,

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF” and exit the vehicle.

Long beep

(continuous)

— —

Select lever position warning:

The hybrid system is turned off by press-

ing the push-button ignition switch and the

select lever is in a position other than the

“P” position.

Start the hybrid system, shift the select

lever to the “P” position, switch the push-

button ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the

vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator

197

Instruments and controls

(200,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button igni-

tion switch

Status Action

Long beep

(continuous)

— —

Select lever position warning:

The driver’s door was opened while the

push-button ignition switch is in a position

other than “OFF” and the select lever is in

a position other than the “P” position.

Shift the select lever to the “P” position,

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF” and exit the vehicle.

Ding — — The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.

Ding —

Flashes in green

(15 seconds max.)

Steering lock warning:

The hybrid system start procedure was

performed, but the steering is still locked.

While turning the steering wheel right and

left lightly, depress the brake pedal and

press the push-button ignition switch.

Ding —

Flashes in orange

(15 seconds max.)

System malfunction warning:

A malfunction was detected in the power

system or steering lock.

Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately

and have the vehicle inspected.

Warning and indicator

198

(201,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Security indicator light

S03AE16

This indicator light shows the status of the

alarm system. It also indicates operation of

the immobilizer system.

! Alarm system

S03AE1601

It blinks to show the driver the operational

status of the alarm system. For detailed

information, refer to “Alarm system”

FP163.

! Immobilizer system

S03AE1602

The security indicator light starts blinking

in the following conditions.

. Immediately after the push-button igni-

tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position.

. Immediately after the driver’s door is

opened or closed when all of the following

conditions are met.

– The push-button ignition switch is in

the “ON” or “ACC” position.

– The hybrid system is not running.

In the event that an unauthorized key is

used (for example, the key is unregistered

or the ID code does not match), the power

is not switched to “ON” and the security

indicator light continues blinking.

NOTE

. The security indicator light remains

off in the following conditions. It means

that the matching of the ID code is

completed and the immobilizer system

is deactivated, and it does not indicate

a malfunction.

– While the hybrid system is run-

ning.

– The push-button ignition switch

has been turned to the “ON” or

“ACC” position and the driver’s

door has not been opened or

closed.

. Even if a malfunction occurs, such

as the security indicator light flashes

irregularly, it will not affect the func-

tionality of the immobilizer system.

& SI-DRIVE indicator light

S03AE52

1) Intelligent (I) mode indicator

2) Sport (S) mode indicator

This light indicates the current SI-DRIVE

mode.

For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to “SI-

DRIVE” FP295.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator

199

Instruments and controls

(202,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Select lever position indica-

tor

S03AE43

This indicator shows the position of the

select lever.

& Turn signal indicator

lights

S03AE20

These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned

out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Refer to “Replacing bulbs” FP432.

& High beam indicator

light

S03AE21

This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.

This indicator light also illuminates when

the headlight flasher is operated.

& High beam assist indi-

cator light

S03AE83

This light illuminates when the high beam

assist function is activated. For details

about the high beam assist function, refer

to “High beam assist function” FP233.

& Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light

S03AE33

This light illuminates when the automatic

headlight beam leveler does not operate

normally.

If this light illuminates during driving, have

your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU

dealer.

& LED headlight warning

light

S03AE76

This light illuminates if the LED headlights

malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& Steering Responsive

Headlight warning light/

Steering Responsive

Headlight OFF indicator

light

S03AE89

This light illuminates when the Steering

Responsive Headlight OFF switch is

pressed to deactivate the Steering Re-

sponsive Headlight. Also, the light flashes

when a malfunction occurs in the Steering

Responsive Headlight. Refer to “Steering

Responsive Headlight (SRH)” FP237.

& Front fog light indicator

light

S03AE25

This indicator light illuminates while the

front fog lights are illuminated.

& Headlight indicator

light

S03AE24

This indicator light illuminates under the

following conditions.

. When the light switch is turned to the

“

” or “ ” position.

. When the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-

nate automatically.

Warning and indicator

200

(203,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& X-MODE indicator

S03AE68

This indicator appears while the X-MODE

is activated. It will disappear when the X-

MODE is deactivated. Refer to “To acti-

vate/deactivate the X-MODE” FP306.

& Hill descent control in-

dicator

S03AE69

This indicator appears while the hill des-

cent control function is in standby. It will

flash while the hill descent control function

is operating. It will disappear when the hill

descent control function is not available.

Refer to “Hill descent control function”

FP307.

& BSD/RCTA warning in-

dicator

S03AE80

This warning indicator appears when the

BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case

the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be

shown on the combination meter display

(color LCD). When this indicator appears,

have your vehicle inspected by your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& BSD/RCTA OFF indica-

tor

S03AE86

The indicator appears when the BSD/

RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate

the BSD/RCTA, or when the BSD/RCTA is

suspended temporarily. In this case the

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on

the combination meter display (color

LCD). For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA”

FP314.

& RAB warning indicator

S03AE91

This indicator illuminates if the Reverse

Automatic Braking System malfunctions.

Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking

System” FP323.

& RAB OFF indicator

S03AE92

This indicator illuminates when the Re-

verse Automatic Braking System is turned

OFF, or when the Reverse Automatic

Braking System is suspended temporarily.

Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking

System” FP323.

& Icy road surface warn-

ing indicator

S03AE82

When the outside temperature is 378F

(38C) or less, the icy road surface warning

will illuminate to inform the driver that the

road surface may be frozen.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. Therefore, the tem-

perature indication may differ from the

actual outside air temperature.

. The icy road surface warning screen

should be treated only as a guide. Be

sure to check the condition of the road

surface before driving.

. Once the icy road surface warning

screen appears, it will not disappear

unless the outside temperature has

increased to 418F (58C) or higher.

Warning and indicator

201

Instruments and controls

(204,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3-6. Combination meter dis-

play (color LCD)

S03BN

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to

safe driving when operating the

combination meter display (color

LCD) while the vehicle is in motion.

When operation of the combination

meter display (color LCD) interferes

with your ability to concentrate on

driving, stop the vehicle before

performing operations on the

screen. Also, do not concentrate on

the display while driving. Doing so

may cause you to look away from the

road and could result in an accident.

Various information will be shown on the

combination meter display (color LCD).

Also, a warning message will appear on

the display if a malfunction, etc. is

detected. In addition, several settings for

the displayed content can be performed.

Combination meter display (color LCD)

1) Hybrid Battery Charge Status (refer to

“Hybrid Battery Charge Status” FP179.)

2) Warning screen (refer to “Warning

screen” FP203.)/Basic screen (refer to

“Basic screens” FP205.)

3) EyeSight screen

4) Telltale screen (refer to “Telltale screen”

FP204.)

5) Select lever position indicator (refer to

“Select lever position indicator” FP200.)

6) X-MODE indicator (refer to “X-MODE

indicator” FP201.)/SI-DRIVE indicator

(refer to “SI-DRIVE” FP295.)

7) Odometer (refer to “Odometer” FP178.)/

double trip meter (refer to “Double trip

meter” FP178.)

8) Fuel gauge (refer to “Fuel gauge”

FP179.)

A: Deactivating the EyeSight system

B: Activating the EyeSight system

& Basic operation

S03BN01

Control switch

(Up)

/SET (enter)

(Down)

By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control

Combination meter display (color LCD)

202

(205,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

switch, the screens and selection items

can be switched. When the “

/SET”

switch is pulled toward you, the item can

be selected and set.

If there are some useful messages, such

as vehicle information, warning informa-

tion, etc., they will interrupt the current

screen, and appear on the display accom-

panied by a beep. If such a screen is

displayed, take proper action according to

the message shown on the screen.

The warning screen will return to the

original screen after a few seconds. While

the “

” information reminder is shown on

the display, it may be possible to display

the warning screen again. To recall the

message marked with “

” on the display,

pull the “

/SET” switch on the steering

wheel toward you.

NOTE

When the multi-function display (color

LCD) is set to the setting screen, the

combination meter display (color LCD)

cannot be controlled by pulling on the

“

”, “ ” and “ /SET” on the control

switch.

& Welcome screen (opening

animation) and Good-bye

screen (ending animation)

S03BN08

When the driver’s door is opened and

closed after unlocking the door, the wel-

come screen (opening animation) will

appear on the combination meter display

(color LCD) for approximately 20 seconds.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position, the combination meter

display (color LCD) gradually turns off

while showing the Good-bye screen (end-

ing animation).

NOTE

. The welcome screen and the good-

bye screen may differ in the actual

words and appearance.

. Once the welcome screen appears, it

takes a certain period of time to display

it again.

. If the ignition switch is operated

after unlocking the driver’s door, the

welcome screen will not appear even

when the driver’s door is opened and

closed.

. The welcome screen will disappear

when you lock the driver’s door by

using the remote keyless entry system

or the keyless access function while

the welcome screen is displayed.

. The welcome screen including the

multi-function display (color LCD) and

the audio/navigation unit can be set to

on or off. For details, refer to “Welcome

Screen” FP207.

& Warning screen

S03BN05

Example of warning

If there is a warning message or a

maintenance notification, it will appear on

this screen. Take the appropriate actions

based on the messages indicated.

– CONTINUED –

Combination meter display (color LCD)

203

Instruments and controls

(206,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Telltale screen

S03BN09

1) Telltale screen

When the corresponding situation occurs,

the following telltales will be displayed on

the telltale screen.

NOTE

When there is warning information to

display, it will be displayed in five

warning indicators, starting on the left

in ascending order of severity. If there

are six or more warning information

displayed, pull the “

/SET” switch and

check the item.

Mark Name Page

Door open light 192

LED headlight warning

light

200

High beam assist indi-

cator light

200

Steering Responsive

Headlight warning light

200

Engine low oil level

warning light

187

RAB warning indicator 201

RAB OFF indicator 201

BSD/RCTA warning in-

dicator

201

BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

cator

201

Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light

200

Windshield washer fluid

warning light

187

Mark Name Page

Hill descent control in-

dicator

201

Icy road surface warn-

ing indicator

201

Hybrid Battery Charge

Mode indicator

185

Engine hood open

warning light

185

Timer charging setting

indicator

185

Charge cable connec-

tion indicator

185

Hybrid Battery Save

Mode indicator

185

Hybrid Fail Lamp 185

Hybrid system overheat

warning light

185

Combination meter display (color LCD)

204

(207,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Basic screens

S03BN06

By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel, you can change the screen

that is always displayed.

Average fuel consumption screen:

: Average fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the average rate of

fuel consumption since the trip meter was

last reset.

NOTE

. The average fuel consumption

screen is only a guide. The indicated

values may differ from actual values

depends on the driving conditions of

the vehicle. The tank must be immedi-

ately filled when the low fuel warning

light illuminates.

. The average fuel consumption

screen will be displayed when the

vehicle drives 1 mile (1 km) or more

after resetting the trip meter and start-

ing the engine.

Current fuel consumption screen:

: Current fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the rate of fuel

consumption at the present moment.

NOTE

The driving range on remaining fuel is

only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

remaining fuel, so you must immedi-

ately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

Driving range on remaining fuel/high vol-

tage battery screen:

1) EV driving range on remaining high

voltage battery

2) Driving range on remaining fuel

It shows an estimate of the possible driving

distance with the remaining high voltage

battery and fuel.

NOTE

The EV driving range on remaining high

voltage battery decreases depends on

the driving conditions of the vehicle.

Also, the EV driving range may de-

crease due to system power consump-

tion even though the vehicle is not

being driven.

– CONTINUED –

Combination meter display (color LCD)

205

Instruments and controls

(208,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Driving information screen:

: Journey time

: Journey distance

This screen displays the journey time (the

time that has elapsed since the ignition

switch was turned to the “ON” position)

and journey distance (the distance that

has been driven since the ignition switch

was turned to the “ON” position).

Digital speed screen:

1) Speed limit indicator

2) Vehicle speed

This screen displays the current vehicle

speed.

SI-DRIVE mode screen:

This screen indicates the current SI-

DRIVE mode with its throttle angle.

TPMS screen:

This screen displays each tire pressure.

Combination meter display (color LCD)

206

(209,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire

and the tire pressure will be displayed on

the screen in yellow.

NOTE

. The tire pressure values are dis-

played several minutes after driving.

. For information about the specified

value of the air pressure, refer to

“Tires” FP444.

Menu screen entering screen:

While this screen is selected, pull and hold

the “

/SET” switch to enter the menu

screen.

& Menu screens

S03BN07

Pull and hold the “ /SET” switch to enter

the menu screens when all of the following

conditions are satisfied.

. The menu screen entering screen is

selected.

. The “

” information reminder is off.

NOTE

. While driving, the setting items

available on the combination meter

display (color LCD) are limited.

. For function settings and adjust-

ments on the combination meter dis-

play (color LCD), refer to “Function

settings” FP20.

By operating the “

” or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel, you can select the menu.

Pull the “

/SET” switch to enter the

selected menu.

NOTE

If you enter the “Go Back” menu, the

system will return to the previous

screen.

! Screen Settings

S03BN0701

After entering the “Screen Settings” menu,

select one of the following menus.

! Welcome Screen

S03BN070101

The welcome screen can be activated or

deactivated.

! Good-bye Screen

S03BN070106

The good-bye screen can be activated or

deactivated.

! Gauge Initial Movement

S03BN070102

The movement of the meter needles and

gauge needles that occurs when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position can be activated or deactivated.

! Driver Assist Indicator

S03BN070111

This sets whether or not the lighting at the

top of the combination meter flashes when

charging from an external source or when

the mode is switched to hybrid system

operation mode.

! Units

S03BN070108

Changes the units displayed in the combi-

nation meter display (color LCD) and the

type B multi-function display (color LCD).

! Tire Pressure Units

S03BN070109

Changes the units displayed in the Tire

Pressure Monitoring system.

– CONTINUED –

Combination meter display (color LCD)

207

Instruments and controls

(210,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Languages

S03BN070103

Changes the language displayed in the

combination meter display (color LCD)

and the multi-function display (color LCD).

! Warning Volume

S03BN0713

Sets the EyeSight warning volume, the

BSD/RCTA warning volume and the RAB

warning volume.

! EyeSight

S03BN0702

NOTE

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

! RAB

S03BN0712

The Sonar Audible Alarm can be set to on

or off.

NOTE

Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking

System” FP323.

! Sonar Audible Alarm

S03BN071204

When the Reverse Automatic Braking

system is in operation, the warning sound

to notify that an obstacle is detected in the

rear can be activated or deactivated.

! Vehicle Setting

S03BN0708

After entering the “Vehicle Setting” menu,

select one of the following menus.

! Keyless Entry System

S03BN070801

Sets the settings used when the keyless

access function was operated.

. Audible Signal

Sets the electronic chirp that sounds when

the door is locked or unlocked.

. Hazard Warning Flasher

Sets the operation of the hazard warning

flasher that blinks when the door is locked

or unlocked.

. Driver Door Unlock

Select only the driver’s door to unlock or all

doors to unlock simultaneously when the

driver’s door is unlocked.

. Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock

Select only the rear gate to unlock or all

doors to unlock simultaneously when

accessing from the cargo area.

! Defogger

S03BN070802

Sets and customizes the operation of the

defogger.

! Interior Light

S03BN070803

Sets and customizes the interior light off

delay timer.

! Auto Light Sensor

S03BN070804

Sets and customizes the sensitivity of the

auto light sensor.

! Welcome Lighting

S03BN070806

Sets the leaving time and approaching

time.

. Approaching time set

Sets the illumination time of the headlights

that illuminate when you approach the

vehicle.

. Leaving time set

Sets the time until the headlights turn off

when you have moved away from the

vehicle.

! One-touch lane changer

S03BN070807

Sets the one-touch lane changer on/off.

! Default Settings

S03BN0704

Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to

restore customized settings to the factory

default settings. Select “No” to return to the

previous screen without restoring to the

factory default settings.

Combination meter display (color LCD)

208

(211,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3-7. Multi-function display

(color LCD)

S03BP

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to

safe driving when operating the

multi-function display (color LCD)

while the vehicle is in motion. When

operation of the multi-function dis-

play (color LCD) is disturbing your

awareness and ability to concen-

trate on driving, stop the vehicle in

a safe place before performing op-

erations on the screen. Also, do not

concentrate on the display while

driving. Doing so may cause you to

look away from the road and could

result in an accident.

& Features

S03BP25

The multi-function display (color LCD) has

the following functions.

Description Page

Displays useful messages, such

as notification, etc.

210

Displays basic screens (e.g. fuel

consumption screen, etc.)

211

Description Page

Sets and adjusts maintenance

notification

226

Also, the multi-function display (color LCD)

can also be used to set and initialize the

multi-function display (color LCD) itself.

NOTE

. When the vehicle is in motion,

certain functions and selections may

not be available.

. You can set the language and units

for both the multi-function display

(color LCD) and the combination meter

at the same time. For details about

setting the language and units, refer to

“Menu screens” FP207.

. The images displayed in this Own-

er’s Manual are sample images. The

actual image may vary depending on

the market and vehicle specifications.

& Welcome screen

S03BP07

When the driver’s door is opened and

closed, the welcome screen will appear for

a short time.

NOTE

. The welcome screen will disappear

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position while the welcome

screen is displayed.

. The welcome screen can be set to on

or off. For details, refer to “Screen

Settings” FP207.

. For a certain period of time after the

welcome screen has once appeared, it

may not appear again even when the

driver’s door is opened and closed

again. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

& Self-check screen

S03BP09

NOTE

When the setting is “On”, the self check

screen appears. For details about this

setting, refer to “ON/OFF setting”

FP226.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the vehicle self-check will

be performed. The screens corresponding

to the following items will appear one after

another for several seconds each.

– CONTINUED –

Multi-function display (color LCD)

209

Instruments and controls

(212,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine

oil replacement.

2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter

replacement.

3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation.

4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the

interval of inspection and maintenance.

When the checks are performed, the color

of the icon corresponding to the checked

item will change.

If there is a notification, the message will

be displayed. Take the appropriate actions

based on the message indicated.

After the self-check is completed, today’s

date, the stored birthday or the stored

anniversary is displayed.

NOTE

. After performing the maintenance,

change the setting of the correspond-

ing maintenance item. For details, refer

to “Maintenance settings” FP226.

. The maintenance notification screen

will be displayed under either of the

following conditions.

– The period of time remaining until

the registered notification date is 15

days or less.

– The total driving distance remain-

ing until the registered notification

distance is approximately 311 miles

(500 km) or less.

. The maintenance notification screen

will be displayed until either of the

following conditions is satisfied.

– The period of time passed after

the registered notification date is 15

days or more.

– The total distance driven after the

registered notification distance is

approximately 311 miles (500 km) or

more.

& Interruption screen

S03BP19

Example

Useful messages, such as reminder in-

formation, weather information (if

equipped) and traffic information (if

equipped) may interrupt the current screen

and appear on the display accompanied

by a beep. Take proper action according to

the message.

The interruption screen will return to the

original screen after a few seconds. Also,

you can press the INFO button to skip the

interruption screen.

Multi-function display (color LCD)

210

(213,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Basic operation

S03BP06

Control switch

1) INFO button

(up)

/SET (enter)

(down)

Press the INFO button on the steering

wheel to switch the item displayed on the

basic screen. You can operate the items

on the setting screen by using the “

”,

“

” and “ /SET” switches.

& Basic screens

S03BP10

1) Clock

2) Climate control*

3) Outside temperature

4) Information screen

*: This is not displayed on the multi-function

display (color LCD) when the ignition switch

is in the “ACC” position.

While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the basic screen will be

displayed.

! Outside temperature indicator

S03BP1016

The outside temperature is displayed on

the multi-function display (color LCD).

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature around the

sensor. Therefore, the temperature in-

dication may differ from the actual

outside air temperature.

. The temperature unit cannot be

changed.

– CONTINUED –

Multi-function display (color LCD)

211

Instruments and controls

(214,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Climate control screen

S03BP1017

The climate control status is displayed on

the multi-function display (color LCD).

Climate control screen

1) Set temperature indicator

2) FULL AUTO indicator

3) AUTO indicator

4) Airflow mode indicator

5) Air inlet selection indicator

6) Fan speed indicator

7) Air conditioner ON indicator

When operating the climate control sys-

tem, the basic screen switches to the

climate control screen. For details about

climate control operation, refer to “Climate

control panel” FP250.

! Clock

S03BP1018

The clock can be displayed in either 12-

hour display or 24-hour display. For details

about the setting, refer to“Clock” FP228.

Multi-function display (color LCD)

212

(215,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Information screen

S03BP1019

Press the INFO button on the steering wheel to switch the item displayed on the information screen.

Content Description Page

Energy flow screen

Displays energy flow. 214

Electric components operating status screen

Displays the operating status of the electric components and equipment. 214

Prevention safety screen Displays the status of your vehicle. 215

EyeSight screen Displays the operating status of EyeSight. 215

Favorite screen Displays up to 3 optional items. 215

Weather information screen*

Displays weather information. 216

Traffic information*

/Navigation*

screen Displays information linked with the navigation system. 217

Audio screen Displays audio system information. 217

Fuel consumption screen Displays fuel consumption information. 217

Clock screen Displays the clock. 218

Guidance screen Moves to the setting screen.

218

*1: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio

*2: Models with navigation system

– CONTINUED –

Multi-function display (color LCD)

213

Instruments and controls

(216,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Energy flow screen

S03BP101914

1) Engine

2) Electric motor

3) High voltage battery

4) Hybrid Battery Charge Status

The screen displays energy flow.

NOTE

The remaining power in the high vol-

tage battery decreases depends on the

driving conditions of the vehicle. Also,

the remaining amount may decrease

due to system power consumption

even though the vehicle is not being

driven.

! Electric components operation

screen

S03BP101901

1) Lane Departure/Sway Warning indicator

2) Pre-Collision Braking System indicator

3) Stop lights

4) Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

5) BSD/RCTA

6) Headlights*

7) Front fog lights

8) Turn signals

9) Auto on/off headlights

*: The daytime running lights are not dis-

played.

This screen displays the electric compo-

nents operation status of the vehicle.

NOTE

. Indicators do not display for func-

tions that are not equipped to the

vehicle.

. The indicators of functions that are

not operating are displayed in grey.

. If the multi-function display (color

LCD) unit, battery, or fuse is removed,

the Auto on/off headlights indicator

turns off on the multi-function display

(color LCD). After reinstalling the re-

moved multi-function display (color

LCD) unit, battery, or fuse to the

vehicle, the Auto on/off headlights

indicator will appear once more if the

light control switch is turned to the

“AUTO” position.

. The exterior lights indicators on the

screen do not notify the driver when the

bulbs burn out. The indicators on the

screen still illuminate.

Multi-function display (color LCD)

214

(217,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Prevention safety screen

S03BP101902

1) Telltale screen

2) Steering angle

3) Vehicle posture

4) Running condition

This screen displays the driving status of

the vehicle and the operation status func-

tions. For functions that are operating, the

indicator will illuminate or flash.

NOTE

. The vehicle posture indication may

differ from the actual vehicle posture.

. When X-MODE has turned on, the

screen of the multi-function display is

switched to the prevention safety

screen.

! EyeSight screen

S03BP101903

1) Lead vehicle indicator

2) Your own vehicle indicator

3) Stop lights

4) Road line indicator

5) Lane indicator

This screen displays the status of the

EyeSight system. The lead vehicle indica-

tor moves forward and backward depend-

ing on the distance with the vehicle in front.

For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual

supplement for the EyeSight system.

! Favorite screen

S03BP101904

Favorite screen (display example)

This screen displays up to three optional

pieces of information that can be selected

from the following items.

– CONTINUED –

Multi-function display (color LCD)

215

Instruments and controls

(218,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Item Details

The engine coolant temperature is

displayed.

The engine oil temperature is

displayed.

The average vehicle speed is

displayed.

The accelerator opening ratio is

displayed.

The vehicle posture is displayed.

The current rate of fuel consump-

tion is displayed.

The direction of the vehicle is

displayed.*

The weather information is dis-

played.*

Item Details

The posted speed limit of the road

you are currently driving on is

displayed.*

The calendar is displayed.

Nothing is displayed.

*1: If equipped

*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio

NOTE

Some displayed items may be not

displayed depending on the model

and specifications.

The items shown in the favorite screen can

be changed. For details, refer to “Favorite

setting” FP225.

! Weather information screen (if

equipped)

S03BP101905

1) Weather information for the destination*

2) Weather information for the current loca-

tion

*: Only when a destination is set in the

navigation system

The weather information is displayed on

the screen.

NOTE

. When all of the following conditions

are satisfied, weather information is

displayed.

– The vehicle is equipped with an

audio and navigation system for

SiriusXM satellite radio.

– You have a current SiriusXM

Multi-function display (color LCD)

216

(219,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

satellite radio subscription.

. The weather forecast for the set

destination remains displayed until a

new destination is set or until you reach

the destination.

. Depending on the reception timing

of XM, the display of weather informa-

tion may be delayed.

! Navigation screen (models with

navigation system)

S03BP101906

The navigation system information to the

destination is displayed on the screen.

NOTE

When a destination is not set in the

navigation system, the compass orien-

tation, name, route sign and speed limit

of the road the vehicle is traveling on

remain displayed on the screen.

! Audio screen

S03BP101907

The screen of the currently selected audio

source is displayed.

For details about how to use the audio set,

refer to the separate navigation/audio

Owner’s Manual.

! Fuel consumption screen

S03BP101908

1) Driving range on remaining fuel

2) Average fuel consumption corresponding

to the driving distance of each trip meter

3) Current fuel consumption

The fuel consumption information is dis-

played on the screen.

NOTE

The driving range on remaining fuel is

only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

remaining fuel, so you must immedi-

ately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

– CONTINUED –

Multi-function display (color LCD)

217

Instruments and controls

(220,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Clock/date screen

S03BP101909

The time and date are displayed.

You can adjust the time and date. For

details, refer to “Clock” FP228.

! Guidance screen

S03BP101910

When the INFO button on the steering

wheel is pressed and held on this screen,

the setting screen can be displayed.

For details, refer to “Setting screen”

FP218.

NOTE

When the combination meter display

(color LCD) is displaying the menu

screen entering screen, the system will

not move to the setting screen even if

the INFO button is pressed and held.

& Setting screen

S03BP28

1. Press and hold the INFO button on the

guidance screen. The top menu is dis-

played.

2. Operate the “

” or “ ” switch to

select the preferred menu from the top

menu.

3. Pull the “

/SET” switch to enter the

selected menu.

4. Operate the “

” or “ ” switch to

select the preferred menu from the 2nd

menu.

5. Pull the “

/SET” switch to enter the

selected menu.

Multi-function display (color LCD)

218

(221,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

The menu list is as follows.

Top menu 2nd menu Description Page

Time/Date

Time/Date* Set and adjust the time and date. 12h or 24h format can be selected. 221

Birthday Set a birthday. 221

Anniversary Set an anniversary day. 221

Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —

High voltage

battery set-

tings

High voltage battery cooling

screen

Set to display a message when the cooling is

required during charging.

On/Off 221

High voltage battery heating

setting

Set to warm the high voltage battery during

charging.

On/Off 223

Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —

Charge set-

tings

Charge timer settings Set timer charging. 223

Maximum charge current setting Set the maximum current value for charging. 223

Charge cable connector lock

mode

Configure the charge cable lock/unlock setting. 224

Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —

Display/Beep

Screen Off* Turn the screen on or off. Yes or No 224

Favorite Set and customize the triple meter. 225

Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off 225

Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off 225

Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —

– CONTINUED –

Multi-function display (color LCD)

219

Instruments and controls

(222,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Top menu 2nd menu Description Page

Maintenance

Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. 226

Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 226

Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 226

Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 226

ON/OFF

Turn on or off the self-check screen that is

activated when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

On or Off 226

Clear All Settings Clear all settings for maintenance items. Yes or No 227

Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —

Initialize

— Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No 227

Go Back

— Return to the setting screen.

—

*: You can also set this while driving.

Multi-function display (color LCD)

220

(223,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Date and time settings

S03BP2801

You can set the date, time and 12h or 24h

format settings.

! Current date and time setting

S03BP280101

For details about clock setting, refer to

“Clock” FP228.

! Birthday setting

S03BP280102

If a birthday or anniversary is approaching,

a message will be displayed when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position. This function can be set to on or

off. For details, refer to “Bypass screen

setting” FP225.

1. Select “Birthday” from the 2nd menu in

the setting screen. Refer to “Setting

screen” FP218.

2. Select from the list the number that you

want to register.

3. Enter the date and the text by using the

control switches.

4. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

without applying the setting changes.

NOTE

You can store a maximum of 5 birth-

days.

! Anniversary setting

S03BP280103

1. The procedure for setting an anniver-

sary is the same as “Birthday setting”

FP221, except that in step 1 “Anniversary”

is selected.

NOTE

You can store a maximum of 5 anniver-

saries.

! High voltage battery settings

S03BP2901

Set to reduce the effects of air temperature

on the high voltage battery during char-

ging.

! High voltage battery cooling

screen setting

S03BP290101

When the high voltage battery shows a

high temperature, use the climate control

system to cool it down before charging.

The high voltage battery is cooled in order

to protect it.

– CONTINUED –

Multi-function display (color LCD)

221

Instruments and controls

(224,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Check screen

If the high voltage battery is hot when the

ignition switch is turned off, a check screen

is displayed. This check screen can be

turned on and off in the “High voltage

battery cooling screen” settings on the

multi-function display.

1. Select “High voltage battery cooling

screen” from the 2nd menu in setting

screen. Refer to “Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select “On” to display the check screen

when the high voltage battery is high

temperature. Select “Off” to inactive the

check screen.

3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

without applying the setting changes.

NOTE

. When the high voltage battery is

above a certain temperature and the

ignition switch is turned off, a check

screen is displayed on the multi-func-

tion display. The system activates ap-

proximately 5 minutes after the user

selects YES on the screen and inserts

the charging gun.

. If a check screen is set to “Off”, the

high voltage battery cooling function

will not operate.

. When charging starts, the high vol-

tage battery cooling function operates

if the high voltage battery temperature

is hot.

. The charging indicator is illuminated

while the high voltage battery cooling

function is on standby or operating.

. The high voltage battery cooling

function is implemented for a maximum

of approximately 30 minutes. However,

when the “Departure time” is set and

there is not sufficient time between the

current time and the time that charging

will complete, the high voltage battery

cooling function operation time may

become shorter.

. When there is a small amount of

remaining charge in the high voltage

battery, even if the high voltage battery

is hot, the high voltage battery cooling

function may not be implemented.

. When the following operations are

performed while the high voltage bat-

tery cooling function is operating, the

high voltage battery cooling operation

stops.

– A door is opened

– The engine hood is opened

– The ignition switch is turned to

any mode other than off

– The shift position is changed to

Multi-function display (color LCD)

222

(225,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

any position other than P

– The remote climate control sys-

tem is operated

– “Charge Now” is implemented

– The amount of remaining charge

in the high voltage battery is below a

certain amount

. The high voltage battery cooling

function uses the power of the external

power source. While the high voltage

battery cooling function is operating,

the amount of the remaining charge of

the high voltage battery increases and

decreases in a certain range, and does

not increase as in normal charging.

! High voltage battery heating

setting

S03BP290102

When the outside temperature is low and a

charge cable is connected to the vehicle,

this function automatically heats up the

high voltage battery to a certain tempera-

ture.

1. The setting procedure is the same as

battery cooling setting, but select the “High

voltage battery heating setting” item in

step 1.

NOTE

. When the charge cable is removed

from the vehicle or remains connected

to the vehicle for approximately 3 days,

the system automatically stops.

. When Remote Battery Charging

Timer is used, this function will operate

according to the timer settings.

. When the high voltage battery heat-

ing function is operating, the charging

indicator illuminates.

. When the high voltage battery heat-

ing function is operating during char-

ging, the charging time may be longer

than normal.

. If the outside temperature becomes

high while the high voltage battery

heating function is operating, charging

may complete earlier than “Departure

time” set.

. When the high voltage battery is

extremely cold (below approximately

−228F (−308C)) under the influence of

the outside temperature, it may not be

possible to start the hybrid system. In

this case, try to start the hybrid system

again after the temperature of the high

voltage battery increases due to the

outside temperature increase etc.

! Charge settings

S03BP30

Set the functions related to charging.

! Charge timer settings

S03BP3001

Set the Remote Battery Charging Timer.

For details, refer to “Using the Remote

Battery Charging Timer” FP57.

! Maximum charge current setting

S03BP3002

Set the value of the maximum charge

current while charging.

– CONTINUED –

Multi-function display (color LCD)

223

Instruments and controls

(226,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1. Select “Maximum charge current

setting” from the 2nd menu in setting

screen. Refer to “Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select the setting.

3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

without applying the setting changes.

NOTE

. If the breaker still trips while char-

ging, even after changing the upper

limit of the charging current, check if

the connected power source meets the

specified charging conditions.

. Restricting the charging current will

lengthen the charging time.

! Charge cable connector lock

mode setting

S03BP3003

Set the charge cable connector mode for

locking/unlocking.

1. Select “Charge cable connector lock

mode” from the 2nd menu in setting

screen. Refer to “Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select the setting.

. Auto lock & Auto unlock:

Lock the cable when it is inserted, and

unlock the cable automatically when

charging is completed.

. Auto lock:

Lock the cable when it is inserted

automatically.

. Manual lock:

Lock and unlock are performed manu-

ally.

3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

without applying the setting changes.

! Display/Beep settings

S03BP2805

You can set the display settings and

volume settings.

! Screen OFF setting

S03BP280501

1. Select “Screen Off” from the 2nd menu

in setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”

FP218.

2. Select “Yes” to turn off the screen.

Select “No” to return to the previous

screen.

Restoring the screen

When the INFO button is operated after

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” or

Multi-function display (color LCD)

224

(227,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

“ACC” position, the screen will be restored.

The screen will be restored with the basic

screen that was displayed when the

screen was turned off.

NOTE

While the screen is off, the screen

switches to the climate control screen

only when the climate control system is

operated.

! Favorite setting

S03BP280502

1. Select the “Favorite” from the 2nd

menu in setting screen. Refer to “Setting

screen” FP218.

2. Set the desired items by using the

control switches. For details about items,

refer to “Favorite screen” FP215.

3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

without applying the setting changes.

NOTE

. You can display a maximum of the 3

items.

. The same item cannot be selected

for the left, center or right location.

. Weather information for 3 hours

later or 6 hours later can be displayed.

! Bypass screen setting

S03BP280503

1. Select “Bypass Screen” from the 2nd

menu in the setting screen. Refer to

“Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the display

of items on or off by using the control

switches.

3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

without applying the setting changes.

NOTE

Traffic information setting is only dis-

played for the audio unit with SiriusXM

satellite radio.

! Beep setting

S03BP280504

1. Select “Beep” from the 2nd menu in the

setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”

FP218.

2. Set the beep volume by using the

control switches.

3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

without applying the setting changes.

– CONTINUED –

Multi-function display (color LCD)

225

Instruments and controls

(228,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Maintenance settings

S03BP2803

You can set maintenance reminders.

! Engine oil setting

S03BP280301

1. Select “Engine Oil” from the 2nd menu

in the setting screen. Refer to “Setting

screen” FP218.

2. Set the date and distance of the

reminder by using the control switches.

3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select

“Update” to change the notification dis-

tance to the default value. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

without applying the setting changes.

NOTE

. The reminder will be displayed by

either date or distance in accordance

with the setting.

. Even when either “Day” or “Dis-

tance” are displayed as “_ _” a pop-up

screen will appear.

. The reminder will be displayed until

either of the following conditions is

satisfied.

– The period of time passed after

the registered notification date is 15

days or more.

– The total distance driven after the

registered notification distance is

approximately 311 miles (500 km) or

more.

! Oil filter setting

S03BP280302

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine oil setting” FP226, but select the

“Oil Filter” item in step 1.

! Tires setting

S03BP280303

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine oil setting” FP226, but select the

“Tires” item in step 1.

! Maintenance schedule setting

S03BP280304

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine oil setting” FP226, but select the

“Maintenance Schedule” item in step 1.

! ON/OFF setting

S03BP280305

1. Select “ON/OFF” from the 2nd menu

on the setting screen. Refer to “Setting

screen” FP218.

2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the opening

screen on or off by using the control

switches.

3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

without applying the setting changes.

Multi-function display (color LCD)

226

(229,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Clear All setting

S03BP280306

1. Select “Clear All Settings” from the 2nd

menu on the setting screen. Refer to

“Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using the

control switches.

! Initialize

S03BP2804

You can initialize the items that have been

set to your preference.

1. Select “Initialize” from the 2nd menu on

the setting screen. Refer to “Setting

screen” FP218.

2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using the

control switches.

& How to get the source code

using the open source

S03BP29

Free/Open Source Software Information

This product contains Free/Open Source

Software (FOSS).

The license information and/or the source

code of such FOSS can be found at the

following URL.

http://www.globaldenso.com/en/open-

source/ivi/subaru/

Multi-function display (color LCD)

227

Instruments and controls

(230,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3-8. Clock

S03AF

For models with a SUBARU genuine

navigation and/or audio system, the clock

can be adjusted using either auto mode or

manual mode.

. Auto mode: automatic clock adjustment

. Manual mode: manual clock adjust-

ment

& Setting the clock manually

S03AF03

NOTE

When the combination meter display

(color LCD) is displaying the menu

screen entering screen, the system will

not move to the selection screen even if

the “INFO” button is pressed and held.

Before adjusting the clock, be sure to

change the combination meter display

(color LCD) to a screen other than the

menu screen entering screen.

1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.

2. Press the button.

3. Select “Settings”.

4. Select “Vehicle”.

5. Select “Clock adjustment” and then

select “Manual”.

1) “INFO” button

6. Press the “INFO” button on the steer-

ing wheel to display the guidance screen.

Clock

228

(231,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

7. While displaying the guidance screen,

press and hold the “INFO” button on the

steering wheel. The screen goes to the

selection screen.

1) (up)

/SET (enter)

(down)

8. Pull the “ ” or “ ” switch to select the

item.

9. Select “Time/Date” and pull the /SET

switch.

10. Select “Time/Date” and pull the /SET

switch.

NOTE

If “Clock adjustment” is not in manual

mode, “Time/Date” cannot be selected.

Be sure to perform steps 2 through 5.

– CONTINUED –

Clock

229

Instruments and controls

(232,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

11. Pull the “ ”, “ ” switches to scroll

through to the items you can set.

(1) Use the

/ SET switch to choose

the item you would like to change.

(2) Pull the “

”, “ ” switches to

adjust the items.

12. Select “Set” and pull the

/SET switch

to complete the clock setting.

Select “Go Back” to return to the previous

screen without saving settings.

NOTE

The Birthday/Anniversary and mainte-

nance reminder system function are

based on the time and date on the

multifunction display (color LCD).

& Setting the clock automati-

cally

S03AF02

1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.

2. Press the button.

3. Select “Settings”.

4. Select “Vehicle”.

5. Select “Clock adjustment” and then

select “Auto”.

6. Press the

button again to complete

the setting.

! Models with navigation system

S03AF0201

The clock will be set automatically where a

GPS signal is available.

! Models without navigation system

S03AF0202

The clock will be set and adjusted auto-

matically when a smartphone is connected

via Bluetooth

for transferring phonebook

data.

1. Register the smartphone to the audio

system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth

SETTINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s

Manual for the audio/navigation system.

2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-

tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth SET-

TINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s

Manual for the audio/navigation system.

The clock will be adjusted automatically.

NOTE

Depending on the model of smart-

phone, the settings of the connected

smartphone may need to be changed.

(ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-

tion settings may need to be activated.)

For details, check the instructions on

connecting smartphones.

& Regulatory information

S03AF04

The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are

registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc.

Clock

230

(233,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3-9. Light control switch

S03AH

& Precautions and tips

S03AH06

CAUTION

. Use of any lights for a long period

of time while the hybrid system is

not running can cause the 12 V

battery to discharge.

. Before leaving the vehicle, make

sure that the lights are turned off.

If the vehicle is left unattended

for a long time with the lights

illuminated, the 12 V battery may

be discharged.

The light control switch operates when the

push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the push-button ignition

switch is turned off.

& Headlights

S03AH01

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the turn signal lever.

“

” position:

Instrument panel illumination, headlights,

parking lights, front side marker lights, rear

side marker lights, tail lights and license

plate lights are on.

“

” position:

Instrument panel illumination, parking

lights, front side marker lights, rear side

marker lights, tail lights and license plate

lights are on.

“

” position:

. Auto on/off headlights

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, the instrument panel illumination,

headlights, parking lights, front side mar-

ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are automatically

on or off depending on the level of the

ambient light.

NOTE

The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-

lights can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer

for details. Also, the setting can be

changed using the display. For details,

refer to “Vehicle Setting” FP208.

. Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights

While the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position, the headlights will auto-

matically turn on when the windshield

wipers operate several times. The head-

lights will automatically turn off when the

wipers stop.

NOTE

The ON/OFF setting of this function can

be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-

tails.

“

” position:

The headlights are all off.

– CONTINUED –

Light control switch

231

Instruments and controls

(234,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Welcome lighting function

S03AH0103

The welcome lighting function turns on the

low beam headlight for smooth approach-

ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or

in a dark place.

The function is activated while all of the

following conditions are met.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

position.

. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/

off headlights.

When approaching:

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

automatically illuminate when unlocking

the doors and the rear gate by using the

remote keyless entry system.

The low beam headlights will remain

illuminated for 30 seconds*

and then turn

off. However, if any of the following

operations is done, the low beam head-

lights will turn off.

. The doors are locked.

. The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

When exiting:

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

remain illuminated even when either of the

following operation is done.

. The push-button ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” status.

The low beam headlights will turn off under

any of the following conditions.

. 3 minutes have passed since the low

beam headlights were illuminated by the

welcome lighting function.

. 30 seconds have passed since the door

is opened and closed.*

. The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

. The locking procedure is performed

twice. When performing the unlocking

procedure after performing the locking

procedure, perform the locking procedure

twice again.

*1: The setting for the period of time in which the

low beam headlights remain on by the

welcome lighting function can be changed

by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for details.

! Sensor for the auto on/off head-

lights

S03AH0101

The sensor is on the instrument panel as

shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

If any object is placed on or near the

sensor, the sensor may not detect

the level of the ambient light cor-

rectly and the auto on/off headlights

may not operate properly.

Light control switch

232

(235,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& High/low beam change (dim-

mer)

S03AH02

1) High beam

2) Low beam

When the headlights are on high beam, the

high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter is also on.

& Headlight flasher

S03AH03

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing

position for more than just a few

seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

toward you and then release it. The high

beam will stay on for as long as you hold

the lever.

When the headlights are on high beam, the

high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter also illuminates.

& High beam assist function

S03AH07

NOTE

. The high beam assist function uti-

lizes the stereo camera installed at the

position of the front map lights.

. For details on how to handle the

stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s

Manual supplement for the EyeSight

system.

The high beam assist function automati-

cally changes the headlight from high

beam to low beam (or vice versa).

When all of the following conditions are

met, the headlight will change to high

beam.

. When the vehicle speed increases to or

above 20 mph (32 km/h).

. There is no preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

. The forward area of the vehicle is dark.

. The road does not have a sharp curve.

When any of the following conditions is

met, the headlight will change to low beam.

. When the vehicle speed decreases to

or below 10 mph (16 km/h).

. When the forward area of the vehicle is

bright.

. When there is a preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Light control switch

233

Instruments and controls

(236,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. When the EyeSight system is malfunc-

tioning or is temporarily stopped.

NOTE

The factory setting (default setting) for

this function is set as “operational”.

This setting can be changed to OFF

(non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.

For more details, contact a SUBARU

dealer.

! How to use the high beam assist

function

S03AH0701

The high beam assist function will be

activated when all the following conditions

are met.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the low beam headlights are

on automatically.

. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.

High beam assist indicator light

When the high beam assist function is

activated, the high beam assist indicator

light on the combination meter will illumi-

nate.

NOTE

If the high beam assist function is

malfunctioning or is temporarily

stopped, the headlight will be fixed at

low beam.

! How to temporarily lower the sensi-

tivity of the high beam assist func-

tion

S03AH0704

The sensitivity of the high beam assist

function can be lowered by performing the

following operations.

1. Before turning the ignition switch to the

“ON” position, set the light control switch to

the “AUTO” position and push the signal

lever forward (high beam position).

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and within approximately 15 sec-

onds, press the “

/ ” (following distance

setting) switch more than 10 times con-

secutively.

When the sensitivity of the high beam

assist function is lowered, the EyeSight

temporary stop indicator (white) “

” on

the combination meter will flash.

NOTE

. The sensitivity of the high beam

assist function cannot be lowered in

the following conditions.

– Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise

Control is in operation.

– The EyeSight warning indicator

(yellow) is illuminated.

. The sensitivity of the high beam

assist function returns to normal level

the next time the ignition switch is

Light control switch

234

(237,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

turned to the “OFF” position and the

hybrid system is restarted.

! How to change the headlight mode

manually

S03AH0702

Change to the low beam:

When you return the turn signal lever to the

center position, the high beam assist

function will turn off and the high beam

assist indicator light will turn off.

Change to the high beam:

When you turn the light control switch to

the “

” position, the headlight mode will

be changed to the high beam.

At this time, the high beam assist function

will turn off, the high beam assist indicator

will turn off and the high beam indicator

light will turn on.

NOTE

. After manually changing the head-

light mode to the high beam, if you turn

on the high beam assist function,

return the light control switch to the

“AUTO” position.

. When manually changing the head-

light mode to the high beam, if you turn

the light control switch to the “

”

position, the instrument panel illumina-

tion, parking lights, front side marker

lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights will be on.

! Tips for the high beam assist sys-

tem

S03AH0703

. The high beam assist function recog-

nizes the conditions surrounding the ve-

hicle based on the brightness of illumina-

tion ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore,

the headlight mode may switch in some

situations that do not match to the driver’s

sense.

. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be

detected.

. Under the following situations, the

brightness of ambient illumination may

not be detected correctly and the high

beam assist function may not work prop-

erly. As a result, the glare of the high beam

may disturb the oncoming vehicle or

vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode

may continue although there are no

oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead.

In the such cases, change the headlight

mode manually.

– In bad weather (fog, snow, sand

storm, heavy rain, etc.).

– When the windshield glass is dirty or

fogged.

– When the windshield is cracked or

damaged.

– When the stereo camera is de-

formed or the stereo camera lenses

are dirty.

– If there are lights similar to the

headlights or the tail lights in the

surrounding area.

– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-

hicle ahead is driven without its head-

lights and tail lights on.

– If the headlights of an oncoming

vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle

ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the

light beams are not aimed correctly.

– When a rapid change of brightness

continues while driving.

– When driving on a road with many

ups and downs or uneven surfaces.

– When driving on a road with many

curves.

– When there are some objects that

reflect light strongly, such as a road

sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.

– When the rear part of the vehicle

ahead, such as a container, reflects

light strongly.

– When the headlights of your vehicle

are damaged or dirty.

– When your vehicle is tilted, such as

in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is

being towed.

– Immediately after the hybrid system

has started.

. In the following conditions, the head-

light mode will not be automatically chan-

– CONTINUED –

Light control switch

235

Instruments and controls

(238,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

ged from the high beam to the low beam.

– When your vehicle passes an on-

coming vehicle suddenly in a blind

curve.

– When another vehicle passes in

front of your vehicle.

– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-

hicle ahead comes in and out of view

because of continuous curves, median

strips, roadside trees, etc.

. If the stereo camera detects the light of

the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle,

the headlight mode may change from the

high beam to the low beam automatically.

. The headlight mode may change from

the high beam to the low beam, or the low

beam mode may continue, when affected

by a street light, traffic signal, illumination

of an advertisement board, or a reflective

object such as a road sign and signboard.

. The timing of the change of headlight

mode may differ due to the following

factors.

– Color or brightness of the headlights

of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights

of a vehicle ahead.

– The headlights of the oncoming

vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle

ahead are covered with mud, snow,

etc.

– Movement and direction of an on-

coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.

– When the headlights of an oncom-

ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle

ahead illuminate on only one side.

– When the oncoming vehicle or

vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.

– Conditions of a road (slope, curve,

road surface, etc.).

– Number of passengers and weight

of loaded cargo.

– Limitation of the detection ability of

the stereo camera.

& Daytime running light system

S03AH04

WARNING

When the daytime running lights are

illuminated, the tail lights do not

illuminate. When it becomes dark

outside, turn the light switch to the

“

” position to illuminate the head-

lights and tail lights. This will im-

prove visibility and allow other dri-

vers to see your vehicle more easily.

The daytime running lights will automati-

cally illuminate when the following condi-

tions are fulfilled.

. The hybrid system is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

“

” or off position.

. The select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

NOTE

When the light switch is in the “ ”

position, the instrument panel illumina-

tion, front side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are also illumi-

nated.

Light control switch

236

(239,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3-10. Steering Responsive

Headlight (SRH)

S03BL

1) The target area of illumination when SRH

is activated.

2) The target area of illumination when SRH

is not activated.

SRH is a function that automatically moves

the headlight beam to the left or right in

accordance with the steering angle and

vehicle speed. This function helps to

improve the visibility at night by illuminat-

ing the road ahead at corners and inter-

sections.

You can turn the SRH function on or off by

pressing the SRH OFF switch.

1) SRH OFF indicator

The SRH OFF indicator on the combina-

tion meter turns off when SRH is turned on.

The SRH OFF indicator on the combina-

tion meter illuminates when SRH is turned

off.

If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH OFF

indicator on the combination meter flashes

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position. It indicates that SRH has been

deactivated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for

an inspection.

NOTE

. If you turn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position with SRH turned off and

then start the hybrid system again, SRH

will automatically turn on.

. When you turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position, the SRH OFF indi-

cator will illuminate and turn off after

several seconds.

. SRH only activates when the vehicle

is traveling forward at the speed of

approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.

Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)

237

Instruments and controls

(240,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3-11. Headlight beam leveler

S03AT

The LED headlights produce more light

than conventional halogen headlights.

When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load

and the headlight beams are angled

upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle

may experience glare.

To prevent this, the automatic headlight

beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the

optimum height automatically depending

on the load the vehicle is carrying.

3-12. Fog light switch

S03BA

1) Headlight switch

2) Fog light switch

The front fog lights will turn on when the

fog light switch is placed in the “

” position

while the headlights are in the following

condition.

. While the headlight switch is in the “

”

position.

. While the headlight switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the low beam head-

lights turn on automatically.

To turn off the front fog lights, turn the

switch back down to the “

” position.

The indicator light on the combination

meter will illuminate when the front fog

lights are illuminated.

Headlight beam leveler

238

(241,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3-13. Turn signal lever

S03AI

1) Right turn

2) Lane change right signal

3) Lane change left signal

4) Left turn

If the lever does not return after cornering,

return the lever to the neutral position by

hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and hold it

during the lane change. The lever will

return automatically to the neutral position

when you release it.

& One-touch lane changer

S03AI01

To flash the turn signal and turn signal

indicator light three times, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and

immediately release it.

NOTE

The operational/non-operational

setting of the one-touch lane changer

can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for

details. The setting can also be chan-

ged by operating the combination me-

ter display (color LCD). For details,

refer to “Vehicle Setting” FP208.

3-14. Wiper and washer

S03AM

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the wind-

shield is sufficiently warmed by the

defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can

freeze on the windshield, blocking

your view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 10 sec-

onds, or when the washer fluid

tank is empty. This may cause

overheating of the washer motor.

Check the washer fluid level fre-

quently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers when

the windshield or rear window is

dry. This may scratch the glass,

damage the blade rubbers and

might cause the wiper motor to

fail. Before operating the wiper

on a dry windshield or rear win-

dow, always use the windshield

washer.

– CONTINUED –

Turn signal lever

239

Instruments and controls

(242,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. In freezing weather, be sure that

the blade rubbers are not frozen

to the windshield or rear window

before switching on the wipers.

Attempting to operate the wiper

with the blades frozen to the

window glass could cause not

only the blade rubbers to be

damaged but also might cause

the wiper motor to fail. If the blade

rubbers are frozen to the window

glass, be sure to operate the

defroster, windshield wiper dei-

cer or rear window defogger

before turning on the wiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera-

tion because of ice or some other

obstruction on the window, this

might cause the wiper motor to

fail even if the wiper switch is

turned off. If this occurs,

promptly stop the vehicle in a

safe place, turn the ignition

switch to the “OFF” position and

clean the window glass to allow

proper wiper operation.

. Use clean water if windshield

washer fluid is unavailable. In

areas where water freezes in

winter, use SUBARU Windshield

Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Refer to “Windshield washer

fluid” FP423.

. Do not clean the blade rubbers

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

blade rubbers.

NOTE

. The windshield wiper motor is pro-

tected against overloads by a circuit

breaker. If the motor operates continu-

ously under an unusually heavy load,

the circuit breaker may trip to stop the

motor temporarily. If this happens, park

your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the

wiper switch, and wait for approxi-

mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker

will reset itself, and the wipers will

again operate normally.

. Clean your blade rubbers and win-

dow glass periodically with a washer

solution to prevent streaking, and to

remove accumulations of road salt or

road film. Operate the windshield

washer for at least 1 second so that

washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield or rear window.

. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-

rial on the windshield or the blade

rubbers results in jerky wiper operation

and streaking on the glass. If you

cannot remove those streaks after

operating the washer or if the wiper

operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-

face of the windshield or rear window

and the blade rubbers using a sponge

or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,

rinse the window glass and blade

rubbers with clean water. The glass is

clean if no beads form on the glass

when you rinse with water.

. If you cannot eliminate the streaking

even after following this procedure,

replace the blade rubbers with new

ones. For replacement instructions,

refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”

FP424.

Wiper and washer

240

(243,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Windshield wiper and washer

switches

S03AM01

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

! Operating the wiper lever

S03AM0106

: Mist operation (for a single wipe)

: Off

: Intermittent operation

: Low speed operation

: High speed operation

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the

lever up. The wipers operate until you

release the lever.

! Wiper intermittent time control

S03AM0103

When the wiper switch is in the “ ”

position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-

ing interval of the wiper. The operating

interval can be adjusted in several steps

from the shortest interval to the longest.

! Windshield washer

S03AM0104

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper

control lever toward you. The washer fluid

sprays until you release the lever. The

wipers operate while you pull the lever.

Windshield washer fluid warning light

– CONTINUED –

Wiper and washer

241

Instruments and controls

(244,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

NOTE

The windshield washer fluid warning

light illuminates when the washer fluid

level in the tank has dropped to the

lower limit. If the warning light illumi-

nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the

refilling procedure, refer to “Wind-

shield washer fluid” FP423.

& Rear window wiper and

washer switch

S03AM02

: Washer operation (accompanied by

wiper operation)

: Continuous operation

: Intermittent operation

: Off

: Washer operation (accompanied by

wiper operation)

! Rear wiper

S03AM0201

With the switch turned to the “ ” position,

the rear wiper will operate intermittently at

intervals corresponding to the vehicle

speed. In this position, when you move

the select lever to the “R” (reverse)

position, the rear wiper will switch to

continuous operation. When you move

the select lever from the “R” (reverse)

position to another position, the rear wiper

will return to intermittent operation.

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:

Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off

“

” position, if the front windshield wiper is

operating continuously, the rear wiper will

operate intermittently when you move the

select lever to the “R” (reverse) position.

The factory setting (default setting) of the

reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as

follows.

. U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational

This setting can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for

details.

CAUTION

Do not attach anything that disturbs

the rear wiper operation on the rear

gate. Doing so may damage the rear

wiper when it operates.

! Washer

S03AM0202

To wash the rear window, turn the knob to

the “

” position. The washer fluid sprays

and the wiper operates until you release

the knob.

Wiper and washer

242

(245,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3-15. Mirrors

S03AP

Always check that the inside and outside

mirrors are properly adjusted before you

start driving.

& Inside mirror

S03AP01

1) Normal position

2) Anti-glare position

Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.

To reduce glare from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the anti-

glare position.

& Outside mirrors

S03AP03

! Convex mirror (passenger side)

S03AP0301

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex

mirror and farther away than when

viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the

convex mirror to judge the distance

of vehicles behind you when chan-

ging lanes. Use the inside mirror (or

glance backwards) to determine the

actual size and distance of objects

that you view in convex mirror.

CAUTION

Make sure to adjust the mirrors

before driving.

! Remote control mirror switch

S03AP0302

: Select side to adjust

: Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“ACC” position.

1. Turn the control switch to the side that

you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,

“R” is for the right mirror.

2. Move the control switch in the direction

you want to move the mirror.

3. Return the control switch to the neutral

position to prevent unintentional opera-

tion.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-

ally.

Mirrors

243

Instruments and controls

(246,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3-16. Defogger and deicer

S03BI

1) Rear window defogger

2) Outside mirror defogger

3) Windshield wiper deicer

The vehicle is equipped with the defogger

and the deicer system. The defogger and

deicer system is activated only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

Rear window defogger button and outside

mirror defogger button

To activate simultaneously the rear win-

dow defogger, outside mirror defogger and

windshield wiper deicer, press the control

switch that is located on the climate control

panel. The indicator light on the control

switch illuminates while the defogger and

deicer system is activated.

To turn them off, press the control switch

again. They also turn off when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF”

position.

The defogger and deicer system will

automatically shut off after approximately

15 minutes. If the rear window and the

outside mirrors have been cleared and the

windshield blade rubbers have been

deiced completely before that time, press

the control switch to turn them off.

For climate control system (type B and

C), it is possible for the defogger and

deicer system to be set to continuous

operation mode by a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

Also, it is possible to set the defogger and

deicer system for the continuous operation

mode. For details, refer to “Vehicle Setting”

FP208.

CAUTION

. To prevent the 12 V battery from

being discharged, do not operate

the defogger and deicer system

continuously for any longer than

necessary.

. Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the rear window. They may da-

mage the conductors printed on

the window.

Defogger and deicer

244

(247,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

NOTE

. Turn on the defogger and deicer

system if the wipers are frozen to the

windshield.

. If the windshield is covered with

snow, remove the snow so that the

windshield wiper deicer works effec-

tively.

. While the defogger and deicer sys-

tem is in the continuous operation

mode:

– If the vehicle speed remains at 9

mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15

minutes, the windshield wiper dei-

cer system automatically stops op-

erating. However, the rear window

defogger system and outside mirror

defogger system maintain continu-

ous operation in this condition.

– If the 12 V battery voltage drops

below the permissible level, contin-

uous operation of the defogger

system and deicer system is can-

celed and the system stops operat-

ing.

3-17. Tilt/telescopic steering

wheel

S03BF

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel

tilt/telescopic position while driv-

ing. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in per-

sonal injury.

. If the lever cannot be raised to the

fixed position, adjust the steering

wheel again. It is dangerous to

drive without locking the steering

wheel. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in per-

sonal injury.

1) Tilt adjustment

2) Telescopic adjustment

3) Tilt/telescopic lock lever

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to “Front

seats” FP73.

2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

level.

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and down,

and forward and backward.

– CONTINUED –

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

245

Instruments and controls

(248,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Heated Steering Wheel sys-

tem (if equipped)

S03BF01

The Heated Steering Wheel system

warms the steering wheel at a constant

temperature.

1) Heated Steering Wheel switch

2) Indicator light

3) Heated area

To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel

system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel

switch when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” or “ACC” position. Then the steering

wheel will be warmed and the indicator

light on the switch will illuminate. To turn off

the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull

the switch again. Then the indicator light

will turn off.

CAUTION

. Use the Heated Steering Wheel

system with the hybrid system

running. Otherwise, the 12 V

battery voltage may drop below

the permissible level and it may

not be possible to start the hybrid

system.

. There is a possibility that people

with delicate skin may suffer

slight burns even at low tempera-

tures if they use the Heated

Steering Wheel for a long period

of time. When using the Heated

Steering Wheel, always be sure to

warn the persons concerned.

. Do not cover the Heated Steering

Wheel with an object such as a

steering wheel cover. Doing so

may cause the Heated Steering

Wheel to overheat.

NOTE

. If the surface temperature of the

steering wheel is approximately above

1048F (408C) when the system is turned

on, the system will not heat the steering

wheel. Then, the indicator light will

continue to illuminate.

. The Heated Steering Wheel system

will automatically turn off approxi-

mately 30 minutes after the system

has been turned on.

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

246

(249,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3-18. Horn

S03AR

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Horn

247

Instruments and controls

(250,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(251,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

S04

4-1. Ventilator control ............................................ 250

Center ventilators ............................................... 250

Side ventilators .................................................. 250

4-2. Climate control panel ..................................... 250

4-3. Automatic climate control operation............. 252

Sensors.............................................................. 252

4-4. Manual climate control operation.................. 253

Airflow mode selection .......................................253

MAX A/C mode ................................................... 254

Temperature control ........................................... 254

Fan speed control............................................... 255

Air conditioner control........................................ 255

Air inlet selection ...............................................255

To turn off the climate control system................. 255

4-5. Defrosting........................................................ 255

4-6. Operating tips for heater and air

conditioner.....................................................256

Heating .............................................................. 256

Climate control system initialization ................... 256

Water droplets during air conditioning

operation ......................................................... 257

Cleaning ventilation grille ................................... 257

Efficient cooling after parking in direct

sunlight ........................................................... 257

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant

circuit .............................................................. 257

Checking air conditioning system before

summer season ............................................... 257

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity

and low temperature weather conditions .......... 257

Refrigerant for your climate control system........ 258

4-7. Air filtration system.........................................258

Replacing a cabin air filter.................................. 258

Climate control

(252,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

4-1. Ventilator control

S04AF

& Center ventilators

S04AF01

Center ventilators

To adjust the airflow direction, move the

tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all

the way down.

& Side ventilators

S04AF02

Side ventilators

1) Close

2) Open

To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.

4-2. Climate control panel

S04AG

WARNING

. The cooling function operates

only when the hybrid system is

running.

. Do not leave children or adults

who would normally require the

support of others alone in your

vehicle. Pets should not be left

alone either. On hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle

could quickly become high en-

ough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or ani-

mals.

Ventilator control

250

(253,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

matic climate control operation” FP252

and/or “Temperature control” FP254.)

2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-

mate control operation” FP252.)

3) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air

conditioner control” FP255.)

4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air

inlet selection” FP255.)

5) MAX A/C button (Refer to “MAX A/C

mode” FP254.)

6) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”

FP255.)

7) Rear window defogger button and out-

side mirror defogger button (Refer to

“Defogger and deicer” FP244.)

8) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to

“Airflow mode selection” FP253.)

9) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan

speed control” FP255.)

10) ON/OFF button (Refer to “Automatic

climate control operation” FP252.)

NOTE

The climate control screen is displayed

on the multi-function display (color

LCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”

FP212.

Climate control panel

251

Climate control

(254,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

4-3. Automatic climate con-

trol operation

S04AI

When this mode is selected, the fan speed,

airflow distribution, air-inlet control, and air

conditioner compressor operation are

automatically controlled. To activate this

mode, perform the following.

1. Press the AUTO button. The indicator

light “FULL AUTO” on the multi-function

display (color LCD) illuminates.

2. Set the preferred temperature using

the temperature control dial.

NOTE

. Operate the automatic climate con-

trol system when the hybrid system is

running.

. Even when cooling is not necessary,

the air conditioner compressor will

automatically turn on if the temperature

is set much lower than the current

outlet air temperature. Even in this

case, the “A/C” indicator light on the

control panel illuminates.

. The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

. If you operate any of the buttons on

the control panel other than the ON/

OFF button, rear window defogger

button, and temperature control dial

during FULL AUTO mode operation, the

“FULL” indicator light on the multi-

function display (color LCD) will turn

off and the “AUTO” indicator light will

remain illuminated. You can then manu-

ally control the system as desired using

the button you operated. To change the

system back to the FULL AUTO mode,

press the AUTO button.

To turn off the climate control system,

press the ON/OFF button. Then the air

inlet selection will be set to the following.

. When the air inlet selection is set to

auto mode: Outside air circulation

. When the air inlet selection is set to

manual mode: No change

& Sensors

S04AI03

The sensors are located as follows.

1) Interior air temperature sensor

2) Solar sensor

The automatic climate control system

employs several sensors. These sensors

Automatic climate control operation

252

(255,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

are delicate. If they are not treated properly

and become damaged, the system may

not be able to control the interior tempera-

ture correctly. To avoid damaging the

sensors, observe the following precau-

tions.

. Do not subject the sensors to impact.

. Keep water away from the sensors.

. Do not cover the sensors.

4-4. Manual climate control

operation

S04AJ

& Airflow mode selection

S04AJ01

Select the airflow mode by using the

airflow mode selection dial.

Airflow modes are as follows.

Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets

Ventilation 2 for type B and C: Instru-

ment panel outlets and foot outlets

Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and foot

outlets

– CONTINUED –

Manual climate control operation

253

Climate control

(256,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the

instrument panel and some through wind-

shield defroster outlets (A small amount of

air flows to the windshield and both side

windows to prevent fogging.)

Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets,

foot outlets and both side outlets of the

instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting”

FP255.)

Defrost: Windshield defroster outlets and

both side outlets of the instrument panel

(Refer to “Defrosting” FP255.)

& MAX A/C mode

S04AJ06

For quicker cooling, press the MAX A/C

button.

When the MAX A/C mode is on, the

following settings will be changed auto-

matically.

. The air conditioner will turn on.

. The temperature will be set on the

lowest.

. The fan speed will be set on the

maximum speed.

. The air inlet will be set to recirculation.

. The air flow mode setting will be set to

ventilation mode.

To turn off MAX A/C mode and return the

previous setting, press the MAX A/C

button again.

& Temperature control

S04AJ02

Turn the temperature control dial to set the

preferred interior temperature.

NOTE

The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

Manual climate control operation

254

(257,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Fan speed control

S04AJ03

Select the preferred fan speed by turning

the fan speed control dial.

& Air conditioner control

S04AJ04

The air conditioner operates only when the

hybrid system is running.

Press the air conditioner button while the

fan is in operation to turn on the air

conditioner. When the air conditioner is

on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates.

To turn off the air conditioner, press the

button again.

NOTE

For efficient defogging or dehumidify-

ing in cold weather, turn on the air

conditioner. If the ambient temperature

decreases to approximately 328F (08C),

the air conditioner and dehumidifica-

tion system may not operate properly.

& Air inlet selection

S04AJ05

Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet

selection button.

. Recirculation mode:

When the indicator light on the air inlet

selection button illuminates, interior air is

recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the

air inlet selection button to the ON position

for fast cooling with the air conditioner or

when driving on a dusty road.

Using the recirculation mode continuously

when the outside temperature is low will

cause the mode to change automatically to

the outside air circulation mode.

. Outside air circulation mode:

When the indicator light on the air inlet

selection button does not illuminate, out-

side air is drawn into the passenger

compartment. Press the air inlet selection

button to the OFF position when the

interior has cooled to a comfortable tem-

perature and the road is no longer dusty.

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi-

tion may fog up the windows. Switch

to the OFF position as soon as the

outside conditions are no longer

dusty.

& To turn off the climate control

system

S04AJ07

To turn off the climate control system,

press the ON/OFF button.

4-5. Defrosting

S04AH

Select the “ ” or “ ” mode to defrost or

dehumidify the windshield and front door

windows.

NOTE

. When the “ ” or “ ” mode is

selected, the air conditioner compres-

sor operates automatically regardless

of the position of the air conditioner

button to defrost the windshield more

quickly. However the indicator on the

air conditioner button will not illumi-

nate. At the same time, the air inlet

selection is automatically set to the

outside air mode.

. After defrosting the windshield by

pressing the defroster button “

”,

– CONTINUED –

Defrosting

255

Climate control

(258,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

pressing the button again returns the

system to the setting that had been

selected before the defroster was acti-

vated.

4-6. Operating tips for heater

and air conditioner

S04AD

& Heating

S04AD08

. When driving using electronic motor,

heating is done by a heat pump system.

– When the outside temperature is

low or it is snowing, compared to

conventional vehicles, heating may

be less effective and warm air may

not come out.

1) Outside heat exchanger

– When the outside heat exchanger is

frosted over, fan speed declines and it

may become harder to heat the inter-

ior. However, it is not a malfunction. In

this situation, the air temperature from

the outlets may not change even

though the set temperature is raised.

– If frost has formed on the outside

heat exchanger, the heating perfor-

mance will decline. The frost can be

removed from the outside heat ex-

changer by operating the remote cli-

mate control system before driving.

When frosted over, the heating opera-

tion of the remote climate control

system starts after defrosting.

. In the following situations, the gasoline

engine may operate in order to exhaust

heat from the engine coolant via the

heater.

– The outside temperature is approxi-

mately 148F (−108C) or lower

– The defroster is operating

& Climate control system initi-

alization

S04AD10

The climate control system initialization

will start automatically after installing the

12 V battery. Therefore the air will only

blow for up to 20 seconds until the system

is ready to blow hot air and cool air.

Operating tips for heater and air conditioner

256

(259,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Water droplets during air

conditioning operation

S04AD09

1) Outside heat exchanger

2) Accumulator

The outside heat exchanger, accumulator

and climate control piping may incur

condensation or frost may form. During

or after the air conditioning operation,

water droplets may fall from the vehicle.

However, it is not a malfunction.

& Cleaning ventilation grille

S04AD01

1) Front ventilation inlet grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions

to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.

Since the condenser is located in front of

the radiator, this area should be kept clean

because cooling performance is impaired

by any accumulation of insects and leaves

on the condenser.

& Efficient cooling after parking

in direct sunlight

S04AD02

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes to

allow outside air to circulate into the

heated interior. This results in quicker

cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the

windows closed during the operation of the

air conditioner for maximum cooling effi-

ciency.

& Lubrication oil circulation in

the refrigerant circuit

S04AD03

Operate the air conditioner compressor at

a low engine speed (at idle or low driving

speeds) a few minutes each month during

the off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking air conditioning

system before summer sea-

son

S04AD04

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-

ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper

operation each spring. Have the air con-

ditioning system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

& Cooling and dehumidifying in

high humidity and low tem-

perature weather conditions

S04AD05

Under certain weather conditions (high

relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a

small amount of water vapor emission

from the air outlets may be noticed. This

condition is normal and does not indicate

any problem with the air conditioning

system.

– CONTINUED –

Operating tips for heater and air conditioner

257

Climate control

(260,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Refrigerant for your climate

control system

S04AD07

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

refrigerant R-134a (HFC134a). Consult

your SUBARU dealer for service. Repairs

needed as a result of using the wrong

refrigerant are not covered under war-

ranty.

4-7. Air filtration system

S04AE

Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is

equipped with an air filtration system.

Replace the cabin air filter according to

the replacement schedule found in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. This

schedule should be followed to maintain

the filter’s dust collection ability. Under

extremely dusty conditions, the filter

should be replaced more frequently. Have

your filter checked or replaced by your

SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use

only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the

following occurs, even if it is not yet

time to change the filter:

. Reduction of the airflow through

the vents.

. The windshield gets easily

fogged or misted.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-

tioning, heating and defroster perfor-

mance if not properly maintained.

& Replacing a cabin air filter

S04AE01

1. Remove the glove box.

NOTE

We recommend that you take measures

to protect the center console with

masking tape first, so that you avoid

scratching the center console with the

glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

(2) Remove the damper shaft from the

glove box.

Air filtration system

258

(261,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

(3) Push in the stoppers located on

both sides of the glove box and then

pull down the glove box as far as it will

go.

(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally

and remove the hinge portion. When

doing this, be careful not to damage

the hinge.

2. Remove the cabin air filter according to

the following procedure in order to prevent

dust on the air cleaner from falling to the

inside of its housing.

(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the

filter cover.

(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter

and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).

(3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.

3. Replace the cabin air filter with a new

one and then reinstall the cover.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter must

point UP.

– CONTINUED –

Air filtration system

259

Climate control

(262,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect

the damper shaft.

5. Close the glove box.

Air filtration system

260

(263,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

S05

5-1. Antenna ........................................................... 262

5-2. Audio set..........................................................262

Audio

(264,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

5-1. Antenna

S05AA

The roof antenna is installed on the roof.

5-2. Audio set

S05AC

If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine

SUBARU navigation system or audio

system, refer to the separate navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual for details.

Antenna

262

(265,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

S06

6-1. Interior lights................................................... 264

Map lights .......................................................... 264

Dome light..........................................................264

Cargo area light.................................................. 265

OFF delay timer .................................................. 265

6-2. Sun visors ....................................................... 265

Sun visor extension plate ................................... 266

Vanity mirror with light .......................................266

6-3. Storage compartment..................................... 267

Glove box...........................................................267

Center console ................................................... 267

Cup holders........................................................267

Bottle holders.....................................................268

6-4. Accessory power outlets ................................269

Use with a cigarette lighter (dealer option).......... 270

6-5. USB power supply ..........................................271

How to use the USB power supply ..................... 271

6-6. Ashtray (dealer option) ...................................272

6-7. Floor mat..........................................................273

6-8. Assist grip........................................................273

6-9. Coat hook.........................................................274

6-10. Shopping bag hook.......................................275

6-11. Cargo area cover ...........................................275

Using the cover.................................................. 275

Stowage of the cargo area cover ........................ 276

6-12. Cargo tie-down hooks...................................277

Interior equipment

(266,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

6-1. Interior lights

S06AA

CAUTION

When leaving your vehicle, make

sure the lights are turned off to

avoid the 12 V battery discharge.

& Map lights

S06AA06

1) Door interlock switch

To turn on the map light, push the lens.

To turn it off, push the lens again.

! Automatic illumination

S06AA0603

When the door interlock switch is in the

“DOOR” position, the map lights illuminate

automatically in the following cases.

. Any of the doors other than the rear

gate is opened.

. The doors are unlocked using the

keyless access function. Refer to “Locking

and unlocking by holding the access key

fob” FP145.

. The doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry system. Refer to

“Remote keyless entry system” FP156.

. The ignition switch is turned from the

“ACC” position to the “OFF” position.

& Dome light

S06AA01

1) ON

2) DOOR

3) OFF

The dome light switch has the following

positions.

ON: The light remains on continuously.

OFF: The light remains off.

DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-

matically in the following cases.

. Any of the doors or the rear gate is

opened.

. The doors or the rear gate are unlocked

using the keyless access function. Refer to

“Locking and unlocking by holding the

access key fob” FP145.

. The doors or the rear gate are unlocked

using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Refer to “Remote keyless entry system”

FP156.

. The ignition switch is turned from the

“ACC” position to the “OFF” position.

Interior lights

264

(267,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Cargo area light

S06AA02

1) DOOR

2) OFF

DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear

gate is opened. The light remains illumi-

nated for several seconds and gradually

turns off after the rear gate is closed.

OFF: The light remains off.

& OFF delay timer

S06AA07

The following lights have an automatic

illumination function.

. dome light

. map light

. cargo area light

When the interior light switch is set to the

“DOOR” position, the light will automati-

cally turn on and turn off depending on the

locking and unlocking of the doors, the

opening and closing of the doors, as well

as the position of the ignition switch.

NOTE

The setting for the period of time in

which the lights remain on (OFF delay

timer) can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for details. The setting can also be

changed by operating the combination

meter display (color LCD). For details,

refer to “Vehicle Setting” FP208.

6-2. Sun visors

S06AC

To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,

swing it down and move it sideways.

– CONTINUED –

Sun visors

265

Interior equipment

(268,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Sun visor extension plate

S06AC01

With the sun visor positioned over the side

window, you can use the sun visor exten-

sion plate to prevent glare through the gap

between the sun visor and center pillar. To

use the extension plate, pull it toward the

rear of the vehicle. When you have

finished using it, stow it by pushing it

toward the front of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not pull out the extension plate

with the sun visor positioned over

the windshield. The extension plate

would obstruct your view of the

rearview mirror.

& Vanity mirror with light

S06AC02

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed

while the car is being driven to avoid

being distracted by the light.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

The light beside the vanity mirror illumi-

nates when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTE

Use of the vanity mirror light for a long

period of time while the hybrid system

is not running can cause the 12 V

battery discharge.

Sun visors

266

(269,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

6-3. Storage compartment

S06AD

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com-

partment closed while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the

event of a sudden stop or an

accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the storage compart-

ment.

& Glove box

S06AD01

1) Rotate the key clockwise to lock.

2) Rotate the key counterclockwise to un-

lock.

To open the glove box, pull the handle.

To close it, push the lid firmly upward.

NOTE

. The emergency key is directional. If

the key cannot be inserted, change the

direction that the grooved side is facing

and insert it again.

. Use the emergency key to lock or

unlock the glove box.

& Center console

S06AD02

The center console box provides a storage

space.

1) Card holder

2) Holder (smartphone, card, etc.)

The top of the console can be used as an

armrest.

& Cup holders

S06AD16

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a cup from the cup

holder or put a cup in the holder

while you are driving, as this may

distract you and lead to an acci-

dent.

. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-

erages, if hot, might scald you

and/or your passengers. Spilled

beverages may also damage up-

holstery or carpets.

. When a cup in the rear passen-

ger’s cup holder contains a bev-

erage, do not fold down the rear

seatback. Otherwise, the bever-

age could spill and, if the bev-

erage is hot, it could scald you

and/or your passengers.

– CONTINUED –

Storage compartment

267

Interior equipment

(270,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Front passenger’s cup holder

A dual cup holder is built into the center

console.

Rear passenger’s cup holder

A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.

& Bottle holders

S06AD17

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a bottle from the

bottle holder or put a bottle in the

holder while you are driving, as

this may distract you and lead to

an accident.

. When placing a beverage in a

bottle holder, make sure it is

capped. Otherwise, the beverage

could spill when opening/closing

the door or while driving and, if

the beverage is hot, it could scald

you and/or your passengers.

The bottle holder equipped on each door

trim can be used to hold beverage bottles

and other items.

Storage compartment

268

(271,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

6-4. Accessory power outlets

S06AF

Electrical power (12 V DC) is available at

any of the accessory power outlets when

the ignition switch is in either the “ACC” or

“ON” position. Accessory power outlets

are located in the following places.

Power outlet below the climate control

dials

Power outlet in the center console

You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli-

ance by connecting it to an outlet.

The maximum power rating of an appli-

ance that can be connected is 120 W.

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the accessory power

outlets.

. Do not place any foreign objects,

especially metal ones such as

coins or aluminum foil, into the

accessory power outlet. That

could cause a short circuit. Al-

ways put the cap on the acces-

sory power outlet when it is not in

use.

. Use only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12 V DC.

The maximum power rating of an

appliance that can be connected

is 120 W. Do not use an appliance

which exceeds the indicated wat-

tage for each outlet.

. When using appliances con-

nected to two outlets simulta-

neously, the total power con-

sumed by them must not exceed

120 W. Overloading the acces-

sory power outlet can cause a

short circuit. Do not use double

adapters or more than one elec-

trical appliance.

. If the plug on your electric appli-

ance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power

outlet, this can result in a poor

contact or cause the plug to get

stuck. Only use plugs that fit

properly.

. Use of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a long

period of time while the hybrid

system is not running can cause

the 12 V battery discharge.

. Before driving your vehicle, make

sure that the plug and the cord on

your electrical appliance will not

– CONTINUED –

Accessory power outlets

269

Interior equipment

(272,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

interfere with your shifting gears

and operating the accelerator

and brake pedals. If they do, do

not use the electrical appliance

while driving.

NOTE

When the lid of the center console is

closed, an opening remains between

the center console and the lid to allow

the power outlet in the center console

to be used. Pass the cord of the

electrical appliance through this open-

ing.

& Use with a cigarette lighter

(dealer option)

S06AF01

To use the accessory power outlet as a

cigarette lighter socket, purchase the

cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional

accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is

available from your SUBARU dealer.

The cigarette lighter operates only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”

position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push in the

knob and wait a few moments. It will

automatically spring up when ready for

use.

WARNING

To avoid being burned, never grasp

the lighter by the end with the

heating element. Doing so could

result in injury and could also da-

mage the heating element.

CAUTION

. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,

because it will overheat.

. The electrical power socket is

originally designed to use a gen-

uine SUBARU cigarette lighter

plug. Do not use a non-genuine

cigarette lighter plug in the sock-

et. Doing so may cause a short-

circuit and overheating, resulting

in a fire.

. If the socket is ever used for a

plug-in accessory such as a cell

phone, that may damage the

portion of the socket’s internal

mechanism that causes a cigar-

ette lighter plug to “pop out” after

its lighter element is heated.

Therefore, do not place a cigar-

ette lighter plug in a socket that

has been used, even once, to

power a plug-in accessory. Doing

so may cause the plug to stick

and overheat, creating a potential

fire hazard.

Accessory power outlets

270

(273,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

6-5. USB power supply

S06AY

CAUTION

. The specification of a USB term-

inal that can be used is the A-

type. If a different specification of

terminal is connected, power

supply or charging may not be

possible, or the device may mal-

function.

. There is a risk that a connected

device may malfunction or data

may be damaged. The connec-

tion of a device shall be per-

formed at your responsibility.

. To avoid an electric shock or a

malfunction, observe the follow-

ing precautions.

– Do not connect a USB hub.

– Do not insert any metal or

other foreign object into the

USB terminal.

– Do not spill water or other

liquid on the USB terminal.

. Be careful not to pull the con-

nected cable. Doing so could

break the USB terminal and the

connected device.

. If a device is connected for a long

time when the engine is not

running, doing so may cause the

risk of a discharged battery. Even

when the engine is running, we

recommend that you do not con-

nect a device for an unnecessa-

rily long time.

. Do not connect a malfunctioning

device. Doing so may cause the

risk of smoke and fire.

NOTE

. The rated voltage of each USB

terminal is 5 V. For details about a

maximum rated power, refer to “How to

use the USB power supply” FP271.

Before connecting a device, be sure to

read the instruction manual of the

device and check whether or not this

specification of the output is supported

by the device. If a device that requires

power exceeding the maximum rating

is connected, power supply or charging

may not be possible. Even if charging

could be completed, the time required

for charging may be longer than when

the genuine charger for that device is

used.

. Depending on the device, charging

may be possible only when a special

cable is used. In this case, be sure to

connect the device using the special

cable.

. When a device that communicates

with a PC is connected, power supply

or charging may not be possible.

. When connect a device for charging,

disconnect the device promptly after

charging is completed.

& How to use the USB power

supply

S06AY01

Console USB power supply (power supply

function only)

When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position and a USB electronic device

is connected to the USB terminal, 5 V DC

power can be supplied to the device. Use

the USB terminal to use or charge an

electronic device.

– CONTINUED –

USB power supply

271

Interior equipment

(274,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

When using the terminal, open the USB

power supply cover. After use, close the

USB power supply cover.

NOTE

The maximum rated power charges

depending on the number of the term-

inal.

Number of USB

terminal

Maximum rated

power

DC 5 V/2.1 A*

*: The available electricity of the two

USB terminals is a maximum of 4.2 A.

6-6. Ashtray (dealer option)

S06AG

CAUTION

. Do not use ashtrays as waste

receptacles or leave a lighted

cigarette in an ashtray. This could

cause a fire.

. Always extinguish matches and

cigarettes before putting them

into the ashtray, and then close

the ashtray securely. If you keep

the ashtray open, the fire of the

cigarette may spread to another

cigarette butt and start a fire.

. Do not put flammable material in

the ashtray.

. Do not leave a lot of cigarette

butts in the ashtray.

NOTE

Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-

mulate around the hinges of the ash-

tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a

toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended

implement.

The portable ashtray can be installed in

each cup holder or bottle holder. For the

locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup

holders” FP267. For the locations of the

bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders”

FP268.

When using the ashtray, open the lid of the

ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the

ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.

Ashtray (dealer option)

272

(275,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

6-7. Floor mat

S06AJ

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward and

interferes with the movement of the

pedals during driving, it could cause

an accident. Observe the following

precautions to prevent the floor mat

from slipping forward.

. Be sure to use a genuine

SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-

lent designed with grommets in

the correct locations.

. Make sure that the driver’s floor

mat is placed in its proper loca-

tion and is correctly secured on

its retaining pins.

. Do not use more than one floor

mat.

Retaining pins are located on the driver’s

side floor.

The floor mat should be properly secured

using the built-in grommets, by placing the

grommets over the pins and pushing them

downward.

6-8. Assist grip

S06BD

1) Assist grip

The assist grip is to be held to support the

body of the passengers when they are in

the seat and the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

Do not hold the assist grip when

getting up from the seat. Holding

and pulling the assist grip in the

wrong way could break the grip and

possibly cause injury.

CAUTION

Do not attach heavy objects to the

assist grip. Doing so could break it

– CONTINUED –

Floor mat

273

Interior equipment

(276,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

and damage the object.

6-9. Coat hook

S06AH

A coat hook is attached to the rear

passenger’s assist grip.

WARNING

Obey the following instructions.

. Do not hang coat hangers or

other hard or pointed objects on

the coat hooks. Hang clothing

directly on the coat hooks with-

out using hangers.

. Before hanging clothing on the

coat hooks, make sure there are

no pointed objects in the pock-

ets.

If these instructions are ignored, the

following may occur in sudden

stops or in a collision.

. serious injuries by the items

thrown through the cabin.

. incorrect SRS curtain airbag de-

ployment

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coat

hook that might obstruct the driver’s

view or that could cause injury in

sudden stops or in a collision. And

do not hang items on the coat hook

that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

Coat hook

274

(277,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

6-10. Shopping bag hook

S06AI

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping

bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or

more.

A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area.

6-11. Cargo area cover

S06AK

The cargo area cover is provided for

covering the cargo area and to protect its

contents from direct sunlight. This cover is

detachable to make room for additional

cargo.

& Using the cover

S06AK01

WARNING

Do not place anything on the cover.

Putting excessive weight on the

cover can break it and an object on

the cover could tumble forward in

the event of a sudden stop or colli-

sion. This could cause serious in-

jury.

Insert both ends of the cargo area cover

aligned with the guides.

To remove the cover housing, pull out the

cover.

NOTE

Do not place any material on top of the

cargo area cover. Doing so could cause

it to fall off.

– CONTINUED –

Shopping bag hook

275

Interior equipment

(278,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Stowage of the cargo area

cover

S06AK04

1) Label

2) Fastener strip (short)

3) Fastener strip (long)

1. Hold the cargo area cover by the lower

ends with the label on the right top corner.

Make sure that the longer fastener strip is

on the back side and the shorter strip tape

is on the front side.

2. Bend the cargo area cover ends

together.

3. Twist the left hand under the right

hand.

4. Secure the cargo area cover with the

fastener strip.

5. Store the cargo area cover in the sub-

trunk.

Cargo area cover

276

(279,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

CAUTION

. If the cargo area cover is not fixed

securely, it will open suddenly

and may cause injury.

. When the cargo area cover needs

to be opened for use, make sure

there are no people or cargo

around.

NOTE

Hold at the two corners with the

fastener strips and expand the cargo

area cover safely.

6-12. Cargo tie-down hooks

S06AM

The cargo area is equipped with several

tie-down hooks so that cargo can be

secured with a cargo net or ropes.

When using the front tie-down hooks, turn

them down out of the storing recesses.

CAUTION

The cargo tie-down hooks are de-

signed only for securing light cargo.

Never try to secure cargo that ex-

ceeds the capacity of the hooks. The

maximum load capacity is 6 lbs (3

kg) per hook.

Cargo tie-down hooks

277

Interior equipment

(280,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(281,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 11/ 7

S07

7-1. Fuel .................................................................. 281

Fuel requirements............................................... 281

Fuel filler door and cap....................................... 282

7-2. State emission testing (U.S. only)................. 285

7-3. Preparing to drive........................................... 287

7-4. Starting and stopping the hybrid system ..... 287

General precautions when starting/stopping

the hybrid system............................................. 287

Safety precautions for “keyless access with

push-button start system” ................................ 288

Operating range for push-button start system ..... 288

Starting the hybrid system..................................288

Stopping the hybrid system ................................ 290

Automatic shut down.......................................... 291

When access key fob does not operate

properly............................................................291

7-5. Continuously variable transmission ............. 291

Continuously variable transmission features .......292

Select lever ........................................................ 292

Selection of “B”.................................................. 293

Shift lock function .............................................. 294

Driving tips.........................................................295

7-6. SI-DRIVE .......................................................... 295

Intelligent (I) mode.............................................. 295

Sport (S) mode ................................................... 296

SI-DRIVE switches .............................................. 296

7-7. Power steering ................................................ 297

Power steering system features ..........................297

7-8. Braking ............................................................ 298

Braking tips........................................................298

Brake system..................................................... 298

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 299

7-9. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......................300

ABS self-check .................................................. 300

ABS warning light .............................................. 300

7-10. Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system.................................................301

Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions .......... 301

7-11. Vehicle Dynamics Control system ...............302

Safety precautions ............................................. 302

System features ................................................. 303

Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 303

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................ 304

7-12. X-MODE ..........................................................305

To activate/deactivate the X-MODE ..................... 306

Hill descent control function .............................. 307

7-13. Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ...308

7-14. Parking your vehicle .....................................310

Electronic parking brake .................................... 310

Parking tips ....................................................... 314

7-15. BSD/RCTA ......................................................314

System features ................................................. 315

System operation ............................................... 317

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning

buzzer.............................................................. 318

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator.................................... 320

BSD/RCTA warning indicator .............................. 321

BSD/RCTA OFF switch ....................................... 321

Certification for the BSD/RCTA ........................... 322

Handling of radar sensors .................................. 322

Starting and operating

(282,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

7-16. Reverse Automatic Braking System ........... 323

Reverse Automatic Braking System overview...... 323

Operating conditions ..........................................325

Reverse Automatic Braking System operation.....327

Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking

system operation.............................................. 330

Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF

setting ............................................................. 330

RAB warning indicator ....................................... 332

Handling of the sonar sensors ........................... 332

Starting and operating

(283,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

7-1. Fuel

S07AA

CAUTION

. Use of a fuel which is low in

quality or use of an inappropriate

fuel additive may cause damage

to the engine and/or fuel system.

. Some gas stations, particularly

those in high altitude areas, offer

fuels posted as regular octane

gasoline with an octane rating

below 87. Use of those fuels are

not recommended.

& Fuel requirements

S07AA01

The engine is designed to operate using

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating

of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.

! Fuel octane rating

S07AA0103

Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating

can cause persistent and heavy knocking,

which can damage the engine. Do not be

concerned if your vehicle sometimes

knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or

when you accelerate. Contact your

SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with the

specified octane rating and your vehicle

knocks heavily or persistently.

! RON

S07AA010301

This octane rating is the Research Octane

Number.

! AKI

S07AA010302

This octane rating is the average of the

Research Octane and Motor Octane num-

bers and is commonly referred to as the

Anti Knock Index (AKI).

! Unleaded gasoline

S07AA0104

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed

to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used because it will

damage the emission control system and

may impair driveability and fuel economy.

! Reformulated gasoline

S07AA0128

SUBARU supports the use of reformulated

gasoline when available. Reformulated

gasoline has been blended to burn more

cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.

! MMT

S07AA0106

Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan-

cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo-

pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

you use such fuels, your emission control

system performance may deteriorate and

the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator light may turn on. If this

happens, return to your authorized

SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is

determined that the condition is caused

by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be

covered by your warranty.

! Gasoline for cleaner air

S07AA0107

Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-

ditives will help prevent deposits from

forming in your engine and fuel system.

This helps keep your engine in tune and

your emission control system working

properly, and is a way of doing your part

for cleaner air. If you continuously use a

high quality fuel with the proper detergent

and other additives, you should never

need to add any fuel system cleaning

agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with

materials called oxygenates. Use of these

fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.

Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol

(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your

vehicle, but should contain no more than

15% ethanol for the proper operation of

your SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that contains

more than 15% ethanol, including from any

pump labeled E30, E50 or E85 (which are

only some examples of fuel containing

more than 15% ethanol).

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

– CONTINUED –

Fuel

281

Starting and operating

(284,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

now producing reformulated gasolines,

which are designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,

you should ask your service station op-

erators if their gasolines contain deter-

gents and oxygenates and if they have

been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-

sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels

suited for your vehicle as explained in the

following description.

. Fuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that specified

in this manual.

. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is

sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.

Methanol can be used in your vehicle

ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel

mixture AND if it is accompanied by

sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-

vents and corrosion inhibitors required to

prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not

use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT

under these conditions.

. If undesirable driveability problems are

experienced and you suspect they may be

fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-

line before seeking service at your

SUBARU dealer.

. Fuel system damage or driveability

problems which result from the use of

improper fuel are not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel

may damage the paint, be sure to

wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.

Paint damage caused by spilled fuel

is not covered under the SUBARU

Limited Warranty.

& Fuel filler door and cap

S07AA02

! Locations of the fuel filler door and

the door release switch

S07AA0202

Fuel filler door

Fuel door release switch

Fuel

282

(285,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Refueling

S07AA0201

Only one person should be involved in

refueling. Do not allow others to approach

the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler

pipe while refueling is in progress.

Be sure to observe any other precautions

that are posted at the service station.

1. Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition

switch to the “OFF” position and turn off all

the other electrical components.

2. To open the fuel filler door, push the

fuel door release switch on the instrument

panel.

When the switch is pressed, a message is

displayed on the combination meter (color

LCD).

NOTE

. The fuel filler door opens several

seconds or up to approximately 10

seconds after the switch was pressed.

. In the following circumstances, the

fuel filler door cannot be opened even

when the switch is pressed.

– While the vehicle is driving

– When the select lever is not in the

“P” position.

– When there is a malfunction in

the fuel system

. If there is a malfunction in the fuel

system or other systems, and the fuel

filler door cannot be opened, refer to

“Fuel door – if the fuel door cannot be

opened” FP386.

. If one of the following occurs when

the Hybrid READY indicator illumi-

nates, “Unable to refuel” will be shown

on the combination meter (color LCD)

and refueling will not be possible.

– Vehicle speed is 1 mph (2 km/h)

or more.

– Select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

If the error message does not turn off,

consult a SUBARU dealer.

. Complete fueling within 30 minutes

after pressing the fuel door release

switch. When 30 minutes have passed,

the vehicle auto stop function activates

and fuel cannot be added to the tank. If

this occurs, press the fuel door release

switch again.

WARNING

. Before opening the fuel filler cap,

first touch the vehicle body or a

metal portion of the fuel pump or

similar object to discharge any

static electricity that may be pre-

sent on your body. If your body is

carrying an electrostatic charge,

there is a possibility that an

electric spark could ignite the

fuel, which could burn you. To

avoid acquiring a new static elec-

tric charge, do not get back into

the vehicle while refueling is in

progress.

. Do not charge the vehicle while

fueling it.

1) Open

2) Close

3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-

mable. Before refueling, always

– CONTINUED –

Fuel

283

Starting and operating

(286,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

turn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position first and then

close all vehicle doors and win-

dows. Make sure that there are no

lighted cigarettes, open flames or

electrical sparks in the adjacent

area. Only handle fuel outdoors.

Quickly wipe up any spilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp it

firmly and turn it slowly to the left.

Do not remove the cap quickly.

Fuel may be under pressure and

spray out of the fuel filler neck,

especially in hot weather. If you

hear a hissing sound while you

are removing the cap, wait for the

sound to stop and then slowly

open the cap to prevent fuel from

spraying out and creating a fire

hazard.

4. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder

inside the fuel filler door.

WARNING

. When refueling, insert the fuel

nozzle securely into the fuel filler

pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not

fully inserted, its automatic stop-

ping mechanism may not func-

tion, causing fuel to overflow the

tank and creating a fire hazard.

. Stop refueling when the auto-

matic stop mechanism on the

fuel nozzle activates. If you con-

tinue to add fuel, temperature

changes or other conditions

may cause fuel to overflow from

the tank and create a fire hazard.

5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically stops. Do not add any

more fuel.

6. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise

until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain

not to catch the tether under the cap while

tightening.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tightened

until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage

in the event of an accident.

7. Close the fuel filler door completely.

CAUTION

If you spill any fuel on the painted

surface, rinse it off immediately.

Otherwise, the painted surface

could be damaged.

Fuel

284

(287,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

NOTE

. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler

door is located on the right side of the

vehicle.

. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened

until it clicks or if the tether is caught

under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE

warning light/malfunction indicator

light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK

ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-

dicator light” FP184.

. If the fuel filler door is not securely

closed, a message is displayed on the

combination meter (color LCD) and the

CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc-

tion indicator light may illuminate.

Refer to “CHECK ENGINE warning

light/Malfunction indicator light”

FP184.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents to

the fuel tank. The addition of a

cleaning agent may cause da-

mage to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap to the

right until it clicks to ensure that

it is fully tightened. If the cap is

not securely tightened, fuel may

leak out while the vehicle is being

driven or fuel spillage could oc-

cur in the event of an accident,

creating a fire hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because

fuel may damage the paint, be

sure to wipe off any spilled fuel

quickly. Paint damage caused by

spilled fuel is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARU

fuel filler cap. If you use the

wrong cap, it may not fit or have

proper venting and your fuel tank

and emission control system

may be damaged. It could also

lead to fuel spillage and a fire.

. Immediately put fuel in the tank

whenever the low fuel warning

light illuminates. Engine misfires

as a result of an empty tank could

cause damage to the engine.

Continuing to operate your vehi-

cle at an extremely low fuel level

may result in a reduction of

engine performance.

7-2. State emission testing

(U.S. only)

S07AB

WARNING

Only use a four-wheel dynamometer

when testing an All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) model.

Testing of an AWD model must

NEVER be performed on a single

two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt-

ing to do so will result in uncon-

trolled vehicle movement and may

cause an accident or injuries to

persons nearby.

CAUTION

. At state inspection time, remem-

ber to tell your inspection or

service station in advance not to

place your SUBARU AWD vehicle

on a two-wheel dynamometer.

Otherwise, serious transmission

damage will result.

. Resultant vehicle damage due to

improper testing is not covered

under the SUBARU Limited War-

ranty and is the responsibility of

the state inspection program or

– CONTINUED –

State emission testing (U.S. only)

285

Starting and operating

(288,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

its contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal states

have Inspection/Maintenance programs to

inspect your vehicle’s emission control

system. If your vehicle does not pass this

test, some states may deny renewal of

your vehicle’s registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer

that monitors the performance of the

engine’s emission control system. Certi-

fied emission inspectors will inspect the

On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as

part of the state emission inspection

process. The OBDII system is designed

to detect engine and transmission pro-

blems that might cause the vehicle emis-

sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII

inspections apply to all 1996 model year

and newer passenger cars and trucks.

Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-

bia have implemented emission inspection

of the OBDII system.

. The inspection of the OBDII system

consists of a visual operational check of

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-

function indicator light (MIL) and an ex-

amination of the OBDII system with an

electronic scan tool.

. A vehicle passes the OBDII system

inspection if proper operation of the

“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-

served, there are no stored diagnostic

trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness

monitors are all complete.

. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not

properly operating (light is illuminated or is

not working due to faulty LED [Light

Emitting Diode]) or there is one or more

diagnostic trouble codes stored in the

vehicle’s computer.

. A state emission inspection may reject

(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of

OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT

READY” is greater than one. If the

vehicle’s battery has been recently re-

placed or disconnected, the OBDII system

inspection may indicate that the vehicle is

not ready for the emission test. Under this

condition, the vehicle driver should be

instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a

few days to reset the readiness monitors

and return for an emission re-inspection.

. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles

should contact their SUBARU Dealer for

service.

Some states still use dynamometers in

their emission inspection program. A

dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like

testing device that allows your vehicle’s

wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in

one place. Prior to your vehicle being put

on a dynamometer, tell your emission

inspector not to place your SUBARU

AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-

ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-

sion damage will result.

The U.S. Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel

dynamometers in their emission testing

program have EXEMPTED SUBARU

AWD vehicles from the portion of the

testing program that involves a two-wheel

dynamometer. There are some states that

use four-wheel dynamometers in their

testing program. When properly used, this

equipment should not damage a SUBARU

AWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected in

an attempt to bypass AWD for state

emission testing. An AWD vehicle must

be tested using an AWD dynamometer

with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.

State emission testing (U.S. only)

286

(289,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

7-3. Preparing to drive

S07AC

You should perform the following checks

and adjustments every day before you

start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition

of the tires. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

4. Check that no small animals enter the

engine compartment.

5. Check that the engine hood and rear

gate are fully closed.

6. Check the adjustment of the seat.

7. Check the adjustment of the inside and

outside mirrors.

8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seatbelts.

9. Check the operation of the warning

and indicator lights when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-

ing lights after starting the hybrid system.

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cool-

ing fan and belts of the engine may

result in a malfunction. Check that

no small animal enters the engine

compartment and under the vehicle

before starting the hybrid system.

NOTE

. Engine oil, engine coolant, brake

fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels

should be checked daily, weekly or at

fuel stops.

. When towing a trailer, refer to “Trai-

ler hitch (dealer option)” FP350

7-4. Starting and stopping the

hybrid system

S07BE

& General precautions when

starting/stopping the hybrid

system

S07BE08

WARNING

. Never start the hybrid system

from outside the vehicle. It may

result in an accident.

. Do not leave the hybrid system

running in locations with poor

ventilation, such as a garage and

indoors. The exhaust gas may

enter the vehicle or indoors, and

it may result in carbon monoxide

poisoning.

. Do not start the hybrid system

near dry foliage, paper, or other

flammable substances. The ex-

haust pipe and exhaust emis-

sions can create a fire hazard at

high temperatures.

CAUTION

. If the hybrid system is stopped

during driving, the catalyst may

overheat and burn.

– CONTINUED –

Preparing to drive

287

Starting and operating

(290,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. When starting the hybrid system,

be sure to sit in the driver’s seat.

NOTE

. Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel-

eration immediately after the hybrid

system has started.

. When the hybrid system activates,

the engine speed may be maintained at

a high speed for an instant. When the

warm-up is completed, the engine

speed lowers automatically.

. On rare occasions, it may be difficult

to start the engine depending on the

fuel and the usage condition (repeated

driving of a distance in which the

engine has not warmed up sufficiently).

In such a case, it is recommended that

you change to a different brand of fuel.

. On rare occasions, transient knock-

ing may be heard from the engine when

the accelerator is operated rapidly such

as a rapid start-up and a rapid accel-

eration. This is not a malfunction.

. Do not shift the select lever at the

time when the hybrid system first

activates.

. The hybrid system may not start

immediately after the terminal of the

12 V battery has been reconnected

when replacing the 12 V battery, etc.

. The remaining power of the high

voltage battery may decrease when the

hybrid system has been stopped over-

night in a state where it is sufficiently

charged. However, this is a result of the

high voltage battery self-discharge and

is not a malfunction.

. When you cannot start the hybrid

system, confirm that the security in-

dicator light illuminates. If the indicator

light illuminates, perform the proce-

dure described in “Immobilizer”

FP155.

& Safety precautions for “key-

less access with push-button

start system”

S07BE06

Refer to “Safety precautions” FP143.

& Operating range for push-

button start system

S07BE01

Refer to “Operating range for push-button

start system” FP175.

& Starting the hybrid system

S07BE03

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the hybrid

system. Carefully read the pre-

cautions described in “General

precautions when starting/stop-

ping the hybrid system” FP287.

. If the indicator on the push-but-

ton ignition switch flashes in

green after the hybrid system

has started, never drive the vehi-

cle. The steering is still locked,

and it may result in an accident.

CAUTION

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch is

flashing in orange, there may be a

malfunction with the vehicle.

Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-

diately.

. If the indicator on the push-but-

ton ignition switch is flashing in

green after the hybrid system has

started, it means that the steering

is still locked. Depress the brake

pedal while moving the steering

wheel to the right and left, and

press the push-button ignition

switch.

. Do not continue pushing the

push-button ignition switch for

more than 10 seconds. Doing so

could cause a malfunction. If the

hybrid system does not start,

stop pushing the push-button

Starting and stopping the hybrid system

288

(291,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

ignition switch. Instead, press

the push-button ignition switch

without depressing the brake

pedal to switch the power status

to “OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and

then push the push-button igni-

tion switch to start the hybrid

system.

NOTE

. For a short time after the hybrid

system has started, the engine speed is

kept high. When the warm-up is com-

pleted, the engine speed lowers auto-

matically.

. When the push-button ignition

switch is pressed while depressing

the brake pedal, the hybrid system

can be started regardless of the status

of the push-button ignition switch.

. If the security indicator light illumi-

nates when you attempt to start the

hybrid system but the hybrid system

does not start, press the push-button

ignition switch to switch the power to

“OFF” and then try to start the hybrid

system again.

. If the hybrid system does not start,

press the push-button ignition switch

without depressing the brake pedal to

switch the power to “OFF”. Then, while

depressing the brake pedal more for-

cefully, press the push-button ignition

switch.

. The engine start procedures may not

function depending on the radio wave

conditions around the vehicle. In such

a case, refer to “Starting the hybrid

system” FP385.

. If the 12 V battery is discharged, the

steering cannot be unlocked. Charge

the battery.

1) Operation indicator

2) Push-button ignition switch

The starting procedure for the hybrid

system is as follows.

1. Check that the charge cable is dis-

connected.

2. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Make sure the select lever is in the “P”

position. The hybrid system cannot be

started when the select lever is in the “N”

position.

5. Depress the brake pedal until the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green.

6. While depressing the brake pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

7. Check that the Hybrid READY indica-

tor light is illuminated. The buzzer sounds

when the Hybrid READY indicator light

illuminates. However if Hybrid READY

indicator light illuminates when the seat-

belt is unfastened, the seatbelt warning

buzzer will sound. The vehicle will not

move when the Hybrid READY indicator

light is off. The vehicle can move when the

Hybrid READY indicator light illuminates

even if the engine is stopped. (The gaso-

line engine starts or stops automatically in

accordance with the state of the vehicle.)

NOTE

. While pressing the select lever but-

ton, the indicator on the push-button

ignition switch will not turn green even

when the select lever is in the “P”

position.

. In case the hybrid system does not

start by the normal hybrid system start

procedure, move the select lever to the

– CONTINUED –

Starting and stopping the hybrid system

289

Starting and operating

(292,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

“P” position, and switch the power to

“ACC”. Depress the brake pedal, and

press the push-button ignition switch

for at least 15 seconds. The hybrid

system may start. Only use this hybrid

system start procedure in case of

emergency.

. When the hybrid system does not

start, the brake pedal may feel stiff. In

such a case, depress the brake pedal

more forcefully than usual. Check that

the operation indicator on the push-

button ignition switch turns green, and

press the push-button ignition switch

to start the hybrid system.

. When starting the hybrid system, the

flashing time of the Hybrid READY

indicator light may be long. Leave the

vehicle as it is until the Hybrid READY

indicator light is steady on, as steady

means the vehicle is able to move.

. If the hybrid system does not start,

the charge cable may be connected to

the vehicle.

. In the event that the Hybrid READY

indicator light does not come on even

after performing the proper procedures

for starting the vehicle, contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately.

. When the high voltage battery is

extremely cold (below approximately

−228F (−308C)) under the influence of

the outside temperature, it may not be

possible to start the hybrid system. In

this case, try to start the hybrid system

again after the temperature of the high

voltage battery increases due to the

outside temperature increase etc.

& Stopping the hybrid system

S07BE04

1. Stop the vehicle completely.

2. Move the select lever to the “P”

position.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch.

The hybrid system will stop, and the power

will be switched off.

WARNING

. Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch during driving.

When the push-button ignition

switch is operated as follows,

the hybrid system will stop.

– The switch is pressed and held

for 3 seconds or longer.

– The switch is pressed briefly 3

times or more in succession.

When the hybrid system stops,

the brake booster will not func-

tion. A greater foot pressure will

be required on the brake pedal.

The power steering system will

not operate either. A greater force

will be required to steer, and it

may result in an accident.

. If the hybrid system stops during

driving, do not operate the push-

button ignition switch or open

any of the doors until the vehicle

is stopped in a safe location. It is

dangerous because the steering

lock may be activated. Stop the

vehicle in a safe place, and con-

tact a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

CAUTION

. Do not stop the hybrid system

while the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” posi-

tion.

. If the hybrid system is stopped

while the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” posi-

tion, the power will be in “ACC”. If

the vehicle is left in this condi-

tion, the 12 V battery may be

discharged.

NOTE

Although you can stop the hybrid

Starting and stopping the hybrid system

290

(293,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 11/ 7

system by operating the push-button

ignition switch, do not stop the hybrid

system during driving except in an

emergency.

& Automatic shut down

S07BE09

This function is a safety system that

activates when the user forgets to turn off

the hybrid system.

! System standby

S07BE0901

When the following conditions are satis-

fied, the system judges that the vehicle has

been left unattended and engages stand-

by state. At this time, a message is

displayed on the combination meter and

the buzzer sounds to notify the user of the

standby state.

. The Hybrid READY indicator light is

illuminated and the vehicle is stopped

(vehicle speed 3 mph (5 km/h) or less).

. The select lever is in the “P” position.

. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.

. Opening of the driver’s door was

detected.

! System operation

S07BE0902

When the engine is started from standby

state and the remaining charge of the high

voltage battery is low, the system begins a

10 minute count. When approximately 10

minutes have passed, a message is

displayed on the combination meter. At

this time, the buzzer sounds for 5 seconds,

and then the hybrid system automatically

turns off.

NOTE

If the automatic shut off system devi-

ates from the operating condition dur-

ing the system standby state or the 10

minute count state, the system will be

canceled.

& When access key fob does

not operate properly

S07BE05

Refer to “Access key fob – if access key

fob does not operate properly” FP384.

7-5. Continuously variable

transmission

S07BG

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N”

position into the “D”, “B” or “R”

position while depressing the accel-

erator pedal. This may cause the

vehicle to jump forward or back-

ward.

CAUTION

. Shift into the “P” or “R” position

only after the vehicle is comple-

tely stopped. Shifting while the

vehicle is moving may cause

damage to the transmission.

. Never move the vehicle rearward

by inertia with the select lever set

in a forward driving position or

move the vehicle forward by

inertia with the select lever set

in the “R” position. Doing so may

result in an unexpected accident

or malfunction.

. Do not shift from the “D”/“B”

position into the “R” position or

vice versa until the vehicle has

– CONTINUED –

Continuously variable transmission

291

Starting and operating

(294,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

completely stopped. Such shift-

ing may cause damage to the

transmission.

. When parking the vehicle, first

securely apply the parking brake

and then place the select lever in

the “P” position. Do not park for a

long time with the select lever in

any other position as doing so

could result in a dead battery.

& Continuously variable trans-

mission features

S07BG06

The continuously variable transmission is

electronically controlled and provides an

infinite number of forward speeds and 1

reverse speed. It also has a “B” position.

NOTE

When the engine coolant temperature

is still low, the transmission will upshift

or downshift at higher engine speeds

than when the coolant temperature is

sufficiently high in order to shorten the

warm-up time and improve driveability.

The gearshift timing will automatically

shift to the normal timing after the

engine has warmed up.

& Select lever

S07BG01

! Select lever positions

S07BG0105

1) Select lever button

: With the brake pedal depressed, shift

while pressing the select lever button

in.

: Shift while pressing the select lever

button in.

: Shift without pressing the select lever

button.

The select lever has five positions, “P”, “R”,

“N”, “D”, and “B”.

NOTE

In the “P” or “N” position, the engine

speed will not increase when the accel-

erator pedal is depressed.

! P (Park)

S07BG0101

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the hybrid system. In this position,

the transmission is mechanically locked to

prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply the

parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the mechanical friction of the transmission.

To shift the select lever from the “P”

position to any other position, you should

depress the brake pedal fully then move

the select lever. This prevents the vehicle

from lurching when it is started.

! R (Reverse)

S07BG0102

This position is for backing the vehicle. To

shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the

vehicle completely then move the lever to

Continuously variable transmission

292

(295,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

the “R” position while pressing the select

lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned

to the “OFF” position, movement of the

select lever from the “N” to “R” position is

possible for a limited time period by

depressing the brake pedal, and then it

becomes impossible. For details, refer to

“Shift lock function” FP294.

! N (Neutral)

S07BG0103

In this position, the transmission is neutral,

meaning that the wheels and transmission

are not locked. Therefore, the vehicle will

roll freely, even on the slightest incline

unless the parking brake or foot brake is

applied.

Avoid coasting with the transmission in

neutral. Engine braking and regenerative

braking have no effect in this condition.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

select lever in the “N” (neutral)

position. Engine braking and regen-

erative braking have no effect in this

condition and the risk of an accident

is consequently increased.

CAUTION

If the shift position is in “N”, the high

voltage battery will not be charged.

To prevent the battery from dischar-

ging, avoid leaving the “N” position

selected for an extended period of

time.

NOTE

If the select lever is in the “N” position

when you stop the hybrid system for

parking, you may not subsequently be

able to move it to the “R” and “P”

positions. If this happens, turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position.

You will then be able to move the select

lever to the “P” position.

! D (Drive)

S07BG0104

This position is for normal driving. The

transmission shifts automatically and con-

tinuously into a suitable gear according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration you

require. Also, while driving up and down a

hill, the transmission assists and controls

the driving performance and engine brak-

ing while corresponding to the road grade.

When more acceleration is required in “D”

position, depress the accelerator pedal

fully to the floor and hold that position. The

transmission will automatically downshift.

! B (Brake)

S07BG0106

Applying engine braking or strong braking

when the accelerator pedal has been

released on steep downward slopes etc.

& Selection of “B”

S07BG03

While pressing the select lever button,

move the select lever from the “D” position

to the “B” position.

– CONTINUED –

Continuously variable transmission

293

Starting and operating

(296,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

When selected, the indicator “B” will

illuminate on the combination meter.

To deselect “B”, move the select lever to

the “D” position.

& Shift lock function

S07BG04

The shift lock function helps prevent the

improper operation of the select lever.

. The select lever cannot be operated

unless the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

. The select lever cannot be moved from

the “P” position to any other position before

the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the

brake pedal first, and then operate the

select lever.

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position while the select lever is in

the “N” position, the select lever may not

be moved to the “P” position after a period

of time. Therefore, move the select lever to

the “P” position with the brake pedal

depressed soon after the ignition switch

is turned to the “OFF” position.

! Shift lock release

S07BG0401

If the select lever cannot be operated, turn

the ignition switch back to the “ON”

position then move the select lever to the

“P” position with the select lever button

pressed and brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, perform

the following steps.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “P” to “N”:

Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift

lock release button” FP294.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:

Within 60 seconds after placing the ignition

switch in the “ACC” position, move the

select lever to the “P” position with the

select lever button pressed and brake

pedal depressed.

If you must perform the above procedure,

the shift lock system (or the vehicle control

system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a

SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon

as possible.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, refer to

“Shift lock release using the shift lock

release button” FP294.

! Shift lock release using the shift

lock release button

S07BG0402

Perform the following procedure to release

the shift lock.

1. Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “OFF” position.

2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to

remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock

release button is located under the shift

lock cover.

Continuously variable transmission

294

(297,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3. Remove the grip portion of the screw-

driver.

4. While depressing the brake pedal,

insert a screwdriver into the hole, move it

right and left while pushing the shift lock

release button using a screwdriver, and

then move the select lever.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, the shift

lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-

tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as

soon as possible.

& Driving tips

S07BG05

CAUTION

If the accelerator and brake pedals

are depressed at the same time,

driving torque may be restrained.

This is not a malfunction.

. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D”, “B”

or “R” position.

. Always apply the parking brake when

parking your vehicle. Do not hold the

vehicle with only the mechanical friction

of the transmission.

. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using the “D”

or “B” position. Use the brake instead.

. The engine may, on rare occasions,

knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-

ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.

This phenomenon does not indicate a

malfunction.

7-6. SI-DRIVE

S07BC

SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive)

works to maximize hybrid system perfor-

mance, control and efficiency.

This system consists of the following

modes:

. Intelligent (I) mode

. Sport (S) mode

By operating the SI-DRIVE switches, the

character of the power unit changes.

& Intelligent (I) mode

S07BC02

! For smooth, efficient performance

driving

S07BC0201

The linear acceleration characteristic of

this versatile mode is ideal for normal

– CONTINUED –

SI-DRIVE

295

Starting and operating

(298,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

driving use.

The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-

balanced performance with greater fuel

efficiency and smooth driveability without

stress. Power delivery is moderate during

acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.

This is ideal for around-town driving and

situations that do not require full power

output. It provides better control in difficult

driving conditions, such as slippery roads

or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle

response.

& Sport (S) mode

S07BC03

! For all-around performance driving

S07BC0301

The Sport (S) mode provides the hybrid

system power desired by those who want

to make the driving experience their own

personal adventure.

& SI-DRIVE switches

S07BC01

NOTE

If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators blink,

the SI-DRIVE system may be malfunc-

tioning. We recommend that you con-

tact your SUBARU dealer.

SI-DRIVE switches

To select the Intelligent (I) mode, press the

“I” switch. To select the Sport (S) mode,

press the “S” switch.

NOTE

The default mode of the SI-DRIVE

system is the Intelligent (I) mode. Once

you turn off the hybrid system, the

previous setting mode is canceled and

the SI-DRIVE system returns to the

Intelligent (I) mode the next time you

turn on the hybrid system.

SI-DRIVE

296

(299,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

7-7. Power steering

S07AJ

& Power steering system fea-

tures

S07AJ11

Power steering warning light

The vehicle is equipped with an electric

power steering system. When the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, the

power steering warning light on the com-

bination meter illuminates to inform the

driver that the warning system is function-

ing properly. Then, if the hybrid system

started, the warning light turns off to inform

the driver that the steering power assist is

operational.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low

speeds, such as while frequently turn-

ing the steering wheel during parallel

parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long period of

time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur too frequently,

this may result in a malfunction of the

power steering control system.

Power steering

297

Starting and operating

(300,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

7-8. Braking

S07AK

& Braking tips

S07AK01

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This can cause

dangerous overheating of the

brakes and needless wear on the

brake pads.

! When the brakes get wet

S07AK0101

When driving in rain or after washing the

vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a

result, brake stopping distance will be

longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle

at a safe speed while lightly depressing the

brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

! Use of engine braking

S07AK0102

Remember to make use of engine braking

in addition to foot braking. When descend-

ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,

the brakes may start working improperly

because of brake fluid overheating,

caused by overheated brake pads. To help

prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get

stronger engine braking.

! Braking when a tire is punctured

S07AK0103

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

when a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe location.

& Brake system

S07AK02

! Two separate circuits

S07AK0201

Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake

systems. Each circuit works diagonally

across the vehicle. If one circuit of the

brake system should fail, the other half of

the system still works. If one circuit fails,

the brake pedal will go down much closer

to the floor than usual and you will need to

press it down much harder. And a much

longer distance will be needed to stop the

vehicle.

! Brake booster

S07AK0202

The vehicle is equipped with an electronic

brake booster to provide additional braking

force. Do not turn off the hybrid system

while driving because that will turn off the

brake booster, resulting in poor braking

power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the brake booster completely stops

functioning. If this happens, you will have

to depress the pedal much harder than

during normal braking, and the braking

distance will increase.

NOTE

. When the following operations are

performed, an operating sound from

the electronic brake boost control

module may be heard. This is not a

malfunction.

– The brake pedal was operated.

– The driver’s door was opened.

– The EyeSight function was acti-

vated.

– Several minutes have passed

after the hybrid system stopped.

. Vibration may occur when the brake

pedal was depressed and the vehicle

speed was reduced from approximately

9 mph (15 km/h) to 0 mph (0 km/h),

however this is not abnormal.

! Supplemental booster function

when pressure fails

S07AK0205

If there is a malfunction in the breaking

system, the power for the breaking will be

stored by controlling the hydraulic pres-

sure of the VDC system.

When the brake pedal is depressed while

the supplemental booster function is oper-

ating, an operation sound and brake pedal

vibration may be generated.

Braking

298

(301,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Brake assist system

S07AK0203

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the

brake assist. It is not a system that

brings more braking ability to the

vehicle beyond its braking capabil-

ity. Always use the utmost care

when driving regarding vehicle

speed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly,

continue depressing the brake pedal

strongly to bring the effect of the

brake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system.

It assists the brake power when the driver

cannot depress the brake pedal strongly

and the brake power is insufficient.

Brake assist generates the brake power

according to the speed at which the driver

depresses the brake pedal.

If the brake pedal may feel heavy, im-

mediately stop the vehicle in a safe

location. And request instructions from a

SUBARU dealer. Continuing to drive the

vehicle may be dangerous.

NOTE

When you depress the brake pedal

strongly or suddenly, the following

phenomena occur. However, even

though these occur, they do not indi-

cate any malfunctions, and the brake

assist system is operating properly.

. You might feel that the brake pedal is

applied by lighter force and generates a

greater braking force.

. You might hear an ABS operating

noise from the engine compartment.

! Regenerative braking

S07AK0206

Regenerative braking converts decelera-

tion energy to electrical energy. This

generated electrical energy is stored in

the high voltage battery. When driving with

the select lever in the “D” or “B” position,

regenerative braking activates at the fol-

lowing times.

. When the accelerator pedal was re-

leased

. When the brake pedal was depressed

NOTE

When the high voltage battery is fully

charged, it is not recharged by regen-

erative braking.

& Disc brake pad wear warning

indicators

S07AK03

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors on the disc brakes give a warning

noise when the brake pads are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard

from the disc brakes while braking, im-

mediately have your vehicle checked by

your SUBARU dealer.

Braking

299

Starting and operating

(302,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

7-9. ABS (Anti-lock Brake

System)

S07AL

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels

which may occur during sudden braking or

braking on slippery road surfaces. This

helps prevent the loss of steering control

and directional stability caused by wheel

lock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may hear

a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration

in the brake pedal. This is normal when the

ABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the vehicle

speed is below approximately 6 mph (10

km/h).

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driv-

ing – overconfidence because you

are driving a vehicle with the ABS

could easily lead to a serious acci-

dent.

CAUTION

. The ABS does not always de-

crease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe

following distance from other

vehicles.

. When driving on badly surfaced

roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or

over deep newly fallen snow,

stopping distances may be long-

er for a vehicle with the ABS than

one without. When driving under

these conditions, therefore, re-

duce your speed and leave ample

distance from other vehicles.

. When tire chains are installed,

stopping distances may be long-

er for a vehicle with the ABS than

one without. Be sure to reduce

your speed and maintain a safe

distance from the vehicle in front.

. When you feel the ABS operating,

you should maintain constant

brake pedal pressure. Do not

pump the brake pedal since

doing so may defeat the opera-

tion of the ABS.

& ABS self-check

S07AL01

Just after the vehicle is started, you may

feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar

to when the ABS operates, and you may

also hear the sound of the ABS working

from the engine compartment. This is

caused by an automatic functional test of

the ABS being carried out and does not

indicate a malfunction.

& ABS warning light

S07AL02

Refer to “ABS warning light” FP188.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

300

(303,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

7-10. Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD) system

S07AM

The EBD system maximizes the effective-

ness of the brakes by allowing the rear

brakes to supply a greater proportion of the

braking force. It functions by adjusting the

distribution of braking force to the rear

wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s

loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the

ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-

nents to perform its function of optimizing

the distribution of braking force. If any of

the ABS components used by the EBD

system malfunction, the EBD system also

stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

and does not indicate a malfunction.

& Steps to take if EBD system

malfunctions

S07AM01

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the following

warning lights illuminate simultaneously.

. Brake system warning light

. ABS warning light

. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

all the warning lights illuminate simulta-

neously during driving.

Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the

conventional braking system will still func-

tion. However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are

applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s

motion may therefore become somewhat

harder to control.

If all the warning lights illuminate simulta-

neously, take the following steps.

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat

location.

2. Apply the parking brake and turn off the

hybrid system.

3. Restart the hybrid system.

4. Release the parking brake.

If all the warning lights do not come

back on:

The EBD system have a possible malfunc-

tion. Drive carefully to the nearest

SUBARU dealer and have the system

inspected.

If all the warning lights stay illuminated

or come back on after approximately 2

seconds:

1. Turn off the hybrid system again.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Check the brake fluid level. For details

about checking the brake fluid level, refer

to “Checking the fluid level” FP414.

. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the

nearest SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected.

. If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN”

mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead,

– CONTINUED –

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system

301

Starting and operating

(304,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

have the vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light illuminated is dan-

gerous. This indicates your brake

system may not be working prop-

erly. If the light remains illumi-

nated, have the brakes inspected

by a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

7-11. Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system

S07AN

& Safety precautions

S07AN05

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driv-

ing – overconfidence because you

are driving a vehicle with the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system could ea-

sily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, winter tires should be

used when driving on snow-cov-

ered or icy roads; in addition,

vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having a

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem does not guarantee that the

vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system is an

indication that the road being

travelled on has a slippery sur-

face; since having Vehicle Dy-

namics Control is no guarantee

that full vehicle control will be

maintained at all times and under

all conditions, its activation

should be seen as a sign that

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle are removed from a

vehicle, have an inspection of

that system performed by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

. The following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure

that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is operating properly:

– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all four

tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

vehicle placard attached to

the driver’s side door pillar.

. If non-matching tires are used,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system may not operate cor-

rectly.

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

302

(305,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control

system helps prevent unstable

vehicle motion such as skidding

using control of the brakes and

hybrid system power. Do not turn

off the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system unless it is absolutely

necessary. If you must turn off

the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, drive very carefully ac-

cording to the road surface con-

ditions.

& System features

S07AN06

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding

on a slippery road surface and/or during

cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

adjusts the hybrid system’s output and

the wheels’ respective braking forces to

help maintain traction and directional

control.

. Traction Control Function

The traction control function is designed to

prevent spinning of the driving wheels on

slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to

maintain traction and directional control.

Activation of this function is shown by

flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light.

. Skid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is designed

to help maintain directional stability by

suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide

sideways during steering operations. Acti-

vation of this function is shown by flashing

the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light.

NOTE

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem may be considered normal when

the following conditions occur.

– Slight twitching of the brake

pedal is felt.

– The vehicle or steering wheel

shakes to a small degree.

– An operating sound from the

engine compartment is heard briefly

when starting the hybrid system

and when driving off after starting

the hybrid system.

– The brake pedal seems to jolt

when driving off after starting the

hybrid system.

. In the circumstances shown in the

following list, the vehicle may be less

stable than it feels to the driver. The

Vehicle Dynamics Control System may

therefore operate. Such operation does

not indicate a system malfunction.

– On gravel-covered or rutted

roads

– On unfinished roads

– When the vehicle is towing a

trailer

– When the vehicle is fitted with

snow tires or winter tires.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will cause operation of

the steering wheel to feel slightly

different compared to that for normal

conditions.

. It is always important to reduce

speed when approaching a corner,

even if your vehicle is equipped with

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

. Always turn off the hybrid system

before replacing a tire. Failure to do so

may render the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system unable to operate correctly.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

system monitor

S07AN01

Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-

ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light” FP193 and “Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light”

FP194.

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

303

Starting and operating

(306,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF switch

S07AN02

Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF

switch to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system. Creating adequate driving

wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system may help to

recover from the loss of traction. Use the

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as

necessary.

. A standing start on a steeply sloping

road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or

otherwise slippery surface

. Extrication of the vehicle when its

wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When the switch is pressed during hybrid

system operation, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF indicator light “

” on the

combination meter illuminates. The Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control system will be

deactivated and the vehicle will behave

like a model not equipped with the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system. When the

switch is pressed again to reactivate the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator

light turns off.

With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

deactivated, traction and stability en-

hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is unavailable. Therefore

you should not deactivate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system except under

above-mentioned situations.

NOTE

. When the switch has been pressed

to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system automatically reacti-

vates itself the next time the ignition

switch is turned to the “OFF” position

and the hybrid system is restarted.

. If the switch is held down for 30

seconds or longer, the indicator light

turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is activated, and the system

ignores any further pressing of the

switch. To make the switch usable

again, turn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position and restart the hybrid

system.

. When the switch is pressed to

deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system, the vehicle’s running per-

formance is comparable with that of a

vehicle that does not have a Vehicle

Dynamics Control system. Do not de-

activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system except when absolutely neces-

sary.

. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is deactivated, compo-

nents of the brake control system may

still activate. When the brake control

system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control operation indicator

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

304

(307,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

light flashes.

7-12. X-MODE

S07BI

WARNING

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving a vehicle

with X-MODE could easily lead to

a serious accident.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving a vehicle

with hill descent control function

could easily lead to a serious

accident. Be especially careful,

and depress the brake pedal if

necessary when driving on ex-

tremely steep downhill, frozen,

muddy or sandy roads. Failure

to control the vehicle’s speed

may cause a loss of control and

result in a serious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with X-MODE, winter tires should

be used when driving on snow-

covered or icy roads; in addition,

vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having X-

MODE does not guarantee that

the vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

. Activate the X-MODE when you

encounter a very slippery surface

at low speed. However, having X-

MODE is no guarantee that full

vehicle control will be maintained

at all times and under all condi-

tions. When activating X-MODE,

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle have been refitted in a

vehicle, have the system in-

spected by an authorized

SUBARU dealer.

. Observe the following precau-

tions in order to ensure that the

X-MODE is operating properly:

– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all four

tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

label attached to the vehicle’s

door pillar.

– CONTINUED –

X-MODE

305

Starting and operating

(308,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. If the hill descent control function

has operated continuously for a

long time, the temperature of the

brake disc may increase and the

hill descent control function may

be temporarily disabled. In this

case, the hill descent control

indicator will disappear. When

the hill descent control indicator

disappears, the hill descent con-

trol function is disabled.

X-MODE is the integrated control system

of the hybrid system, AWD and Vehicle

Dynamics Control system, etc. for driving

with bad road conditions. Using X-MODE,

you can drive more comfortably even in

slippery road conditions including uphill

and downhill.

X-MODE has the following functions.

. Hill descent control function:

Using the hill descent control function, you

can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed

driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is

likely to increase, the brake control system

will be activated to adjust the vehicle

speed.

. Driving ability control:

This mode increases the hill-climbing

ability and driving ability as well as

enabling smooth application of torque for

easier control of the steering wheel.

& To activate/deactivate the X-

MODE

S07BI01

X-MODE switch

X-MODE indicator

To activate:

Press the X-MODE switch. While the X-

MODE is activated, the X-MODE indicator

appears.

To deactivate:

Press the X-MODE switch again. The X-

MODE indicator will disappear when the X-

MODE is deactivated.

NOTE

. Even if you try to activate the X-

MODE by pressing the X-MODE switch

when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20

km/h) or more, the X-MODE will not be

activated. At this time, a buzzer will

sound twice.

. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph

X-MODE

306

(309,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

(40 km/h) or more while the X-MODE is

activated, a buzzer will sound once and

the X-MODE will be deactivated.

. The SI-DRIVE mode will change to

the Intelligent (I) mode when the X-

MODE is deactivated.

. The SI-DRIVE mode will not be

affected even if the SI-DRIVE switch is

pressed while the X-MODE is activated.

At this time, the buzzer will sound

twice.

. While the hybrid system is running,

if any of the following conditions is met,

the X-MODE will be deactivated. In this

case, it is not possible to activate the X-

MODE.

Also, the mode will change to the Sport

(S) mode and it will not be possible to

change to the other modes.

– The CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light illu-

minates.

– The ABS warning light illumi-

nates.

– The Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light illuminates.

. If the engine could overheat because

of a temperature increase of the engine

coolant, it may not be possible to

activate the X-MODE. Even while the

X-MODE is activated, the X-MODE will

be deactivated when the engine coolant

temperature increases. In this case, the

mode will change to the Sport (S) mode.

& Hill descent control function

S07BI03

The hill descent control function will be in

standby mode when the X-MODE is

activated and the vehicle speed is less

than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).

The function will operate when the vehicle

speed is less than approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less

than approximately 10%.

The function will turn off when the vehicle

speed is more than approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is

depressed.

CAUTION

The braking power of the hill des-

cent control function may not be

sufficient when strong braking

power is needed (e.g., when towing

a trailer).

NOTE

. Even while the hill descent control

function is operating, you can vary the

vehicle speed by using the brake pedal

or accelerator pedal.

. During braking by the hill descent

control function, the hill descent con-

trol indicator will flash.

. The hill descent control function is

operable regardless of the gradient of

the road.

. The hill descent control function

may be considered normal when the

following conditions occur.

– An operating sound is heard

briefly from the hybrid system com-

partment while the hill descent con-

trol function is operating.

– The sensation of depressing the

brake pedal is different, (harder than

usual etc.) when the brake pedal is

depressed during hill descent con-

trol function operation.

! Hill descent control indicator

S07BI0301

Hill descent control indicator

– CONTINUED –

X-MODE

307

Starting and operating

(310,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

This indicator appears while the hill des-

cent control function is in the standby

mode. It flashes while the function is

operating. It will disappear when the

function is in the disabled mode. When

this function is changed from operational

to non-operational, it will disappear when

the vehicle speed reaches more than

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

7-13. Tire pressure monitor-

ing system (TPMS)

S07AO

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

when tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this

system may not react immediately to a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,

a blow-out caused by running over a sharp

object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

Otherwise, an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and ser-

ious personal injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe location.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the COLD tire pressure

shown on the tire placard.

The tire placard is located on

the door pillar on the driver’s

side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a

very short distance, the tires get

warm and their pressures in-

crease accordingly. Be sure to

let the tires cool thoroughly be-

fore adjusting their pressures to

the standard values shown on the

tire placard. Refer to “Tires and

wheels” FP416. The tire pres-

sure monitoring system does

not function when the vehicle is

stationary. After adjusting the tire

pressures, increase the vehicle

speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)

to start the TPMS rechecking of

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

308

(311,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

the tire inflation pressures. If the

tire pressures are now above the

severe low pressure threshold,

the low tire pressure warning

light should turn off a few min-

utes later.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

. When a wheel rim is replaced

without the original pressure

sensor/transmitter being trans-

ferred, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will illuminate steadily

after blinking for approximately

one minute. This indicates the

TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible for tire and sensor replace-

ment and/or system resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquid

sealant, the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter may not

operate properly. If a liquid sea-

lant is used, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer or other qualified

service shop as soon as possi-

ble. Make sure to replace the tire

pressure warning valve and

transmitter when replacing the

tire. You may reuse the wheel if

there is no damage to it and if the

sealant residue is properly

cleaned off. Do not inject any tire

liquid or aerosol tire sealant into

the tires, as this may cause a

malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors. If the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for ap-

proximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system in-

spected.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metal

parts in the cargo area. This may

cause poor reception of the signals

from the tire pressure sensors, and

the tire pressure monitoring system

will not function properly.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

309

Starting and operating

(312,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

7-14. Parking your vehicle

S07AP

WARNING

. Never leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, the tempera-

ture in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to them.

. Do not park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come

near hot engine or exhaust sys-

tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the hybrid system

if you take a nap in the vehicle. If

engine exhaust gas enters the

passenger compartment, occu-

pants in the vehicle could die

from carbon monoxide (CO) con-

tained in the exhaust gas.

& Electronic parking brake

S07AP03

1) Parking brake switch

2) Indicator light

3) Release the electronic parking brake

4) Apply the electronic parking brake

WARNING

. Before exiting the vehicle, make

sure that you turn off the hybrid

system. Otherwise, the parking

brake may be released and an

accident may occur.

. If the electronic parking brake

warning light illuminates, the

electronic parking brake system

may be malfunctioning. Immedi-

ately stop your vehicle in a safe

location, use tire stops under the

tires to prevent the vehicle from

moving and we recommend that

you contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

CAUTION

. When the electronic parking

brake system has a malfunction

and the parking brake cannot be

applied, we recommend that you

contact your SUBARU dealer im-

mediately for an inspection. If

you have to park your vehicle in

such conditions, perform the fol-

lowing procedure.

– Stop your vehicle in a flat

location.

– Shift the select lever in the “P”

position. When the select le-

ver cannot be shifted into the

“P” position, you must release

shift lock. Refer to “Shift lock

function” FP294.

– Use tire stops under the tires

to prevent the vehicle from

moving.

. Never drive while the parking

brake is applied because this will

cause unnecessary wear on the

brake pads. Before starting to

Parking your vehicle

310

(313,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

drive, always make sure that the

parking brake has been released

and the electronic parking brake

indicator light has turned off.

. The braking power of the electro-

nic parking brake may not be

sufficient when strong braking

power is needed (e.g., when park-

ing on a steep slope while towing

a trailer).

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic

parking brake. You can apply/release the

parking brake by operating the parking

brake switch.

To apply: Pull up the parking brake switch.

To release: Press the parking brake

switch firmly while the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

Electronic parking brake indicator light

When the parking brake is applied while

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

the following indicator lights illuminate.

. The indicator light on the parking brake

switch

. The electronic parking brake indicator

light on the combination meter (for details,

refer to “Electronic parking brake indicator

light” FP190.)

NOTE

. If the parking brake switch is

pressed with the ignition switch in the

“ACC” or “OFF” position, the parking

brake is not released.

. If the parking brake switch is

pressed without depressing the brake

pedal, the parking brake is not re-

leased.

. The electronic parking brake system

uses motors to apply the parking brake.

Therefore, operating sounds from the

motors will be heard when applying or

releasing the parking brake. Make sure

that the motor sounds are heard when

applying or releasing the parking

brake. Additionally, the motor sounds

will be heard when operating the select

lever or depressing the brake pedal.

This is not a malfunction. The sounds

will occur when the electronic parking

brake system automatically controls

the motors.

. When the electronic parking brake

system has a malfunction or the elec-

tronic parking brake operation is pro-

hibited temporarily, if the parking brake

switch is operated, a chirp sound is

heard and the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes.

. When the electronic parking brake is

applied under any of the following

conditions, the operating sound of the

electronic parking brake may be heard

several minutes after the electronic

parking brake indicator light illumi-

nates. However, this does not indicate

a malfunction.

– The parking brake overheats.

– The vehicle is parked on a steep

– CONTINUED –

Parking your vehicle

311

Starting and operating

(314,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

slope.

– You operate the parking brake

switch after the ignition switch has

been turned off.

. If you use the electronic parking

brake under the following conditions,

the electronic parking brake indicator

light may flash.

– The parking brake overheats.

– The vehicle is stopped on a steep

slope.

Even in these cases, the electronic

parking brake will operate. However,

use tire stops because the vehicle may

move.

. When starting the hybrid system, if

you operate the electronic parking

brake switch, the electronic parking

brake indicator light may flash tem-

porarily. However, this is not a malfunc-

tion if the light turns off after the

electronic parking brake is deactivated.

! Automatic release function by ac-

celerator pedal

S07AP0301

The electronic parking brake system has

an automatic release function. The parking

brake will be automatically released by

depressing the accelerator pedal. How-

ever, the automatic release function does

not operate under the following conditions.

. Any door is open.

. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.

. The select lever is in the “P” or “N”

position.

If the parking brake is automatically

released, the electronic parking brake

indicator light and the indicator light on

the parking brake switch turn off.

NOTE

While pulling up the parking brake

switch, the parking brake will not be

automatically released even when the

accelerator pedal is depressed.

! Hill Holder function

S07AP0302

WARNING

When stopping on an uphill slope

with the Hill Holder function acti-

vated, release the brake pedal after

the electronic parking brake indica-

tor light has illuminated. Otherwise,

the Hill Holder function may not

operate properly and an accident

may occur.

The electronic parking brake system has a

Hill Holder function. If the Hill Holder

function is activated, the parking brake will

be automatically applied when stopping on

an uphill slope with the brake pedal

depressed. In this case, the electronic

parking brake indicator light and the

indicator light on the parking brake switch

illuminate.

The Hill Holder function also activates

when driving uphill in reverse.

NOTE

. The Hill Holder function may not

activate on a gentle uphill slope. In this

case, manually apply the electronic

parking brake.

. If you do not depress the brake pedal

sufficiently, the Hill Holder function

may not operate properly. However,

this is not a malfunction. When stop-

ping on an uphill slope, depress the

brake pedal firmly and release it after

the electronic parking brake indicator

light illuminates.

. Depending on the condition of the

road surface and braking force, the

brakes operate temporarily and feel

different than usual.

. When the electronic parking brake

system has a malfunction while the Hill

Holder function is activated, a chirp

sound is heard, the Hill Holder indicator

light turns off and the electronic park-

ing brake warning light illuminates.

. If the Hill Holder function activates

Parking your vehicle

312

(315,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

automatically and the driver releases

the function manually and continues to

park, the function will not activate

automatically again. In this case, oper-

ate the electronic parking brake manu-

ally to activate the function.

. If the driver does not fasten the

seatbelt when the Hill Holder function

is activated, the vehicle may not start

moving smoothly from a stop, or a

noise may be heard from the brake

components.

! Hill Holder switch

S07AP030201

Hill Holder switch

You can activate/deactivate the Hill Holder

function by pressing the Hill Holder switch.

To activate: Press the Hill Holder switch.

To deactivate: Press the Hill Holder

switch again.

Deactivate the Hill Holder function under

the following conditions.

. When towing a trailer

. When carrying a heavy load

. When you do not frequently use the

parking brake when stopping on an uphill

slope.

NOTE

. If the Hill Holder switch is pressed

for more than 30 seconds, the Hill

Holder indicator light turns off, and

the system ignores any further press-

ing of the switch. To activate the switch

again, turn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position and restart the hybrid

system.

. When the Hill Holder function is

deactivated while the Hill Holder func-

tion has a malfunction, if you press the

Hill Holder switch, a chirp sounds.

! Hill Holder indicator light

S07AP030202

Refer to “Hill Holder indicator light”

FP192.

! Emergency brake

S07AP0303

CAUTION

Use the emergency brake only in

case of an emergency. If the emer-

gency brake is excessively used, the

brake parts will wear down faster or

the brake may not work sufficiently

due to rear wheel brake overheating.

NOTE

While using the emergency brake, the

electronic parking brake indicator light

and the indicator light on the parking

brake switch illuminate and a chirp

sounds.

If the foot brake has a malfunction, you can

stop the vehicle by pulling the parking

brake switch continuously.

While applying the emergency brake, the

electronic parking brake indicator light and

the indicator on the parking brake switch

illuminate and a chirp sounds.

! Electronic parking brake system

warning

S07AP0304

CAUTION

If the electronic parking brake in-

dicator light flashes, the electronic

parking brake system may be mal-

functioning. Immediately stop your

vehicle in the nearest safe location

and we recommend that you contact

your SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED –

Parking your vehicle

313

Starting and operating

(316,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Brake system warning light

If a malfunction occurs in the electronic

parking brake system, the brake system

warning light turns on. Refer to “Brake

system warning light” FP189.

& Parking tips

S07AP02

When parking your vehicle, always per-

form the following items.

. Apply the parking brake.

. Put the select lever in the “P” (Park)

position.

Never rely on the mechanical friction of the

transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel. When the vehicle is

headed up the hill, the front wheels should

be turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

7-15. BSD/RCTA

S07BM

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear radar with

Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross

Traffic Alert.

These functions enable the system to

detect objects or vehicles to the rear,

drawing attention to the driver when

changing a lane or when driving in reverse.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for driving

safely. Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

changing lanes or reversing the

vehicle.

The system is designed to assist the

driver to change lanes or reverse

safely by monitoring the rear and

side areas of the vehicle. However,

you cannot rely on this system alone

in assuring the safety during a lane

change or reversing. Overconfi-

dence in this system could result in

an accident and lead to serious

injury or death. Since the system

operation has various limitations,

the flashing or illumination of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

may be delayed or it may not operate

BSD/RCTA

314

(317,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

at all even when a vehicle is present

in a neighboring lane or approach-

ing from either side.

The driver is responsible for paying

attention to the rear and side areas

of the vehicle.

& System features

S07BM01

BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-

tions.

. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an

adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at

high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind

Spot Detection).

. To detect a vehicle approaching from

the right or left while reversing the vehicle

(Rear Cross Traffic Alert).

The system uses radar sensors for the

above functions.

NOTE

The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been

certified by the radio wave related laws

of the U.S. When driving in other

countries, certification of the country

where the vehicle is driven must be

obtained. For certification in the U.S.,

refer to “Certification for the BSD/

RCTA” FP322.

! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

S07BM0101

1) Operating range

The system warns the driver of dangers as

follows.

. If the system detects a vehicle existing

in the blind spot, the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s)

will illuminate.

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

. If the driver operates the turn signal

lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light is illuminating, the

corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi-

cator light will flash.

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

315

Starting and operating

(318,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Lane Change Assist (LCA)

S07BM010101

1) Operating range

The system warns the driver of dangers as

follows.

. If the system detects a vehicle ap-

proaching at a high speed in the neighbor-

ing lanes, the BSD/RCTA approach indi-

cator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) will

illuminate.

. If the driver operates the turn signal

lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light is illuminating, the

corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi-

cator light will flash.

! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

S07BM0103

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another

vehicle approaching from either side when

driving in reverse. This feature helps the

driver check the rear and side areas of the

vehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approach-

ing from either side while moving back-

ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the

following way.

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.

. A warning buzzer sounds.

. An icon appears on the rear view

camera screen (audio/navigation monitor)

! Limitations of the detectability of

RCTA

S07BM010301

Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,

the RCTA may not operate properly in

angled parking.

Example 1

1) The detection range of the radar sensors

2) Area out of detection range of the radar

sensors

A) Vehicle that may not be detected.

B) Parked vehicle

WARNING

An approaching vehicle (A) may not

be detected because the detection

range is limited by the parked vehi-

cle (B). Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

BSD/RCTA

316

(319,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

reversing the vehicle.

Example 2

1) The detection range of the radar sensors

C) Vehicle that may be detected.

NOTE

The system may detect that a vehicle

Always be sure to check the surround-

ings with your eyes when reversing the

vehicle.

& System operation

S07BM02

! Operating conditions

S07BM0201

The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the

following conditions are met.

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.

. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7

mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).

. The select lever is in the “R” position

(when reversing).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the

following situations.

. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on.

. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10

km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF

indicator remains off (except when rever-

sing).

NOTE

. In the following case, the BSD/RCTA

will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA

warning indicator will appear. If the

BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears,

have your vehicle inspected at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

– When a malfunction occurs in the

system, including the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light.

. In the following cases, the BSD/

RCTA will temporarily stop operating

(or may stop operating) and the BSD/

RCTA OFF indicator will appear.

– When the radar sensor becomes

significantly misaligned (If the or-

ientation of the radar sensor is

shifted for any reason, readjust-

ment is required. Have the sensor

adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)

– When a large amount of snow or

ice sticks to the rear bumper sur-

face around the radar sensors

– When the vehicle is driven on a

snow-covered road or in an envir-

onment in which there are no ob-

jects around (such as in a desert) for

a long time.

– When the temperature around the

radar sensors increased exces-

sively due to long driving on uphill

grades in summer, etc.

– When the temperature around the

radar sensors becomes extremely

low.

– When the 12 V battery voltage

lowers.

– When the 12 V battery becomes

overvoltage.

When the above conditions are cor-

rected, the BSD/RCTA will resume op-

eration and the BSD/RCTA OFF indica-

tor will disappear. However, if the BSD/

RCTA OFF indicator has appeared for a

prolonged time, have the system in-

spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

317

Starting and operating

(320,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. The detectability of the radar sen-

sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de-

tection may be impaired and the system

may not operate properly under the

following conditions.

– When the rear bumper around the

radar sensors is distorted.

– When ice, snow or mud adheres

to the rear bumper surface around

the radar sensors.

– When stickers, etc. are affixed on

the areas of the radar sensors on

the rear bumper.

– During adverse weather condi-

tions such as rain, snow or fog

– When driving on wet roads such

as snow-covered roads and through

puddles

. The radar sensors may not detect or

may have difficulty detecting the fol-

lowing.

– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-

destrians, stationary objects on the

road or road side, etc.

– Vehicles with body shapes that

the radar may not reflect (vehicles

with a low body height such as

sports cars or a trailer with no

cargo).

– Vehicles that are not approaching

your vehicle even though they are in

the detection area (either on a

neighboring lane to the rear or be-

side your vehicle when reversing).

(The system determines the pre-

sence of approaching vehicles

based on data detected by the radar

sensors.)

– Vehicles traveling at significantly

different speeds

– Vehicles driving in parallel at al-

most the same speed as your vehi-

cle for a prolonged time

– Oncoming vehicles

– Vehicles in a lane beyond the

neighboring lane

– Vehicles travelling at a signifi-

cantly lower speed that you are

trying to overtake

. On a road with extremely narrow

lanes, the system may detect vehicles

driving in a lane next to the neighboring

lane.

. When the 8-inch audio/navigation

system is performing a software up-

date, the RCTA warning icons may not

be displayed on the audio/navigation

screen until the update is complete.

& BSD/RCTA approach indica-

tor light/warning buzzer

S07BM03

When the BSD/RCTA is active, the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light will operate

to alert the driver when there are vehicles

in the neighboring lanes. When reversing

the vehicle, the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light and warning buzzer will

operate to alert the driver that a vehicle is

approaching from the left or right side.

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

S07BM0301

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

It is mounted in each side of the outside

mirrors.

The indicator light will illuminate when a

vehicle approaching from behind is de-

tected.

The indicator light will flash to warn the

driver of dangers under the following

conditions.

. While the indicator light illuminates, if

you operate the turn signal lever toward

BSD/RCTA

318

(321,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

the side in which this light turned on.

. When reversing the vehicle while the

system detects a vehicle approaching

from either side.

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light dimming function

S07BM030101

When the headlights are turned on, the

brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light will be reduced.

NOTE

. You may have difficulty recognizing

the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

under the following conditions.

– When affected by direct sunlight

– When affected by the headlight

beams from the vehicles behind

. While the illumination brightness

control dial is in the fully upward

position, even if the headlights are

turned on, the brightness of the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light will not

be reduced. For details about the

illumination brightness control dial,

refer to “Illumination brightness con-

trol” FP180.

! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-

zer (only when reversing)

S07BM0302

A warning buzzer sounds along with

flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-

dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.

The setting of the warning buzzer volume

can be changed by operating the combi-

nation meter display (color LCD). For

details, refer to “Menu screens” FP207.

! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light/warning

buzzer

S07BM0303

. In the following cases, operation of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and

the warning buzzer may be delayed or the

system may fail to issue these warnings.

– When a vehicle moves to the neigh-

boring lane from a lane next to the

neighboring lane.

– When driving on a steep incline or

on repeated sharp uphill and downhill

grades

– When going beyond a pass

– When both your vehicle and a

vehicle driving on a neighboring lane

are driving on the far side of each lane.

– When several narrowly-spaced ve-

hicles are approaching in a row.

– In low radius bends (tight bends or

when making turns at an intersection)

– When there is a difference in height

between your lane and the neighboring

lane.

– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is

activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA

OFF switch.

– Immediately after the select lever is

shifted to the “R” position.

– When extremely heavy cargo is

loaded in the cargo area.

. During reversing, operation of the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light and the

warning buzzer may be delayed or the

system may fail to issue these warnings

under the following conditions.

– When backing out of an angled

parking space

– When a large-sized vehicle is

parked next to your vehicle (That

vehicle prevents the propagation of

radar waves.)

– When reversing on sloped roads

– When reversing at a high speed

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

319

Starting and operating

(322,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

light may illuminate when driving close to

solid objects on the road or road side (such

as guardrails, tunnels and sidewalls).

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may flash when turning at an inter-

section in urban areas or a multilane

intersection.

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may flash and the warning buzzer

may sound if a building or a wall exists in

the reversing direction.

. In the following cases, the system may

detect a vehicle driving two lanes away

from your vehicle.

– When you are driving on the near

side of its lane from the corresponding

vehicle.

– When the vehicle driving two lanes

away is driving on the near side of its

lane from your vehicle.

& BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

S07BM08

! System temporary stops

S07BM0801

1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message

2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the system is

used under the following conditions.

. Extremely high or low temperatures

. When abnormal voltage exists for the

12 V battery.

. When the radar sensor is significantly

misaligned.

Once the above conditions are corrected,

the system will recover from the temporary

stop condition and the indicator will dis-

appear. If the indicator remains displayed

for a prolonged time, have the system

inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

! System temporary stops due to

reduced radar sensitivity

S07BM0802

1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due

to reduced radar sensitivity

2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the detectabil-

ity of the radar sensors is reduced. Once

the condition is corrected, the system will

recover from the temporary stop condition

and the indicator will disappear. If the

indicator remains displayed for a pro-

longed time, have the system inspected

at a SUBARU dealer.

BSD/RCTA

320

(323,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& BSD/RCTA warning indicator

S07BM04

! System malfunction

S07BM0403

1) BSD/RCTA malfunction message

2) At first, this message will appear

3) Then this message will appear

4) BSD/RCTA warning indicator

This display appears when a malfunction

occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

& BSD/RCTA OFF switch

S07BM05

BSD/RCTA OFF switch

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed,

the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on

the combination meter, and the BSD/

RCTA is deactivated.

Press the switch again to activate the BSD/

RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will

disappear.

When this occurs, the BSD/RCTA ap-

proach indicator light on the side of the

rearview mirror illuminates for a few

seconds and then turns off.

NOTE

. In the following cases, the system

may not operate properly due to

blocked radar waves. Press the BSD/

RCTA OFF switch to deactivate the

system.

– When towing a trailer

– When a bicycle carrier or other

carrier item is fitted to the rear of the

vehicle.

– When using a chassis dynam-

ometer or free roller device, etc.

– When running the hybrid system

and making the wheels rotate while

lifting up the vehicle

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position, the last known status

of the system is maintained. For exam-

ple, if the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position with the BSD/RCTA

deactivated, the BSD/RCTA will remain

deactivated the next time the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

321

Starting and operating

(324,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Certification for the BSD/

RCTA

S07BM06

FCC ID: OAYSRR3A

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

& Handling of radar sensors

S07BM07

1) Sensors

The radar sensors, one on each side of the

vehicle, are mounted inside the rear

bumper.

To ensure correct operation of the BSD/

RCTA, observe the following precautions.

. Always keep the bumper surface near

the radar sensors clean.

. Do not affix any stickers or other items

on the bumper surface near the radar

sensors.

. Do not modify the bumper near the

radar sensors.

. Do not paint the bumper near the radar

sensors.

. Do not expose the bumper near the

radar sensors to strong impacts. If a

sensor becomes misaligned, a system

malfunction may occur, including the in-

ability to detect vehicles entering the

detection areas. If any strong shock is

applied to the bumper, be sure to contact

your SUBARU dealer for inspection.

. Do not disassemble the radar sensors.

NOTE

If the radar sensors require repair or

replacement, or the bumper area

around the radar sensors requires

repair, paintwork or replacement, con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-

tance.

BSD/RCTA

322

(325,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

7-16. Reverse Automatic

Braking System

S07BN

Reverse Automatic Braking is a system

designed to help avoid collisions or reduce

collision damage when reversing the

vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected

in the reversing direction, the system will

notify the driver with a warning sound and

may activate the vehicle’s brakes auto-

matically.

WARNING

. Reverse Automatic Braking is not

a system intended to replace the

driver’s responsibility to check

surrounding areas for vehicles or

obstacles to avoid a collision.

. The driver is responsible for driv-

ing safely. Before reversing, be

sure to first depress the brake

pedal and visually check the

surroundings.

. There are some cases in which

the vehicle cannot avoid colli-

sion, because the system opera-

tion has limitations. The warning

sound or automatic braking may

be delayed or may not operate at

all even when an obstacle is

present.

. The system is not designed to

detect people (including chil-

dren), animals or other moving

objects.

. Depending on the vehicle condi-

tion or the surrounding environ-

ment, the sonar sensor’s ability

to detect objects may be compro-

mised.

NOTE

The Reverse Automatic Braking Sys-

tem records and stores the following

data when automatic braking operates.

It does not record conversations, per-

sonal information or other audio data.

. Distance from the object

. Vehicle speed

. Accelerator pedal operation status

. Brake pedal operation status

. Select lever position

. Outside temperature

. The sensitivity setting of the sonar

sensors

SUBARU and third parties contracted

by SUBARU may acquire and use the

recorded data for the purpose of vehi-

cle research and development.

SUBARU and third parties contracted

by SUBARU will not disclose or provide

the acquired data to any other third

party except under the following con-

ditions.

. The vehicle owner has given his/her

consent.

. The disclosure/provision is based

on a court order or other legally en-

forceable request.

. Data that has been modified so that

the user and vehicle cannot be identi-

fied is provided to a research institution

for statistical processing or similar

purposes.

& Reverse Automatic Braking

System overview

S07BN01

The system detects objects using sonar

sensors installed in the rear bumper.

. If the system determines a possible

collision with an object in the reversing

direction, automatic deceleration will be

activated. Also, beeping sounds will acti-

vate.

. If the vehicle is further reversed, auto-

matic hard braking will be applied and a

continuous beeping sound will activate.

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking System

323

Starting and operating

(326,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1) When reversing

2) When either strong automatic braking or

torque control is applied to prevent

collision (in this case, short warning

beeps or continuous warning beeps will

sound)

3) When the vehicle is stopped by the

system (in this case, the continuous

beep will remain sounding)

4) Object (e.g., a wall)

! Detecting range

S07BN0101

1) Detecting range (width): Approximately 6

in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width

2) Range that the system cannot detect:

Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the

rear of the vehicle

3) Detecting range (length): Approximately

5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle

WARNING

If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-

road crossing and you are trying to

escape by reversing through the

crossing gate, the system may re-

cognize the crossing gate as an

obstacle and the brake may activate.

In this case, remain calm and either

continue to depress the accelerator

pedal or cancel the system. To

Reverse Automatic Braking System

324

(327,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

cancel the system, refer to “Cancel-

ing the Reverse Automatic Braking

system operation” FP330.

& Operating conditions

S07BN02

The Reverse Automatic Braking system

will operate when all of the following

conditions are met.

1) EyeSight warning indicator

2) RAB warning indicator

3) RAB OFF indicator

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. The EyeSight warning indicator is off.

. The RAB warning indicator is off.

. HALT (RAB OFF) indicator is off.

. The Reverse Automatic Braking sys-

tem is set to on.

. The select lever is in the “R” position.

. The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9

mph (1.5 to 15 km/h).

NOTE

. In the following cases, the Reverse

Automatic braking system will not

operate. Promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

– The EyeSight warning indicator

is illuminated.

– The Reverse Automatic Braking

fail indicator is illuminated.

. When the Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing system OFF indicator is illumi-

nated, the Reverse Automatic braking

system cannot be operated.

. In the following cases, the system

may not be able to properly detect an

obstacle. Promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

– A sticker, paint, or a chemical is

applied to the sonar sensors or the

rear bumper near the sonar sensor

– The rear bumper is modified.

– The rear bumper has been re-

moved and reattached.

– The ground clearance is changed

due to the vehicle’s loading condi-

tion or modification.

– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to

the sonar sensors or the rear bum-

per near the sonar sensor.

– The rear bumper is exposed to

strong impact, or the rear bumper is

deformed.

. When the 8-inch audio/navigation

system is performing a software up-

date, the Reverse Automatic Braking

System may not display the following

items on the audio/navigation screen

until the update is complete.

– Display Icon on/off Function

– Distance Indicator Image

– Warning Message

. On a steep hill, the system’s auto-

matic braking ability will be reduced.

. The system is designed to avoid

collisions by automatic hard braking

when the vehicle’s reversing speed is

less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).

However, the system does not guaran-

tee that the vehicle will be able to avoid

collisions in any situation.

. If the vehicle is reversed at an

extremely slow speed, the driver’s

operation may be prioritized. In this

case, automatic braking will not oper-

ate.

. The system may not be able to detect

the following objects.

– Sharp or thin objects such as

poles, fences and ropes which may

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking System

325

Starting and operating

(328,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

not reflect the sound wave emitted

from the sonar sensor.

– Objects that are too close to the

rear bumper when the select lever is

set to the “R” position.

– Objects with a surface which may

not reflect the sound wave emitted

from the sonar sensor such as a

chain link fence.

. Objects the system is not designed

to detect

– Pedestrians

– Moving objects including moving

vehicles

– Objects which absorb sound

waves such as cloth or snow.

– Objects whose surface has a

diagonal angle.

– Objects that are low to the ground

such as parking blocks.

– Objects that are high above the

ground such as objects hanging

from above.

. The system may not be able to

properly detect objects or may cause

a system malfunction when the follow-

ing conditions exist.

High frequency sound from other

sources are nearby:

– Horn sound from another vehicle.

– Engine sound from other vehi-

cles.

– Sound of an air brake

– Vehicle detection equipment or a

sonar from another vehicle

– A sound wave with a frequency

similar to the vehicle’s system is

transmitted nearby.

– A vehicle equipped with the same

system is reversing toward your

reversing direction.

Weather conditions:

– Extremely high or extremely low

temperatures in which the area near

the sonar sensor becomes too hot

or too cold to operate

– The sonar sensors or the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors is

exposed to heavy rain or a signifi-

cant amount of water.

– Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.

– Air is moving rapidly such as

when a strong wind is blowing.

Parts attached to the rear bumper

near the sonar sensor:

– Commercial electronic parts (fog

light, fender pole, radio antenna) or

commercial attachment parts (trai-

ler hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper

guard) are attached.

– Parts that emit high frequency

sound, such as a horn or speaker,

are attached.

Vehicle conditions:

– The vehicle is significantly in-

clined.

– The ground clearance is signifi-

cantly reduced due to the vehicle’s

loading condition, etc.

– When the sonar sensor is mis-

aligned due to a collision or an

accident.

Surrounding environment:

– A cloth banner, flag, hanging

branch or railroad crossing bars

are present in the reversing direc-

tion

– When reversing on a gravel or

grassy area.

– When reversing in an area where

objects or walls are adjacent to the

vehicle such as narrow tunnels,

narrow bridges, narrow roads or

narrow garages.

– Wheel tracks or a hole is present

in the ground of the reversing

direction.

– When reversing over a drainage

cover (grate cover)

Reverse Automatic Braking System

326

(329,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

– The path of the reversing direc-

tion is inclined such as on a steep

uphill.

– A curb is present in the reversing

direction.

– When reversing downhill

– When reversing on an uneven

road

. In circumstances such as the follow-

ing, it may not be possible to avoid a

collision even when the system oper-

ates normally.

– Roads are slippery.

– The tire air pressure is not cor-

rect.

– The tires have become worn.

– Tire chains are installed.

– Tires which are not the desig-

nated size are installed.

– Emergency repairs were per-

formed using a puncture repair kit.

– The suspension was modified.

– Vehicle driving is unstable due to

accident or malfunction.

– The brake warning light is illumi-

nated.

& Reverse Automatic Braking

System operation

S07BN03

When the Reverse Automatic Braking

System is in operation, the range between

the vehicle and the detected object will be

indicated on the audio/navigation monitor.

Also, warning sounds will activate in 3

levels to warn the driver of a potential

collision.

While the RAB is operating, a warning

message is displayed on the audio/navi-

gation monitor and the combination meter

display (color LCD).

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking System

327

Starting and operating

(330,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Guideline of detecting range

Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern

Long proximity (ob-

ject detected)

35 in (90 cm) or more Green No warning sound

Medium proximity

alert (approaching the

object)

28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm) Yellow Short beeps

Short proximity alert

(approaching closer

to the object)

20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm) Orange Rapid short beeps

Closest proximity

alert (too close to the

object)

20 in (50 cm) or less Red

Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

! Obstacle detected and alert level

S07BN0301

Long proximity alert (object detected)

1) Green: 35 in (90 cm) or more

Medium proximity alert (approaching the

object)

1) Yellow: 28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm)

Reverse Automatic Braking System

328

(331,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Short proximity alert (approaching the

object closer)

1) Orange: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)

Closest proximity alert (too close to the

object)

1) Red: 20 in (50 cm) or less

When an object is detected in the rever-

sing direction, the range of detected object

will be shown on the audio/navigation

monitor.

A warning alarm will sound and, depend-

ing on the speed, either torque control to

generate engine braking or automatic

braking will be applied.

! Object close behind warning

S07BN0302

Automatic braking warning

1) Warning message

If the vehicle continues to go in reverse,

the system may determine the risk of

collision with the object. In this case, short

warning beeps or continuous warning

beeps will sound and either strong auto-

matic braking or torque control will be

applied to prevent collision.

Depress brake pedal warning

1) Warning message

Make sure to depress the brake pedal

once the vehicle has been stopped by

automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is

depressed, a message will be displayed

on the audio/navigation monitor and the

continuous beep will remain sounding.

At this time, a warning message is also

displayed on the combination meter dis-

play (color LCD).

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking System

329

Starting and operating

(332,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

WARNING

When the vehicle was stopped by

automatic braking, be sure to de-

press the brake pedal right away.

There is the risk that the vehicle may

start moving.

! After the vehicle is stopped by the

system

S07BN0304

After the brake pedal is depressed, the

Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF

indicator will illuminate and the system will

temporarily stop operating. The Reverse

Automatic Braking system OFF indicator

will turn off when the select lever is shifted

to a position other than the “R” position.

The system will operate again the next

time the select lever is shifted to “R”

position.

NOTE

. After the vehicle has been stopped

by the Reverse Automatic Braking

system, brake control is released and

the electronic parking brake operates

in the following cases. For details about

releasing the parking brake, refer to

“Electronic parking brake” FP310.

– 2 minutes pass after the vehicle

is stopped

– Any door is opened

. The Reverse Automatic Braking sys-

tem may stop operating temporarily in

the following cases and the Reverse

Automatic Braking system OFF indica-

tor will illuminate.

– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to

the sonar sensors or the rear bum-

per near the sonar sensor.

– Objects are too close to the rear

bumper when the select lever is set

to the “R” position.

– The system detects sounds of a

similar frequency to the RAB sonar.

& Canceling the Reverse Auto-

matic Braking system opera-

tion

S07BN04

The Reverse Automatic Braking system

can be temporarily canceled by any of the

following operations.

. While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the brake

pedal is depressed.

. While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the accel-

erator pedal is depressed.

. The accelerator pedal is kept de-

pressed (In this case, limited acceleration

will be canceled and the vehicle will

continue reversing.)

. The select lever is shifted to a position

other than the “R” position.

NOTE

The system will be canceled if the

object is no longer detected.

& Reverse Automatic Braking

system ON/OFF setting

S07BN05

While the select lever is shifted to the “R”

position, the below functions of the Re-

verse Automatic Braking system can be

set by operating the audio/navigation

monitor.

Reverse Automatic Braking System

330

(333,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1) ON setting key of Reverse Automatic

Braking

2) OFF setting key of Reverse Automatic

Braking

3) ON setting key of the object detection

warning beeping sound

4) OFF setting key of the object detection

warning beeping sound

When the ON setting key is shown, the

corresponding setting is ON.

Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn

the setting OFF.

When the OFF setting is shown, the

corresponding setting is OFF.

Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turn

the setting ON.

When the Reverse Automatic Braking

system is turned OFF, the following in-

dicator will illuminate.

RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the

Reverse Automatic Braking system is turned

OFF.

RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the

Reverse Automatic Braking system is

turned ON.

NOTE

. When the settings cannot be chan-

ged, the ON/OFF setting key will be

grayed out.

. The ON/OFF setting key may be

greyed out if the Reverse Automatic

Braking system malfunctions, etc. In

this case, turn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position and then turn it to the

“ON” position again. If the setting

cannot be changed even after turning

the ignition switch to the “ON” position

again, consult your SUBARU dealer.

. The settings will be restored as

follows when the select lever is shifted

to the “R” position next time.

– Reverse Automatic Braking sys-

tem settings: default (ON setting)

– Object detection warning beep-

ing sound: the setting selected by

operating the combination meter

display (color LCD)

Also, the following settings can be chan-

ged by operating the combination meter

display (color LCD).

. Warning volume

. Sonar audible alarm ON/OFF

For details, refer to “Menu screens”

FP207.

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking System

331

Starting and operating

(334,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& RAB warning indicator

S07BN07

If the Reverse Automatic Braking System

malfunctions, the above indicator illumi-

nates on the combination meter. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

& Handling of the sonar sen-

sors

S07BN06

The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear

bumper. To ensure the proper operation of

the Reverse Automatic Braking system,

observe the following precautions.

. Do not affix any stickers or other items

on the sonar sensors or the bumper

surface near the sonar sensors.

. Always keep the sonar sensors and the

rear bumper surface near the sonar

sensors clean.

. Do not modify the rear bumper.

. Do not paint the bumper near the sonar

sensors.

. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor

becomes misaligned, a system malfunc-

tion may occur, including inability to detect

objects in the reversing direction. If any

strong impact is applied to the rear

bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to

have the system inspected.

. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.

NOTE

If the sonar sensors require repair or

replacement, or if the area of the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors re-

quires repair, paintwork or replace-

ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for

assistance.

Reverse Automatic Braking System

332

(335,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(336,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(337,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

S08

8-1. New vehicle break-in driving – the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km) .................................. 336

8-2. Fuel economy hints........................................ 336

8-3. Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ....... 336

8-4. Catalytic converter ......................................... 337

8-5. Periodic inspections....................................... 338

8-6. Driving in foreign countries........................... 338

8-7. Driving tips for AWD models ......................... 338

8-8. Off road driving............................................... 340

Before driving.....................................................340

During driving ....................................................341

After driving ....................................................... 341

8-9. Winter driving ................................................. 342

Operation during cold weather............................ 342

Driving on snowy and icy roads.......................... 343

Corrosion protection........................................... 344

Snow tires ..........................................................344

Tire chains......................................................... 345

Rocking the vehicle............................................ 345

8-10. Loading your vehicle ....................................346

Vehicle capacity weight ...................................... 346

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating).............. 347

Roof rail............................................................. 348

Roof tent............................................................ 348

8-11. Trailer hitch (dealer option) ..........................350

Connecting a trailer............................................ 351

If not towing a trailer.......................................... 352

8-12. Trailer towing .................................................352

Warranties and maintenance .............................. 353

Maximum load limits .......................................... 353

Trailer Hitches.................................................... 356

When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 357

Connecting a trailer............................................ 357

Trailer towing tips .............................................. 358

Driving tips

(338,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

8-1. New vehicle break-in

driving – the first 1,000 miles

(1,600 km)

S08AA

The performance and long life of your

vehicle are dependent on how you handle

and care for your vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km):

. Do not race the engine.

. Do not drive at one constant engine or

vehicle speed, either fast or slow.

. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid ac-

celeration, except in an emergency.

. Avoid hard braking, except in an emer-

gency.

The same break-in procedures should be

applied to an overhauled engine, newly

mounted engine or when brake pads are

replaced with new ones.

8-2. Fuel economy hints

S08AB

The following suggestions will help to save

fuel.

. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-

tion. Always accelerate gently until you

reach the desired speed. Then try to

maintain that speed for as long as possi-

ble.

. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid

racing the engine.

. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

. Keep the hybrid system properly tuned.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the tire placard, which

is located under the door latch on the

driver’s side. Low pressure will increase

tire wear and fuel consumption.

. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

. Keep the front and rear wheels in

proper alignment.

. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or

cargo.

8-3. Engine exhaust gas (car-

bon monoxide)

S08AC

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-

hicle for a lengthy time while the

engine is running. If that is un-

avoidable, then use the ventila-

tion fan to force fresh air into the

vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

336

(339,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction

of the metals used in the manufacture

of the exhaust system, you may hear a

crackling sound coming from the ex-

haust system for a short time after the

hybrid system has been shut off. This

sound is normal.

8-4. Catalytic converter

S08AD

The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases,

thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:

. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small

amount of leaded fuel will damage the

catalytic converter.

. Never start the hybrid system by push-

ing or pulling the vehicle.

. Avoid racing the engine.

. Never turn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position while the vehicle is moving.

. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel

the engine running rough (misfiring, back-

firing or incomplete combustion), have

your vehicle checked and repaired by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

. Do not apply undercoating or rust

prevention treatment to the heat shield of

catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-

tem.

. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel

level.

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive

or park the vehicle anywhere

near flammable materials (e.g.,

grass, paper, rags or leaves),

because the catalytic converter

operates at very high tempera-

tures.

. Keep everyone and flammable

materials away from the exhaust

pipe while the hybrid system is

running. The exhaust gas is very

hot.

Catalytic converter

337

Driving tips

(340,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

8-5. Periodic inspections

S08AE

To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recom-

mended maintenance services listed in

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-

formed at the specified time or mileage

intervals.

8-6. Driving in foreign coun-

tries

S08AF

When planning to use your vehicle in

another country:

. Confirm the availability of the correct

fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” FP281.

. Comply with all regulations and require-

ments of each country.

8-7. Driving tips for AWD

models

S08AG

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

. When replacing or installing

tire(s), all four tires must be the

same for following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

Periodic inspections

338

(341,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

For the items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

driver’s door pillar.

If all of four tires are not the same

for items (a) to (h), serious me-

chanical damage could occur to

the drive train of your car, and

affect the following.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the hybrid

system power to all four wheels. AWD

models provide better traction when driv-

ing on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads

and when moving out of mud, dirt and

sand. By shifting power between the front

and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also

provide added traction during acceleration

and added engine braking force during

deceleration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle

may handle differently than an ordinary

two wheel drive vehicle and it contains

some features unique to AWD. For safety

purposes as well as to avoid damaging the

AWD system, you should keep the follow-

ing tips in mind.

. An AWD model is better able to climb

steeper roads under snowy or slippery

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.

There is little difference in handling, how-

ever, during extremely sharp turns or

sudden braking. Therefore, when driving

down a slope or turning corners, be sure to

reduce your speed and maintain an ample

distance from other vehicles.

. Always check the cold tire pressure

before starting to drive. The recommended

tire pressure is provided on the tire

placard, which is located under the door

latch on the driver’s side.

. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle

under hard-driving conditions such as

steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate

more frequent replacement of the follow-

ing items than that specified in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

– Engine oil

– Brake fluid

– Rear differential gear oil

– Continuously variable transmission

fluid

– Front differential gear oil

. Never attempt to drive through pools

and puddles, or roads flooded with water.

Water entering the engine air intake or the

exhaust pipe or water splashing onto

electrical parts may damage your vehicle

and may cause it to stall.

– CONTINUED –

Driving tips for AWD models

339

Driving tips

(342,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. There are some precautions that you

must observe when towing your vehicle.

For detailed information, refer to “Towing”

FP380.

8-8. Off road driving

S08AH

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive model could easily

lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

Frequent driving of an AWD model

under hard-driving conditions such

as rough roads or off roads will

necessitate more frequent replace-

ment of the following items than that

specified in the maintenance sche-

dule described in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

. Engine oil

. Brake fluid

Remember that damage done to

your SUBARU while operating it off-

road and not using common sense

precautions such as those listed

here is not eligible for warranty

coverage.

Because of the AWD feature and higher

ground clearance, you can drive your

SUBARU on ordinary roads or off-road.

But please keep in mind that an AWD

SUBARU is a passenger car and is neither

a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-

terrain vehicle. If you do take your

SUBARU off-road, certain common sense

precautions such as those in the following

list should be taken.

& Before driving

S08AH09

. Make certain that you and all of your

passengers are wearing seatbelts.

. Carry some emergency equipment,

such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,

wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or

citizens band radio.

. Secure all cargo carried inside the

vehicle and make certain that it is not piled

higher than the seatbacks. During sudden

stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be

thrown around in the vehicle and cause

injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof.

Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of

gravity and make it more prone to tip over.

Off road driving

340

(343,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. Never equip your vehicle with tires

larger than those specified in this manual.

& During driving

S08AH10

General precautions:

. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-

sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or

over rough terrain.

. Slow down and employ extra caution at

all times. When driving off-road, you will

not have the benefit of marked traffic

lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and

the like.

. Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead, drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. A vehicle can much more

easily tip over sideways than it can end

over end. Avoid driving straight up or down

slopes that are too steep.

. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-

cially at higher speeds.

. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the

wheel and injure your hands. Instead,

drive with your fingers and thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

. Do not drive or park over or near

flammable materials such as dry grass or

fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The

exhaust system is very hot while the

engine is running and right after the engine

stops. This could create a fire hazard.

Precautions when driving under espe-

cially dangerous situations:

. If driving through water, such as when

crossing shallow streams, first check the

depth of the water and the bottom of the

stream bed for firmness and ensure that

the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly

and cross the stream without stopping.

The water should be shallow enough that it

does not reach the vehicle’s undercar-

riage. Water entering the engine air intake

or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto

electrical parts may damage your vehicle

and may cause it to stall. Never attempt to

drive through rushing water; regardless of

its depth, it can wash away the ground

from under your tires, resulting in possible

loss of traction and even vehicle rollover.

. If you must rock the vehicle to free it

from sand or mud, depress the accelerator

pedal slightly and move the select lever

back and forth between “D” and “R”

repeatedly. Do not race the hybrid system.

For the best possible traction, avoid spin-

ning the wheels when trying to free the

vehicle.

& After driving

S08AH11

. Always check your brakes for effective-

ness immediately after driving in sand,

mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and

stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that

process several times to dry out the brake

discs and brake pads.

. After driving through tall grass, mud,

rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is

no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand,

etc. adhering to or trapped on the under-

body. Clear off any such matter from the

underbody. If the vehicle is used with these

materials trapped or adhering to the

underbody, a mechanical breakdown or

fire could occur.

. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-

road driving. Suspension components are

particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they

need to be washed thoroughly.

Off road driving

341

Driving tips

(344,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

8-9. Winter driving

S08AI

& Operation during cold weath-

S08AI01

! Maintenance

S08AI0105

Carry some emergency equipment, such

as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares,

a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold tem-

peratures reduce battery capacity. The

battery must be in good condition to

provide enough power for cold winter

starts.

It normally takes longer to start the hybrid

system in very cold weather conditions.

Use an engine oil of a proper grade and

viscosity for cold weather. Using heavy

summer oil will make it harder to start the

hybrid system.

Keep the door locks from freezing by

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage

or separate the rubber weather strips

around the door. If the door is frozen, use

hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards

thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-

tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use

engine antifreeze or other substitutes

because they may damage the paint of

the vehicle.

SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-

tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it is

diluted, as indicated in the following table.

Washer Fluid Con-

centration

Freezing Temperature

30% 10.48F (−128C)

50% −48F (−208C)

100%

−498F (−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid,

check the freezing temperatures in the

table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is too low for the outside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct your

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

! Before driving your vehicle

S08AI0101

Before entering the vehicle, remove any

snow or ice from your shoes because that

could make the pedals slippery and driving

dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before

driving, check that the accelerator pedal,

brake pedal, and all other controls operate

smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accu-

mulated under the fenders to avoid making

Winter driving

342

(345,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

steering difficult. During severe winter

driving, stop when and where it is safe to

do so and check under the fenders

periodically.

! Parking in cold weather

S08AI0102

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle if you park

the vehicle in snow with the hybrid

system running.

CAUTION

. Do not use the parking brake

when parking for long periods in

cold weather since it could freeze

in that position.

. When the vehicle is parked in

snow or when it snows, raise the

wiper blades off the glass to

prevent damage to them.

. When the vehicle has been left

parked after use on roads heavily

covered with snow, or has been

left parked during a snowstorm,

icing may develop on the brake

system, which could cause poor

braking action. Check for snow or

ice buildup on the suspension,

disc brakes and brake hoses

underneath the vehicle. If there

is caked snow or ice, remove it,

being careful not to damage the

disc brakes and brake hoses and

ABS harness.

When parking for long periods in cold

weather, you should observe the following

tips.

1. Place the select lever in the “P”

position.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent

the vehicle from moving.

! Refueling in cold weather

S08AI0103

To help prevent moisture from forming in

the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel

tank is recommended during cold weather.

Use only additives that are specifically

designed for this purpose. When an anti-

freeze additive is used, its effect lasts

longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used for

an extended period, it is best to have the

fuel tank filled to capacity.

& Driving on snowy and icy

roads

S08AI02

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid

sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-

speed driving, and sharp turning when

driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the

engine brake effectively to control the

vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear

when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-

vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly

leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-

hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-

mance on snowy and icy roads. For

information on braking on slippery sur-

faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake

System)” FP300 and “Vehicle Dynamics

Control system” FP302.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads such as snowy or icy

roads. This may cause loss of vehi-

cle control.

– CONTINUED –

Winter driving

343

Driving tips

(346,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving

in snowstorms. Snow will enter the

engine’s intake system and may

hinder the airflow, which could re-

sult in engine shutdown or even

breakdown.

! Wiper operation when snowing

S08AI0201

Before driving in cold weather, make sure

the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to

the windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the

windshield or rear window, perform the

following procedure.

. To thaw the windshield wiper blade

rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow

selection in “

” and the temperature set

for maximum warmth until the wiper blade

rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to

“Climate control” FP249.

. A wiper deicer is helpful to thaw the

windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to

“Defogger and deicer” FP244.

. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,

use the rear window defogger. Refer to

“Defogger and deicer” FP244.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts

to stick on the surface of the windshield

despite wiper operation, use the defroster

with the airflow selection in “

” and the

temperature set for maximum warmth.

After the windshield gets warmed enough

to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away

using the windshield washer. Refer to

“Windshield washer” FP241.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the

wiper from working effectively. If snow is

stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to

a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the

vehicle at road side, use the hazard

warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer

to “Hazard warning flasher” FP177.

& Corrosion protection

S08AI03

Refer to “Corrosion protection” FP394.

& Snow tires

S08AI04

WARNING

. When replacing or installing win-

ter tire(s), all four tires must be

the same for following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

driver’s door pillar.

If all of four winter tires are not

the same for items (a) to (h),

serious mechanical damage

could occur to the drive train of

your car, and affect the following.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

. Do not use a combination of

radial, belted bias or bias tires

since it may cause dangerous

handling characteristics and lead

to an accident.

Winter driving

344

(347,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Your vehicle is equipped with “all season

tires” as original equipment, which are

designed to provide an adequate measure

of traction, handling and braking perfor-

mance in year-round driving. In winter, it

may be possible to enhance performance

through use of tires designed specifically

for winter driving conditions.

When you choose to install winter tires on

your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire

size and type. You must install four winter

tires that are of the same size, construc-

tion, brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

since this may result in dangerous hand-

ling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough

clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your

vehicle.

& Tire chains

S08AI05

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your

vehicle because of the lack of clear-

ance between the tires and vehicle

body.

NOTE

When tire chains cannot be used, use of

another type of traction device (such as

spring chains) may be acceptable if use

on your vehicle is recommended by the

device manufacturer, taking into ac-

count tire size and road conditions.

Follow the device manufacturer’s in-

structions, especially regarding max-

imum vehicle speed.

To help avoid damage to your vehicle,

drive slowly, readjust or remove the

device if it is contacting your vehicle,

and do not spin your wheels. Damage

caused to your vehicle by use of a

traction device is not covered under

warranty.

Make certain that any traction device

you use is an SAE class S device, and

use it on the front wheels only. Always

use the utmost care when driving with a

traction device. Overconfidence be-

cause you are using a traction device

could easily lead to a serious accident.

& Rocking the vehicle

S08AI06

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from

snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the select

lever back and forth between “D” and “R”

repeatedly. Do not race the hybrid system.

For the best possible traction, avoid spin-

ning the wheels when trying to free the

vehicle.

Winter driving

345

Driving tips

(348,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

8-10. Loading your vehicle

S08AJ

WARNING

. Never allow passengers to ride

on a folded rear seatback in the

cargo area. Doing so may result

in serious injury.

. Never stack luggage or other

cargo higher than the top of the

seatback because it could tumble

forward and injure passengers in

the event of a sudden stop or

accident. Keep luggage or cargo

low, as close to the floor as

possible.

WARNING

. When you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it whenever

you can to prevent it from being

thrown around inside the vehicle

during sudden stops, sharp turns

or in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on the

roof. These loads raise the vehi-

cle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

. Secure lengthy items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum load

limit. If you do, some parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can

change the way your vehicle

handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal

injury. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

. Do not place anything on the

extended cargo area cover. Such

items could tumble forward in the

event of a sudden stop or a

collision. This could cause ser-

ious injury.

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers

with flammable or corrosive liquids

or any other dangerous items inside

the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded cargo.

& Vehicle capacity weight

S08AJ01

Loading your vehicle

346

(349,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Vehicle placard

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by available

cargo space. The maximum load you can

carry in your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the driver’s

side door pillar. It includes the total weight

of the driver and all passengers and their

belongings, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,

etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve-

hicle Weight Rating and

Gross Axle Weight Rating)

S08AJ02

Certification label

The certification label attached to the

bottom of driver’s side door pillar shows

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must

never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the

combined total of weight of the vehicle,

fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any

optional equipment and trailer tongue

load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-

pending on the situation. The GVWR

equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle – including standard equipment,

fluids and emergency tools plus the

vehicle capacity weight.

In addition, the total weight applied to each

axle (GAW) must never exceed the

GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

adjusted by relocating luggage inside the

vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is

lower than the vehicle capacity weight,

either front or rear GAW may exceed the

GAWR, depending on the distribution of

the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly

distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you

should confirm that GVW and front and

rear GAWs are within the GVWR and

GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle

scale, found at a commercial weighing

station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower

load range than the originals because they

may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-

tions. Replacement tires with a higher load

range than the originals do not increase

the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

– CONTINUED –

Loading your vehicle

347

Driving tips

(350,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Roof rail

S08AJ04

1) Crossbar

Cargo can be carried on the roof after

securing the crossbars to the roof rails and

installing an appropriate carrying attach-

ment. When installing crossbars and a

carrying attachment, follow the manufac-

turer’s instructions. The roof rail system is

designed to carry loads (cargo, crossbars

and carrying attachment) of no more than

176 lbs (80 kg). Be sure not to exceed

your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR.

CAUTION

. When using a carrying attach-

ment, make sure that the total

carrying load of the cargo, cross-

bars and carrying attachment

does not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg).

Overloading may cause damage

to the vehicle.

. For cargo carrying purposes, the

roof rails must be used together

with the crossbars and any ap-

propriate carrying attachment

that may be needed. The roof

rails must never be used alone

to carry cargo. Otherwise, da-

mage to the roof or paint, or a

dangerous road hazard due to

loss of cargo could result.

! Installing carrying attachments on

the roof rack

S08AJ0901

When installing any carrying attachments

such as the load carriers, crossbars, bike

carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo

basket, etc., follow the manufacturer’s

instructions of the load capacity and make

sure that the attachments are securely

installed. Use only attachments designed

specifically for the crossbars. Before oper-

ating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo

is properly secured on the attachment.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting driving

characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

& Roof tent

S08AJ14

WARNING

Adding weight to the vehicle’s roof

can adversely affect handling, brak-

ing, and rollover resistance. The

vehicle must never be driven with a

total roof rail load in excess of 176

lbs (80 kg).

Loading your vehicle

348

(351,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

CAUTION

. The roof rail load limit for sta-

tionary vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg))

applies only when the vehicle is

parked and the load is evenly

distributed left/right and front/

rear and the roof crossbars and

roof tent are tightly secured to

the vehicle. If these conditions

are not met, the load limit will be

lower.

. The maximum load limit of the

roof crossbars must be obtained

from the manufacturer or retailer

of the roof rack. When driving the

vehicle, the maximum roof rail

load is 176 lbs (80 kg) or the

crossbar load limit (whichever is

lower).

Roof tents may be used under certain

conditions at your own risk.

! When driving the vehicle

S08AJ1401

The total weight on the roof rails, including

the roof crossbars and roof tent, must not

exceed the vehicle’s roof rail load of 176

lbs (80 kg), evenly distributed.

A: Roof rails

B: Roof crossbars

C: Roof tent

B + C < 176 lbs (80 kg)

! When the vehicle is parked on level

ground

S08AJ1402

A: Roof rails

B: Roof crossbars

C: Roof tent

D: Occupants in the roof tent

– CONTINUED –

Loading your vehicle

349

Driving tips

(352,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

The total weight on the roof rails –

including the roof crossbars, roof tent,

and all occupants and contents in the roof

tent – must not exceed either the vehicle’s

roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)), evenly

distributed, or the load limit of the roof

crossbars, whichever is lower.

Load limit of the roof rail (A).

B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg)

Exceeding this load limit could cause

damage to the vehicle or racking system.

The vehicle must never be driven with

occupants in the roof tent. Before the

vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo

must be removed from the roof tent and

the roof rail load must be restored to within

the roof rail load limit of 176 lbs (80 kg).

Refer to the user manual that accompa-

nied the roof tent for important safety

information and instructions on the proper

installation and use of the tent.

8-11. Trailer hitch (dealer op-

tion)

S08AK

WARNING

. Never exceed the maximum

weight specified for the trailer

hitch. Exceeding the maximum

weight could cause an accident

resulting in serious personal in-

juries. Permissible trailer weight

changes depending on the situa-

tion. For possible recommenda-

tions and limitations, refer to

“Trailer towing” FP352.

. Trailer brakes are required when

the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg). Be sure your trailer has

safety chains and that each chain

will hold the trailer’s maximum

gross weight. Towing trailers

without safety chains could cre-

ate a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch

due to coupling damage or hitch

ball damage.

. Be sure to check the hitch pin and

safety pin for positive locking

placement before towing a trailer.

If the ball mount comes off the

hitch receiver, the trailer could

get loose and create a traffic

safety hazard.

. Although towing regulations for

trailer or caravan vehicles vary

by state/region, all regulations

agree that specifications such

as the maximum gross trailer

weight must not exceed the les-

ser of the following:

– Maximum gross trailer weight

– Maximum gross tongue

weight

– GVWR

– GAWR

. Failure to comply with the proce-

dures set forth will not only

compromise your safety, but will

also negate your insurance cov-

erage and/or may violate the state

road and traffic acts and regula-

tions.

. Use only the ball mount supplied

with this hitch. Use the hitch only

as a weight carrying hitch. Do not

use with any type of weight dis-

tributing hitch.

. The standard bumper beam must

be installed after you remove the

trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU

dealer for purchase of a standard

Trailer hitch (dealer option)

350

(353,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

bumper beam if you do not have

the original.

. Safety performance is decreased

and there is increased risk of

injury to passengers in the case

of an accident if the trailer hitch

or a standard bumper beam is not

installed. One of them must al-

ways be installed on the vehicle.

. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is

not possible to install the rear

towing hook.

The maximum gross trailer weight and

maximum gross tongue weight are indi-

cated in the following table.

Maximum gross trai-

ler weight

Maximum gross ton-

gue weight

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

100 lbs (45 kg)

When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer

towing” FP352.

& Connecting a trailer

S08AK01

1) Ball mount

2) Hitch pin

3) Safety pin

A) Hitch receiver tube

1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch

receiver tube.

2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located

on the hitch receiver tube so that the pin

passes through the ball mount.

3. Insert the safety pin through the hole

located on the hitch pin securely.

4. Check the ball mount assembly by

pulling on it to make sure it does not come

off the hitch receiver.

1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains

5. Attach a hitch ball. Use only a hitch ball

that is appropriate for the ball mount and

your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely

installed on the ball mount.

6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with

safety chains that will hold the trailer’s

– CONTINUED –

Trailer hitch (dealer option)

351

Driving tips

(354,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

maximum gross weight. The chains should

cross under the trailer tongue to prevent

the tongue from dropping onto the ground

in case it should disconnect from the hitch

ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains

taking tight turn situations into account;

however, be careful not to let them drag on

the ground.

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to any

part of the vehicle other than the

safety chain hooks.

1) Hitch harness connector

8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black

four-pin wire connector to the towing

trailer’s wire harness.

9. Confirm proper function of the hitch

wire harness by individually activating the

brake, stop and turn signal lights on the

trailer.

NOTE

Always disconnect the trailer wire har-

ness before launching or retrieving a

watercraft.

& If not towing a trailer

S08AK02

. Remove the ball mount from the hitch

receiver tube and insert the receiver cover

onto the hitch receiver tube.

. Place the dust cap over the four-pin

connector of the hitch wire harness to

protect against possible damage.

. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the

four-pin connector using terminal grease.

8-12. Trailer towing

S08AL

Your vehicle is designed and intended to

be used primarily as a passenger-carrying

vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional

loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,

brakes, tires and suspension and has an

adverse effect on fuel economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety

and satisfaction depend upon proper use

of correct equipment and cautious opera-

tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of

your SUBARU dealer to assist you in

purchasing a hitch and other necessary

towing equipment appropriate for your

vehicle. Do not use towing equipment

other than genuine SUBARU towing

equipment. In addition, be sure to follow

the instructions for proper installation and

use provided by the trailer or caravan’s

manufacturer.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for

injuries or vehicle damage that result from

trailer towing equipment, or from any

errors or omissions in the instructions

accompanying such equipment or for your

failure to follow the proper instructions.

Regularly check that the hitch mounting

bolts and nuts are tightened securely.

Trailer towing

352

(355,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Warranties and maintenance

S08AL01

SUBARU warranties do not apply to

vehicle damage or malfunction caused by

trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow

a trailer, more frequent maintenance will

be required due to the additional load.

(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under

severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”.)

Under no circumstances should a trailer be

towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with

any new powertrain component (engine,

transmission, differential, wheel bearings,

etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of

driving.

& Maximum load limits

S08AL02

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum load

limits explained in the following.

Exceeding the maximum load limits

could cause personal injury and/or

vehicle damage.

CAUTION

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Before towing a trailer, check the

trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs

and tongue load. Make sure the

load and its distribution in your

vehicle and trailer are acceptable.

! Total trailer weight

S08AL0201

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo load) must never exceed the

maximum total trailer weight in the follow-

ing table.

– CONTINUED –

Trailer towing

353

Driving tips

(356,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Conditions Maximum total trailer weight

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade

continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an

outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.

750 lbs (340 kg)

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

S08AL0202

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must

never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com-

bined total of the weight of the vehicle,

driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,

trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment installed on your vehicle.

Therefore, the GVW changes depending

on the situation. Determine the GVW each

time before going on a trip by putting your

vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

Trailer towing

354

(357,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 9/ 18

Certification label

GVWR of your vehicle that is given by

SUBARU is shown on the certification

label located at the bottom of driver’s side

door pillar of your vehicle.

! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

S08AL0203

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear

GAWs can be adjusted by relocating

passengers and luggage inside the vehi-

cle. The front and rear GAWR of your

vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also

shown on the certification label located at

the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to

confirm that the total weight and weight

distribution are within safe driving limits,

you should have your vehicle and trailer

weighed at a commercial weighing station.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

! Tongue load

S08AL0204

Tongue load

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8

to 11 percent of the total trailer weight and

does not exceed the maximum value of

100 lbs (45 kg).

– CONTINUED –

Trailer towing

355

Driving tips

(358,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1) Jack*

2) Bathroom scale

*: The jack can be purchased at a SUBARU

dealer. When using a general-purpose jack,

be sure to use a general-purpose jack that is

equivalent to the genuine SUBARU jack.

The tongue load can be weighed with a

bathroom scale as shown in the illustration

above. When weighing the tongue load, be

sure to position the towing coupler at the

height at which it would be during actual

towing, using a jack as shown.

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by proper

distribution of the load in the trailer. Never

load the trailer with more weight in the

back than in the front; approximately 60

percent of the trailer load should be in the

front and approximately 40 percent in the

rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as

possible on both the left and right sides.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with more

weight in the back of trailer’s axle

than in the front, the load is taken off

the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

This may cause the rear wheels to

skid, especially during braking or

when vehicle speed is reduced dur-

ing cornering, resulting in over-

steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

& Trailer Hitches

S08AL03

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-body

of your vehicle to install a commer-

cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-

ous exhaust gas, water or mud may

enter the passenger compartment

through the drilled hole. Exhaust

gas contains carbon monoxide, a

colorless and odorless gas which is

dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

Also, drilling the frame or under-

body of your vehicle could cause

deterioration of strength of your

vehicle and cause corrosion around

the drilled hole.

CAUTION

. Do not modify the vehicle ex-

haust system, brake system, or

other systems when installing a

hitch or other trailer towing

Trailer towing

356

(359,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

equipment.

. Do not use axle-mounted hitches

as they can cause damage to the

axle housing, wheel bearings,

wheels or tires.

Do not use a trailer hitch other than

genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine

SUBARU hitch is available from your

SUBARU dealer.

& When you do not tow a trailer

S08AL14

CAUTION

. The housing should be kept dirt

and corrosion-free at the points

of contact. The surfaces only

require cleaning with a cloth.

Grease or other lubricants

should never be used.

. If the ball is not installed, the

plastic insert should then be

inserted for protection and to

prevent dirt.

When the ball is not used, place the ball

cap and store securely.

& Connecting a trailer

S08AL04

! Trailer brakes

S08AL0401

WARNING

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Do not directly connect your

trailer’s hydraulic brake system

to the hydraulic brake system in

your vehicle. Direct connection

would cause the vehicle’s brake

performance to deteriorate and

could lead to an accident.

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight

plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg), the trailer is required to be

equipped with its own brake system.

Electric brakes or surge brakes are re-

commended, and must be installed prop-

erly. Check that your trailer’s brakes con-

form with Federal, state/province and/or

other applicable regulations. Your

SUBARU’s brake system is not designed

to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic

brake system. Please ask your SUBARU

dealer and professional trailer supplier for

more information about the trailer’s brake

system.

! Trailer safety chains

S08AL0402

WARNING

Always use safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. Towing

trailer without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch due

to coupling damage or hitch ball

damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch

ball should break or become discon-

nected, the trailer could get loose and

create a traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing

vehicle and trailer with trailer safety

chains. Two chains should be used in

total, one to the right side and the other to

the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains

crossing each other under the trailer

tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping

onto the ground in case the trailer tongue

should disconnect from the hitch ball.

Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking

tight turn situations into account; however,

be careful not to let them drag on the

ground.

– CONTINUED –

Trailer towing

357

Driving tips

(360,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Outside mirrors

S08AL0403

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,

check that the standard outside mirrors

provide a good rearward field of view

without significant blind spots. If significant

blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-

dard outside mirrors, use towing mirrors

that conform with Federal, state/province

and/or other applicable regulations.

! Trailer lights

S08AL0404

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improper

connection of trailer lights may

damage your vehicle’s electrical

system and cause a malfunction of

your vehicle’s lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s

electrical system requires modifications to

the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its

capacity and accommodate wiring

changes. To ensure the trailer lights are

connected properly, please consult your

SUBARU dealer. Check for proper opera-

tion of the turn signals and the brake lights

each time you connect a trailer to your

vehicle.

! Tires

S08AL0405

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle

are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires”

FP444.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

proper inflation pressure should be in

accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s

specifications. Also check federal, state,

province and/or other applicable regula-

tions.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire

when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

road service representative or profes-

sional to repair the flat tire.

& Trailer towing tips

S08AL05

CAUTION

. For models equipped with the

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

driving support systems, when

towing a trailer, press the BSD/

RCTA OFF switch to deactivate

the system. The system may not

operate properly due to the

blocked radar waves. For details

about the BSD/RCTA OFF switch,

refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF switch”

FP321.

. For models equipped with the

RAB (Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing) system, consult your

SUBARU dealer for additional

information about towing a trai-

ler.

. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)

when towing a trailer in hilly

country on hot days.

. When towing a trailer, steering,

stability, stopping distance and

braking performance will be dif-

ferent when compared to normal

operation. For safety’s sake, you

should employ extra caution

when towing a trailer and you

should never drive at excessive

speeds. You should also keep the

following tips in mind:

. When parking on a steep slope

with a trailer attached to your

Trailer towing

358

(361,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

vehicle, the braking power of the

electronic parking brake may not

be sufficient since strong braking

power is needed.

If your vehicle is equipped with SI-DRIVE,

and when towing a trailer on an uphill

slope, do not drive in the Intelligent (I)

mode. It is recommend that you drive in the

Sport (S) mode.

However, it is possible to tow a trailer in

any mode of the SI-DRIVE on a downhill

slope.

! Before starting out on a trip

S08AL0501

. Check the towing regulations for trailer

or caravan vehicles that vary by state/

region. Failure to comply with the proce-

dures set forth will not only compromise

your safety, but will also negate your

insurance coverage and/or may violate

the state road and traffic acts and regula-

tions.

. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-

hitch mounting are in good condition. If any

problems are apparent, do not tow the

trailer.

. Check that the vehicle rests horizon-

tally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle

is tipped sharply up at the front and down

at the rear, check the total trailer weight,

GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then

confirm that the load and its distribution are

acceptable.

. Check that the tire rating and pressures

are correct.

. Check that the vehicle and trailer are

connected properly. Confirm that:

– the trailer tongue is connected

properly to the hitch ball.

– the trailer lights connector is con-

nected properly and trailer’s brake

lights illuminate when the vehicle’s

brake pedal is pressed, and that the

trailer’s turn signal lights flash when

the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-

ated.

– the safety chains are connected

properly.

– all cargo in the trailer is secured

safely in position.

– the outside mirrors provide a good

rearward field of view without a sig-

nificant blind spot.

. Sufficient time should be taken to learn

the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination

before starting out on a trip. In an area free

of traffic, practice turning, stopping and

backing up.

! Driving with a trailer

S08AL0502

. You should allow for considerably more

stopping distance when towing a trailer.

Avoid sudden braking because it may

result in skidding or jackknifing and loss

of control.

. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-

erations.

. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and

rapid lane changes.

. Slow down before turning. Make a

longer than normal turning radius because

the trailer wheels will be closer than the

vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a

tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.

. Crosswinds will adversely affect the

handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-

ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to

weather conditions or the passing of large

trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly

grip the steering wheel and promptly begin

decelerating your vehicle at a gradual

pace.

. When passing other vehicles, consider-

able distance is required because of the

added weight and length caused by

attaching the trailer to your vehicle.

. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can

be difficult and requires experience. Never

accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the

bottom of the steering wheel with one

hand.

– CONTINUED –

Trailer towing

359

Driving tips

(362,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

To reverse around a corner, perform the

following procedure.

1. Reverse slowly and steer in the oppo-

site direction to the way you want to turn.

2. Once the trailer begins to swing

around, straighten the steering wheel.

3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc-

tion.

4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line

with the trailer, then straighten the steering

again.

. If the ABS warning light illuminates

while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing

the trailer and have repairs performed

immediately by your nearest SUBARU

dealer.

! Driving on grades

S08AL0503

. Before going down a steep hill, slow

down and shift into lower gear in order to

utilize the engine braking effect and pre-

vent overheating of your vehicle’s brakes.

Do not make sudden downshifts.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, the

air conditioner may turn off automatically

to protect the engine from overheating.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay

attention to the following indicators be-

cause the engine and transmission are

relatively prone to overheating.

: Coolant temperature high warning light

If the coolant temperature high warning

light illuminates, immediately turn off the

air conditioner and stop the vehicle in the

nearest safe location. For further instruc-

tions and additional information, refer to

the following sections.

– “If you park your vehicle in case of

an emergency” FP364

– “Engine and hybrid system over-

heating” FP378

– “Coolant temperature high warning

light” FP185

. Avoid using the accelerator pedal to

stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of

using the parking brake or foot brake. That

may cause the transmission fluid to over-

heat.

! Parking on a grade

S08AL0504

CAUTION

The braking power of the electronic

parking brake may not be sufficient

when strong braking power is

needed (e.g., when parking on a

steep slope while towing a trailer).

Always block the wheels under both

vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply

the parking brake firmly. You should not

park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or

slope cannot be avoided, you should take

the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal

down.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks

under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

Trailer towing

360

(363,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release the regular brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the regular brakes and then

apply the parking brake; slowly release

the regular brakes.

5. Shift into “P” position and shut off the

hybrid system.

Trailer towing

361

Driving tips

(364,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(365,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

S09

9-1. If you park your vehicle in case of

an emergency................................................ 364

9-2. Maintenance tools .......................................... 364

Tool locations..................................................... 364

Using the jack (if equipped) ................................ 365

9-3. Flat tires .......................................................... 366

Sealing flat tire ................................................... 366

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).............374

9-4. Jump starting.................................................. 375

How to jump start ...............................................376

9-5. Engine and hybrid system overheating........ 378

If steam is coming from the engine

compartment ....................................................378

If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment ....................................................378

If the hybrid system is overheating ..................... 379

9-6. Towing ............................................................. 380

Towing hook and tie-down hooks/holes............... 380

Using a flat-bed truck .........................................383

9-7. Electronic parking brake – if the electronic

parking brake cannot be released ............... 384

9-8. Access key fob – if access key fob does

not operate properly .....................................384

Locking and unlocking ....................................... 384

Switching power status ...................................... 385

Starting the hybrid system ................................. 385

9-9. Hybrid system – if the hybrid system

does not start ................................................386

9-10. Fuel door – if the fuel door cannot be

opened ...........................................................386

9-11. Charge port door – if the charge port

door cannot be opened ................................387

9-12. Charge cable – if the charge cable

cannot be removed .......................................388

9-13. Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be

opened ...........................................................388

9-14. Moonroof (if equipped) – if the moonroof

does not close...............................................389

9-15. If your vehicle is involved in an accident ...389

In case of emergency

(366,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

9-1. If you park your vehicle in

case of an emergency

S09AA

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers

when you have to park your vehicle under

emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to

safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-

vated regardless of the ignition switch

position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the

hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off

by pushing the switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

9-2. Maintenance tools

S09AH

Your vehicle is equipped with the following

maintenance tools.

. Jack*

. Jack handle

. Screwdriver

. Towing hook (eye bolt)

. Wheel nut wrench

*: The jack and the jack strap can be

purchased at a SUBARU dealer.

& Tool locations

S09AH15

1) Jack (if equipped)

2) Jack handle

3) Wheel nut wrench

If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency

364

(367,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

A jack handle, wheel nut wrench, and jack

are stored under the left side front seat.

1) Towing hook (eye bolt)

2) Screwdriver

Towing hook and screwdriver are stored

under the floor of the cargo area.

& Using the jack (if equipped)

S09AH14

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-

ever possible, then stop the hybrid system.

2. Apply the parking brake securely and

shift the select lever to the “P” (Park)

position.

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and

unload all occupants and luggage from the

vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the tire that

you are going to replace.

5. Take out the jack, jack handle and

wheel nut wrench.

Jack-up points

6. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the tire

that you are going to replace.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

7. Insert the jack handle into the hole of

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance tools

365

In case of emergency

(368,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

the wheel nut wrench.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle

higher than necessary.

9-3. Flat tires

S09AC

If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing speed.

Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

& Sealing flat tire

S09AC03

WARNING

Read these instructions and

warnings carefully before sealing a

flat tire.

Compliance with these instructions

is vital to ensuring vehicle safety.

Noncompliance with these instruc-

tions means risking tire damage,

which can affect vehicle handling

and lead to loss of vehicle control.

This may result in serious injury or

death.

If the tire is punctured, you can seal the flat

tire temporarily by using the flat tire repair

kit. You can seal a flat tire caused, for

example, by nails or similar objects with

less than 0.2 in (4 mm). However, depend-

ing on the type and extent of tire damage,

some tires can only be partially sealed or

not sealed at all, and this condition may

cause a loss of tire pressure. A loss of tire

pressure can affect vehicle handling,

leading to the loss of vehicle control.

After sealing the flat tire temporarily,

change the tires with new ones as soon

as possible. We recommend that you have

the sealed tire changed by your nearest

SUBARU dealer. You may reuse the wheel

if the attached sealant is wiped off, but the

valve of the wheel must be replaced with a

new one. If you reuse the wheel without

replacing the valve, air may leak from the

valve.

For tire replacement, refer to “Tire replace-

ment” FP421.

Flat tires

366

(369,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Safety precautions when sealing flat

tire

S09AC0301

Observe the following rules when sealing a

flat tire.

1) Sealing is possible

2) Sealing is not possible

WARNING

. Do not use the flat tire repair kit in

the following cases.

– The tire has already been

damaged as a result of being

driven in the under inflated

condition.

– The tire damage is not located

within the visible tread of the

tire.

– The tire damage is on the

sidewall of the tire.

– When the tire has been taken

off of the wheel.

– The wheel or the tire valve of

the flat tire is damaged.

– Two or more tires have been

punctured.

– The expiration date of the

sealant has passed.

– The tire is punctured by

pointed items such as nails

of 0.2 in (4 mm) or larger.

. When inflating the flat tire, if the

tire inflation pressure does not

reach the green zone of the

pressure gauge within 10 min-

utes, do not continue to seal the

tire. We recommend that you

contact your SUBARU dealer.

. Drive with caution and avoid

making sudden steering or driv-

ing maneuvers.

. Do not exceed a maximum speed

of 50 mph (80 km/h).

. Do not exceed a maximum driv-

ing distance of 125 miles (200

km).

. Do not use tire chains on a sealed

tire.

. Do not tow a trailer.

. If used for a purpose other than

sealing a flat tire, the flat tire

repair kit may cause a severe

accident or injury due to the fact

that compressed air can act as an

explosive or propellant.

. Safely park your vehicle on the

roadside so that you do not

obstruct the flow of traffic and

so that you are able to seal the flat

tire without being in danger.

. Apply the parking brake, even if

the vehicle is parked on a level

road, to make sure that the vehi-

cle will not move.

. Stop the hybrid system before

sealing the flat tire.

. Turn on the hazard warning

flasher while sealing the flat tire.

. Do not attempt to remove foreign

objects like nails or screws that

have penetrated the tire. Leave

them as they are.

. Never leave the flat tire repair kit

unattended while in use.

. Only one tire can be repaired with

one bottle of sealant.

. The tires can be repaired when

the ambient temperature is −228F

– CONTINUED –

Flat tires

367

In case of emergency

(370,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

(−308C) or higher.

CAUTION

. Remember that the flat tire repair

kit only provides temporary mo-

bility. Regulations concerning

tire repair after usage of flat tire

repair kit may differ from country

to country. We recommend that

you consult your SUBARU dealer

or tire dealer for advice.

. Store the flat tire repair kit safely

and secure it in the cargo area.

Storing it anywhere in the pas-

senger compartment is not advi-

sable because it could strike an

occupant in the event of a sudden

stop or collision and cause injury.

. Use the flat tire repair kit with

original vehicle tires only.

. Do not keep the air compressor

operating for more than 10 min-

utes, otherwise there is a risk of

overheating.

. The temperature of the air com-

pressor may become high. Be

careful not to burn yourself.

. When raining, take measures to

prevent the air compressor from

being exposed directly to the

rain. Exposing to rain may cause

a malfunction.

. Do not use air compressors other

than the one in the repair kit.

Using an air compressor other

than the one in the repair kit may

damage the tires.

. Do not disassemble or modify the

air compressor to enable the use

of a power supply or a battery

other than DC12 V.

. If a temporary puncture repair is

performed with the repair kit, the

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) may not operate nor-

mally.

! Location of the flat tire repair kit

S09AC0305

Flat tire repair kit

1) Air compressor

2) Sealant bottle

The flat tire repair kit is stored in the portion

shown in the illustration.

Flat tires

368

(371,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Contents of the flat tire repair kit

S09AC0304

1) Sealant bottle

2) Quick reference guide

3) Air compressor

4) Speed limit label

The above repair kits are packed in a

plastic bag. Return them to the plastic bag

after use.

Air compressor (front side)

1) Air gauge

2) Power plug

Air compressor (rear side)

1) Hose

2) Compressor switch

Sealant bottle

1) Hose

2) Valve

WARNING

. Do not drink the sealant. If the

sealant is accidentally swal-

lowed, seek medical attention

immediately.

. If the sealant splashes onto your

skin or eyes, wash it away im-

mediately with plenty of water. If

necessary, seek medical atten-

tion immediately.

. Keep the flat tire repair kit out of

the reach of children.

. If a person who is allergic to

natural rubber comes in contact

– CONTINUED –

Flat tires

369

In case of emergency

(372,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

the sealant, allergy symptoms

may occur.

1) Expiration date

CAUTION

Replace the sealant bottle with a

new one before the expiration date

passes.

! How to seal the flat tire

S09AC0302

To seal the flat tire, perform the following

steps.

. First, pump in the sealant and air. Drive

the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes

or 3 miles (5 km) so that the sealant can

seal the damaged area.

. Stop the vehicle again, check and, if

necessary, adjust the pressure of the

damaged tire.

. After that, you can continue to drive

carefully no faster than 50 mph (80 km/h)

and within the maximum distance of 125

miles (200 km).

Inform all other users of the vehicle that the

tire has been temporarily sealed with the

flat tire repair kit and make them aware of

the special driving conditions to be ob-

served.

1. Shake the sealant bottle well. Loosen

the hose.

1) Valve

2. Connect the air compressor hose to

the valve on the bottle.

CAUTION

. Make sure that the air compres-

sor switch is OFF.

. The sealant may leak if the fitting

is not tight enough.

Flat tires

370

(373,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Connect the hose from the bottle to the tire

valve stem tightly.

CAUTION

The sealant may leak if the fitting is

not tight enough.

3. Turn the bottle upside down and tilt the

bottle cap into the bottle holder of the air

compressor.

Make sure that the air compressor switch

is OFF.

4. Connect the power plug of the air

compressor into the accessory power

outlet. Apply the parking brake and turn

on the ignition switch to the “ACC” position.

Apply the parking brake and turn on the

ignition switch to the “ACC” position. Turn

the air compressor switch on and adjust

– CONTINUED –

Flat tires

371

In case of emergency

(374,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

the air pressure to the appropriate level

(green zone of the air gauge).

CAUTION

. Do not run the air compressor for

more than 10 minutes as it can

get hot. Be careful not to get

burned.

. If tire pressure doesn’t reach the

green zone for 10 minutes, this kit

will be unable to seal the tire.

Please contact your SUBARU

dealer for help.

NOTE

. After the compressor starts to oper-

ate, the air pressure will temporarily

rise to 45 psi (300 kPa, 3.0 kgf/cm

) or

higher. After about 30 seconds when all

of the sealant is inside the tire, the air

pressure will lower, representing the air

pressure in the tire.

. In extremely low temperatures −228F

to −48F (−308C to −208C), the viscosity

of the sealant increases and the sealant

will flow more slowly. In such tempera-

tures, bring the sealant into the vehicle

to warm it up before use.

. When mending the tire, if the air

pressure gauge is hard to read, turn the

compressor switch off once to get an

accurate reading.

5. While filling the tire with air, attach the

speed limit label on the position shown in

the illustration.

WARNING

Do not attach the speed limit label in

a position where the label hides the

warning lamp or on the steering

wheel. It may interfere with the

normal operation of the airbag and

lead to a critical failure.

6. Turn the air compressor power switch

off when the air pressure reaches the

green zone of the air gauge.

Remove the power plug from the acces-

sory power socket.

Remove the hose after filling the tire with

Flat tires

372

(375,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

air and fasten the valve cap.

Connect the hose of the bottle to the valve

of the bottle in a circular fashion to avoid

leakage of the remaining sealant.

CAUTION

The sealant may stain clothing.

7. Stow the kit back in the vehicle and

drive your vehicle immediately for 10

minutes or 3 miles (5 km).

WARNING

. Drive carefully. Do not exceed 50

mph (80 km/h). Driving faster

than that can result in the vehicle

shaking.

. Do not use tire chains on a sealed

tire.

. Do not tow a trailer.

. If heavy vibrations, unsteady

steering behavior or noises oc-

cur while driving, reduce your

speed and drive with caution to

a location where it is safe for you

to stop the vehicle. Recheck the

tire and its pressure. If the tire

pressure is in the red zone of the

air gauge or if there are any

cracks, bumps or similar tire

damage visible, temporary re-

pairs cannot be performed with

the repair kit. We recommend that

you consult with your SUBARU

dealer or road service provider.

8. After driving for 10 minutes or 3 miles

(5 km), whichever comes first, stop the

vehicle in a safe place to recheck the air

pressure (see step 4).

If necessary, fill the tire with air to the

appropriate air pressure again and drive

carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer

for tire, valve stem and sealant bottle

replacement.

– CONTINUED –

Flat tires

373

In case of emergency

(376,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

NOTE

Connect the air compressor only to the

tire valve.

CAUTION

. If the air pressure is in red zone of

the air gauge, the kit did not

successfully seal the puncture.

In this case, please stop driving

and contact your SUBARU dealer

for help.

. Do not drive your vehicle with the

sealed tire for more than 125

miles (200 km). Failure to replace

the valve stem may result in air

leakage at the valve stem.

Before the tire is removed from the rim,

inform your SUBARU dealer or other tire

dealer that the tire contains sealant.

CAUTION

The sealant bottle and speed limit

label need to be replaced after using

the flat tire repair kit.

NOTE

New sealant and replacement parts can

be purchased from your authorized

repair shop or SUBARU dealer, and

they should also be installed into the kit

by a specialist. Empty sealant bottles

and replacement parts must be re-

turned to your SUBARU dealer or

disposed of in compliance with local

waste disposal regulations.

! Technical data of air compressor

S09AC0303

Line voltage DC 12 V

Operating voltage DC 10 – 15 V

Amperage

Max. 10 A

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS)

S09AC02

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with the warning message

indicated by sending a signal from a

sensor that is installed in each wheel when

tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven.

Also, this system may not react immedi-

ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a blow-out caused running over

a sharp object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe place. Otherwise an acci-

dent involving serious vehicle

damage and serious personal

injury could occur.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the COLD tire pressure

shown on the vehicle placard

on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

Flat tires

374

(377,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

. When a wheel rim is replaced

without the original pressure

sensor/transmitter being trans-

ferred, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will illuminate steadily

after blinking for approximately

one minute. This indicates the

TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible for tire and sensor replace-

ment and/or system resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquid

sealant, the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter may not

operate properly. If a liquid sea-

lant is used, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer or other qualified

service shop as soon as possi-

ble. Make sure to replace the tire

pressure warning valve and

transmitter when replacing the

tire. You may reuse the wheel if

there is no damage to it and if the

sealant residue is properly

cleaned off.

If the light illuminates steadily

after blinking for approximately

one minute, promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the sys-

tem inspected.

9-4. Jump starting

S09AD

WARNING

. 12 V battery fluid is SULFURIC

ACID. Do not let it come in

contact with the eyes, skin, cloth-

ing or the vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you, thor-

oughly flush the exposed area

with water immediately. Get med-

ical help if the fluid has entered

your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and obtain immediate medical

help.

Keep everyone including chil-

dren away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a 12 V

battery explodes if a flame or

spark is brought near it. Do not

smoke or light a match while

jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if the

discharged 12 V battery is frozen.

It could cause the battery to burst

or explode.

. Whenever working on or around a

– CONTINUED –

Jump starting

375

In case of emergency

(378,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

12 V battery, always wear suitable

eye protectors, and remove metal

objects such as rings, bands or

other metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables and

clamps on them do not have

loose or missing insulation.

Do not jump start unless cables

in suitable condition are avail-

able.

. A running hybrid system can be

dangerous. Keep your fingers,

hands, clothing, hair and tools

away from the cooling fan, belts

and any other moving engine

parts. Removing rings, watches

and ties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if it

done incorrectly. If you are un-

sure about the proper procedure

for jump starting, consult a com-

petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle

may be jump started by connecting your

battery to another battery (called the

booster battery) with jumper cables.

NOTE

If “12 V battery inspection required” is

shown on the combination meter (color

LCD), the 12 V battery may be de-

graded. Have the vehicle inspected at

a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

If this is shown on the combination

meter (color LCD) and the Hybrid

system cannot start, jump start the

Hybrid System. Refer to “How to jump

start” FP376.

& How to jump start

S09AD01

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

volts and the negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and

accessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated.

Jump starting

376

(379,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

A) Booster battery

B) Strut mounting nut

(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the discharged

12 V battery.

(2) Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the positive (+) term-

inal of the booster battery.

(3) Connect one end of the other cable

to the negative (−) terminal of the

booster battery.

(4) Connect the other end of the cable

to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle

with the discharged 12 V battery.

Make sure that the cables are not near any

moving parts and that the cable clamps are

not in contact with any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the hybrid system of the

vehicle that has the discharged 12 V

battery.

6. When finished, carefully disconnect

the cables in exactly the reverse order.

Jump starting

377

In case of emergency

(380,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

9-5. Engine and hybrid sys-

tem overheating

S09AE

WARNING

. Never attempt to remove the

radiator cap and radiator cap for

inverter with converter assembly

until the hybrid system has been

shut off and has fully cooled

down. When the engine is hot,

the coolant is under pressure.

Removing the cap while the en-

gine is still hot could release a

spray of boiling hot coolant,

which could burn you very ser-

iously.

. After stopping the hybrid system,

check that the power status is

OFF and the hybrid READY in-

dicator light is off. If the hybrid

system is operating, the cooling

fan may suddenly begin moving.

If this occurs, there is the risk of

severe injury caused by a hand or

clothing being caught in the fan.

If the engine overheats, safely pull off the

road and stop the vehicle in a safe

location.

& If steam is coming from the

engine compartment

S09AE01

. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position and get everyone away from the

vehicle until it cools down.

. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal-

er.

& If no steam is coming from the

engine compartment

S09AE02

1. Keep the hybrid system running at

idling speed.

2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the

engine compartment. Refer to “Engine

hood” FP403.

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If

the fan is not turning, immediately turn off

the hybrid system and contact an author-

ized SUBARU dealer for repair.

3. After the coolant temperature high

warning light that has blinked or illumi-

nated in RED turns off, turn off the hybrid

system. For details about the warning light,

refer to “Coolant temperature high warning

light” FP185.

4. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve tank.

If the coolant level is below the “LOW”

mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.

NOTE

For details about how to check the

coolant level or how to add coolant,

refer to “Engine coolant” FP409.

5. If there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then

remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator

with coolant.

Engine and hybrid system overheating

378

(381,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot

radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the

radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has been

fully released, remove the cap by pressing

down and turning it.

& If the hybrid system is over-

heating

S09AE03

If the message “Hybrid System Over-

heated. Reduced Output Power.” appears

on the combination meter (color LCD), the

hybrid system is overheating. Perform the

following actions.

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe location and

stop the hybrid system.

2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the

engine compartment.

3. After the hybrid system has fully

cooled, check that there is no coolant

leakage from the radiator core or hoses.

1) “FULL” level mark

2) “LOW” level mark

4. Check that the level of coolant in the

reservoir tank is within the prescribed

range.

5. If the level of coolant is insufficient, add

coolant. Refer to “Inverter with converter

assembly coolant” FP410.

NOTE

If coolant was added as an emergency

measure, have the vehicle inspected at

a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

6. When 5 minutes or more have passed

after stopping the hybrid system, start the

hybrid system. If a warning is not displayed

on the combination meter (color LCD),

then normal driving is possible. If a

warning is displayed, contact a SUBARU

dealer.

NOTE

If the warning is displayed frequently

during ordinary driving, contact a

SUBARU dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to observe the following in

order to prevent damage to the

hybrid system.

. Add coolant slowly after the hy-

brid system has fully cooled.

. Be sure that no foreign sub-

stances enter the coolant.

. Do not use any coolant additives.

Engine and hybrid system overheating

379

In case of emergency

(382,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

9-6. Towing

S09AF

If towing is necessary, it is best done by

your SUBARU dealer or a commercial

towing service. Observe the following

procedures for safety.

WARNING

. Never tow AWD models with the

front wheels raised off the

ground while the rear wheels are

on the ground, or with the rear

wheels raised off the ground

while the front wheels are on the

ground. This will cause the vehi-

cle to spin away due to the

operation or deterioration of the

center differential.

. If your vehicle needs to be towed,

do so with all wheels raised. If the

wheels connected to the electric

motor (traction motor) are on the

ground when towing, the electric

motor may continue to generate

electricity. This may cause a fire.

& Towing hook and tie-down

hooks/holes

S09AF01

The towing hook should be used only in an

emergency.

CAUTION

Use only the specified towing hooks

and tie-down hooks/holes. Never

use suspension parts or other parts

of the body for towing or tie-down

purposes.

! Front towing hook

S09AF0112

1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver

and jack handle. For the locations of these

tools, refer to “Tool locations” FP364.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head

screwdriver into the cutout of the cover and

pry open the cover.

Towing

380

(383,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using

the jack handle and wheel nut wrench.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hook for

purposes other than towing your

vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the SRS airbag

system in a frontal collision.

CAUTION

To prevent deformation to the bum-

per and the towing hook, do not

apply excessive load to the towing

hook.

! Rear towing hook

S09AF0105

1. Remove the towing hook, screwdriver,

and jack handle from storage area of the

vehicle. For the tool storage locations,

refer to “Tool locations” FP364.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch the bumper. Pry off the cover on

the rear bumper using a screwdriver, and

you will find a threaded hole for attaching

the towing hook.

– CONTINUED –

Towing

381

In case of emergency

(384,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using

the jack handle and wheel nut wrench.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hook for

purposes other than towing your

vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the fuel pump

shut off function when the vehi-

cle is struck from behind.

CAUTION

To prevent deformation to the bum-

per and the towing hook, do not

apply excessive load to the towing

hook.

! Front tie-down hooks

S09AF0106

The front tie-down hooks are located

between each of the front tires and the

front bumper.

Towing

382

(385,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Rear tie-down holes

S09AF0107

1) Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near

each of the jack-up reinforcements.

There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.

To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the

plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes,

return the plugs to their original places.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down holes only for

downward anchoring. If they are

used to anchor the vehicle in any

other direction, cables may slip out

of the holes, possibly causing a

dangerous situation.

& Using a flat-bed truck

S09AF02

This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to

ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the select lever into the “P”

position.

2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

properly with safety chains. Each safety

chain should be equally tightened and care

must be taken not to pull the chains so

tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

CAUTION

If your vehicle has a bumper under

guard (optional), be careful not to

scrape it when placing the vehicle

on the carrier and when removing

the vehicle from the carrier.

Towing

383

In case of emergency

(386,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

9-7. Electronic parking brake

– if the electronic parking

brake cannot be released

S09AN

Contact your SUBARU dealer and have

your SUBARU dealer release the electro-

nic parking brake.

9-8. Access key fob – if ac-

cess key fob does not operate

properly

S09AP

CAUTION

Keep metallic objects, magnetic

sources and signal transmitters

away from the area between the

access key fob and the push-button

ignition switch. They may interfere

with the communication between

the access key fob and the push-

button ignition switch.

The following functions may be inoperable

because of strong radio signals in the

surrounding area or a low battery condition

of the access key fob.

. Locking/unlocking doors (including the

rear gate)

. Switching power status

. Starting the hybrid system

In such cases, perform the following

procedure. When the battery of the access

key fob is discharged, replace it with a new

one. Refer to “Replacing battery of access

key fob” FP437.

& Locking and unlocking

S09AP01

1) Release button

2) Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the

access key fob, take out the emergency

key.

Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the

emergency key in the procedure described

in “Locking and unlocking from the out-

side” FP160.

NOTE

After locking or unlocking, be sure to

attach the emergency key back to the

access key fob.

Electronic parking brake – if the electronic parking brake cannot be released

384

(387,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Switching power status

S09AP02

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the select lever to the “P” (Park)

position.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the push-

button ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is com-

pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the

same time, the status of the push-button

ignition switch changes to either of the

following.

. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated:

“ACC”

. Under other conditions: “ON”

5. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated, press

the push-button ignition switch with the

brake pedal released. The status of the

push-button ignition switch then changes

to “ON”.

NOTE

If the power does not switch even

though the above procedure was fol-

lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

& Starting the hybrid system

S09AP03

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the select lever to the “P” (Park)

position.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the push-

button ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is com-

pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the

same time, the push-button ignition switch

turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position.

5. After the push-button ignition switch

turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, while

depressing the brake pedal, press the

push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

If the hybrid system does not start even

though the above procedure was fol-

lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly

385

In case of emergency

(388,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

9-9. Hybrid system – if the

hybrid system does not start

S09AP07

The following are possible causes for the

system not starting. Check the following

and perform the appropriate procedure.

. The charge cable may be attached to

the vehicle.

. There is a possibility that the tempera-

ture of the high voltage battery is extremely

low (approximately below −228F (−308C)).

. The electronic key may not be function-

ing properly.

. There may not be sufficient fuel in the

vehicle’s tank.

. There may be a malfunction in the

immobilizer system.

. There may be a malfunction in the shift

control system.

. The hybrid system may be malfunction-

ing due to an electrical problem such as

electronic key battery depletion or a blown

fuse. However, depending on the type of

malfunction, an interim measure is avail-

able to start the hybrid system.

When the hybrid system does not start, the

following steps can be used as an interim

measure to start the hybrid system if the

push-button ignition switch is functioning

normally. Do not use this starting proce-

dure except in cases of emergency.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ACC” position.

3. Press and hold the switch for about 15

seconds while depressing the brake pedal

firmly.

Even if the hybrid system can be started

using the above steps, the system may be

malfunctioning. Have the vehicle in-

spected by your SUBARU dealer.

9-10. Fuel door – if the fuel

door cannot be opened

S09AP05

In the event that you cannot open the fuel

door by pressing the fuel door release

switch, you can open it from inside the

cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom of the rear right trim using a flat-

head screwdriver wrapped with vinyl tape

or a cloth.

Hybrid system – if the hybrid system does not start

386

(389,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

1) Fuel door opener lever

2. Pull the fuel door opener lever behind

the rear trim panel.

9-11. Charge port door – if the

charge port door cannot be

opened

S09AP06

In the event that you cannot open the

charge port door, you can open it from

inside the cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom of the rear left trim using a flat-

head screwdriver wrapped with vinyl tape

or a cloth.

1) Charge port door cable (white)

2. Pull the charge port door cable (white)

behind the rear trim panel.

Charge port door – if the charge port door cannot be opened

387

In case of emergency

(390,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

9-12. Charge cable – if the

charge cable cannot be re-

moved

S09AP08

In the event that you cannot remove the

charge cable, you can remove it from

inside the cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom of the rear left trim using a flat-

head screwdriver wrapped with vinyl tape

or a cloth.

1) Cable (yellow)

2. Pull the cable (yellow) to release the

charge cable.

9-13. Rear gate – if the rear

gate cannot be opened

S09AG

In the event that you cannot open the rear

gate by operating the rear gate opener

button, you can open it from inside the

cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom-center of the rear gate trim using

a flat-head screwdriver wrapped with vinyl

tape or a cloth.

2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind

the rear gate trim panel.

Charge cable – if the charge cable cannot be removed

388

(391,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

CAUTION

Never operate the rear gate open

lever with fingers because doing so

may cause an injury. Always use a

flat-head screwdriver or a similar

tool.

3. To open the rear gate, turn the lever to

the right position using a flat-head screw-

driver or a similar tool.

9-14. Moonroof (if equipped)

– if the moonroof does not

S09AJ

If the moonroof does not close, we

recommend that you have the system

checked by a SUBARU dealer.

9-15. If your vehicle is in-

volved in an accident

S09AR

CAUTION

If your vehicle is involved in an

accident, be sure to inspect the

ground under the vehicle before

restarting the hybrid system. If you

find that fuel has leaked on the

ground, do not try to restart the

hybrid system. The fuel system has

been damaged and is in need of

repair. Immediately contact the near-

est automotive service facility. We

recommend that you consult your

SUBARU dealer.

Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off

system. When the vehicle sustains an

impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump

shut off system stops supplying the fuel in

order to minimize fuel leakage. However,

depending on the impact conditions at the

time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off

system may not operate.

Perform the following procedures to restart

the hybrid system after the system is

activated.

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

– CONTINUED –

Moonroof – if the moonroof does not close

389

In case of emergency

(392,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

the “ACC” or “OFF” position.

2. Restart the hybrid system.

If your vehicle is involved in an accident

390

(393,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

S10

10-1. Exterior care.................................................. 392

Washing ............................................................. 392

Waxing and polishing .........................................393

Cleaning alloy wheels .........................................394

10-2. Corrosion protection .................................... 394

Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 394

To help prevent corrosion ................................... 394

10-3. Cleaning the interior .....................................395

Seat fabric ......................................................... 395

Leather seat materials ........................................ 395

Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 396

Seatbelt ............................................................. 396

Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument

panel, console panel, and switches .................. 396

Monitor .............................................................. 396

Appearance care

(394,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

10-1. Exterior care

S10AA

& Washing

S10AA01

CAUTION

. When washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result,

the brake stopping distance will

be longer. To dry the brakes, drive

the vehicle at a safe speed while

lightly depressing the brake ped-

al to heat up the brakes.

. Before washing the vehicle,

check that the charge port door

is fully closed. When using a

high-pressure washer, do not

use it around the charge port

door. There is the risk that water

may enter the charge port and

cause a malfunction.

. Do not wash the engine compart-

ment and area adjacent to it. If

water enters the engine air intake

or electrical parts, it will cause

engine trouble or a malfunction

of electrical equipment.

. When washing inner fenders, un-

derbody, bumpers and protrud-

ing objects such as exhaust

pipes and exhaust finishers, be

careful to prevent injuries from

contacting sharp ends.

. Do not use any organic solvents

when washing the surface of the

bulb assembly cover. However, if

a detergent with organic solvents

is used to wash the cover sur-

face, completely rinse off the

detergent with water. Otherwise,

the cover surface may be da-

maged.

. Since your vehicle is equipped

with a rear wiper, automatic car-

wash brushes could become

tangled around it, damaging the

wiper arm and other compo-

nents. Ask the automatic car-

wash operator not to let the

brushes touch the wiper arm or

to fix the wiper arm on the rear

window glass with adhesive tape

before operating the machine.

NOTE

. When having your vehicle washed in

an automatic car wash, make sure

beforehand that the car wash is of

suitable type.

. The rear view camera lens has a hard

coating to help prevent scratches.

However, when washing the vehicle or

cleaning the camera lens, be careful not

to scratch the camera lens. Do not use a

washing brush directly on the camera

lens. The image quality of the rear view

camera may deteriorate.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s

beauty is frequent washing. Wash the

vehicle at least once a month to avoid

contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the

vehicle with hot water and in direct sun-

light.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,

and bird droppings should be washed off

by using a light detergent, as required. If

you use a light detergent, make certain

that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use

strong soap or chemical detergents. All

cleaning agents should be promptly

flushed from the surface and not allowed

to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly

with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the

remaining water off with a chamois or soft

cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand

brush when washing down underbody,

inner fenders and suspension to effec-

tively remove mud and dirt off.

! Washing the underbody

S10AA0101

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for

deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-

Exterior care

392

(395,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-

derbody components, such as the exhaust

system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables,

floor pan and fenders, and suspension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside

of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water

at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful

effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody

components may accelerate their corro-

sion.

After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy

roads, wash the mud and sand off the

underbody. Carefully flush the suspension

and axle parts, as they are particularly

prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not use

a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to damage brake

hoses, sensor harnesses, and

other parts when washing sus-

pension components.

. Be careful not to flush the engine

bottom for a long time. It may

cause damage of some electrical

parts.

! Using a warm water washer

S10AA0102

. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)

or more between the washer nozzle and

the vehicle.

. Do not wash the same area continu-

ously.

. If a stain will not come out easily, wash

by hand. Some warm water washers are of

the high temperature, high pressure type,

and they can damage or deform the resin

parts such as moldings, or cause water to

leak into the vehicle.

& Waxing and polishing

S10AA02

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and

apply them according to the manufac-

turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when

the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,

as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of

wax on a painted surface leads to loss of

the original luster and also quickens the

deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied at

least once a month, or whenever the

surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-

ished to the point where the luster or tone

cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-

face with a fine-grained compound. Never

polish just the affected area, but include

the surrounding area as well. Always

polish in only one direction. A No. 2000

grain compound is recommended. Never

use a coarse-grained compound. Coarse-

grained compounds have a smaller grain-

size number and could damage the paint.

After polishing with a compound, coat with

wax to restore the original luster. Frequent

polishing with a compound or an incorrect

polishing technique will result in removing

the paint layer and exposing the under-

coat. When in doubt, it is always best to

contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto

paint specialist.

CAUTION

Do not use any agents with organic

solvents on the surface of the bulb

assembly cover. However, if a polish

or wax with organic solvents is

applied to the cover surface, com-

pletely wipe off the polish or wax.

Otherwise, the cover surface may be

damaged.

NOTE

. Be careful not to block the wind-

shield washer nozzles with wax when

waxing the vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Exterior care

393

Appearance care

(396,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. Do not wipe the rear view camera

with alcohol, benzine or paint thinner.

Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To

remove contamination, wipe the cam-

era with a cloth moistened with diluted

neutral detergent and then wipe it with a

soft, dry cloth.

. When waxing the vehicle, be careful

not to apply the wax to the rear view

camera. If it comes in contact with the

camera, moisten a clean cloth with

diluted neutral detergent to remove

the wax.

& Cleaning alloy wheels

S10AA04

. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of

any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on

too long, it may be difficult to clean off.

. Do not use soap containing grit to clean

the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral

cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly

with water. Do not clean the wheels with a

stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed

washing device.

. Clean the vehicle (including the alloy

wheels) with water as soon as possible

when it has been splashed with sea water,

exposed to sea breezes, or driven on

roads treated with salt or other agents.

10-2. Corrosion protection

S10AB

Your SUBARU has been designed and

built to resist corrosion. Special materials

and protective finishes have been used on

most parts of the vehicle to help maintain

fine appearance, strength, and reliable

operation.

& Most common causes of cor-

rosion

S10AB01

The most common causes of corrosion

are:

. The accumulation of moisture retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone chips

or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

when:

. It is exposed to road salt or dust control

chemicals, or used in coastal areas where

there is more salt in the air, or in areas

where there is considerable industrial

pollution.

. It is driven in areas of high humidity,

especially when temperatures range just

above freezing.

. Dampness in certain parts of the

vehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may be

dry.

. High temperatures will cause corrosion

to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry

quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.

& To help prevent corrosion

S10AB02

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent

corrosion of the body and suspension

components. Also, wash the vehicle

promptly after driving on any of the

following surfaces.

. roads that have been salted to prevent

them from freezing in winter

. mud, sand, or gravel

. coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-

mended that the underbody be given a

very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the

condition of underbody components, such

as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, suspension, steering

system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of

them are found to be rusted, they should

be given an appropriate rust prevention

treatment or should be replaced. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

of maintenance and treatment if you need

Corrosion protection

394

(397,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water

and dirt accumulation under the floor mats

because that could cause corrosion. Oc-

casionally check under the mats to make

sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your

vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar-

age. In such a garage, corrosion can be

caused by dampness. If you wash the

vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into

the garage when wet or covered with

snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather

and/or in areas where road salts and other

corrosive materials are used, the door

hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and

engine hood latch should be inspected

and lubricated periodically.

10-3. Cleaning the interior

S10AC

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use

organic solvents.)

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the rear window. They may damage

the conductors printed on the win-

dow.

& Seat fabric

S10AC01

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a

vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the

fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum

cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung

cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If

the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution

of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry

thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a

commercially-available fabric cleaner.

Use the cleaner on a hidden place and

make sure it does not affect the fabric

adversely. Use the cleaner according to its

instructions.

CAUTION

When cleaning the seat, do not use

benzine, paint thinner, or any similar

materials. Doing so could damage

the surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

& Leather seat materials

S10AC02

The leather used by SUBARU is a high

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the

surface can cause the material to become

brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular

cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber

cloth should be performed monthly, taking

care not to soak the leather or allow water

to penetrate the stitched seams.

A mild detergent suitable for cleaning

woolen fabrics may be used to remove

difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry

cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If

your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended

that the seats and head restraints be

– CONTINUED –

Cleaning the interior

395

Appearance care

(398,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

covered, or the windows shaded, to pre-

vent fading or shrinkage.

Minor surface blemishes or bald patches

may be treated with a commercial leather

spray lacquer. You will discover that each

leather seat section will develop soft folds

or wrinkles, which is characteristic of

genuine leather.

& Synthetic leather upholstery

S10AC03

The synthetic leather material used on the

SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-

ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the

soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial

foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic

leather materials may be used when

necessary.

CAUTION

Strong cleaning agents such as

solvents, paint thinners, window

cleaner or fuel must never be used

on leather or synthetic interior ma-

terials. Doing so could damage the

surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

& Seatbelt

S10AC09

For details about how to clean the seatbelt,

refer to “Seatbelt maintenance” FP87.

& Climate control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel, con-

sole panel, and switches

S10AC04

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches.

CAUTION

. Do not use organic solvents such

as paint thinners or fuel, or

strong cleaning agents that con-

tain those solvents. Doing so

could damage the surface and

cause the color to deteriorate.

. Do not use chemical solvents that

contain silicone on the vehicle

audio system, electrical compo-

nents of the air-conditioner or

any switches. If silicone adheres

to these parts, it may cause

damage to electrical compo-

nents.

& Monitor

S10AC05

To clean the audio/navigation/multi func-

tion display monitor, wipe it with a silicone

cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is

extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth

moistened with neutral detergent then

carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.

CAUTION

. Do not spray neutral detergent

directly onto the monitor. Doing

so could damage the monitor’s

components.

. Do not wipe the monitor with a

hard cloth. Doing so could

scratch the monitor.

. Do not use cleaning fluid that

contains thinner, fuel, or any

other volatile substance. Such

cleaning fluid could erase the

lettering on the switches at the

bottom of the monitor.

Cleaning the interior

396

(399,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(400,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(401,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

S11

11-1. Maintenance schedule.................................. 401

11-2. Maintenance precautions ............................. 401

Before checking or servicing in the engine

compartment ....................................................402

When checking or servicing in the engine

compartment ....................................................402

When checking or servicing in the engine

compartment while the engine is running.......... 403

11-3. Engine hood .................................................. 403

11-4. Engine compartment overview .................... 405

11-5. Engine oil....................................................... 406

Engine oil consumption ......................................406

Locations of the oil level gauge, oil filler cap

and oil filter ...................................................... 406

Checking the oil level .........................................406

Changing the oil and oil filter.............................. 407

Recommended grade and viscosity..................... 408

Synthetic oil ....................................................... 408

11-6. Cooling system ............................................. 408

Safety precautions.............................................. 408

Cooling fan, hose and connections ..................... 409

Engine coolant ...................................................409

Inverter with converter assembly coolant ............410

11-7. Air cleaner element....................................... 411

Replacing the air cleaner element .......................412

11-8. Spark plugs ................................................... 413

Recommended spark plugs................................. 413

11-9. Drive belts ..................................................... 413

11-10. Continuously variable transmission

fluid ................................................................ 413

11-11. Front differential gear oil and rear

differential gear oil........................................414

Recommended grade and viscosity .................... 414

11-12. Brake fluid ....................................................414

Checking the fluid level...................................... 414

Recommended brake fluid.................................. 415

11-13. Brake pedal ..................................................415

11-14. Replacement of brake pad..........................415

Breaking-in of new brake pads ........................... 416

11-15. Tires and wheels..........................................416

Types of tires ..................................................... 416

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ............ 416

Tire inspection ................................................... 418

Tire pressures and wear..................................... 418

Wheel balance.................................................... 420

Wear indicators .................................................. 420

Rotational direction of tires ................................ 421

Tire rotation ....................................................... 421

Tire replacement ................................................ 421

Wheel replacement............................................. 422

11-16. Alloy wheels.................................................423

11-17. Windshield washer fluid..............................423

Adding the windshield washer fluid.................... 423

Windshield washer fluid ..................................... 423

11-18. Replacement of wiper blades .....................424

Windshield wiper blade assembly....................... 425

Window wiper blade rubber................................ 426

Rear window wiper blade assembly.................... 427

Rear window wiper blade rubber ........................ 427

11-19. 12 V battery ..................................................429

Maintenance and service

(402,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

11-20. Fuses ........................................................... 430

11-21. Installation of accessories ......................... 431

11-22. Replacing bulbs .......................................... 432

Headlights .......................................................... 432

Front turn signal light ......................................... 432

Parking light....................................................... 432

Front fog light .................................................... 432

Rear combination lights ......................................432

Backup light .......................................................434

License plate light.............................................. 435

Map light............................................................ 435

Vanity mirror light .............................................. 435

Dome light and cargo area light.......................... 435

Other bulbs........................................................ 436

11-23. Replacing key battery .................................436

Safety precautions ............................................. 436

Replacing battery of access key fob ................... 437

Maintenance and service

(403,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

11-1. Maintenance schedule

S11AA

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”. For details, read the

separate “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”.

NOTE

You can set a reminder to be displayed

when a scheduled maintenance item is

almost due. For details, refer to “Main-

tenance settings” FP226.

11-2. Maintenance precau-

tions

S11AB

When maintenance and service are re-

quired, it is recommended that all work be

done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service by

yourself, you should familiarize yourself

with the information provided in this sec-

tion on general maintenance and service

for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-

tion. Any problems caused by improper

maintenance and service performed by

you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

. Always select a safe area when

performing maintenance on your

vehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehi-

cle. Remember that some of the

materials in the vehicle may be

hazardous if improperly used or

handled, for example, battery

acid.

. Your vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent

to do so. Serious personal injury

may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.

. Always use the proper tools and

make certain that they are well

maintained.

. Never get under the vehicle sup-

ported only by a jack. Always use

safety stands to support the

vehicle.

. Never keep the hybrid system

running in a poorly ventilated

area, such as a garage or other

closed areas.

. Do not smoke or allow open

flames around the fuel or battery.

This will cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is under

pressure, replacement of the fuel

filter should be performed only

by your SUBARU dealer.

. Wear adequate eye protection to

guard against getting oil or fluids

in your eyes. If something does

get in your eyes, thoroughly

wash them out with clean water.

. Do not tamper with the wiring of

the SRS airbag system or seat-

belt pretensioner system, or at-

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance schedule

401

Maintenance and service

(404,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

tempt to take its connectors

apart, as that may activate the

system or it can render it inop-

erative. NEVER use a circuit tes-

ter for this wiring. If your SRS

airbag or seatbelt pretensioner

needs service, consult your near-

est SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

SUBARU does not endorse the use of

non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-

tems and strongly advises against

performing these services on a

SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-

proved flushing systems use chemi-

cals and/or solvents which have not

been tested or approved by SUBARU.

SUBARU warranties do not cover any

part of the vehicle which is damaged by

adding or applying chemicals and/or

solvents other than those approved or

recommended by SUBARU.

& Before checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

S11AB01

WARNING

. Always stop the engine and apply

the parking brake firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving.

. Always let the engine cool down.

Engine parts become very hot

when the engine is running and

remain hot for some time after the

engine has stopped.

. Do not spill engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.

This may cause a fire.

. When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position, the cooling fan

may operate suddenly even when

the hybrid system is stopped. If

your body or clothes come into

contact with a rotating fan, that

could result in serious injury. To

avoid risk of injury, always turn

the push-button ignition switch

to the “OFF” position and con-

firm that the operation indicator

on the switch is turned off. Then

take the access key fob out from

the vehicle.

& When checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

S11AB03

CAUTION

. Do not contact the engine cover

while checking the components

in the engine compartment.

Doing so may cause your hand

to slip off the cover and result in

an unexpected injury.

Maintenance precautions

402

(405,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. Do not touch the oil filter until the

engine has cooled down comple-

tely. Doing so may result in a burn

or other injury. Note that the oil

filter becomes very hot when the

engine is running and remains

hot for some time after the engine

has stopped.

& When checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

while the engine is running

S11AB02

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.

Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from the cooling

fan, drive belt and any other moving

engine parts. Removing rings,

watches and ties is advisable.

11-3. Engine hood

S11AC

CAUTION

. When you open the engine hood,

do not stand the wiper blades up.

Furthermore, while the hood is

open, do not operate the wind-

shield wipers. Doing so could

result in damage to the engine

hood and wiper blades.

. Be extremely careful not to catch

fingers or other objects when

closing the engine hood.

. Do not push the hood forcibly to

close it. It could deform the metal.

. Be extremely careful opening the

engine hood when the wind is

strong. The engine hood could

close suddenly, possibly causing

injuries from slamming.

. Do not install accessories other

than genuine SUBARU parts to

the engine hood. If the engine

hood becomes too heavy, the

stay may not be able to support

holding it open.

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their original

position.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

instrument panel.

– CONTINUED –

Engine hood

403

Maintenance and service

(406,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3. Release the secondary hood release

by moving the lever between the front grille

and the hood toward the left.

1) Grip

4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop

from its retainer and put the end of the

hood prop into the slot in the hood. Hold

the grip for handling the hood prop.

To close the hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the

hood prop from the slot in the hood and

return the prop to its retainer.

2. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-

mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed

position and then let it drop.

3. After closing the hood, be sure the

hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position.

WARNING

Always check that the hood is

properly locked before you start

driving. If it is not, it might fly open

while the vehicle is moving and

block your view, which may cause

an accident and serious bodily in-

jury.

Engine hood

404

(407,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

11-4. Engine compartment overview

S11AD

1) Brake fluid reservoir (page 414)

2) Fuse box (page 430)

3) 12 V battery (page 429)

4) Windshield washer tank (page 423)

5) Radiator cap for engine (page 409)

6) Engine oil filler cap (page 406)

7) Engine coolant reservoir (page 409)

8) Engine oil filter (page 407)

9) Radiator cap for inverter with converter

assembly (page 410)

10) Engine oil level gauge (page 406)

11) Air cleaner case (page 411)

Engine compartment overview

405

Maintenance and service

(408,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

11-5. Engine oil

S11AE

CAUTION

. If the level gauge cannot be

pulled out easily, twist the level

gauge right and left, then gently

pull it out. Otherwise, you may be

injured accidentally straining

yourself.

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

& Engine oil consumption

S11AE07

Some engine oil will be consumed while

driving. The rate of consumption can be

affected by such factors as transmission

type, driving style, terrain and tempera-

ture. Under the following conditions, oil

consumption can be increased and thus

require refilling between maintenance in-

tervals:

. The engine is new and within the break-

in period.

. The engine oil is of lower quality.

. The incorrect oil viscosity is used.

. Engine braking is employed (repeat-

edly).

. The engine is operated at high engine

speeds (for extended periods of time).

. The engine is operated under heavy

loads (for extended periods of time).

. A trailer is being towed.

. The engine idles for extended periods

of time.

. The vehicle is operated in stop and go

and/or heavy traffic situations.

. The vehicle is used under severe

thermal conditions.

. The vehicle accelerates and decele-

rates frequently.

Under these or similar conditions, you

should check your oil at least every 2nd

fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more

frequently. Different drivers in the same

car may experience different results. If

your oil consumption rate is greater than

expected, contact your authorized

SUBARU dealer who may perform a test

under controlled conditions.

& Locations of the oil level

gauge, oil filler cap and oil

filter

S11AE06

1) Oil level gauge

2) Oil filler cap

3) Oil filter

& Checking the oil level

S11AE01

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position. If you check the oil level just after

turning the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position, wait a few minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan before checking

the level.

Engine oil

406

(409,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

CAUTION

If the level gauge cannot be pulled

out easily, twist the level gauge right

and left, then gently pull it out.

Otherwise, you may be injured acci-

dentally straining yourself.

2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,

and insert it again.

3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly

inserted until it stops.

1) Full level

2) Low level

3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp

qt) from low level to full level

4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.

5. Check the oil levels on both sides of the

level gauge. The engine oil level must be

judged by the lowest of the two levels. If

the oil level is below the low level mark,

add oil so that the full level is reached.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to touch the engine

oil filter when removing the oil

filler cap. Doing so may result in a

burn, a pinched finger, or may

cause some other injury.

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

To add engine oil, remove the engine oil

filler cap and slowly pour engine oil

through the filler neck. After pouring oil

into the engine, you must use the level

gauge to confirm that the oil level is

correct.

NOTE

. To prevent overfilling the engine oil,

do not add any additional oil above the

upper level when the engine is cold.

. The engine low oil level warning light

may stay illuminated when the hybrid

system is started straight after topping

up or changing the engine oil. In such

cases, park the vehicle on a level sur-

face and wait for more than a minute

until the oil level settles, after which the

warning light will turn off. Refer to

“Engine low oil level warning light”

FP187.

& Changing the oil and oil filter

S11AE02

Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

The engine oil and oil filter must be

changed more frequently than listed in

the maintenance schedule when driving

on dusty roads, when short trips are

frequently made, or when driving in ex-

tremely cold weather.

NOTE

. Changing the engine oil and oil filter

should be performed by a well-trained

expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for changing the engine oil and oil filter.

Fully trained mechanics are on standby

at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the

special tools, spare parts and recom-

mended oil for this work, and also, used

oils are properly disposed of.

– CONTINUED –

Engine oil

407

Maintenance and service

(410,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. If performing oil replacement your-

self, observe the local regulations and

dispose of waste oil properly.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

S11AE03

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-

mended grade and viscosity.

Refer to “Engine oil” FP441.

NOTE

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects

fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity

provide better fuel economy. However,

in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is

required to properly lubricate the en-

gine.

& Synthetic oil

S11AE05

You should use synthetic engine oil that

meets the same requirements given for

conventional engine oil. When using syn-

thetic oil, you must use oil of the same

classification, viscosity and grade shown

in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine

oil” FP441. Also, you must follow the oil

and filter changing intervals shown in the

Warranty and Maintenance booklet.

NOTE

Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity

noted in chapter 12 is the recom-

mended engine oil for optimum engine

performance. Conventional oil may be

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

11-6. Cooling system

S11AF

& Safety precautions

S11AF04

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radiator

cap until the hybrid system has been

shut off and has cooled down com-

pletely. Since the coolant is under

pressure, you may suffer serious

burns from a spray of boiling hot

coolant when the cap is removed.

CAUTION

. Vehicles are filled at the factory

with SUBARU Super Coolant that

does not require the first change

for 11 years/137,500 miles (11

years/220,000 km). This coolant

should not be mixed with any

other brand or type of coolant

during this period. Mixing with a

different coolant will reduce the

life of the coolant. Should it be

necessary to top up the coolant

for any reason, use only SUBARU

Super Coolant.

If the SUBARU Super Coolant is

diluted with another brand or

Cooling system

408

(411,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

type, the maintenance interval is

shortened to that of the mixing

coolant.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

& Cooling fan, hose and con-

nections

S11AF03

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling

fan which is thermostatically controlled to

operate when the engine coolant reaches

a specific temperature.

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate

even when the coolant temperature high

warning light blinks or illuminates in RED,

the cooling fan circuit may be defective.

Refer to “Coolant temperature high warn-

ing light” FP185.

Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.

Refer to “Fuses” FP430 and “Fuse panel

located in the engine compartment”

FP448.

If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling

system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is necessary,

there may be a leak in the engine cooling

system. It is recommended that the cooling

system and connections be checked for

leaks, damage, or looseness.

& Engine coolant

S11AF02

! Checking the coolant level

S11AF0201

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radiator

cap until the hybrid system has been

shut off and has cooled down com-

pletely. Since the coolant is under

pressure, you may suffer serious

burns from a spray of boiling hot

coolant when the cap is removed.

1) “FULL” level mark

2) “LOW” level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the

“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is

empty, remove the radiator cap and refill

coolant up to just below the filler neck as

shown in the following illustration.

1) Fill up to this level

– CONTINUED –

Cooling system

409

Maintenance and service

(412,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the cap and check that

the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap

are in the proper position.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill engine

coolant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

! Changing the coolant

S11AF0202

It may be difficult to change the coolant.

Have the coolant changed by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

& Inverter with converter as-

sembly coolant

S11AF05

! Checking the coolant level

S11AF0501

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radiator

cap until the hybrid system has been

shut off and has cooled down com-

pletely. Since the coolant is under

pressure, you may suffer serious

burns from a spray of boiling hot

coolant when the cap is removed.

1) “FULL” level mark

2) “LOW” level mark

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is cool.

1) “FULL” level mark

2) “LOW” level mark

Cooling system

410

(413,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW” level mark, remove the radiator cap

and add coolant up to the “FULL” level

mark.

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the cap and check that

the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap

are in the proper position.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill inverter

with converter assembly coolant

when adding it. If coolant touches

the exhaust pipe, it may cause a

bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

inverter with converter assembly

coolant gets on the exhaust pipe,

be sure to wipe it off.

. Do not splash the inverter with

converter assembly coolant over

painted parts. The alcohol con-

tained in the inverter with con-

verter assembly coolant may da-

mage the paint surface.

! Changing the coolant

S11AF0502

It may be difficult to change the coolant.

Have the coolant changed by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

11-7. Air cleaner element

S11AG

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the

air cleaner element removed. The air

cleaner element not only filters in-

take air but also stops flames if the

engine backfires. If the air cleaner

element is not installed when the

engine backfires, you could be

burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment, use a genuine SUBARU air

cleaner element. If it is not used,

there is the possibility of causing a

negative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a filter

screen. When the element is perforated or

removed, engine wear will be excessive

and engine life shortened.

It is not necessary to clean or wash the air

cleaner element.

– CONTINUED –

Air cleaner element

411

Maintenance and service

(414,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment

S11AG01

Replace the air cleaner element according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under

extremely dusty conditions, replace it

more frequently. It is recommended that

you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

1) Clip

1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case (rear).

2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the

cover rearward while lifting it up.

3. Remove the air cleaner element.

4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case

(both front and rear) with a damp cloth and

install a new air cleaner element.

5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),

insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air

cleaner case (front).

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE

Install the air cleaner element so that

the surface with “UPR” printed on it

faces upward.

Air cleaner element

412

(415,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

11-8. Spark plugs

S11AH

It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have the

spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”.

CAUTION

Make sure the cables are replaced in

the correct order.

& Recommended spark plugs

S11AH01

For the recommended spark plugs, refer to

“Electrical system” FP444.

11-9. Drive belts

S11AI

It is unnecessary to check the deflection of

the drive belt periodically. However, repla-

cement of the belt should be done accord-

ing to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for replace-

ment.

If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

11-10. Continuously variable

transmission fluid

S11AY

It is not necessary to check the transmis-

sion fluid level. Check that there are no

cracks, damage or leakage. However, the

fluid inspection should be performed ac-

cording to the maintenance schedule in

the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

Spark plugs

413

Maintenance and service

(416,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

11-11. Front differential gear

oil and rear differential gear

oil

S11BL

It is not necessary to check the gear oil

level. Check that there are no cracks,

damage or leakage. However, the oil

inspection should be performed according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult

your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

S11BL01

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together. For details, refer to “Front

differential and rear differential gear oil”

FP443.

CAUTION

Using a differential gear oil other

than the specified oil may cause a

decline in vehicle performance.

11-12. Brake fluid

S11AO

& Checking the fluid level

S11AO01

WARNING

. Never let brake fluid contact your

eyes because brake fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If brake

fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-

ately flush them thoroughly with

clean water. For safety, when

performing this work, wearing

eye protection is advisable.

. Brake fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause a dangerous loss

of braking performance.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

CAUTION

. When adding brake fluid, be care-

ful not to allow any dirt into the

reservoir.

. Never splash the brake fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the brake

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill brake fluid

when adding it. If brake fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If brake fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

1) “MAX” level line

2) “MIN” level line

A) The brake fluid level must be checked in

this area.

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. Be sure to check the fluid level

for the brake system at the shaded area in

the illustration.

Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil

414

(417,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

If the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the

recommended brake fluid to “MAX”. Use

only brake fluid from a sealed container.

& Recommended brake fluid

S11AO02

Refer to “Fluids” FP443.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of brake

fluid together. Also, avoid mixing

DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if

they are the same brand.

11-13. Brake pedal

S11AR

Check the brake pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

11-14. Replacement of brake

pad

S11AT

The disc brakes have audible wear in-

dicators on the brake pads. If the brake

pads wear close to their service limit, the

wear indicator makes a very audible

scraping noise when the brake pedal is

applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake

pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

If you continue to drive despite the

scraping noise from the audible

brake pad wear indicator, it will

– CONTINUED –

Brake pedal

415

Maintenance and service

(418,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

result in the need for costly brake

rotor repair or replacement.

& Breaking-in of new brake

pads

S11AT01

When replacing the brake pad, use only

genuine SUBARU parts. After replace-

ment, the new parts must be broken in.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

11-15. Tires and wheels

S11AV

& Types of tires

S11AV01

You should be familiar with type of tires

present on your vehicle.

! All season tires

S11AV0101

All season tires are designed to provide an

adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving including snowy and icy road

conditions. However all season tires do

not offer as much traction performance as

winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow

or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL

SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on

the tire sidewall.

! Summer tires

S11AV0102

Summer tires are high-speed capability

tires best suited for highway driving under

dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving on

slippery roads such as on snow-covered or

icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered

or icy roads, we strongly recommend the

use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to

replace all four tires.

! Winter (snow) tires

S11AV0103

Winter tires are best suited for driving on

snow-covered and icy roads. However

winter tires do not perform as well as

summer tires and all season tires on roads

other than snow-covered and icy roads.

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS)

S11AV02

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message by

sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-

ing system will activate only when the

vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not

react immediately to a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example, a blow-out caused

by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm

garage and will then drive the vehicle in

cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire

pressures may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. To avoid this

problem when adjusting the tire pressures

in a warm garage, inflate the tires to

pressures higher than those shown on

the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them

by an extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm

) for

every difference of 108F (5.68C) between

the temperature in the garage and the

Tires and wheels

416

(419,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

temperature outside. By way of example,

the following table shows the required tire

pressures that correspond to various out-

side temperatures when the temperature

in the garage is 608F (15.68C).

Example:

Tire size: 225/55R18 98H

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

Front Rear

308F (−18C) 39 (270, 2.7) 38 (260, 2.6)

108F (−128C) 41 (285, 2.85) 40 (275, 2.75)

−108F (−238C) 44 (300, 3.0)

42 (290, 2.9)

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates when you drive the vehicle in

cold outside air after adjusting the tire

pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the

tire pressures using the method described

above. Then, increase the vehicle speed

to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to

see that the low tire pressure warning light

turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire

pressure warning light does not turn off,

the tire pressure monitoring system may

not be functioning normally. In this event,

go to a SUBARU dealer to have the

system inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-

tween tires and the road surface causes

the tires to warm up. After illumination of

the low tire pressure warning light, any

increase in the tire pressures caused by an

increase in the outside air temperature or

by an increase in the temperature in the

tires can cause the low tire pressure

warning light to turn off.

System resetting is necessary when the

wheels are changed (for example, a switch

to snow tires) and new TPMS valves are

installed on the newly fitted wheels. Have

this work performed by a SUBARU dealer

following wheel replacement.

It may not be possible to install TPMS

valves on certain wheels that are on the

market. Therefore, if you change the

wheels (for example, a switch to snow

tires), use wheels that have the same part

number as the standard-equipment

wheels. Without four operational TPMS

valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS

will not fully function and the warning light

on the combination meter will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approximately

one minute.

When a tire is replaced, adjustments are

necessary to ensure continued normal

operation of the tire pressure monitoring

system. As with wheel replacement, there-

fore, you should have the work performed

by a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not illuminate briefly after the

ignition switch is turned ON or the

light illuminates steadily after blink-

ing for approximately one minute,

you should have your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly.

When a wheel rim is replaced with-

out the original pressure sensor/

transmitter being transferred, the

– CONTINUED –

Tires and wheels

417

Maintenance and service

(420,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

low tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking for

approximately one minute. This in-

dicates the TPMS is unable to moni-

tor all four road wheels. Contact

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible for tire and sensor replace-

ment and/or system resetting. If the

light illuminates steadily after blink-

ing for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

& Tire inspection

S11AV03

Check on a daily basis that the tires

are free from serious damage,

nails, and stones. At the same time,

check the tires for abnormal wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer im-

mediately if you find any problem.

NOTE

. When the wheels and tires

strike curbs or are subjected to

harsh treatment as when the

vehicle is driven on a rough

surface, they can suffer damage

that cannot be seen with the

naked eye. This type of damage

does not become evident until

time has passed. Try not to drive

over curbs, potholes or on other

rough surfaces. If doing so is

unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s

speed down to a walking pace or

less, and approach the curbs as

squarely as possible. Also, make

sure the tires are not pressed

against the curb when you park

the vehicle.

. If you feel unusual vibration

while driving or find it difficult to

steer the vehicle in a straight line,

one of the tires and/or wheels

may be damaged. Drive slowly to

the nearest authorized SUBARU

dealer and have the vehicle in-

spected.

& Tire pressures and wear

S11AV04

Maintaining the correct tire pres-

sures helps to maximize the tires’

service lives and is essential for

good running performance. Check

and, if necessary, adjust the pres-

sure of each tire at least once a

month (for example, during a fuel

stop) and before any long journey.

Tire placard

Check the tire pressures when the

tires are cold. Use a pressure

gauge to adjust the tire pressures

to the values shown on the tire

placard. The tire placard is located

on the door pillar on the driver’s

side.

Driving even a short distance

warms up the tires and increases

the tire pressures. Also, the tire

pressures are affected by the out-

side temperature. It is best to check

Tires and wheels

418

(421,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

tire pressure outdoors before driv-

ing the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air

inside it expands, causing the tire

pressure to increase. Be careful not

to mistakenly release air from a

warm tire to reduce its pressure.

NOTE

. The air pressure in a tire

increases by approximately 4.3

psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm

) when the

tire becomes warm.

. The tires are considered cold

when the vehicle has been

parked for at least three hours

or has been driven less than one

mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires

to adjust pressure. Doing so

will result in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from

controllability and ride comfort, and

they cause the tires to wear abnor-

mally.

1) Correct tire pressure (tread

worn evenly)

Roadholding is good, and

steering is responsive. Rolling

resistance is low, so fuel con-

sumption is also lower.

2) Under inflated tire (tread worn

on shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so

fuel consumption is also high-

er.

3) Over inflated (tread worn in the

center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the

tire magnifies the effects of

road-surface bumps and dips,

possibly resulting in vehicle

damage.

If the tire placard shows tire pres-

sures for the vehicle when fully

loaded, adjust the tire pressures to

the values that match the loading

conditions.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with

excessively low tire pressures

can cause the tires to deform

severely and to rapidly heat

up. A sharp increase in tem-

perature could cause tread

– CONTINUED –

Tires and wheels

419

Maintenance and service

(422,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to

an accident.

& Wheel balance

S11AV05

Each wheel was correctly balanced

when your vehicle was new, but the

wheels will become unbalanced as

the tires become worn during use.

Wheel imbalance causes the steer-

ing wheel to vibrate slightly at

certain vehicle speeds and detracts

from the vehicle’s straight-line sta-

bility. It can also cause steering and

suspension system problems and

abnormal tire wear. If you suspect

that the wheels are not correctly

balanced, have them checked and

adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.

Also have them adjusted after tire

repairs and after tire rotation.

CAUTION

Loss of correct wheel align-

ment causes the tires to wear

on one side and reduces the

vehicle’s running stability.

Contact your SUBARU dealer

if you notice abnormal tire

wear.

NOTE

The suspension system is de-

signed to hold each wheel at a

certain alignment (relative to the

other wheels and to the road) for

optimum straight-line stability

and cornering performance.

& Wear indicators

S11AV06

1) New tread

2) Worn tread

3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear

indicator, which becomes visible

when the depth of the tread grooves

decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A

tire must be replaced when the

tread wear indicator appears as a

solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indi-

cator becomes visible, the tire

Tires and wheels

420

(423,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

is worn beyond the acceptable

limit and must be replaced

immediately. With a tire in this

condition, driving at high

speeds in wet weather can

cause the vehicle to hydro-

plane. The resulting loss of

vehicle control can lead to an

accident.

NOTE

For safety, inspect tire tread

regularly and replace the tires

before their tread wear indicators

become visible.

& Rotational direction of tires

S11AV11

Example of rotational direction

marked on the sidewall

1) Front

If the tires have specific rotational

direction, refer to the arrow marked

on the side wall.

The arrow should be pointing for-

ward direction when the wheels are

fitted.

& Tire rotation

S11AV07

Tire wear varies from wheel to

wheel, and rotation is necessary.

However, it may be difficult to rotate

the tires. Have the tires rotated by

your SUBARU dealer. For the tire

rotation schedule, refer to the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

& Tire replacement

S11AV08

The wheels and tires are important and

integral parts of your vehicle’s design; they

cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires

fitted as standard equipment are optimally

matched to the characteristics of the

vehicle and were selected to give the best

possible combination of running perfor-

mance, ride comfort, and service life. It is

essential for every tire to have a size and

construction matching those shown on the

tire placard and to have a speed symbol

and load index matching those shown on

the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts

from controllability, ride comfort, braking

performance, speedometer accuracy and

odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-

rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-

priately changes the vehicle’s ground

clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-

struction, and size. You are advised to

replace the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard equip-

– CONTINUED –

Tires and wheels

421

Maintenance and service

(424,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

ment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU

recommends replacing all four tires at the

same time.

WARNING

. When replacing or installing

tire(s), all four tires must be the

same for following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

driver’s door pillar.

If all of four tires are not the same

for items (a) to (h), serious me-

chanical damage could occur to

the drive train of your car, and

affect the following.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not use

radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.

Doing so can dangerously re-

duce controllability, resulting in

an accident.

& Wheel replacement

S11AV09

When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement

wheels match the specifications of the

wheels that are fitted as standard equip-

ment. Replacement wheels are available

from SUBARU dealers.

WARNING

Use only those wheels that are

specified for your vehicle. Wheels

not meeting specifications could

interfere with brake caliper opera-

tion and may cause the tires to rub

against the wheel well housing dur-

ing turns. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

NOTE

When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or for any

other reason, always check the tight-

ness of the wheel nuts after driving

approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If

any nut is loose, tighten it to the

specified torque.

Tires and wheels

422

(425,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

11-16. Alloy wheels

S11BM

Alloy wheels can be scratched and da-

maged easily. Handle them carefully to

maintain their appearance, performance,

and safety.

. When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to change a

flat tire, always check the tightness of the

wheel nuts after driving approximately 600

miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,

tighten it to the specified torque.

. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

. Never let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap is replaced, be sure to

replace them with genuine SUBARU parts

designed for alloy wheels.

. When stacking and storing removed

tires, place shock-absorbing material be-

tween the tires to protect the wheels from

becoming scratched.

11-17. Windshield washer

fluid

S11AX

Windshield washer fluid warning light

When there is only a small amount of

washer fluid remaining, the windshield

washer fluid warning light will illuminate.

When this occurs, refill the washer fluid.

& Adding the windshield

washer fluid

S11AX01

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

add windshield washer fluid.

& Windshield washer fluid

S11AX02

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield

washer fluid is unavailable use clean

water.

In areas where water freezes in winter, use

an anti-freeze type windshield washer

fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid

contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it is

diluted, as indicated in the following table.

– CONTINUED –

Alloy wheels

423

Maintenance and service

(426,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Washer Fluid

Concentration

Freezing

Temperature

30%

10.48F (−128C)

50% −48F (−208C)

100% −498F (−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid,

check the freezing temperatures in the

table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is too low for the outside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct your

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

11-18. Replacement of wiper

blades

S11AZ

Grease, wax, insects, or other material on

the windshield or the wiper blade results in

jerky wiper operation and streaking on the

glass. If you cannot remove the streaks

after operating the windshield washer or if

the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer

surface of the windshield (or rear window)

and the wiper blades using a sponge or

soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-

abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the

windshield and wiper blades with clean

water. The windshield is clean if beads do

not form when you rinse the windshield

with water.

CAUTION

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

wiper blades.

. When you wish to raise the pas-

senger-side wiper arm, first raise

the driver-side wiper arm. Other-

wise, the passenger-side wiper

assembly and driver-side wiper

assembly will touch each other,

possibly resulting in scratches.

Replacement of wiper blades

424

(427,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. Return the passenger-side wiper

arm to its original position before

returning the driver-side wiper

arm to its original position. Other-

wise, the passenger-side wiper

assembly and driver-side wiper

assembly will touch each other,

possibly resulting in scratches.

. While removing the wiper blades

from the wiper arms, do not

return the wiper arms to the

original positions. Otherwise,

the windshield surface may be

scratched.

. When returning the raised wiper

arms to the original positions,

carefully return the wiper arms

on the windshield by hand. You

should not return the wiper arms

to the windshield only by the

return spring. Otherwise, the wi-

per arms may be deformed and/or

the windshield surface may be

scratched.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the

wiper blades using the following proce-

dures.

& Windshield wiper blade as-

sembly

S11AZ01

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

CAUTION

Hold the wiper arm when replacing

the wiper blade. Holding the wiper

blade, may result in blade deforma-

tion.

1) Lock knob

2. Hold the wiper blade connection by

hand, push the lock knob to release the

lock, and then pull out the wiper blade

assembly.

NOTE

Do not use a hard object to push the

lock knob. The lock knob may be

scratched.

– CONTINUED –

Replacement of wiper blades

425

Maintenance and service

(428,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

3. When installing the wiper blade as-

sembly, align it with the wiper arm connec-

tion part and then slide it in the opposite

direction of removal to install. After instal-

ling the wiper blade assembly, check that

the connection part is locked completely.

4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

& Window wiper blade rubber

S11AZ05

Replace the wiper blade rubber according

to the following procedure.

1. Pull the wiper blade rubber until the slit

on the underside of the wiper blade is in

the removal position, as shown in the

illustration, so that it can be removed.

2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber

through the slit to remove it.

3. To install a new wiper blade rubber,

perform the removal procedure in the

reverse order. After installation, check that

the tip of the wiper rubber has reached the

end of the cap.

NOTE

It may be difficult to perform the wiper

blade rubber replacement. We recom-

mend that you contact your SUBARU

dealer for wiper blade rubber replace-

ment if necessary.

Replacement of wiper blades

426

(429,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Rear window wiper blade as-

sembly

S11AZ03

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear

window.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-

terclockwise.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.

4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

& Rear window wiper blade

rubber

S11AZ04

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber

assembly to unlock it from the plastic

support.

– CONTINUED –

Replacement of wiper blades

427

Maintenance and service

(430,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.

1) Metal spines

3. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and install

them in the new blade rubber.

4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber

assembly, then slide the blade rubber

assembly into place.

Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support

ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,

the wiper may scratch the rear window

glass.

5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

Replacement of wiper blades

428

(431,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

11-19. 12 V battery

S11BA

WARNING

. Before beginning work on or near

any battery, be sure to extinguish

all cigarettes, matches, and light-

ers. Never expose a battery to an

open flame or electric sparks.

Batteries give off a gas which is

highly flammable and explosive.

. For safety, in case an explosion

does occur, wear eye protection

or shield your eyes when working

near any battery. Never lean over

a battery.

. Do not let battery fluid contact

eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-

cause battery fluid is a corrosive

acid. If battery fluid gets on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately

flush the area with water thor-

oughly. Seek medical help imme-

diately if acid has entered the

eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and seek medical attention im-

mediately.

. To lessen the risk of sparks,

remove rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never

allow metal tools to contact the

positive battery terminal and any-

thing connected to it WHILE you

are at the same time in contact

with any other metallic portion of

the vehicle because a short cir-

cuit will result.

. Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

. Charge the battery in a well-

ventilated area.

. Battery posts, terminals and re-

lated accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Batteries also contain

other chemicals known to the

State of California to cause can-

cer.

Wash hands after handling

1) Cap

2) Upper level

3) Lower level

It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

However, if the battery fluid level is below

the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the

upper level with distilled water.

If the 12 V battery is removed and

installed, it may not be changed to EV

driving. In that case, contact a SUBARU

dealer.

– CONTINUED –

12 V battery

429

Maintenance and service

(432,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 A when

charging the battery because it will

shorten battery life.

11-20. Fuses

S11BB

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one having

a higher rating or with material other

than a fuse because serious damage

or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring

harness and electrical equipment. The

fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

One is located under the instrument panel

behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s

seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

1) Spare fuses

The other one (main fuse box) is housed in

the engine compartment. Also, the spare

fuses are stored in the fuse box cover.

The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse

box in the engine compartment.

Fuses

430

(433,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller

when removing it from the main fuse box.

1) Good

2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical

controls do not operate, inspect the corre-

sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace

it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position and turn off all electrical acces-

sories.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

Look at the back side of each fuse box

cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”

FP446.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,

replace it with a spare fuse of the same

rating.

6. If the same fuse blows again, this

indicates that its system has a problem.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

11-21. Installation of acces-

sories

S11BD

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing fog lights or any other

electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such

accessories may cause the electronic

system to malfunction if they are incor-

rectly installed or if they are not suited for

the vehicle.

Installation of accessories

431

Maintenance and service

(434,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

11-22. Replacing bulbs

S11BE

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is

a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire. For the specified

wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb

chart” FP450.

NOTE

For models with type B combination

meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, the

SRH OFF indicator appears on the

combination meter when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position. It

indicates that SRH has been deacti-

vated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an

inspection.

& Headlights

S11BE18

LED headlight warning light

The LED headlight warning light illumi-

nates if the LED headlights malfunction.

Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

& Front turn signal light

S11BE03

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer if necessary.

& Parking light

S11BE02

The parking lights are the LED. Consult

your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

& Front fog light

S11BE04

The front fog lights are the LED. Consult

your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

& Rear combination lights

S11BE05

1. Remove the covers.

Replacing bulbs

432

(435,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove

the upper and lower screws that secure the

rear combination light assembly.

3. Slide the rear combination light as-

sembly rearward and remove it from the

vehicle.

1) Tail light

2) Rear side marker light

3) Rear turn signal light

4. Remove the bulb socket from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

6. Set the bulb socket into the rear

combination light assembly and turn it

clockwise until it locks.

1) Guide pins

2) Catch

3) Clip

7. Put the rear combination light assem-

bly into place while aligning the 2 guide

pins and a catch with the guide holes and a

clip on the vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Replacing bulbs

433

Maintenance and service

(436,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

8. Tighten the upper and lower screws.

9. Reinstall the covers.

& Backup light

S11BE06

1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the

light cover as shown in the illustration, and

pry the light cover off from the rear gate

trim.

2. For left side light, turn the bulb socket

clockwise and remove it.

For right side light, turn the bulb socket

counterclockwise and remove it.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

Replacing bulbs

434

(437,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

4. Install the bulb socket by turning it

clockwise.

5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.

& License plate light

S11BE07

1. The license plate lights must be

pushed outwards, and then pulled out to

be removed.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and pull out the socket.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the

license plate light cover.

& Map light

S11BE09

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause

burns since the bulb may be very

hot. Have the bulb replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

& Vanity mirror light

S11BE34

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause

burns since the bulb may be very

hot. Have the bulb replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

& Dome light and cargo area

light

S11BE21

Dome light

– CONTINUED –

Replacing bulbs

435

Maintenance and service

(438,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Cargo area light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Reinstall the lens.

& Other bulbs

S11BE29

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

11-23. Replacing key battery

S11BK

The access key fob battery may be

discharged under the following conditions.

. The operation of the keyless access

function is unstable

. The operating distance of the remote

keyless entry system is unstable

Replace the battery with a new one.

& Safety precautions

S11BK04

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the access key fob/transmit-

ter when replacing battery.

. Before replacing the battery, re-

move any static electricity.

. Be careful not to touch or damage

the printed circuit board in the

access key fob/transmitter when

replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; children could

swallow them.

. There is a danger of an explosion

if the battery is incorrectly re-

placed. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type of the

battery.

. Batteries should not be exposed

to excessive heat such as bright

sunlight, fire or the like.

NOTE

. Replace only with the same or

equivalent type of battery recom-

mended by the manufacturer.

. Dispose of used batteries according

to local laws.

. Mount the battery in the correct

orientation to prevent fluid leakage.

Be careful not to bend the terminals. It

may result in a malfunction.

. It is recommended that the battery

be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.

. Use a new battery.

. After replacing the battery, confirm

that the transmitter functions properly.

Replacing key battery

436

(439,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Replacing battery of access

key fob

S11BK01

CAUTION

When removing or reinstalling the

access key fob cover, make sure that

the plastic part does not come off or

become misaligned.

Battery: Button battery CR2032 or

equivalent

1) Release button

2) Emergency key

1. Take out the emergency key.

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl

tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to

remove the cover.

3. Take out the battery using a flat-head

screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.

4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)

side facing upward as shown in the figure.

5. Attach the cover to the access key fob

by fitting the projections and recesses

together.

Replacing key battery

437

Maintenance and service

(440,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(441,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

S12

12-1. Specifications ............................................... 440

Dimensions ........................................................ 440

Engine................................................................ 440

Electric motor (traction motor) ............................441

High voltage battery ........................................... 441

Fuel....................................................................441

Engine oil...........................................................441

Front differential and rear differential gear oil .....443

Fluids ................................................................. 443

Engine coolant ...................................................444

Inverter with converter assembly coolant ............444

Electrical system ................................................444

Tires .................................................................. 444

Brake pedal........................................................ 445

Brake disc ......................................................... 445

Brake pad .......................................................... 445

12-2. Fuses and circuits.........................................446

Fuse panel located in the passenger

compartment.................................................... 446

Fuse panel located in the engine compartment ... 448

12-3. Bulb chart ......................................................450

Safety precautions ............................................. 450

Bulb chart.......................................................... 451

12-4. Vehicle identification.....................................453

Specifications

(442,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

12-1. Specifications

S12AA

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& Dimensions

S12AA01

in (mm)

Item

Overall length 175.8 (4,465)

Overall width 71.0 (1,800)

Overall height 62.8 (1,595)

Wheel base 104.9 (2,665)

Tread

Front 61.0 (1,550)

Rear 61.2 (1,555)

Ground clearance*

8.7 (220)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty

& Engine

S12AA02

Engine model

FB20 (2.0 L, DOHC, non-turbo)

Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine

Displacement cu-in (cc) 122 (1,995)

Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.31 6 3.54 (84.0 6 90.0)

Compression ratio 13.5 : 1

Firing order

1 – 3 – 2 – 4

Specifications

440

(443,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Electric motor (traction motor)

S12AA23

Type

Permanent magnet synchronous motor

Maximum output 88 kW

Maximum torque

149 ft·lbf (202 N·m, 20.6 kgf·m)

& High voltage battery

S12AA24

Type

Lithium-ion battery

Voltage 3.7 V/cell

Capacity 25 Ah

Quantity 95 cells

Overall voltage

351.5 V

& Fuel

S12AA08

Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity

Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher

13.2 US gal (50 liters, 11.0 Imp gal)

For more details, refer to “

Fuel” FP281.

& Engine oil

S12AA12

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” FP406.

NOTE

The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended

that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED –

Specifications

441

Specifications

(444,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Approved engine oil

S12AA1201

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

! Alternative engine oil

S12AA1202

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE

Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the

temperature and other factors.

Oil grade

SAE viscosity No. and

applicable temperature

Engine oil capacity

API (American Petroleum Insti-

tute) classification SN with the

words “RESOURCE CONSER-

VING”

ILSAC (International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Commit-

tee) GF-5, which can be identi-

fied with the ILSAC certification

mark (Starburst mark)

0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil

for optimum engine performance and

protection. Conventional oil may be

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,

5W-30 conventional oil may be used

if replenishment is needed but should

be changed to 0W-20 synthetic oil at

the next oil change.

– Adding the oil from low level to

full level:

1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)

– Changing the oil and oil filter:

4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)

Specifications

442

(445,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Front differential and rear differential gear oil

S12AA13

Oil Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil

Oil grade

. SUBARU Extra MT*

. API classification GL-5

(75W-90)

Oil capacity*

1.54 US qt (1.46 liters, 1.28 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)

Remarks*

“Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil” FP414

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.

*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of oil.

& Fluids

S12AA10

Fluid

Fluid type*

Fluid capacity*

Remarks*

Continuously variable transmission

fluid

Consult your SUBARU dealer. 6.8 US qt (6.4 liters, 5.6 Imp qt)

“

Continuously variable transmis-

sion fluid” FP413

Brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake

fluid*

–

“

Brake fluid” FP414

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors.

*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

*4: SUBARU recommends using SUBARU genuine brake fluid.

– CONTINUED –

Specifications

443

Specifications

(446,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Engine coolant

S12AA11

Coolant capacity Coolant type

8.5 US qt (8.0 liters, 7.0 Imp qt)

SUBARU Super Coolant

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “

Cooling system” FP408.

& Inverter with converter assembly coolant

S12AA29

Coolant capacity Coolant type

3.6 US qt (3.4 liters, 3.0 Imp qt)

SUBARU Super Coolant

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “

Cooling system” FP408.

& Electrical system

S12AA03

12 V battery type

55D23L

Spark plugs

DILKAR7Q8 (NGK)

& Tires

S12AA05

Tire size 225/55R18 98H

Wheel size

18 6 7 J

Pressure Front

36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm

)

Rear

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

)

Wheel nut tightening torque

89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts

by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible.

Specifications

444

(447,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Brake pedal

S12AA27

in (mm)

Pedal clearance 5.47 - 5.87 (139 - 149)*

Pedal free play

0.02 - 0.07 (0.6 - 1.9)*

*1: Minimum value when pedal is operated with a force of 1.8 lbf (8 N, 0.8 kgf)

*2: This is the value when depressing the pedal by the force of 1.8 lbf (8 N, 0.8 kgf).

& Brake disc

S12AA18

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult your

SUBARU dealer.

& Brake pad

S12AA28

in (mm)

Brake pad wear limit

0.059 (1.5)

Specifications

445

Specifications

(448,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

12-2. Fuses and circuits

S12AB

& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment

S12AB01

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 Empty

2 20 A CIGAR SEAT/H

3 7.5 A IG A-1

4 15 A AUDIO NAVI

5 15 A IG B-2

6 15 A BATT FAN

7 15 A 12 V SOCKET

8 15 A A/C IG

9 7.5 A ACC

10 7.5 A IG B-1

11 10 A IGCT No.4

12 Empty

13 7.5 A IG A-3

14 7.5 A UNIT +B

15 7.5 A METER IG

16 10 A PM IGCT

17 7.5 A MIRROR

18 7.5 A LAMP IG

19 10 A IG A-2

20 10 A SRS AIR BAG

Fuses and circuits

446

(449,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

21 10 A IGCT No.2

22 15 A STRG/H

23 10 A DRL

24 10 A PCU

25 10 A UNIT +B2

26 10 A BACK UP

27 15 A PLUG LOCK

28 20 A TRAIL R.FOG

29 10 A INV W/P

30 7.5 A UNIT +B (IG-B)

31 Empty

32 7.5 A ILLUMI

33 7.5 A KEY SW A

34 10 A IGCT No.3

35 10 A UNIT +B3

36 7.5 A KEY SW B

37 7.5 A STOP

38 7.5 A

EYE SIGHT

– CONTINUED –

Fuses and circuits

447

Specifications

(450,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment

S12AB02

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 7.5 A HORN 2

2 7.5 A HORN 1

3 15 A H/L LO RH

4 15 A H/L LO LH

5 30 A IGCT SCENE

6 10 A H/L HI RH

7 10 A H/L HI LH

8 10 A TAIL

9 10 A ODS

10 7.5 A OBD

11 7.5 A PU B/UP

12 15 A IG-B

13 15 A HAZARD

14 20 A FUEL

15 Empty

16 10 A MB-B

17 15 A D/L

18 10 A DCM

19 Empty

20 Empty

21 15 A IG COIL

Fuses and circuits

448

(451,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

22 10 A AVCS

23 10 A E/G2

24 Empty

25 Empty

26 20 A O2 HTR

27 15 A E/G1

28 Empty

29 30 A BACKUP

30 25 A R. DEF

31 20 A AUDIO

32 30 A VDC SOL

33 25 A MAIN FAN

34 25 A SUB FAN

35 10 A DEICER

36 15 A F. FOG

37 15 A BLOWER

38 15 A BLOWER

39 Empty

40 30 A F. WIPER

41 15 A F. WASH

42 15 A R. WIPER

43 10 A AHB-R (BI1)

44 10 A

AHB-R (BI2)

Fuses and circuits

449

Specifications

(452,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

12-3. Bulb chart

S12AC

& Safety precautions

S12AC03

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is

a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire.

Bulb chart

450

(453,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Bulb chart

S12AC04

NOTE

Lights A, B, C, D, E and F are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

– CONTINUED –

Bulb chart

451

Specifications

(454,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Wattage Bulb No.

1) Front turn signal light 12 V-28 W 7444NA

2) Vanity mirror light 12 V-2 W –

Map light 12 V-8 W –

Dome light 12 V-8 W –

Front side marker light 12 V-5 W W5W

Cargo area light 12 V-5 W W5W

Backup light 12 V-21 W W21W

Rear side marker light

12 V-5 W W5W

Tail light 12 V-5 W W5W

10)

Rear turn signal light 12 V-21 W WY21W

11)

License plate light 12 V-5 W

W5W

Low and high beam headlight – –

Side turn signal light – –

Front position light/Daytime running light/Parking light – –

Front fog light – –

High-mounted stop light – –

Stop light –

–

Bulb chart

452

(455,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

12-4. Vehicle identification

S12AD

1) Vehicle identification number (under the

floor carpet of the right-hand front seat)

2) Emission control label

3) Tire inflation pressure label

4) Certification label

5) Vehicle identification number plate

6) Model number label

7) Fuel label

8) Air conditioner label

Vehicle identification

453

Specifications

(456,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(457,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

S13

13-1. For U.S.A. ...................................................... 456

13-2. Tire information ............................................ 456

Tire labeling ....................................................... 456

Recommended tire inflation pressure..................458

Glossary of tire terminology ...............................459

Tire care – maintenance and safety practices ......464

Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle

load capacities ................................................. 464

Adverse safety consequences of overloading

on handling and stopping and on tires.............. 464

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ........... 465

13-3. Vehicle load limit – how to determine .........465

Calculating total and load capacities varying

seating configurations...................................... 466

13-4. Uniform tire quality grading standards .......468

TREADWEAR ..................................................... 469

TRACTION AA, A, B, C ....................................... 469

TEMPERATURE A, B, C ...................................... 469

13-5. Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.).................470

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

(458,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

13-1. For U.S.A.

S13AA

The following information has been

compiled according to Code of

Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part

575”.

13-2. Tire information

S13AB

& Tire labeling

S13AB01

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire

Identification Number or TIN) are

placed on the sidewall of a tire by

tire manufacturers. These markings

can provide you with useful infor-

mation on the tire.

! Tire size

S13AB0101

Your vehicle comes equipped with

P-Metric tire size. It is important to

understand the sizing system in

selecting the proper tire for your

vehicles. Here is a brief review of

the tire sizing system with a break-

down of its individual elements.

! P Metric

S13AB010101

With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters.

To convert millimeters into inches,

divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio

(Section Height divided by Section

Width) helps provide more dimen-

sional information about the tire

size.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used on

light duty vehicles such as passen-

ger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height

7 section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

(5) Rim diameter in inches

! Load and Speed Rating

Descriptions

S13AB010102

The load and speed rating descrip-

tions will appear following the size

designation.

They provide two important facts

about the tire. First, the number

designation is its load index. Sec-

ond, the letter designation indicates

the tire’s speed rating.

For U.S.A.

456

(459,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical code

which specifies the maximum load

a tire can carry at the speed

indicated by its speed symbol, at

maximum inflation pressure.

For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs

(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580

kg).

WARNING

Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting

a load rated tire on any vehicle

does not mean the vehicle can

be loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical

system describing a tire’s capability

to travel at established and prede-

termined speeds.

For example, “V” means 149 mph

(240 km/h)

WARNING

. Speed ratings apply only to

the tire, not to the vehicle.

Putting a speed rated tire on

any vehicle does not mean

the vehicle can be operated

at the tire’s rated speed.

. The speed rating is void if

the tires are worn out, da-

maged, repaired, retreaded,

or otherwise altered from

their original condition. If

tires are repaired, re-

treaded, or otherwise al-

tered, they may not be sui-

table for original equipment

tire designed loads and

speeds.

! Tire Identification Number

(TIN)

S13AB0102

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard

sidewall. The TIN is composed of

four groups. Here is a brief review of

the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

(1) Manufacturer’s Identification

Mark

(2) Tire Size

(3) Tire Type Code

(4) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01” to represent

the first full week of the calendar

year; the second two figures repre-

sent the year. For example, 0101

means the 1st week of 2001.

! Other markings

S13AB0103

The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.

! Maximum permissible infla-

tion pressure

S13AB010301

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which this tire may be

inflated. For example, “300 kPa

(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”

– CONTINUED –

Tire information

457

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

(460,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

! Maximum load rating

S13AB010302

The load rating at the maximum

permissible weight load for this tire.

For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg

(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI)

MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the

vehicle. Putting a load rated

tire on any vehicle does not

mean the vehicle can be

loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

! Construction type

S13AB010303

Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

BELTED RADIAL”

! Construction

S13AB010304

The generic name of each cord

material used in the plies (both

sidewall and tread area) of this tire.

For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-

WALL 2 POLYESTER”

! Uniform Tire Quality Grad-

ing (UTQG)

S13AB010305

For details, refer to “Uniform tire

quality grading standards” FP468.

& Recommended tire inflation

pressure

S13AB02

! Recommended cold tire in-

flation pressure

S13AB0201

For recommended cold tire inflation

pressure for your vehicle’s tires,

refer to “

Tires” FP444.

! Vehicle placard

S13AB0202

The vehicle placard is attached to

the driver’s side door pillar.

Example:

The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire

inflation pressure on each tire at

maximum loaded vehicle weight,

seating capacity and loading infor-

mation.

! Adverse safety conse-

quences of under-inflation

S13AB0203

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to flex severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

Tire information

458

(461,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and failure of the

tire(s). Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

! Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper

inflation

S13AB0204

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire at least once a

month and before any long journey.

Check the tire pressures when the

tires are cold. Use a pressure

gauge to adjust the tire pressures

to the specific values. Driving even

a short distance warms up the tires

and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected

by the outside temperature. It is

best to check tire pressure outdoors

before driving the vehicle. When a

tire becomes warm, the air inside it

expands, causing the tire pressure

to increase. Be careful not to mis-

takenly release air from a warm tire

to reduce its pressure.

& Glossary of tire terminology

S13AB03

. Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be

replaced) of automatic transmis-

sion, power steering, power brakes,

power windows, power seats, radio,

and heater, to the extent that these

items are available as factory-in-

stalled equipment (whether in-

stalled or not).

. Bead

The part of the tire that is made of

steel wires, wrapped or reinforced

by ply cords and that is shaped to fit

the rim.

. Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between

components in the bead.

. Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at alternate angles substantially

less than 90 degrees to the center-

line of the tread.

. Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and

sidewall rubber which, when in-

flated, bears the load.

. Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the

tread or sidewall.

. Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

. Cord

The strands forming the plies in the

tire.

. Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent

rubber compounds.

. Cracking

Any parting within the tread, side-

wall, or inner liner of the tire

extending to cord material.

. Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant, and if so equipped, air

conditioning and additional weight

optional engine.

– CONTINUED –

Tire information

459

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

(462,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and higher inflation pressure

than the corresponding standard

tire.

. Groove

The space between two adjacent

tread ribs.

. Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside sur-

face of a tubeless tire that contains

the inflating medium within the tire.

. Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from

cord material in the carcass.

. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand,

and/or model name molding that

is higher or deeper than the

same molding on the other side-

wall of the tire, or

(2) The outward facing sidewall

of an asymmetrical tire that has a

particular side that must always

face outward when mounting on

a vehicle.

. Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufac-

turer as primarily intended for use

on lightweight trucks or multipur-

pose passenger vehicles.

. Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is

rated to carry for a given inflation

pressure.

. Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the

maximum permissible inflation

pressure for that tire.

. Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

physical dimension requirements.

. Normal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants specified in the second

column of Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section.

. Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehi-

cle as specified in the third column

of Table 1 that is appended to the

end of this section.

. Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread,

sidewall, or innerliner that extends

to cord material.

. Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated

new tire.

. Overall width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, including elevations

due to labeling, decorations, or

protective bands or ribs.

Tire information

460

(463,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

. Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passen-

ger cars, multipurpose passenger

vehicles, and trucks, that have a

gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)

of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.

. Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel

cords.

. Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound

between adjacent plies.

. Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rub-

ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or

other materials, that, when

mounted on an automotive wheel,

provides the traction and contains

the gas or fluid that sustains the

load.

. Production options weight

The combined weight of those

installed regular production options

weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in

excess of those standard items

which they replace, not previously

considered in curb weight or acces-

sory weight, including heavy duty

brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,

heavy duty battery, and special trim.

. Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at substantially 90 degrees to

the centerline of the tread.

. Recommended inflation pres-

sure

The cold inflation pressure recom-

mended by a vehicle manufacturer.

. Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and at higher inflation pres-

sures than the corresponding stan-

dard tire.

. Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire

and tube assembly upon which the

tire beads are seated.

. Rim diameter

Nominal diameter of the bead seat.

. Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width.

. Rim type designation

The industry of manufacturer’s des-

ignation for a rim by style or code.

. Rim width

Nominal distance between rim

flanges.

. Section width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, excluding elevations

due to labeling, decoration, or pro-

tective bands.

. Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the

tread and bead.

. Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compound

from the cord material in the side-

wall.

. Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index

equal to or greater than 110, com-

pared to the ASTM E-1136 Stan-

dard Reference Test Tire, when

using the snow traction test as

described in ASTM F-1805-00,

Standard Test Method for Single

– CONTINUED –

Tire information

461

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

(464,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight

Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered

Surfaces, and which is marked with

an Alpine Symbol “

” on at least

one sidewall.

. Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

testing, and it may be any rim listed

as appropriate for use with that tire.

. Tread

That portion of a tire that comes into

contact with the road.

. Tread rib

A tread section running circumfer-

entially around a tire.

. Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the

tire carcass.

. Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal

grooves designed to give a visual

indication of the degrees of wear of

the tread.

. Vehicle capacity weight

The rated cargo and luggage load

plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the

vehicle’s designated seating capa-

city.

. Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the maximum

loaded vehicle weight and dividing

by two.

. Vehicle normal load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal oc-

cupant weight (distributed in accor-

dance with Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section) and

dividing by 2.

. Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel

and tire assembly securely during

testing.

Tire information

462

(465,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for

various designated seating capacities

Designated seating

capacity, number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load,

number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a

normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front.

5 through 10 3

2 in front, 1 in second

seat.

11 through 15 5

2 in front, 1 in second

seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

16 through 22 7

2 in front, 2 in second

seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

– CONTINUED –

Tire information

463

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

(466,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

& Tire care – maintenance and

safety practices

S13AB04

. Check on a daily basis that the

tires are free from serious damage,

nails, and stones. At the same time,

check the tires for abnormal wear.

. Inspect the tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become visi-

ble. When a tire’s tread wear in-

dicator becomes visible, the tire is

worn beyond the acceptable limit

and must be replaced immediately.

With a tire in this condition, driving

at even low speeds in wet weather

can cause the vehicle to hydro-

plane. Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control can lead to an

accident.

. To maximize the life of each tire

and ensure that the tires wear

uniformly, it is best to rotate the

tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

For information about the tire rota-

tion order, refer to “

Tire rotation”

FP421.

Replace any damaged or

unevenly worn tires at the time of

rotation. After tire rotation, adjust

the tire pressures and make sure

the wheel nuts are correctly tigh-

tened. For information about the

tightening torque and tightening

sequence for the wheel nuts, refer

to “

Flat tires” FP366.

& Determining compatibility of

tire and vehicle load capaci-

ties

S13AB06

The sum of four tires’ maximum

load ratings must exceed the max-

imum loaded vehicle weight

(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the

maximum load ratings of two front

tires and of two rear tires must

exceed each axle’s maximum

loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original

equipment tires are designed to

fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle

weight is referred to Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). And each

axle’s maximum loaded capacity is

referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-

ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each

axle’s GAWR are shown on the

vehicle certification label located at

the bottom of driver’s side door

pillar.

The GVWR and front and rear

GAWRs are determined by not only

the maximum load rating of tires but

also loaded capacities of the vehi-

cle’s suspension, axles and other

parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the

vehicle cannot necessarily be

loaded up to the tire’s maximum

load rating on the tire sidewall.

& Adverse safety conse-

quences of overloading on

handling and stopping and on

tires

S13AB07

Overloading could affect vehicle

handling, stopping distance, and

vehicle and tire performance in the

following ways. This could lead to

an accident and possibly result in

severe personal injury.

. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.

. Heavy and/or high-mounted

Tire information

464

(467,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

loads could increase the risk of

rollover.

. Stopping distance will increase.

. Brakes could overheat and fail.

. Suspension, bearings, axles and

other body parts could break or

experience accelerated wear that

will shorten vehicle life.

. Tires could fail.

. Tread separation could occur.

. Tire could separate from its rim.

& Steps for Determining Cor-

rect Load Limit

S13AB08

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the “XXX” amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five 150

lb passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your ve-

hicle.

13-3. Vehicle load limit – how

to determine

S13BU

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by avail-

able cargo space. The load limit of

your vehicle is shown on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s side

door pillar. Locate the statement

“The combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your

vehicle’s placard.

The vehicle placard also shows

seating capacity of your vehicle.

The total load capacity includes the

total weight of driver and all pas-

sengers and their belongings, any

cargo, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike

carrier, etc., and the tongue load of

a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity

can be calculated by the following

method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total

weight of occupants + total weight

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle load limit – how to determine

465

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

(468,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

of optional equipment + tongue load

of a trailer (if applicable))

For information about vehicle load-

ing, refer to “

Loading your vehicle”

FP346.

& Calculating total and load

capacities varying seating

configurations

S13BU01

Calculate the available load capa-

city as shown in the following

examples:

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-

hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is

indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 900 lbs or

408 kg”.

For example, if the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300

kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total

weight from the vehicle capacity

weight of 900 lbs (408 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing

176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to two), the calculations

are as follows.

1. Calculate the total weight.

Vehicle load limit – how to determine

466

(469,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.

Example 2A

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-

hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is

indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 408 kg or

900 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)

plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170

kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted

with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs

(10 kg), to which is attached a trailer

weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of

the trailer weight is applied to the

trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =

176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle load limit – how to determine

467

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

(470,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Example 2B

For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing

40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to three), and a child

restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5

kg) is installed in the vehicle for the

child to use, the calculations are as

follows.

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more.

13-4. Uniform tire quality

grading standards

S13AC

This information indicates the rela-

tive performance of passenger car

tires in the area of treadwear,

traction, and temperature resis-

tance. This is to aid the consumer

in making an informed choice in the

purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall be-

tween tread shoulder and maximum

section width.

For example:

TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

The quality grades apply to new

pneumatic tires for use on passen-

ger cars. However, they do not

apply to deep tread, winter type

snow tires, space-saver or tempor-

ary use spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 12 inches

or less, or to some limited produc-

tion tires.

Uniform tire quality grading standards

468

(471,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

All passenger car tires must con-

form to Federal Safety Require-

ments in addition to these grades.

& TREADWEAR

S13AC02

The treadwear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under con-

trolled conditions on a specified

government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1-

1/2) times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

& TRACTION AA, A, B, C

S13AC03

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spe-

cified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteris-

tics.

& TEMPERATURE A, B, C

S13AC04

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified indoor labora-

tory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level

of performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher

levels of performance on the la-

boratory test wheel than the mini-

mum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or

in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire

failure.

Uniform tire quality grading standards

469

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

(472,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

13-5. Reporting safety de-

fects (U.S.A.)

S13AH

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-

ministration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying Subaru of America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles,

it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA can-

not become involved in individual

problems between you, your dealer,

or Subaru of America, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-

888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New

Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,

Washington, DC 20590. You can

also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety from http://

www.safercar.gov.

Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)

470

(473,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(474,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(475,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Index

(476,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Abbreviation .............................................................. P3

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ................................. P300

Warning light ............................................ P188, P300

Access key fob ...................................................... P142

Warning light ..................................................... P195

Accessories .......................................................... P431

Accessory power outlet .......................................... P269

Air cleaner element ................................................. P411

Air conditioner

Automatic climate control.................................... P252

Manual climate control........................................ P253

Air filtration system ................................................ P258

Air flow mode ........................................................ P253

Alarm system ........................................................ P163

All-Wheel Drive warning light................................... P192

Alloy wheel ........................................................... P423

Cleaning ........................................................... P394

Antenna................................................................ P262

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................................. P300

Arming the system ................................................. P164

Ashtray................................................................. P272

Assist grip............................................................. P273

Audio

Antenna............................................................ P262

Set................................................................... P262

Auto dimmer cancel function ................................... P181

Auto on/off headlights............................................. P231

Sensor ............................................................. P232

Automatic headlight beam leveler

Warning light ..................................................... P200

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR).............................................. P81

Battery .................................................................. P429

12V .................................................................. P429

Drainage prevention function ............................... P162

Jump starting..................................................... P375

Replacement (access key fob)............................. P437

Replacement (keyless access with push-button

start system).......................................... P154, P437

Replacement (remote keyless entry system) ......... P159

Booster seat .......................................................... P100

Brake

Assist ............................................................... P299

Booster ............................................................. P298

Disc.................................................................. P445

Fluid ....................................................... P414, P443

Parking ............................................................. P310

Pedal................................................................ P415

System ............................................................. P298

Brake pad.............................................................. P445

Brake system......................................................... P298

Warning light ..................................................... P189

Braking ................................................................. P298

Tips .................................................................. P298

Breaking-in of new brake pads................................. P416

BSD/RCTA ............................................................ P314

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning

buzzer ............................................................ P318

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator.................................... P320

Index

474

(477,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

BSD/RCTA OFF switch....................................... P321

BSD/RCTA warning indicator............................... P321

OFF indicator .................................. P201, P204, P321

OFF switch ....................................................... P321

Warning indicator............................. P201, P204, P321

Warning volume................................................. P319

Bulb

Chart................................................................ P450

Replacement..................................................... P432

Cargo area

Cover ............................................................... P275

Light........................................................ P265, P435

Tie-down hooks ................................................. P277

Catalytic converter ................................................. P337

Center

Console ............................................................ P267

Center console ...................................................... P267

Changing

Coolant............................................................. P410

Oil and oil filter .................................................. P407

Charge cable........................................................... P37

Charge warning light .............................................. P186

Charging................................................................. P30

Charge cable....................................................... P46

Charge port door ................................................. P43

Charging equipment............................................. P42

Charging from an external power source ................ P52

Charging methods ............................................... P39

Confirm the items before charging ......................... P39

Keyless access function and charge cable

connector locking system ................................... P43

Power sources that can be used........................... P39

Troubleshooting .................................................. P62

Using the Remote Battery Charging Timer ............. P57

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator light ...................................................... P184

Checking

Coolant level (engine)......................................... P409

Coolant level (Inverter with converter assembly) .... P410

Engine oil level .................................................. P406

Fluid level ......................................................... P414

Fluid level (brake fluid)........................................ P414

Fluid level (washer fluid) ..................................... P423

Child restraint systems .............................................. P92

Installation of a booster seat................................ P100

Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt......................... P96

Lower and tether anchorages .............................. P101

Top tether anchorages ........................................ P104

Child safety .............................................................. P4

Locks................................................................ P166

Chime

Light ................................................................. P231

Seatbelt .................................................... P81, P182

Cigarette lighter...................................................... P270

Cleaning

Alloy wheels ...................................................... P394

Interior .............................................................. P395

Ventilation grille.................................................. P257

Climate control system ............................................ P250

Automatic.......................................................... P252

Index

475

(478,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Manual ............................................................. P253

Clock.................................................. P212, P218, P228

Coat hook............................................................. P274

Combination meter display (color LCD) .................... P202

Console ................................................................ P267

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)................. P291

Fluid........................................................ P413, P443

Coolant........................................................ P409, P444

Temperature high warning light............................ P185

Coolant temperature high warning light .................... P185

Cooling system...................................................... P408

Corrosion protection............................................... P394

Daytime running light system .................................. P236

Defogger .............................................................. P244

Defrosting ............................................................. P255

Deicer .................................................................. P244

Differential gear oil

Front ....................................................... P414, P443

Rear........................................................ P414, P443

Dimensions ........................................................... P440

Disarming the alarm system.................................... P164

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ................... P299

Dome light ................................................... P264, P435

Door

Locks ............................................................... P160

Open warning light............................................. P192

Unlock selection function .................................... P208

Double trip meter ................................................... P178

Drive belts ............................................................ P413

Driver Assist indicator ................................... P180, P207

Driving

All-Wheel Drive model ........................................ P338

All-Wheel Drive warning light ............................... P192

AWD models ..................................................... P338

Drinking ............................................................... P5

Drugs .................................................................. P6

Foreign countries ............................................... P338

Off road ............................................................ P340

Pets..................................................................... P7

Snowy and icy roads .......................................... P343

Tips ............................................... P295, P336, P338

Tired or sleepy...................................................... P6

Winter............................................................... P342

EBD system

Warning ............................................................ P190

Electrical system .................................................... P444

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system ..................................................... P190, P301

Warning ............................................................ P190

Electronic parking brake .......................................... P310

Automatic release function by accelerator pedal .... P312

Hill Holder ......................................................... P312

Indicator light..................................................... P190

Warning ............................................................ P313

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)........................... P81

Engine

Compartment overview ....................................... P405

Coolant ................................................... P409, P444

Index

476

(479,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................... P5, P336

Hood ................................................................ P403

Low oil level warning indicator............................. P187

Low oil level warning light ................................... P187

Oil........................................................... P406, P441

Overheating ...................................................... P378

Starting & stopping ............................................ P287

EV driving range...................................................... P36

Event data recorder ................................................... P8

Exterior care ......................................................... P392

Flat tire repair kit ................................................... P369

Technical data ................................................... P374

Flat tires ............................................................... P366

Floor mat .............................................................. P273

Fluid level

Brake ............................................................... P414

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)............. P413

Fog light ............................................................... P238

Bulb ........................................................ P432, P450

Indicator light..................................................... P200

Switch .............................................................. P238

Front

Differential gear oil.................................... P414, P443

Fog light ......................................... P238, P432, P450

Fog light indicator light ....................................... P200

Seatbelt pretensioners.......................................... P87

Turn signal light ................................................. P432

Front fog light ............................................... P238, P432

Bulb ........................................................ P432, P450

Indicator light..................................................... P200

Switch............................................................... P238

Fuel ............................................................ P281, P441

Consumption indicator .............................. P205, P217

Economy hints ................................................... P336

Filler door and cap ............................................. P282

Gauge .............................................................. P179

Requirements .......................................... P281, P441

Fuses.................................................................... P430

Fuses and circuits .................................................. P446

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)........................... P347

Glove box.............................................................. P267

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) ...................... P347

Hazard warning flasher ................................. P177, P364

Headlight..................................................... P231, P432

Beam leveler ..................................................... P238

Bulb replacement ............................................... P432

Bulb replacing.................................................... P432

Bulb wattage ..................................................... P450

Control switch.................................................... P231

Flasher ............................................................. P233

Indicator light..................................................... P200

OFF delay function............................................. P232

OFF delay setting............................................... P232

Welcome lighting function.................................... P232

High Beam Assist ................................................... P233

High Beam Assist function....................................... P233

Index

477

(480,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Indicator light..................................................... P200

High beam assist warning indicator.......................... P200

High beam indicator light ........................................ P200

High/low beam change (dimmer) ............................. P233

Hill descent control ................................................ P307

Indicator ........................................................... P201

Indicator light..................................................... P201

Hill Holder............................................................. P312

Indicator light..................................................... P192

Switch .............................................................. P313

Hook

Cargo tie-down.................................................. P277

Coat................................................................. P274

Convenient tie-down .......................................... P277

Shopping bag.................................................... P275

Towing and tie-down .......................................... P380

Horn..................................................................... P247

Hose and connections............................................ P409

Hybrid Battery Charge Status.................................. P179

Hybrid Mode switch.................................................. P29

Hybrid system

Fail lamp .......................................................... P185

Hybrid system features ............................................. P24

Hybrid system operation mode .................................. P26

Hybrid system precautions ........................................ P31

Hybrid vehicle driving tips ......................................... P35

Illumination brightness control ................................. P180

Immobilizer ........................................................... P155

Indicator light (security indicator light).......... P155, P199

Indicator light

BSD/RCTA OFF..................... P201, P204, P320, P321

BSD/RCTA warning ......................... P201, P204, P321

Charge cable connection indicator........................ P185

Coolant temperature low ..................................... P185

Electronic parking brake...................................... P190

Engine hood open warning.................................. P185

EV (Electric Vehicle) mode lamp .......................... P185

Front fog light .................................................... P200

Headlight........................................................... P200

High beam ........................................................ P200

High Beam Assist............................................... P200

High beam assist warning ................................... P200

Hill descent control............................................. P201

Hill Holder ......................................................... P192

Hybrid Battery Charge Mode ............................... P185

Hybrid Battery Save Mode .................................. P185

Hybrid Fail Lamp................................................ P185

Hybrid READY................................................... P185

Hybrid system overheat warning .......................... P185

Immobilizer.............................................. P155, P199

LED headlight warning........................................ P200

Security .................................................. P155, P199

Security (Immobilizer indicator light) ..................... P155

Select lever position ........................................... P200

SI-DRIVE .......................................................... P199

Timer charging setting ........................................ P185

Traction control system OFF................................ P194

Turn signal ........................................................ P200

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF ............................ P194

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ........... P193, P194

Index

478

(481,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

X-MODE........................................................... P201

Inside mirror.......................................................... P243

Interior lights ......................................................... P264

Jack-up point......................................................... P366

Jump starting ........................................................ P375

Key

Number ............................................................ P143

Number plate .................................................... P143

Replacement..................................................... P155

Keyless access with push-button start system........... P142

Disabling keyless access functions ...................... P152

Keyless access function and charge cable

connector locking system.................................... P43

Locking and unlocking doors ............................... P147

Warning chimes and warning indicator ................. P194

When access key does not

operate properly ................... P154, P176, P291, P384

When access key fob does not operate properly ... P384

Keyless entry system ............................................. P156

Lap belt pretensioner ............................................... P89

LCA ..................................................................... P316

Leather seat materials ............................................ P395

LED headlights...................................................... P432

License plate light.................................................. P435

Light

Backup ............................................................. P434

Brake/Tail ................................................ P432, P450

Cargo area.............................................. P265, P435

Control switch.................................................... P231

Daytime running....................................... P236, P432

Dome ..................................................... P264, P435

Front fog ................................................. P238, P432

Front position.................................. P231, P238, P432

Front side marker..................................... P231, P450

Front turn .......................................................... P432

License plate ..................................................... P435

Map........................................................ P264, P435

Parking ............................................................. P432

Rear combination............................................... P432

Rear side marker light ........................................ P432

Rear turn signal ................................................. P432

Stop light........................................................... P432

Tail light ............................................................ P432

Turn signal .............................................. P239, P432

Vanity mirror ............................................ P266, P435

Loading your vehicle ............................................... P346

Low fuel warning light ............................................. P191

Low tire pressure warning light................................. P187

Lower and tether anchorage .................................... P101

Maintenance

Precautions ....................................................... P401

Schedule........................................................... P401

Index

479

(482,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Seatbelt .............................................................. P87

Tools ................................................................ P364

Malfunction indicator light

(check engine warning light)................................. P184

Manual

Climate control .................................................. P253

Map light ..................................................... P264, P435

Maximum load limits............................................... P353

Meters and gauges ................................................ P177

Mirror defogger...................................................... P244

Mirrors.................................................................. P243

Moonroof ..................................................... P170, P389

Multi-function display (color LCD) ............................ P209

New vehicle break-in driving ................................... P336

Odometer ............................................................. P178

Off road driving...................................................... P340

Oil filter................................................................. P407

Oil level

Engine.............................................................. P406

Front differential gear ......................................... P414

Rear differential gear.......................................... P414

Warning light ..................................................... P187

Oil pressure warning light ....................................... P186

One-touch lane changer ......................................... P239

Outside

Mirror defogger.................................................. P244

Mirrors .................................................... P243, P244

Temperature indicator ......................................... P211

Overheating engine ................................................ P378

Overheating hybrid system ...................................... P378

Parking ................................................................. P310

Brake................................................................ P310

Light ................................................................. P432

Tips .................................................................. P314

Parking your vehicle ............................................... P310

Periodic inspections................................................ P338

Petrol fuel.............................................................. P281

PIN code Access.................................................... P149

Power

Meter................................................................ P177

Outlets.............................................................. P269

Outside mirrors .................................................. P243

Steering ............................................................ P297

Steering warning light ......................................... P192

USB power supply ............................................. P271

Windows ........................................................... P166

Precautions against vehicle modification ........... P91, P137

Preparing to drive ................................................... P287

Push-button

Ignition switch.................................................... P175

Pedestrian alert system ....................................... P30

Power meter...................................................... P177

Starting and stopping the hybrid system ............... P287

Index

480

(483,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking)

OFF indicator .................................................... P201

ON/OFF setting ................................................. P330

Warning indicator............................................... P201

RCTA ................................................................... P316

Rear

Combination lights ............................................. P432

Differential gear oil.................................... P414, P443

Gate........................................................ P169, P388

Turn signal light ................................................. P432

Rear turn signal ..................................................... P432

Rear window

Defogger .......................................................... P244

Wiper and washer switch.................................... P242

Wiper blades..................................................... P427

Recommended

Brake fluid ............................................... P415, P443

Continuously variable transmission fluid ............... P443

Engine oil ................................................ P408, P441

Front differential gear oil ..................................... P443

Rear differential gear oil ..................................... P443

Spark plugs.............................................. P413, P444

Refueling .............................................................. P283

Remote climate control system................................ P158

Remote keyless entry system.................................. P156

Replacement

Access key fob battery ....................................... P437

Air cleaner element ............................................ P412

Brake pad......................................................... P415

Wiper blades..................................................... P424

Replacing

Access key fob battery........................................ P437

Air cleaner element ............................................ P412

Battery (keyless access with push-button

start system).......................................... P154, P437

Battery (remote keyless entry system) .................. P159

Battery of access key fob.................................... P437

Replacing bulbs ........................................... P432, P450

Backup light ...................................................... P434

Brake/tail light.................................................... P432

Cargo area light ................................................. P435

Daytime running light .......................................... P432

Dome light......................................................... P435

Front fog light .................................................... P432

Front position light.............................................. P432

Front turn signal light.......................................... P432

Headlight........................................................... P432

LED headlight.................................................... P432

License plate light .............................................. P435

Map light........................................................... P435

Parking light ...................................................... P432

Rear combination light ........................................ P432

Rear side marker light ........................................ P432

Rear turn signal light .......................................... P432

Stop light........................................................... P432

Tail light ............................................................ P432

Vanity mirror light ............................................... P435

Reverse Automatic Braking System .......................... P323

Rocking the vehicle ................................................ P345

Roof rails............................................................... P348

Roof tent ............................................................... P348

Index

481

(484,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Safety

Precautions when driving........................................ P4

Symbol ................................................................. P2

Warnings .............................................................. P2

Sealing flat tire ...................................................... P366

Flat tire repair kit ............................................... P369

How to seal....................................................... P370

Safety precautions ............................................. P367

Seat

Fabric............................................................... P395

Heater ................................................................ P78

Seatbelt ............................................................ P4, P79

Fastening............................................................ P81

Maintenance ....................................................... P87

Pretensioners ...................................................... P87

Safety tips........................................................... P79

Warning light and chime .............................. P81, P182

Seatbelts ................................................................ P79

Security

Alarm system .................................................... P163

Immobilizer ....................................................... P155

Indicator light............................................ P155, P199

Security indicator light ............................................ P199

Select lever

Position indicator ............................................... P200

Shift lock function .............................................. P294

Shopping bag hook................................................ P275

Shoulder pretensioners............................................. P88

SI-DRIVE.............................................................. P295

Indicator light..................................................... P199

Skid suppression function........................................ P302

Snow tires ................................................... P344, P416

Snowy and icy roads .............................................. P343

Sounding a panic alarm .......................................... P157

Spark plugs ................................................. P413, P444

Specifications......................................................... P440

Speedometer ......................................................... P177

SRS

Curtain airbag.................................................... P127

Frontal airbag .................................................... P115

Side airbag........................................................ P127

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System

airbag) ......................................................... P4, P106

SRS airbag system

Monitors............................................................ P135

Servicing........................................................... P136

Warning light ..................................................... P183

Starting & stopping the hybrid system....................... P287

State emission testing (U.S. only)............................. P285

Steering Responsive Headlight ................................ P237

Steering wheel

Heater .............................................................. P246

Power ............................................................... P297

Tilt/telescopic..................................................... P245

Stop light..................................................... P432, P451

Storage compartment.............................................. P267

Sun shade............................................................. P172

Sun visors ............................................................. P265

Sunshade .............................................................. P172

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ...... P4, P106

Synthetic leather upholstery..................................... P396

Index

482

(485,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Temperature warning light

Coolant............................................................. P185

Tether (child restraint system) ........................ P101, P104

Tie-down hooks ..................................................... P380

Tie-down hooks/holes............................................. P380

Tire ............................................................. P416, P444

Chains.............................................................. P345

Inspection ......................................................... P418

Pressures and wear ........................................... P418

Replacement..................................................... P421

Rotation............................................................ P421

Size and pressure.............................................. P444

Types ............................................................... P416

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)................................... P187, P308, P374, P416

Warning light ..................................................... P187

Tires and wheels ................................................... P416

Tools .................................................................... P364

Top tether anchorages................................... P101, P104

Towing.................................................................. P380

Flat-bed truck .................................................... P383

Hooks............................................................... P380

Tie-down hooks ................................................. P380

Weight.............................................................. P353

Traction control function ......................................... P302

Traction Control system

OFF indicator light ............................................. P194

Trailer

Connecting ....................................................... P351

Hitch ....................................................... P350, P356

Towing .............................................................. P352

Towing tips ........................................................ P358

Trailer towing ......................................................... P352

Trip meter.............................................................. P178

Turn signal

Indicator lights ................................................... P200

Lever ................................................................ P239

USB power supply .................................................. P271

Valet mode ............................................................ P165

Vanity mirror ................................................ P266, P435

Light ................................................................. P435

Vehicle

Capacity weight ................................................. P346

Identification ...................................................... P453

Symbols............................................................... P3

Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light.............................................. P194

OFF switch........................................................ P304

Operation indicator light ................... P193, P194, P303

System ............................................................. P302

Warning light ........................................... P193, P194

Ventilator ............................................................... P250

Warning and indicator lights..................................... P181

Warning chimes

Keyless access with push-button start system ....... P194

Index

483

(486,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

Seatbelt ..................................................... P81, P182

Warning light

ABS ........................................................ P188, P300

Access key fob .................................................. P195

All-Wheel Drive.................................................. P192

Automatic headlight beam leveler ........................ P200

Brake system .................................................... P189

BSD/RCTA........................................................ P201

Charge ............................................................. P186

CHECK ENGINE ............................................... P184

Coolant temperature high ................................... P185

Door open......................................................... P192

Engine hood open warning ................................. P185

Engine low oil level ............................................ P187

Hybrid fail lamp ................................................. P185

Hybrid system overheat warning.......................... P185

Icy road surface................................................. P201

Keyless access with push-button start system....... P194

LED headlight ................................................... P200

Low fuel............................................................ P191

Low tire pressure ............................................... P187

Oil pressure ...................................................... P186

Power steering .................................................. P192

RAB ................................................................. P201

Seatbelt ..................................................... P81, P182

SRS airbag system ............................................ P183

Steering Responsive Headlight............................ P200

Vehicle Dynamics Control .......................... P193, P194

Windshield washer fluid...................................... P187

Warranties ................................................................ P1

Warranties and maintenance ................................... P353

Washing ................................................................ P392

Waxing and polishing .............................................. P393

Wear indicators ...................................................... P420

Welcome lighting function........................................ P232

Wheel

Alloy ................................................................. P423

Balance ............................................................ P420

Nut tightening torque ................................ P366, P444

Replacement ..................................................... P422

Windows ............................................................... P166

Windshield

Washer fluid ...................................................... P423

Wiper and washer switches ................................. P241

Wiper blades ..................................................... P425

Wiper deicer ...................................................... P244

Winter

Driving .............................................................. P342

Tires ....................................................... P344, P416

Wiper and washer .................................................. P239

Wiper deicer .......................................................... P244

X-MODE................................................................ P305

Indicator............................................................ P201

Index

484

(487,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(488,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(489,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(490,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 31

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(1,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6

Right Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6

Left Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(493,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 10/ 31

Following numbered illustrations are protected by copyright of Toyota Motor Corporation.

Corresponding illustration numbers are as follows;

001617 001623 001626 001629 001631 001642

001643 001644 001658 001663 001664

001750

(2,1)

北米Model "A1360BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 8/ 24

GAS STATION REFERENCE

S99AA

& Fuel

S99AA01

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90

RON) or higher.

& Fuel octane rating

S99AA02

! RON

S99AA0201

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.

! AKI

S99AA0202

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and

Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti

Knock Index (AKI).

& Fuel tank capacity

S99AA03

13.2 US gal (50 liters, 11 Imp gal)

& Engine oil

S99AA04

Use only the following oils.

. API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CON-

SERVING”

. or ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC

certification mark (Starburst mark)

For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”

FP441.

& Engine oil capacity

S99AA05

4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated

based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter.

After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be checked

using the oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance

and service, refer to “Engine oil” FP406.

& Cold tire pressure

S99AA06

Refer to “Tires” FP444.

Subaru 2019 Crosstrek Hybrid

Product's Documents

OWNER'S MANUAL

Specifications

Subaru 2019 CROSSTREK HYBRID Questions and Answers

Related Products

Subaru 2026 Solterra Touring XT Leather

Subaru 2026 Solterra Touring XT

Subaru 2026 Solterra Limited XT

Subaru 2026 Solterra Limited

Vevor YB06-11 High Flow Catalytic Converter Direct Fit Exhaust Manifold for Subaru Impreza Legacy Forester Outback 06-12

Subaru 2026 Solterra Premium